OR. 
 
 PROGRESSIVE EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION, 
 
 WITH NOTES AND 
 DIRECTIONS AND VOCABULARIES. 
 
 BY 
 
 M. KEMPSON, M.A., 
 
 FORMERLY SCHOLAR OF OONVILLE AND CAIUS, CAMBRIDGE; 
 DIRECTOR OF PUBLIC INSTRUCTION, N.W. PROVINCES OF INDIA, 1862-1878; 
 
 FELLOW OF THE CALCUTTA UNIVERSITY ; 
 SOMETIME PROFESSOR OF HINDUSTANI AT THE ROYAL STAFF COLLEGE. 
 
 Scribendi recte sapere est et principium et fons. Hor. 
 
 LONDON: 
 W. H. ALLEN & CO., 13 WATERLOO PLACE. S.W. 
 
 PUBLISHERS TO THE INDIA OFFICE. 
 
 1890. 
 
 (All Bightt nerved.)
 
 PRINTED BT W. B. ALLXN AMD CO. 
 13 WATERLOO PLACX.
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 THIS work is intended to meet the want of an Introduc- 
 tory Treatise for beginners, in a form suited to the 
 previous training of educated Englishmen, and, in accord 
 with the views expressed in a recent Manifesto of the 
 Imperial Institute, aims at the promotion of a scholarly 
 and appreciative cultivation of the most important of the 
 Indian Vernaculars ab initio. 
 
 The method adopted is that of the best books of the 
 kind now used in our Public Schools, and may be shortly 
 described as a compendious course of Syntax and Idioms, 
 with Model Exercises in application step by step. Each 
 Exercise in its turn explains and illustrates some new 
 point or points of Usage, till the subject is exhausted, and 
 a fairly complete view of the quality and resources of the 
 language placed before the student. The application of 
 the ordinary principles of clause-analysis to the diction 
 of Hindustani, which occupies the Second Part of the 
 Exercises, is indispensable to the formation of a correct 
 and idiomatic style, whether in speaking or writing. 
 
 The Model Sentences are taken from the best modern 
 writers, chiefly from the works of Maulavi Nazir Ahmed, 
 the author of the TcwJbai (see note on p. 127 below), and 
 
 2000478
 
 IV PREFACE. 
 
 from the Letters of the late Mirza Nausha (Galib), both 
 Dehli men and of undisputed authority in native literary 
 circles. Use has also been made of the generally excellent 
 Urdu version of part of the Alf-Laila, which was published 
 in Lucknow a few years before the Annexation. 
 
 Thus, in addition to their more immediate function, the 
 Hindustani Sentences serve as a Delectus or Introductory 
 Reader. To give them in lithograph in the written cha- 
 racter, which alone is of practical value, was unfortunately 
 an impossible undertaking in this country ; but they may 
 be published separately in this form hereafter if the 
 demand arises. 
 
 Part III. contains a series of Lessons in Translation, 
 which are drawn up on the principle that the simplest and 
 shortest way to teach this kind of work is to show how it 
 is done ; and as there is no part of his preparatory course 
 in which the learner needs more and usually receives less 
 help, no apology is made for the fulness of the instructions. 
 
 M. K. 
 
 Uley, 1889.
 
 CONTENTS. 
 PART I. THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 
 
 EXERCISE I. THE SUBSTANTIVE VEBB. 
 
 Introductory Suggestions. Gender. Tense Nomenclature. 
 
 Paras. \-~], pp. 1-6 
 
 EXERCISE n. THE SUBSTANTIVE VEBB continued. 
 Order of the Words. Particles of Inference and Emphasis. 
 
 Paras. 8~I3 PP- 6-10 
 
 EXERCISE III. THE SUBSTANTIVE VEBB continued. 
 Plural of Nouns in <jA or &h. Persian and Arabic Plurals. 
 Order of the Persons. Plurality of Subjects. 
 
 Paras. |4~2|, PP- 10-13 
 
 EXERCISE IV. THE SUBSTANTIVE VEBB continued. 
 Nouns in the Construct State. Izdfat and its Signs and Uses. 
 
 Paras. 22-30. PP- 1*-W 
 
 EXERCISE V. THE SUBSTANTIVE VEBB continued. 
 Postpositional Verbals. Mode of expressing ' have. ' Apposi- 
 tion Paras. 3J-37, pp. 19-23 
 
 EXERCISE VI. THE SUBSTANTIVE VEBB IN COMPOUND 
 
 FOBM. 
 
 The Verbs ana, jdnd, raknd. Ko, the Sign of the Remote 
 Object. Usage of the Reflexive Pronoun apnd 
 
 Paras. 38-47- PP- 23-27 
 
 EXERCISE VII. USAGES OP THE VERBAL NOUN IN- 
 FINITIVE OB GEBUND IN nd ; NOUN OF AGENCY. 
 The Intransitives parnd, milnd, laynd. The Locative Affixes 
 men, par, tak . . . Paras. 48~54< PP- 28-33 
 
 EXERCISE VIII. USAGES OF THE GEBUND continued. 
 The Separative Affix se. Comparison of Adjectives. The 
 Affix sd of Similitude or Comparison. 
 
 Paras. 55-63- PP- 33-37
 
 Yl CONTEXTS. 
 
 EXEECISE IX. TRANSITIVE VERBS. 
 
 The Sign of the Near Object, ko. The Past Conjunctive Par- 
 ticiple. The Aorist Tense . Paras. 54.-7J, pp. 38-42 
 
 EXEECISE X. CAUSAL VERBS. 
 
 Intensive, Potential, and Completive Compound Verbs. In- 
 ceptive, Acquisitive and Permissive Verbal Compounds. 
 
 Paras. 72-?9, PP- *3-47 
 
 EXERCISE XL TRANSITIVE VERBS (COMPLETED 
 
 ACTION). 
 
 Nf, the Sign of the Agent. Formation of the Past or Perfect 
 Participle .... Paras. 80-87. PP- 47-52 
 
 EXERCISE XII. THE VERB dend IN COMBINATION 
 
 WITH CAUSAL VERBALS IN i, ETC. 
 Forms of the Imperative. The Verbal chnhf>. 
 
 Paraa. 8894- PP- 53-67 
 
 EXERCISE XIII. USAGE AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 (1) Substantival . . . Paras. 95 |00> PP- 57-60 
 
 EXERCISE XIV. USAGE AND CONSTRUCTION OP THE 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 (2) Adjectival . . . Paras. |OM05> PP- 61-64 
 EXERCISE XV. USAGE AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 (3) Adverbial .... Paras. |Q6 112 pp. 64-68 
 EXERCISE XVI. USAGE AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 Supplementary . . . Paras. ||3-||7, pp. 68-72 
 
 EXERCISE XyiL THE PARTICIPLES IN COMBINATION 
 
 WITH jdnd. 
 (1) Progressives. (2) Passives. Paras. ||8~I25- PP- 72-76 
 
 EXERCISE XVin THE PERFECT PARTICIPLE IN 
 COMBINATION WITH Jcarnd FORMS A CONTINUA- 
 TIVK COMPOUND VERB WITH chdhnd, A DESI- 
 
 DERATIVE. 
 Subsidiary Verbal Compounds with .//, (lend, etc. 
 
 Paras. I26H33. PP- 76-80
 
 CONTENTS. Vll 
 
 PART II. THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 
 
 EXERCISE XIX. SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 
 
 (1) Relative .... Paras. |34~|40> PP- 81-85 
 
 EXERCISE XX. SUBORDINATE CLAUSES continued. 
 
 (2) Predicative . . . Paras. |4(-|46> pp. 86-90 
 
 EXERCISE XXI. SUBORDINATE CLAUSES continued. 
 
 (3) Adverbial : viz. a. Temporal ; b. Local ; c. Modal. 
 
 Paras. 147153 PP- 91-95 
 
 EXERCISE XXII. SUBORDINATE CLAUSES continued. 
 (3) Adverbial : viz. d. Final ; f. Causal. 
 
 Paras. 154160. PP- 95-98 
 
 EXERCISE XXIII. SUBORDINATE CLAUSES continued. 
 (3) Adverbial : viz. f. Conditional. 
 
 Paras. (61 167 pp. 99-102 
 
 EXERCISE XXIV". SUBORDINATE CLAUSES continued. 
 (3) Adverbial : viz. f. Conditional continued. 
 
 Paras. I68H74 PP- 102-106 
 
 EXERCISE XXV. SUBORDINATE CLAUSES continued. 
 (3) Adverbial : viz. J. Conditional ( Concessional'). 
 
 Paras. |75-(79, pp. 106-109 
 
 EXERCISE XXVI. CO-ORDINATE CLAUSES. 
 
 (1) Appositive or Collateral. Paras. |80-|85> PP- 109-113 
 
 EXERCISE XXVII. CO-ORDINATE CLAUSES continued. 
 
 (2) Adjunctive . . Paras. 186190 PP- 113-116 
 
 EXERCISE XXVIIL CO-ORDINATE CLAUSES con- 
 tinued. 
 
 (3) Alternative . . . Paras. |9|-|96< PP- 1 16-120 
 EXERCISE XXIX. CO-ORDINATE CLAUSES continued. 
 
 (4) Adversative. Paras. |97~20I> pp. 120-123
 
 vui COM I:\TS. 
 
 PAKT III. SELECTED PASSAGES FOR 
 TRANSLATION INTO HINDUSTANI. 
 
 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS . Paras. J-g, PP . 124-127 
 Suggestions for Guidance . . Para. 7 PP- 127-132 
 SECTION I. FABLES AND APOLOQUES . pp. 132-164 
 
 SECTION II. EAST NARRATIVES PROM INDIAN HISTORY. 
 
 pp. 165-176 
 
 SECTION III. MISCELLANEOUS PIECES . PP . 177-203 
 SECTION IV. H.M.'s PROCLAMATION (1858) PP . 204-212 
 
 ' 
 
 APPENDIX A. ARABIC DERIVATIVES CURRENT IN 
 HINDUSTANI ... p. 214 
 
 APPENDIX B. TENSE-SYSTEM OF THE HINDUSTANI 
 VERB p. -2-22 
 
 APPENDIX C. ON TRANSLITERATION . P . 224 
 
 VOCABULARIES p. 227-278
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 T 
 
 the Roman character, 
 
 made. 
 
 .. ..i.ii, jrersian, and Arabic respec- 
 tively, so that the words in which they occur reveal 
 their own origiu. In course of time, the student will 
 find that the look of a word is a sufficient indication. 
 
 (2) A second step is the study of the forms and classes 
 of Arabic verbals which have come down to Hindustani 
 through Persian. A tabulation of these forms, with 
 examples, provides a key not only to the spelling and 
 vocalisation of a large and most important class of words, 
 but to their meaning and interconnection, which is in-
 
 VIM CONTKNTS. 
 
 PART III. SELECTED PASSAGES FOR 
 TRANSLATION INTO HINDUSTANI. 
 
 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS . Paras. |-6, PP- 124-127 
 Suggestions for Guidance . . Para. J, pp. 127-132 
 SECTION I. FABLES AND APOLOGUES . pp. 132-164 
 
 VOCABULARIES P . 227-278
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 PART I. 
 THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 THE SUBSTANTIVE VERB. 
 
 Introductory Suggestions. Gender. Tense Nomenclature. 
 
 1, (1) A first step to scholarship in Hindustani is 
 ability to distinguish between the various constituents 
 of the language. Certain letters and combinations of 
 letters are peculiar to Hindi, Persian, and Arabic respec- 
 tively, so that the words in which they occur reveal 
 their own origin. In course of time, the student will 
 find that the look of a word is a sufficient indication. 
 
 (2) A second step is the study of the forms and classes 
 of Arabic verbals which have come down to Hindustani 
 through Persian. A tabulation of these forms, with 
 examples, provides a key not only to the spelling and 
 vocalisation of a large and most important class of words, 
 but to their meaning and interconnection, which is in- 
 
 1
 
 2 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 valuable. See Appendix A for a specimen form of tabu- 
 lation, in which the examples given are taken from the 
 words used in these Exercises. 
 
 2. The following two summary rules for the determi- 
 nation of the conventional gender, or, as the French call it, 
 the sexefictiv, of things inanimate should be remembered. 
 
 Rule I. Hindi nouns in \ and ) are generally mascu- 
 line ; but Persian and Arabic nouns in \ and Persian 
 nouns in ) are generally feminine. 
 
 Nouns ending in ^ are generally feminine, whether 
 I Hindi, Persian, or Arabic. 
 
 Rule II. Nouns ending in a consonant are generally 
 masculine, excepting chiefly (1) Arabic verbals in ^> 
 servile, and Persian verbals in ^ servile ; e.g., musibat 
 'misfortune,' partoarish 'cherishing.' (2) Arabic verbals 
 of Form IE. JA in which > and * are both servile. 
 (See App. A.) (3) Hindi and Persian verbal bases, when 
 used as nouns ; e.g., mar ' beating,' and umad ' advent.' 
 
 3. The tense-system of the Hindustani verb is set forth 
 in Appendix B. In this the designations adopted by the 
 native grammarians are combined with the order usually 
 followed by English scholars, from Gilchrist upwards, 
 except in one important particular. There are no Moods 
 in the Hindustani verb, and, properly speaking, no Passive 
 Voice. But of this more hereafter. 
 
 4. Translate the following sentences into English : 
 
 [X.B. The Hindustani sentences are a key to the translation of 
 the English sentences which follow them ; and this plan holds 
 good throughout Parts I. and II. of this work. Study (I) the 
 meaning and construction of the words used ; (2) the way in 
 which the thought it put in each example.]
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 /O\ .jj S r | f2^ ^<Jb T fl^ 
 
 )> (7) 1y> Ls: 4 (6) 
 
 ( 9 ) ^ ^ ^ -SN3 (8) 
 (11) ^ r b L^ (10) 
 5^ (13) Ky* ^UL c^ lil^ (12) 
 (15) ^ >~ /3^ 4 (14) 
 
 5, 
 
 (1) Ap ' self," 3rd p. pi., like the German Sie, is to be translated 
 here ' yon.' This pronoun is nothing more than a courteous recogni- 
 tion of respectability, like our word ' Sir.' 
 
 (2) This question may be taken as addressed to a stranger of 
 doubtful appearance. Are is a vocative particle, and is often used 
 to attract the attention of a person at a distance ; as are Mohan ! 
 or Mohan re ! Abe is contemptuous, like our ' Sirrah ! ' 
 
 (3) KgunsA, as compared with kaun, expects an answer in detail, j 
 
 (4) Teh and woh are plural as well as singular. The grammatical 
 plurals, ye and we, are discarded in modern Hindustani. The 
 repetition of kaun is an example of one of the commonest and most 
 effective idioms of the language. The sense varies with the con- 
 text. Here it is distributive, and the questioner asks, not who the 
 men are as a whole, but individually. With this understanding, 
 translate ' What men are Ihese ? ' 
 
 As regards the transliteration of yeh and woh, see App. C. 
 
 (5) Bdt is a word of many uses, like the Latin res, which has 
 been called ' a blank cheque, to be filled up from the context to 
 the requisite amount of meaning.' The question here implies 
 surprise or indignation, and corresponds to our ' What is the mean- 
 ing of this ? ' or ' What is this I hear ? ' 
 
 (6) This question is something of the same nature as the fore- 
 going' What 's the matter ? ' ' What 's all this ? ' ' What has 
 happened ? ' etc. 
 
 1
 
 4 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (7) A customary form of greeting, like oar ' How do you do ? ' 
 or ' How do ? ' with pronoun suppressed. Ap kaise hain ? ' How 
 are yon ? ' or Ap aehchh* hain ? ' Are you well ? ' are often used. 
 Take care to sound the doubled letter in tho last phrase. 
 
 (8) D-ik-gharord'ik-kkdna ' post-boose.' Observe in this example 
 the different ways in which h is printed in ff> and ($\*r, according 
 as a vowel does or does not intervene between it and the consonant 
 preceding. 
 
 (9) Kitnt dilr, lit. ' How much distance ? ' that is, ' How far ? ' 
 So, too, barf ddr 'very far'; thorl d&r <a little distance'; d&r 
 nahfn ' not far* ; chand&n d&r nahin ' not BO very far.' 
 
 (10) Dim, the name of the smallest copper coin (native), used 
 in the sense of ' price,' and appropriate to small purchases. Mot 
 indicates the purchasing ' value,' and qimat, the fixed ' price ' of 
 things in general. Bah'i is ' value,' and bh'io and nirkh the market 
 ' rate of sale.' 
 
 (11) A'oi is a form of kyd, used to mean ' how many ? ' Ji 
 hote hain ' are in attendance,' or ' on duty.' See App. A, Form I. 
 The participle hota always refers to status (h&l). 
 
 (12) Tayy'ir: the duplication of the middle radical in this 
 Arabic verbal must be fully enunciated. 
 
 (13) ThA ' was,' at some particular time. If hffa had been used, 
 the emphasis of the query would have rested on magrA. 
 
 (14) Jfo'Wm hai ' is known ' ; mo'ldm hot'i hai ' is in process of 
 being known,' hence, ' seems to be.' See App. A, Form I. For 
 the romanixation of the letter 'ain, and the effect which this 
 letter exercises on the adjacent vowel, see App. C. 
 
 (15) An idiomatic question which denotes surprise at a person's 
 presence, like our ' How do you come to be here ? ' ' Who would 
 have thought of seeing you here ? ' ' You here ! and why ? ' 
 
 {>, Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 [N.B. The student will probably find it convenient to write out 
 his version of the following sentences in the Roman character 
 to begin with ; but he mast be extremely careful and consis- 
 tent in the use of this vehicle, or bad spelling will be the 
 inevitable result. Correct spelling in Hindustani is a matter 
 of eye, not ear, to the European, and therefore the sooner and 
 the oftener he uses the native character the better.
 
 EXEBCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 5 
 
 The best way to form the hand is to watch a native scribe, 
 and to copy from a good lithograph. Books used in native 
 schools are the best for this purpose.] 
 
 (1) Where is the telegraph-office ? (2) How far off 
 is the ferry ? (3) What is the toll ? (4) How much 
 money is due ? (5) When will breakfast be ready ? 
 (6) What book is this? (7) Who is this woman? 
 (8) How did this mistake occur? (9) Why were you 
 absent ? (10) Why such delay ? (11) Where were 
 you? (12) What river is this? (13) What is the 
 reason ? (14) What sort of arrangement is this ? 
 (15) Who is the master-of-the-house ? 
 
 Y, Directions. 
 
 (1) ' Telegraph-office ' is neatly expressed in Hindustani by 
 t&r-ghar ' wire-house." See 4- . 8. 
 
 (2) OMt ' landing-place,' is the usual term for ' ferry ' ; ut&r or 
 ufrA ' the crossing,' is another common term, and these mean 
 ' ferriage ' as well. 
 
 (3) ' What ' is here kitnd, though fcyd may be used. Mahstil is 
 the official term for ' toll.' The breathing sound of the Arabic h 
 must always be fully given. It is one of those letters which modify 
 the adjacent short vowel. The effect here is a hardening of the 
 zabar. See App. C. 
 
 (4) R&paya is ' money ' in general, as well as a ' rupee.' 
 
 (5) The word used by Europeans for ' breakfast ' is hazirt, 
 which lit. means ' attendance,' hence, a ' muster,' or ' gathering.' 
 
 (6) Use the pronoun of 4. 3- 
 
 (8) ' Occur,' ' happen,' ' come to pass,' etc., are sufficiently trans- 
 lated by the substantive verb. 
 
 (9) ' Absent ' gair-hdzir, that is, ' not present,' lit. ' other than 
 present.' Other privatives are l& and .&, used in Persian and 
 Arabic words ; and the Hindi a or an is occasionally met with. 
 
 In writing the, take care to use the form of the final letter shown 
 in hnfe, 4. 1 1- This mode of distinguishing between tht and the, 
 and all words of similar termination, is exceedingly useful, though
 
 6 KXKBCI8E8 IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 neglected bj native scribes, who use whichever form best suits 
 their idea of symmetry in relation to the adjoining letters, and to 
 the linear space at their command. 
 
 (10) 'Such,' ifwf, not ait!, agreeing with dcrt or der. Omit the 
 verb as in English. Let the interrogative stand last. 
 
 (14) The question is depreciatory. The Persian compound 
 bandobast is an e very-day word for 'arrangement.' IntitAm is 
 ' order,' or ' administration ' ; and tajwtz, tadbtr, etc. are used for 
 ' plan,' ' contrivance,' ' expedient,' etc. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 THE SUBSTANTIVE VERB continued. 
 Order of the Words. Particles of Inference and Emphasis. 
 
 3 It will be noticed in the examples of the previous 
 Exercise that the subject stands first, then the interroga- 
 tive adverb, and then the verb. In the affirmative sentence 
 adverbs of time, place, and manner generally precede the 
 subject. As a rule, Time, in whatever way it is expressed, 
 takes precedence in the order of ideas in the Hindustani 
 sentence. 
 
 9, The particle to is a colloquial expletive in constant 
 use. It is inferential and allusive, but often so delicately 
 as to be untranslateable. It adds point to dialogue with- 
 out burdening the expression. 
 
 Shi * even ' or ' too,' when added to an indefinite pronoun, 
 corresponds to our ' at all.' 
 
 Hi italicises, as it were, the word it follows. In com- 
 bination with the demonstrative pronouns, yeh and "//, 
 the h is dropped, and their meaning becomes ' this very,' 
 * that same,' etc.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 i Translate into English : 
 
 (2) y^^ fJj* 0) 
 
 (5) 
 y e>^ oo ^ /y 
 
 (9) ^5* jj^-. ,4^ ^ &$ ^ ^Jf (8) 
 
 1 (10) \$ 
 
 (J- 1 ^ d 1 ^ ( n ) 
 
 (13) l^i ^ ^^ (12) 
 (14) 
 
 11. 
 
 (1) Kal means ' to-morrow ' or ' yesterday,' accor ng to the con- 
 text. The Persian Jardd 'to-morrow' is also current. 
 
 (2) The Arabic tamdshA (see App. A, Form VI.), the gender of 
 which is exceptional (see 2. Rule I.), means ' amusement' of any 
 kind, and the exact sense is determined by the context. It may 
 be translated here ' a bit of fun.' HH& th<l is the Past Remote, 
 and does not necessarily mean ' had been.' Translate here ' happened,' 
 and see "J, 8. 
 
 (3) The substantive verb in the present tense is inherent in the 
 strong negative nahin. The sentence is the ' cooch perwanny ' of a 
 former generation : ' It does not matter.' 
 
 (5) The repetition of the indefinite pronoun gives the sense of 
 deficiency : kuchh knchh ' some little ' ; koi kot ' some few.' 
 
 (6) Aur Icoi or Tto t our ' some other," 'another'; a ur kuchh or 
 knchh aur ' some more.' 
 
 (7) Dfari ' second ' is hero used in the sense of ' other.' Observe 
 that the negative is printed in combination with the verb, a common 
 custom in writing. 
 
 (8) Rtipaya ' rupees ' is constructed as a noun of multitude with
 
 8 EXSBCI8E8 IIT HINDUSTANI. 
 
 the verb in the singular. Sfl i hun-lred or a hundred 
 
 and fifty,' lit. 'a hundred, one and a half hundred.' Hindustani 
 dispense* with the alternative conjunction, for the Miimhoni men- 
 tioned are not really alternative. Dcrh is one of several frac- 
 tional numerals with which the student cannot too soon make 
 himself familiar. That he should commit to memory the cardinals 
 from one to a hundred goes without saying. For mmijAd see App. 
 A. F<>nn I. 
 
 (10) 'There is very little time indeed left now.' Tan] lit. means 
 tight.' 
 
 (11) Persian adjectives are indrcliiiitlile. //. ' ' ..r hot I Am. not 
 'mi, l>ecanBe the idea is that the soil is unsuitable for the growth of 
 
 ii. lltti would mean that it is not grown, though it might 
 I,,.. 
 
 (13) A'of na kot 'one or another'; ek na ek is used in the - 
 sense. Kh'<ll, like 1'iql ("] , 4), is an Arabic noun of quality in tin- 
 form of the Agent, and is indeclinable. This word is sometimes 
 used adverbially in the sense of ' only.' H&i'i is hen- 1'ivMimntive. 
 not Future. 
 
 (14) ' Somewhere or other.' Htit )u>gt, the Past Presumptive. 
 
 (15) The Persian kh&k ' dust ' is idiomatically used for kuchh in 
 the sense of anything valueless or of Rinall account. Translate. 
 ' To-dfly not the slightest effect was produced." 
 
 12i Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) Is anyone here ? (2) It was not at all hot here 
 yesterday. <3) This mare seems to be extremely vicious. 
 (4) What a nice garden ! (5) Is the Munshi ill to-day ? 
 (6) This was the very thing. (7) There is not the slightest 
 cause. (8) Some mistake or other must have been made. 
 (9) It is of no consequence. (10) Some two hundred and 
 fifty rupees are wanted just now. (11) The fort is a full 
 Icon distant. (12) Mind you are in attendance to-morrow. 
 (18) The Pandit is very ready-with-his-answers. (14) Is 
 this stream fordable ? (15) There must be a bazar some- 
 where or other.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 13i Directions. 
 
 (2) Turn this: 'There was not heat,' etc. The idiom of the 
 language is to use nouns instead of adjectives if possible. Dhdp 
 ' sun ' is often used for ' heat," and is feminine. 
 
 (3) See 5. 14. 
 
 (4) KaisH not kya. The translation of such a variously used 
 word as ' nice ' requires consideration. The over-tasked achchh& 
 is, of course, the easiest resource, and 'umda ' excellent ' is another 
 handy adjective ; but it would be strange if the language of Persia, 
 a country of gardens, had not supplied an equivalent to our idea of 
 ' iiic-i- ' in this connection. The following Persian compounds are 
 applicable, viz., kh&sh-numa, khtinh-rd, dil-pasand, dil-kushd, dil~ 
 ruba, of which the first two denote what pleases the eye, and the 
 others the mind. 
 
 (5) The tone of voice is sufficient to mark a question of this 
 kind, but it is often well to preface it by kyd. In using appellatives, 
 take care to add the appropriate term of respect, viz., sahib with 
 words of Persian or Arabic origin, and jt with Hindi. Munsht sahib 
 is better than 3Iun*hi jt, and Pandit jt than Pandit sahib. See the 
 proverb quoted at (82. ' 
 
 (6) ' Thing ' here means ' thing spoken of,' bat. 
 
 (7) See |0. IS- 
 
 (8) See (0. '4 f r the verb. 
 
 (9) Either |Q. 3; or use the Arabic muz&y aqa in place of the 
 Persian parwa. 
 
 (10) ' Wanted,' darker or matlUb, the first for preference in this 
 connection. ' Just now,' abht to, with reference to something said 
 before. 
 
 (11) ' A full ken,' kos bhar, better than ek kos bhar. Ek acts 
 as an indefinite article when perspicacity requires it. It cannot be 
 used in 4 above, and is unnecessary in 15 below. 
 
 (12) This is really a compound sentence. Turn, ' Take care ; be 
 certainly in attendance to-morrow.' 
 
 (13) ' Beady-with-his-answers,' h&zir-jaicdb, an instance of the 
 terseness which is effected by the use of compound words. ' Very ' 
 is generally l>ahut, as in |Q. 10, but the adjective bard, in agree-
 
 10 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 ment with the noun qualified, is often preferable. Translate, 
 jt bare h<lzir-jav&b hain. Coin p. 4. ' 
 
 (14) I lot A hai, rather than hai, the state of the stream, as gene- 
 rally fordablo or not, being intended. 
 
 (15) See |0. I3nd 14. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 THE SUBSTANTIVE VERB continued. 
 
 Plural of Nouns in ah or Sh. Persian and Arabic Plurals. Order 
 of the Persons. Plurality of Subjects. 
 
 Persian and Arabic nouns in rih or t-h, of which a 
 large number are current in Hindustani, are conven- 
 tionally supposed to form their plurals in the same manner 
 as Hind! nouns in u, viz., by changing that termination 
 into e ; but there is no real necessity for this adaptation 
 either in speaking or writing. 
 
 Sab darwuzah (or darw'izeh) band hain ' all the doors are 
 shut,' is quite as correct as sab darw<ht' band hain. The 
 tendency of modern Hindustani is to dispense with the 
 inflection, just as, even in the Hindi pronouns // // and 
 "'//<, the old plural forms y' and we have dropped out of 
 use (5. 4). 
 
 Persian and Arabic adjectives in "' or ah invariably 
 retain these terminations in the plural. 
 
 f 5, The use of original Persian and Arabic plurals in 
 Hindustani is a literary conventionalism rather than a 
 grammatical necessity. They partake of the character of 
 borrowed phrases, for occasional use, in formal conversation 
 and correspondence, and in dealing with the technicalities 
 of law. The student is advised to note the various forms
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 11 
 
 as they occur ; and to this end he cannot do better than 
 consult Platts's Grammar, 125 seqq. 
 
 lf>. There is a difference of idiom between English 
 and Hindustani in the order in which the ' persons ' are 
 mentioned. The first person (mutakallim ' speaker ') takes 
 precedence of the second (mukhdtab 'spoken to'), and 
 both of the third (gd'ib ' absent '). Hence, ' you and I ' 
 is main tu or ham turn, a conjunction being considered 
 unnecessary, as the speaker and the person spoken to are 
 in proximity ; but ' he and I ' or ' he and you ' are main 
 aur woh or til aur woh, because personal contiguity is not 
 necessarily implied. 
 
 17i (1) Two or more subjects require the predicate 
 to be plural. If the subjects, whether singular or plural, 
 are of one gender, the predicate is of that gender ; if of 
 different genders, the predicate is masculine for choice. 
 
 (2) Allied subjects do not require a conjunction, but 
 are conveniently summed up by the introduction of a col- 
 lective term ; and with this term the predicate agrees. 
 
 (3) Where conjunctions are used and the subjects are 
 thus mentioned in severalty, the predicate agrees with the 
 subject nearest to it. 
 
 i Translate into English : 
 
 (2) Jy* ^1 L^ ^ ^ ^ (1) 
 (3) ^J* 
 ^ (4) 
 
 (8) <&>* ^Jy^lunUs^o ^b-jlj (7)
 
 I'J EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 19, Notes. 
 
 The Arabic alaar means ' most ' or ' many,' as in akgar auq&t 
 ' many times ' or ' often.' It is also used as an adverb in the sense 
 of ' mostly ' or 'p'licnillv.' Hutin or hott hai n, not hain, because 
 the stutcincMT is general and not jiarticular. 
 
 (3) 1'achi'i* ek ' about fifty,' one more or less bein^ a matter of no 
 consequence. Not rutcdnc, see 1 4 . 
 
 (4) F'dtti ' spare ' or ' extra ' an anomalous adjective of Hindt 
 origin. Atb&b is an example of an Arabic ' broken ' plural in every- 
 day use as a noun singular. The singular is tabab. 
 
 (5) Kah&r is the appellative of the bearer caste. The word log 
 ' folk ' is added to words of this class to form the plural. Sab is 
 the Latin omnin; ndrd is t<>tu. The Arabic tamdm or kull are 
 frequently used in the sense of drd. 
 
 (6) Ttnon all three,' the plural of totality. 
 
 (7) fidfcajdf, not s&be (|5.)- Abtar hole honge ' must be in a 
 ruinous condition.' The Present Presumptive. 
 
 (8) See |6. 
 
 (9) Donon 'both,' the plural of totality again. Tdsa-tcdrtd 
 ' recently arrived,' ' new-comers,' a Persi- Arabic compound. 
 
 (10) Wa-gaira, et c.vtera. See 7. 9- The form of the verbal 
 nn'hnyy'i shows that it means ' available ' by arrangement, or ' pro- 
 vided, 'as coni]iared with the verbal used at |0.8- See App. A, Form II. 
 
 (11) The repetition of m'xf gives the sense of ' many such.' The 
 Arabic davA, being a feminine, takes en in the plural. The Arabic 
 plur. adwiya is sometimes used. 
 
 (12) An illustration of the rule given in |7. 3- 
 
 2Oi Translate into Hindustani : 
 (1) Several Thags must have been captured. (2) Pole, 
 pegs, qanate, etc., are all right. (3) The printing and the
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 13 
 
 paper and the binding are good. (4) Are you fellows 
 satisfied ? (5) Well, you and all of us alike are men. 
 
 (6) All the office-people must be distracted and unhappy. 
 
 (7) Mr. and Mrs. Smith and the children started yester- 
 day. (8) All the Zemindars are dissatisfied. (9) The 
 North Western Provinces are extensive. (10) Such 
 qualities as common sense, manliness, and modesty are 
 rare. ' (11) Hundreds of rupees have been squandered 
 there. (12) All four of you are deserving men. 
 
 2 1 1 Directions. 
 
 (1) ' Several,' ka'tekor kitne efc, on the principle of |8. 3- 
 
 (2) QancU ' the canvas wall of a tent.' ' Right,' in the sense of 
 ' in good order,' is thtk or durust or ba-h&l. - 
 
 (3) On the model of (8. 12. 
 
 (4) Preface by kyG.. ' You fellows,' turn-log. 
 
 (5) Turn this : ' Well, we you all alike men are.' 
 
 (6) ' All the office-people,' sab daftar-log, or sab daftar-wale, or 
 ard daftar, or kull 'omala. The last word is the plural of 'Amil 
 ' employe,' and is vulgarly pronounced 'omla, and used as singular 
 or plural. The tense is that of J8. 7- 
 
 (7) ' Smith ' is written and sounded Ismit to suit the native ear. 
 Ismit S&hib aur mem sdhib aur b&b&-loy. Mem is an abbreviation of 
 ' Madam.' 
 
 (9) The N. W. P': mamAlik magrabt o xhimalt. Never mind 
 the Persian izdfat, which theoretically follows mamdlik. It is 
 rarely pronounced in Hindustani, except after d. For ' extensive ' 
 the Arabic word wast' is sufficiently common to be unpedantic. 
 The ordinary Hindi bard would be incongruous. 
 
 (10) For ' common sense ' 'ar/i is perhaps as good as any other 
 word. Translate on the model of (8. n. 
 
 (11) ' Hundreds of rupees,' saikron rdpaya, the plural of totality. 
 ' Squandered ' has a good representative in the Persian bar-b&d ' on 
 the wind.' 
 
 (12) Turn this : ' You all four men,' etc. the plural of totality.
 
 14 KXBBCI8K8 IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 
 
 THE SUBSTANTIVE VBEB continued. 
 Nouns in the Construct State. Isd/af and its Signs and Uses. 
 
 22 1 There are no declensions of nouns in Hindustani. 
 The h'ilut or construct state of a noun is indicated by post- 
 positional affixes or ' signs ' ; and there is, therefore, no 
 reason why a change or inflection should take place in the 
 noun itself. No doubt in one particular class of Hindi 
 nouns in <i that vowel becomes e in the construct state, 
 but this change is euphonic and not grammatical ; euphonic, 
 because the accent in these words being on the penulti- 
 mate, as a rule, the effect of the affix is still further to 
 lighten the sound of the final vowel. Take, for instance, the 
 word kh'hi'i. The accent being on the first syllable, the 
 final (/ has the half-sound of a or e ; and this softening 
 of the vowel is still more apparent when an affix is attached ; 
 hence, khune ko rather than kli >> 
 
 It will be observed, too, that Persian and Arabic nouns 
 in -' are uninflected before an affix. This may be due to 
 the circumstance that they are foreign vocables, and that 
 the accent falls, as a rule, on the final syllable ; but the 
 fact remains that the affix is a sufficient indication of the 
 construct state, and that no ambiguity is caused by the 
 absence of inflection in tho noun. These remarks are 
 equally applicable to Persian and Arabic nouns in ah 
 as a matter of fact, the best modern writers* 
 
 * Maulnvi N'azir Ahmc-d, the beat representative of the Dehli 
 school of writers, rarely inflects nouns of this class before an affix.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 15 
 
 omit the inflection as unnecessary, except when the affix 
 is dropped, in which case the change from all to e may be 
 a useful indication that the noun is in the construct 
 state. 
 
 Plural nouns in the construct state invariably take on 
 before an affix. 
 
 23 When the relation between two nouns is such 
 that one is the complement of the other, the complemen- 
 tary noun receives the sign of izdfat * annexure,' viz., one 
 or other of the affixes M, lei, or ke in agreement with the 
 noun of which it is the complement. For example, in the 
 Hindustani idiom ' the road to Dehli ' is Dehli kd rdsta ; 
 * authority for this statement,' is bat ki sanad; ' the Raja's 
 sons,' Rdjd ke bete ; ' fear of death,' maid kd khauf ; ' want- 
 ing in wit,' aql kd mohtdj ; ' a horse worth a thousand rupees,' 
 hazdr riipaya kd ghord ; ' a gold watch,' sone ki ghari, etc. 
 Obviously the relation expressed by izdfat is more com- 
 prehensive than that of the Genitive case in English. 
 
 24 The sympathetic changes of the sign of izdfat 
 show that the complementary relation is adjectival. This 
 is very clearly seen in such expressions as ranj ki bat ' a 
 sad affair ' ; bald kd gussa ' violent anger ' ; gazab ki nd- 
 insdfi 'terrible injustice,' in which the metaphorical use 
 
 The MS. of his best work, the Taubat, was in my hands in 1873, 
 and the absence of inflection duly noted in this and in the first 
 Edition of the work which was lithographed at Agra in the same 
 year. The second Edition was entrusted to a Lucknow publisher, 
 who thought proper to supply the inflections. See Taubat, IV., 1. 
 
 In the Lucknow translation of the Alf Laila, which was the work 
 of a Mir Munshi of the Foreign Office after his retirement, the in- 
 flection is general. 
 
 Newspaper writers, who are not always the best of scholars, 
 inflect or not at their own sweet will.
 
 f 
 
 16 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 of the English adjectives can be represented in this way 
 only. 
 
 Ranjida ddmt is 'a sad man,' but ranjida b<it is inad- 
 missible. On the other hand, to say barn gttsga or bar! 
 nd-indft, though correct enough, would not be a transla- 
 tion of the English epithets. 
 
 25i The sign cf izdfat is occasionally used to connect 
 the same nouns or adjectives by way of completing or 
 intensifying the idea conveyed by the single word, as 
 dfidh kd ditdh, jniii! k'l pant ' the real article,' ' unadulte- 
 rated ' ; kahdni ki kahdni ' a tale and nothing else ' ;_*o&_ 
 ke tab * the whole lot ' ; kumbe kd kumba ' the whole 
 family? 
 
 2f>i It i 8 a ^ 8 used to connect nouns and pronouns 
 with postpositions, such postpositions being viewed as 
 nouns in the construct state, as per ke tale ' under the 
 tree ' ; uske dge ' before him ' ; unke sdth * with them,' etc. 
 When the postpositional noun is feminine, as in shahr ki 
 taraf ' towards the city,' if the order of the words is 
 changed, so that taraf stands first, the sign of / 
 loses its gender, and we have taraf shahr ke. 
 
 27, Translate into English : 
 *J (2) 1yt> L^ K JLJ ^1 jljwJl (1) 
 
 (3) ^ j^ LJ JZ ^b ^J 
 ^ a/T (4) yb 4^ <UJ5j- 
 
 p. ^ )yO^ f$, (5) 
 
 T (7) ^ ^^ ^^ ^ i (6) 
 t (8) ^b y
 
 EXERCISKS IN HINDUSTANI. 17 
 
 28. 
 
 (1) The usual order of the nouns is reversed by way of emphasizing 
 the word insidad, for which see App. A, Form VII. Translate 
 ' How was this emeute put down ? ' 
 
 (2) Tert is bAt, not is teri bat, on the principle laid down in \Q m 
 
 (3) Observe that pote ' grandson ' is in rational agreement with 
 the plural pronoun turn, which is addressed to an individual. 
 
 (4) Agra instead of Agrd. In either form inflection is out of 
 place, for the word is a proper noun. 
 
 Sarak, as compared with rdsta, is ' a made road ' ; pakki sarak is 
 1 a macadamised road ' ; kachcht sarak, a made road but not macada- 
 mised. The Persian rdh is also current, but is mostly reserved for 
 the metaphorical use of ' way,' as in the phrase r<lh o rasra ' manners 
 and customs.' 
 
 (5) Here an inferior speaks of himself by the depreciatory term 
 ' slave,' in the 3rd sing., and addresses his superior as ' the Presence.' 
 Note the connection between Mzir and huzur. 
 
 (6) The pronominal interrogative is here used substantively. For 
 the translation, see 29. 8. 
 
 * The attention of the student is drawn here, once for all, to a 
 defect in the type fount, the reproduction of which he must carefully 
 avoid in writing. This consists in the faulty manner in which final 
 letters of the c form are united with the preceding letter. The 
 point of junction is the left, not the right, end of the horizontal 
 limb. Thus, _) and & in this Exercise should be ^gT and
 
 18 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (7) Aj kal f now -a-days.' Bh&rt is an example of a numerous 
 class of Hindi adjectives of quality, formed by adding C to a noun. 
 
 (8) See 24. 
 
 (!*) Bich kt unglt 'tin- middU- lin-'-r 1 (24-.); also called daint 
 vn'jlt 'witch-finger.' Tin- rc|eiiti<>ii of the adjective gives the 
 sense of ' o rough ' (from sewing). 
 
 (10) The sign of i:<ifttt is dropped after is-qadr as an encum. 
 brance; ix qadr (if) is equivalent to if/if. 
 
 (11) For nab Ice nab see 25 . 
 
 (12) The meaning of Aye ' in front of is here metaphorical, viz., 
 'in comparison with.' By way of variation, the Arabic conjunction 
 is used between the second couple of nouns. 
 
 (13) The word rel for 'railway* is quite naturalised. Ahant 
 aarak (chemin <ie fer) was the first attempt, but this was soon found 
 to be too cumbrous. PA* M ' very near ' or ' close by.' 
 
 (14) M&nind mere or mert m&nind ' like me,' 26 . 
 
 (15) A proverbial expression, in which *iffc, which is generally 
 used as a postposition, is a noun. Translate, ' What companionship 
 is possible between a footman and a horseman ? ' 
 
 i Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) "What is your father's name and caste ? (2) This 
 is no laughing matter. (3) In whose charge is the 
 arrangement of supplies ? (4) The shape and colour of 
 this horse are good. (5) There are two miles to a kos. 
 (6) Where does this road lead to ? (7) Three days' leave 
 of absence was sanctioned. (8) How much for this pony ? 
 (9) An order to this effect is current. (10) An elephant, 
 and also two camels, were with him. (11) My house is 
 close to the Court. (12) There was a very severe famine 
 last year. (13) It is the shop of some Baniya or other. 
 (14) What profit accrued this year ? (15) How old are 
 you? 
 
 3d Directions. 
 
 (1) Put the sign of izufat in agreement with the nearest noun, and 
 let the verb be in the singular.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 19 
 
 (2) See 24. 
 
 (3) Turn this : ' Of supplies arrangement whose charge (zimma) 
 is?' 
 
 (4) As in (1), the sign of iz&fat agrees with the nearest noun ; 
 and by \~j . 3, the predicate agrees with the nearest noun also. 
 
 (5) The Hindustani idiom is.' Of two miles one kon consists (hot&).' 
 Our word ' mile' is naturalised, but is pronounced meel. 
 
 (6) Turn ' This road whereof is ? ' 
 
 (7) Tin din kt chhuttt, or tut din chhuttt never dinon in connec- 
 tion with a numeral. 
 
 (8) Exactly as in 27. 6. 
 
 (9) The word used f or ' effect ' in |Q. 1518 inapplicable here; 
 mazm&n (App. A, Form I) ' contents ' answers the purpose. 
 
 (10) The indefinite article must be translated by ek here, to avoid 
 ambiguity. 
 
 (11) Kothi best describes the kind of ' house ' intended. A native 
 would say garib khdna ' humble abode.' 
 
 (12) For ' very severe" use the idiom described in 24. bcd& 
 with the sign of iz&fat. ' Last year,' p&ra&l ; ' this year,' ims&l or 
 s&l-hdl ; ' next year,' sdl-&yanda. 
 
 (13) See |0. 13- Baniya, as an appellative, should be indeclinable 
 in the singular, and take log in the plural. 
 
 (14) For kitnfr use kis qadr, 27. Io - 'To accrue 1 h&sil Tiond; 
 and note the etymological connection between this verbal and that 
 used for ' toll ' in Q, 3. 
 
 (15) The Hindustani idiom is ' Your age how much ? ' See 1 3 . 2. 
 
 EXERCISE V. 
 
 THE SUBSTANTIVE VERB continued. 
 Postpositional Verbals. Mode of expressing ' have.' Apposition. 
 
 3 1 , Some few Arabic verbals, such as qdbil, mutably, 
 etc. act as postpositions, and arc constructed in the same 
 way by the use of the sign of izufat, ke ; as e'tibdr ke qdbil 
 4 deserving of confidence.' 
 
 2 *
 
 20 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 32 1 ' Have ' is expressed by the substantive verb in 
 combination with the postposition pat * by,' 27. '3 
 but chiefly when the property is movable, as kimj! kis ke 
 pat hai? ' Who has the key ? ' 
 
 The verb rakhnd means ' having,' in the sense of ' keep- 
 ing ' or ' holding,' and is best reserved for such phrases 
 as ikhtiydr rakhnd ' to have authority,' 'aziz rakhnd ' to 
 hold dear/ etc. 
 
 33 Apposition occasionally supersedes the use of 
 izdfat ; e.g. ek shakhf Durgd ndm ' a person of the name of 
 Durga,' punch rnpaya mahind ' five rupees a month.' On 
 the other hand, in some cases where apposition is the 
 English idiom, Hindustani requires the sign of iz'ifnt ; as 
 ' the word river,' daryd kd lafz. 
 
 34, Translate into English : 
 
 (2) ^ J ^^j ^ LUc,l ^T (1)
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 21 
 
 b IS; j ^jT l*J^ c^il (U) 
 
 35. .Note*. 
 
 (1) ' Circumspection ' is the best rendering of this verbal (of 
 which the gender is exceptional) with reference to its origin. See 
 App. A, Form VIII. Other current words from the same root 
 are h&tCi ' enclosure,' muhit ' circumference.' Qdbil belongs to 
 Form L, and ta'rtf to Form II. See App. A. 
 
 (2) K&r raiwVi ' work-procedure ' or ' procedure,' rawtft being a 
 derivative from the Persian raftan ' to go.' See |8. 3 f r another 
 verbal from the same verb. For mut&biq see App. A, Form III. 
 
 (3) Zab&nt, used as a postposition, ' by the tongue of,' or, as we 
 Bay, ' by the mouth of.' 
 
 (4) NavnoAb s&hib ke yah&n ' at the Nawwab's,' an every-day use 
 of the adverb of place. H&n, for eh&n, is often used in this con- 
 nection for yah&n. 
 
 (5) Mere yah&n ' chez moi ' ; Bir&dart ' brotherhood,' in a con- 
 crete Sense; bW ibandon ki might have been used. 
 
 (6) S&'is, Arabic verbal, Form I. ; see App. A. Kharch or 
 kharcha means ' money for expenses ' generally. Fuztil-kharcht 
 'excessive expenditure,' 'extravagance' occurs in 27. IO - RAh- 
 kharch is ' travelling-monej 7 .' 
 
 (7) Compare |8. 10. The regular plural chtzen is seldom used. 
 
 (8) 'EtAb, see App. A, Form III. Wajh ' ground,' in the sense 
 of primd facie reason. The word generally means in Arabic 'face ' 
 or ' surface.' 
 
 (9) Khilaf-cjiyag ' inconceivable.' The ignorance of the weaver 
 caste is proverbial. Both verbals belong to App. A, Form III. 
 
 (10) For muldq'it see App. A, Form III. ; and for mushtaq, 
 App. A, Form VIII. Ed/tar fed of outside,' that is, ' not of the 
 family,' ' a stranger.' 
 
 (11) The sign of izd/at here has the sense of ' between.' The 
 phrase is proverbial, and means ' an enormous difference.' 
 
 (12) Khud'l ki qasam ' by heaven ! ' lit. ' God's oath.' Mnrtakil 
 nah'n hun Vi do not vdnture to commit ' ; the verbal literally meana 
 ' mounting on,' ' venturing on.' See App. A, Form VIII. 
 
 \
 
 -- EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (13) Seo 33. BA-muhAioara ' idiomatic,' opposed to &-> 
 wara ' nnidioniatic,' App. A, Form III. 
 
 (14) Seo 33. 
 
 (15) TAlib-'ilm .' a seeker after knowledge,' ' a student." For 
 muqarrar see App. A, Form II. 
 
 i Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) How much cash have you ? (2) This is the won- 
 drous story of the mechanical horse. (3) I have no 
 vacancy at present. (4) The plaintiff's claim is good. 
 (5) The Dehli idiom is current here. (6) Daily quarrelling 
 is never pleasant. (7) An indiscreet person is unworthy 
 of confidence. (8) The compound wall wants mending. 
 
 (9) What is the literal meaning of the word toajh ? 
 
 (10) This anonymous petition is the work of a rascal. 
 
 (11) This box is a specimen of the local talent. (12) Cer- 
 tainly your nephew deserves promotion. (13) A beggar 
 of the name of Shah Alt, blind of one eye, is standing 
 before the gate. (14) In the opinion of some the Govern- 
 ment plan is a mistake. (15) This District seems to be 
 very lightly assessed. 
 
 37t Directions. 
 
 (1) See 32. 
 
 (2) The kal kH ghorfc of the Alf-Laila, kal uiranmi; ' machine.' 
 Kal *d ghor& might mean 'yesterday's horse,' or ' the horse ri<l<li'ii 
 yesterday.' Both noun and adverb are Hindi words. 
 
 (3) In reply to an ummedw&r or applicant for employim-nt. 
 Turn ' In my office (mere \iah<in) no place is vacant.' 
 
 (4) Good,' that is, ' good in law,' j&'iz. 
 
 (5) ' Dehli ' must have the si^ri "f i-''f<it. ' Current,' murawu-aj. 
 
 (6) Roz&na, roztna, and rozmarra all bear the sense of ' daily,' 
 but the idiom rot roz Urd'of every day 'is here intended, ami is 
 most suitable. We shall come across another equally idiomatic 
 phrase in connection with the participle. 
 
 (7) An ' indiscreet' man is a man ' without discretion ' bc-tamtt,
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 23 
 
 a form of compound adjective, which is extremely useful in Hindu- 
 stani. Seo 35. '3- 
 
 ' \Vorthy of confidence* is e'tibAr ke qAbil (3I.) but the Hindu- 
 stani idiom does not admit of e'tibAr ke nA-qAbU, though nA-qAbil 
 alone is a good rendering of ' unworthy.' We must say e'tibAr ke 
 qabil nalrin. 
 
 (8) For ' wants mending,' an impossible expression in Hindustani 
 say ' is repair- wanting,' marammat-talab hai. HAtA (for ehAtA) is 
 an ' enclosure ' of any kind, from a ' compound ' to a ' Presidency.' 
 
 (9) Lugawl ' literal ' ; asli ' radical.' 
 
 (10) Gum-n&m ' lost name ' is the regular word for ' anonymous ' ; 
 be-nAm ' without a name ' may be used also. 
 
 (11) 'Local talent' may be expressed as 'the workmanship of 
 the people here,' yahAn ke logon M kArigarl. 
 
 (12) BhattjA ' the son of one's brother,' bhAnja 'of one's sister.' 
 A knowledge of the terms of family relationship is indispensable ; 
 and it is a good plan to tabulate these in the form of a pedigree 
 from a man's grandsiro to his grandson. 
 
 (13) In the Hindustani version ' blind-of-one-eye ' (fcdnd) may 
 stand before ' beggar' as a qualifying adjective. 
 
 (14) ' In the opinion of some,' ba'zon ke nazdtk, lit. ' near some.' 
 The Arabic ba'z acts as a plural of the indefinite pronoun kot. 
 
 (15) Turn this : ' The revenue-settlement (bandobasf) of this 
 District seems to be very soft." 
 
 EXERCISE VI. 
 THE SUBSTANTIVE VERB IN COMPOUND FORM. 
 
 The Verbs AnA, jAnA, rahnA. Ko, the sign of the Remote Object. 
 Usage of the Reflexive Pronoun apnA. 
 
 The substantive verb is often idiomatically com- 
 bined with nouns in such a way that noun and verb, taken 
 together, act as a single intransitive ; for instance, ' the 
 tale began ' is ddstdn shuru'-hui, not ddsttin k<i shuril 1 hud. 
 Chiefly Arabic verbal nouns are utilized in this kind of
 
 24 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 phrase ; and the compound is a valuable addition to the 
 verb vocabulary of Hindustani. 
 
 39. The compound ho-jnnti, in which the base of the 
 substantive verb is united with jdnd ' to go,' is in constant 
 use in the sense of 'become ' ; and it may be observed 
 that the verb j<'ma in composition conveys the idea of 
 completeness or finality : d-jdnd, for instance, is to 'arrive,' 
 rah-jdnd ' to stay where one is ' or be left behind.' Ho- 
 dii-i occasionally occurs in the sense of 'accompanying ' ; 
 ho-rahnd is the continuance of a state. 
 
 4Oi ^ 8 we have seen (23.) the sign of iz'ifat marks 
 the complement of a noun; the affix Tto. on the other 
 hand, marks the complement or_object : of adverb, whether 
 intransitive or transitive, and is therefore called the Sign 
 of the object. In other words, when the relation between 
 two nouns is conveyed by a verb, the second noun takes 
 the affix ko, if necessary for the avoidance of ambiguity ; 
 for example, in the sentence main Agra (ko) jdtd him 'I 
 am going to Agra,' ko marks the object of the journey, 
 but is not necessary, for the sense is obvious without it. 
 
 Under certain circumstances ke is used instead of ko to 
 mark the person affected by the action of an intransitive 
 verb ; but this will be reserved for notice farther on (see 
 52. is)- 
 
 41 1 In combination with the substantive verb the 
 affix ko is used to denote the possessor, when the thing 
 possessed is ideal rather than actual ; and thus we have 
 another means of translating the verb 'have.' For 
 instance, 'I have leisure ' is mnjhko fursat hai, not mere 
 pile fursat hai, as in 32. 
 
 The same particle is likewise used for marking
 
 EXEECISES IN HINDUSTANI. 25 
 
 time, as an adverbial adjunct of the verb ; as, do pahar ko 
 ' at noon,' Pir ko ' on Monday,'.?* waqtko ' at this time,' etc. 
 
 43 The reflexive pronoun apnd refers back either 
 to (1) the grammatical subject of a sentence ; (2) the 
 subject of discourse ; or (3) the speaker. 
 
 Apne to? in is preferred to apne ko ' oneself ' as the 
 object of a verb ; apne up ko ' one's own self ' is a common 
 variation ; apne is also used substantively in the plural 
 to mean ' one's own people.' 
 
 i Translate into English : 
 
 (2) j&> \5)*> m~&z*j ^^ (1) 
 
 ^ gT (4) 
 
 ^ ^3^ ^ (5) 
 
 (7) Syt> by ^ ^JA j~~ ^ ^/ (6) 
 
 (3) 
 
 y Jy (9) 
 
 ^l^" ^wo^ ^f^* t*sj ,j-ol (10) 
 -4(12) o 
 
 (13) l*T 
 
 (15) 
 
 45, 
 
 (1) 'I am taking leave,' said by a visitor on rising to end an 
 interview. 
 
 (2) 11 ere apnt agrees with the grammatical subject of the verb 
 i/''i<l-hain, and refers to the speaker also. 
 
 (3) In this Bt'iiteiic-c uplift agrees with the nearest noun, and
 
 26 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 the verb ydd-d'e agrees with the nearest noun also. '!'!. |>an icle ko 
 is omitted after nut u-aqt, 
 
 (4) X/ ' danoen din (ko) 'on the tenth duy from this.' Note 
 here the difference of idiom. The connection between present :unl 
 future time, being unbroken, is denoted by itdfat. Thus ' to-night* 
 is &j kt r&t or &j r&t. The n in domain is nasal, and the word is 
 therefore inflected as if it were an adjective in d. 
 
 (5) 'Where does this road go ?' The Hindustani idiom is more 
 exact than the English. See back to 29. 6 for another mode of 
 asking the question. 
 
 (6) See 33. Bviffi, Arabic noun of quality in form of Agent, 
 App. A, Form I. 
 
 (7) For kull see 21. 6. KA'in&t, an Arabic feminine plural, 
 meaning ' existences,' used as a singular in Urdu, in the sense of 
 ' effects,' ' property,' etc. Chort-hojAnA ' to be stolen,' 38 . 
 
 (8) For istc'ddd (the gender of which is exceptional) see App. A, 
 Form X. 
 
 (9) Translate ' The train must hare come in some time ago.' The 
 id in kab k<\, or as it is often written kabht k"i, agrees with the 
 subject of the verb. The interrogative form of the phrase implies 
 that the question which led to it was unnecessary. 
 
 (10) The same thing is observable of this example : ' I have no 
 leisure now. Why ask ? ' 
 
 (11) The repetition of apnt is distributive, as in the example at 
 4.4- ChAl-dhAl, a compound of two verbal bases, of which the first 
 means ' gait,' and the second ' mould,' may be translated ' manner 
 of life,' ' manners,' ' fashions,' etc. The expression is proverbial, 
 and means that no two men are alike. 
 
 (12) Far&mosh-k<\rl ' obliviousness.' In this sentence the writer 
 complains of his correspondent's neglect to answer inquiries. 
 
 (13) Main kh&d 'I myself.' llnmr'ik is hero used postposi- 
 tional!)- ; hence /., not /.-'. 
 
 (15) Shart-i-in*d.niyat ' a condition of humanity,' which amounts 
 to a moral obligation. 
 
 Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) He took leave yesterday evening. (2) His oily 
 tongue offends me. (3) The Commissioner will return at 
 noon to-day. (4) I remembered my folly. (5) After some
 
 EXEBCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 27 
 
 davs all his servants were dismissed. (6) A darbdr will 
 be held at the Collector's on the 25th of the present 
 month. (7) All of you go home. (8) Some day or other 
 you will remember my advice. (9) The style and contents 
 of your letter pleased me. (10) The result of this fault 
 will soon become plain to you. (11) How much revenue 
 was collected ? (12) The examination will begin at the 
 same time on Monday. (13) I generally enjoy good 
 health here. (14) Who resides here? (15) When was 
 this new dodge of yours invented ? 
 
 47. Directions. 
 
 (1) ' Yesterday evening,' kal sMm ko. 
 
 (2) Turn, as in 4-4. 1 2, ' His oiliness-of -tongue does not come 
 pleasant to me.' 
 
 (3) The Commissioner, as the chief civil officer of a Division, is 
 known as the Bare Sdhib (pi.). Do pahar means ' noon,' because the 
 second of the four watches into which the day is divided by native 
 reckoning ends then. 
 
 (4) Use the compound verb given in 44. 3- 
 
 (5) ' Servants,' naukar chakar. The duplication of synonyms is 
 a favourite method of denoting plurality. ' Were ' should be here 
 translated as ' became.' 
 
 (6) Turn this : ' 25th date month present (m&h Ml Aro) at the 
 Collector's (Kalektar Sdhib kc yahdn~),' etc. 
 
 (7) Turn this : ' to your respective homes,' apne apne ghar. 
 
 (8) Some day or other,' ek na ck din (Aro). 
 
 (9) See the hint given at 3 . 4- 
 
 (11) ' To be collected,' wus-Al hon&. 
 
 (12) Begin with ' on Monday at this very time,' etc., and for the 
 verb see 44. 4- 
 
 (13) For ' generally ' see |9. 2 - Turn, ' I remain well ' (tandu~ 
 rust or bhalA changft). 
 
 (14) Translate ' who,' kaun a&hib, with verb in plural. 
 
 (15) Ironical. For ' dodge ' use hilnnat, which means ' wisdom,' 
 4 skill,' etc.
 
 28 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 EXERCISE VH. 
 
 USAGES OP THE VERBAL NOUN INFINITIVE, OR GERUND 
 IN nd ; NOUN OF AGENCY. 
 
 The Intransitive* par;iu, miln'i, lagnA. The Locative affixes 
 men, par, tak. 
 
 4-Si The verbal ending in nd is called by native 
 scholars the wicwtfar, or * source ' from which the other 
 parts of the verb are derived, and is represented in the 
 dictionaries by the English prepositional infinitive. 
 Bahn.ii, for instance, is ' to remain ' ; but the truer sig- 
 nification is that of our verbal in -ing ; e.g. merd wah<i// 
 mundsib hai ' iny remaining there is proper,' not 
 Jeo. The verbal approaches most nearly to the 
 English infinitive when it is inflected after verbs of 
 motion, the affix ko being suppressed; as, roti /./<'_/"/' 
 htiti 'I am going to eat bread.' 
 
 A certain similarity is observable with the Latin 
 gerund, but the Hindustani verbal is more flexible. It 
 is inflected like other nouns which end in d, and may be 
 plural as well as singular. It may be qualified by 
 an adjective and be itself used adjectively in agreement 
 with common nouns. 
 
 The addition of wild to this verbal personifies, 
 so to say, the state or action which is denoted. For 
 instance, from rahnd ' dwelling ' we have rahii-'-n-.U,' 
 ' dwelling-person ' or ' dweller,' in which the unaccented 
 ii of the verbal is softened to e, as described in 22. before 
 the affix.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 29 
 
 In verbs of motion or action this compound often 
 supplies the want of a future participle active ; as, jdne- 
 wdld Tcann hai, Quis ilurus eat ? ' Who is about to go ?' 
 
 Occasionally the base form of the verb takes this affix ; 
 as, rakhivdld ' a keeper.' 
 
 5O (1) The affix men, in which the long vowel is 
 sofened to c, and the n is nasal, covers most of the meanings 
 of the English prepositions ' in,' ' into,' ' among ' ; some- 
 times it answers to ' between,' and sometimes to ' on ' or 
 ' round.' For example, ' a chain on the foot ' is pdon men 
 zanjir, 'a ring on the finger' ungli men anguthi, etc. ; the 
 reason of this difference of idiom being that the idea of 
 ' on ' in Hindustani is chiefly applicable to articles which 
 are easily removed. 
 
 This affix is frequently dropped, especially in the case 
 of participial nouns, as will appear hereafter. The noun 
 remains in the construct state, and serves as a postposi- 
 tion (see 26. ), or as an adjective ; e.g. gusse 'angry,' for 
 the inflection of which see 22. 
 
 (2) Par corresponds to our ' on ' or ' at,' and is an 
 abbreviation of upar ' over.' 
 
 It is also used to mark the object of an emotion, and 
 
 thus answers to the English prepositions 'with' or 'to* 
 
 in such phrases as ' angry with,' ' merciful to.' This 
 
 particular difference of idiom is a great puzzle to our 
 
 native friends. 
 
 (3) Tak means ' to,' ' up to,' ' even to,' ' as far as,' and 
 so forth, according to the context. 
 
 The sign of izdfat may follow all these affixes after the 
 manner of the English idiom ; e.g. is men Ted pdni 4 water 
 out of this,' etc.
 
 30 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 *>f , Translate into English : 
 
 (1) 
 
 (3) 
 
 ^ (3) 
 
 / ^b^C^I (6) 
 
 i (8) y 6 o^ -^ ^ ] * ^ r 1 o 1 *^ ( 7 ) 
 
 y ^o.^ (9) l^i LKi U IC-jl ^ UKi / uol; 
 
 ( 10 ) 
 (ii) 
 
 (13) cH is* * J b ^ ^ o 1 ^ ++* ( 12 ) 
 
 (14) ^/J ; ^Jlfc ^.^^ J^ vs*i ^ 
 150 ^^ ^ ^5^^ (15) U) 1^ /L^ JU tf 
 
 52. 
 
 (1) The verbal maslahat has here the adjectival sense of ' ad- 
 vieable ' or ' expedient.' 8e App. A, Rem. 5 (3). 
 
 (2) Kitnt der tak or kabtak or kahiin tak ' how long ? ' The verb 
 parnd, which literally means ' falling ' or ' lying,' is used in a variety 
 of idioms. Here it gives to rahn-i the obligatory sense of the Latin 
 gerund in -dum ' Shall I have to remain P ' Mujhko rahnA hog& 
 nic.-ins much the same thing. 
 
 (4) ' Between this and that.' Compare the example at 34. " 
 where farq follows the sign of izdfat. 
 
 (5) The verb milnA is not a transitive like our * receive ' ; hence 
 the Hindustani idiom in this example, ' received to me,' the verb 
 being always in agreement with the thing received. '//. ; v/'-ndma 
 corresponds to our word ' favour ' in the sense of letter. Translate, 
 therefore, ' I was favoured by your letter.' 
 
 (6) See 33. 
 
 (7) Bh&'t means ' mate ' or ' friend,' as well as ' brother,' and is 
 -U--M used when the object is to soothe.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 31 
 
 (8) Nay& ntfcoZnd ' a new going-out,' ' a new departure,' or 
 4 novelty.' This example shows clearly the great difference between 
 the so-called ' Infinitives ' in Hindustani and English or Latin. 
 
 (9) This proverbial expression illustrates the adjectival usage of 
 tin- verbal in d. Ant j&nt shai 'a thing that conies and goes,' 
 otherwise, Ane jdne kt shai. 
 
 (10) Similarly d&liy&n ant, where tint agrees with dtiliy&n, and 
 both with the verb shur&'-htfin, is equivalent to d&ltyon fcd dnd. 
 
 (11) A scrap of Euclid, which illustrates the exactness of expres- 
 sion attained by the use of the double affix. For musallas and 
 murabba' see App. A, Form II. Figures expressed by three and 
 four (sides) respectively. 
 
 (12) Idiomatic sentences of this kind cannot, of course, be trans- 
 lated literally. The meaning is, ' I mean to go (or work, or read, 
 etc.) thus far and no farther. For irdda see App. A, Form IV. 
 The word was ira&d, and the dropping of the a is compensated for 
 by the affix. 
 
 (13) The intransitive lagnA is a word in constant use in many 
 idioms. The general idea is external attatchment, adhesion, appli- 
 cation, etc., according to the context. Here, hdth lagnA means 
 ' to be handled,' like h&th dnd ' to come to hand.' 
 
 (14) Proverbial. An assertion interrogatively put, as in 44. 
 10. The idiom burd lagnd, corresponds to our phrase ' come amiss.' 
 
 (15) Translate 'He was fsrfally wounded,' or 'he received a 
 fatal wound.' 
 
 The propriety of ke instead of ko in this example is apparent from 
 the consideration that usko zahhm lag&, in accordance with the 
 usage of the intransitive lagn&, as illustrated in the two preceding 
 texts, would mean, ' a wound was attached to him,' as if it were 
 something tangible and removable. A wound after infliction is 
 part and parcel of the injured member, and thus uske is the logical 
 resource. Uske sfi't chubht ' the needle pricked her,' in which 
 chubht is an intransitive, may be quoted as another illustration of 
 the same refinement. 
 
 *>3i Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) Government interference in religious matters is 
 inexpedient. (2) He was very angry with me indeed.
 
 82 EXERCISES IX HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (3) I mean to read as far as the eighth chapter and no 
 farther. (4) Where is this kind of cloth to be got ? 
 (5) It is right you should join in this assembly. (6) I 
 had to go to Agra the next day. (7) Anonymous peti- 
 tions began to arrive. (8) You got this place a bargain 
 in my opinion. (9) No one was hurt. (10) There is a 
 great difference between theory and practice. \(11) Your 
 son came out first in the half-yearly examination. (12) 
 Without interest no one obtains employment in this State. 
 
 (13) It is forbidden to drink water from this well. 
 
 (14) The key does not fit the lock. (15) We are bound 
 to obey the canon-law. 
 
 54-! Directions. 
 
 (I) ' Religions,' mazhabt, used in Upper India without respect t<> 
 creed. The form of the Arabic mazhab is that of a mtm-ated noun <if 
 action, and the literal meaning is ' passing ' or ' pass;. 
 
 (3) Exactly on the model of 51. 12, omitting the verli read.' 
 
 (4) Turn this : ' Where is cloth of this kind received (miln-i) ? ' 
 
 (5) Turn this : ' Your joining in this assembly is right.' 
 
 (6) See SI. 2 - ' The next day,' fake agle din (/to). AglA, 
 properly speaking, is ' prior,' that which is ' before,' d</e ; hence the 
 idea of ' future ' in respect of time. The sign of iz'ifat marks the 
 close connection between the present and immediate future. 
 
 (6) See 5|. 10. 
 
 (8) See 36. M- 3/<>r? rae men or mcr? </.'r/ii>-/ nun will do 
 equally well. ' Bargain ' is kh&sh-khartd ' pleasant-purchase.' 
 
 (9 Translate with attention to 5 1 . '5- 
 
 (10) See 51. 4 : ono men on 'y i g required. 'Theory* is .Jlc 
 and 'practice,' A** The contrast is proverbial, and is heightened 
 in the original by the fact that the same letters are used in both 
 words. 
 
 (II) 'To come out first,' awwai nikalnd. The Arabic numeral 
 carries with it a certain amount of dignity as compared with pahl''i. 
 ' Half-yearly ' is ' six-monthly' in the Hindustani idiom. 
 
 (12) ' Without interest,' be A't o aifArish, in which the first
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 33 
 
 member of the compound phrase means ' effort," and the second, 
 ' recommendation.' This kind of compound is often useful in the 
 translation of single terms of complex meaning Compare ch&l 
 dhdl as explained in ^5. IK ' In this State ' stands first in the 
 Hindustani sentence. 
 
 (13) Use the double affix, as in 50> su ^ fi n - ' Forbidden ' (by 
 the rules of religion or caste), hardm, which is, strictly speaking, a 
 Mahomedan word. ' Well,' kumvdn or yKTd by the elision of the 
 nasals. Sometimes the first nasal alone is dropped, and sometimes 
 the second. 
 
 (14) Tdl&, tdlt, are the Hindi words for ' lock and key,' and qufl 
 and kunjt (or ch&bt) the Urdu. 
 
 (15) Turn this : 'Obedience (pd-bandt, lit. ' foot-binding ') of the 
 canon-law-of -Islam (sfcari'af) is an obligation (/arz) on us.' 
 
 EXERCISE VIII. 
 USAGES OP THE GERUND continued. 
 
 The Separative Affix se. Comparison of Adjectives. The Affix 4 
 of Similitude or Comparison. 
 
 55, The verbal in na is constantly used as a jussive: 
 turn jdnd, for instance, means ' go you'; and this usage 
 is akin to, if not an abbreviation of, the gerundial form 
 tumko jdnd hai 'you are to go.' Na jdnd is the corre- 
 sponding prohibitive ; but the use of mat also is sanctioned 
 by the best authorities. 
 
 50, A rare usage of the verbal is that in which it 
 takes the sign of izdfat in agreement with the subject 
 of a negative sentence, and thus acts as a finite verb, 
 with the force of a strong future, or non-possumus. The 
 following proverb is an example : Tahdn tumhdri tikki 
 nahin lagne ki ' Your bit of bread shall not be put here,' 
 
 3
 
 34 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 * cannot be baked in this oven,' i.e. ' It is of no use your 
 coming !. 
 
 *>7i T ne a ffi x * e marks the separated object iu space 
 or time, and so far corresponds with the English prepo- 
 sition ' from ' ; and since ' from ' includes the idea of 
 origin or cause, the sense of instrumentality denoted by 
 the English 'by' likewise belongs to se. Again, the 
 notion of looking from one object to another implies as- 
 sociation of ideas, intercommunication, comparison, etc. ; 
 and thus se covers the meanings of the preposition 
 
 with.' 
 
 58 In its meaning of comparison * with,' se corre- 
 sponds with the English ' than ' after an adjective in the 
 comparative degree. Thus, is se tez ' swift in comparison 
 with this ' translates the English ' swifter than this' ; and, 
 similarly, sab se tez is ' swifter than all ' or ' swiftest.' 
 
 Other modes of comparison will be illustrated below. 
 
 59i The affix s<i of similitude or comparison is not a 
 case-affix like those we have been considering, although, 
 like the sign of izdfat, it is adjectival and agrees in 
 gender and number with the noun which it precedes. 
 It corresponds generally with the English adjectival 
 terminations ' -like ' and ' -ish.' We had an example of 
 the use of this affix in 4. 4> where kaunsd means ' what- 
 like?'and expects a descriptive answer. So, too, ///</,-,; 
 means ' a smallish quantity of water,' or 'only a 
 a little water,' whereas thora thordpdni would mean 'a 
 very little water.' Bahut se ddmi means a 'largrish 
 number of men,' or ' a comparatively large number of 
 men,' which accounts for the popular usage of the phrase 
 in the sense of ' a great many men.' As applied to the
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 35 
 
 personal pronouns, instead of yeh-sa and wnh-sa, we have 
 aisd and waisd, and instead of main-sd and tu-sd, mvjhtd 
 and tujhsd. 
 
 Translate into Enlish : 
 
 (2) See 56. The example is taken from the Alf Laila, in which 
 the word amr is constantly used in the general sense of ' thing,' 
 like b&t. It will be notued that all three forms of the sign of 
 ic'V'if occur in this short sentence. Formarzt see App. A, Form I. 
 
 (3) BaW fed oneidW ' a terrible sleeper.' See 24-. 
 
 (5) Rishta-natii, a Persi-Himli compound, which includes all the 
 degrees of family connection and kinship. 
 
 3 *
 
 36 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (6) Note, with reference to 3. Rule I., that Hindi climinutu 
 iyA are always feminine. 
 
 (7) Ap he yahdn ' in your stable.' 
 
 (8) Ba-nisbat auron ke 'in relation to the rest,' a very common 
 mode of denoting the superlative. Another idiomatic phrase of the 
 the same meaning is auron let nisbat kar. 
 
 (9) From Galib. The Sayyids claim descent from the Prophet. 
 The other three great classes of Mahommedans are Shekh, Mugal, 
 and Pathan. Instead of ke we might have had men, without altera- 
 tion of the meaning. 
 
 (10) Pesh-AnA ' to come before ' usually means ' to treat ' in this 
 construction. Akhl<lq xe ' courteously ' or ' kindly.' St, used in this 
 way with abstract nouns, supplies a large class of adverbs of manner, 
 otherwise lacking in the language. 
 
 (11) Sec 50. f r *h e usage of men here. Pd'on, for pAnon by 
 elision of the first nasal. Another common form of the word ia 
 pfinw, in which the second nasal is dropped. OVon or ganw ' vil- 
 lage' is another common word of similar form. Compare 54. '3- 
 
 (13) Sd, after the sign of iz'ifat, is a very convenient turn 
 for the English ' like that of.' The word talaffuz is understood 
 after kA, so that the full meaning is ' His pronunciation is like the 
 pronunciation of rustics.' AnArt ' nn-Aryan ' or ' ignoble,' a word 
 with a history. The radical connection between talaffuz (see App. 
 A. Form V.) and lafe, 34. *3> should be observed. 
 
 (14) Jaist here replaces K st without derangement of the con- 
 struction. 
 
 (15) For musAfir see App. A, Form III. 
 
 {>2i Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) His disposition is angelic. (2) A considerable 
 number of these merchants have come from Kabul. 
 (3) Hazfiri Mai is a banker of a thousand. (4) This 
 Arab is the quietest horse in my stable. (5) This person's 
 appearance undoubtedly matches the description given in 
 the passport. (6) These three letters to your Honour's 
 address have come from the office. (7) There is no better 
 rough-rider than Pir Khun in the whole neighbourhood.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 37 
 
 (8) I got this pair a bargain at the Hardwar fair. (9) I 
 shall not come at your call. (10) For God's sake do not 
 enter this quarter of- the town. (11) Do not remain idle. 
 (12) Who is the best writer in the school ? (13) My 
 friend was not at home yesterday. (14) I like railway 
 travelling. (15) He had a silver belt round his waist. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) On the model of 60. '3- 
 
 (2) Turn ' Out of these merchants a largeish number,' etc. 
 
 (3) Turn ' Of a thousand bankers H. M. is one banker." 
 
 (4) Oartb ' poor,' stands for ' quiet ' in the native idiom, 
 whether it refers to men or animals. ' In my stable,' mere yah&n. 
 
 (5) Begin with the adverb, and for ' matches ' use the intransitive 
 milna. The nearest term for ' passport ' is ch&ldn, which means 
 ' descriptive roll,' ' invoice,' etc., according to the context. 
 
 (6) ' To your honour's address,' huz&r ke ntim kt, the kt being in 
 agreement with the feminine noun for ' letters." 
 
 (7) On the model of 6 . 6 - 
 
 (8) See 54. 8. 
 
 (9) The idiom explained in 5 6 . IS applicable here. 
 
 (10) ' For God's sake," Khuda ke waste. See 5 5 . 
 
 (12) For ' writer ' use the Persian compound khtish-navtt. The 
 best word for ' school ' here is maktab, which means literally ' place 
 of writing ' ; madrasa is a ' place of reading,' and is generally ap- 
 plied to a higher type of school than maktab. See App. A, Bern. 5. (3). 
 
 (11) Turn ' Biding on rail comes pleasant to me,' as in 44. I2 - 
 (15) See 50. i.
 
 38 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 EXERCISE IX. 
 TRANSITIVE VERBS. 
 
 The Sign of the near Object, ko. The Past Conjunctive Participle. 
 The Aorist Tense. 
 
 \ 
 
 The verb karnd ' acting,' as opposed to hond 
 ' l'ing/ plays an important part in idiomatic Hindustani.* 
 It is specially useful in combination with nouns on pre- 
 cisely the same principle as that described in 38. with 
 regard to hand. The noun and verb taken together act 
 as one transitive verb ; in fact, the noun thus used is 
 verbalized by the addition of karna. For example, apnd 
 hdl 'arz-kartd hun ' I represent my condition,' not apne 
 hdl kd 'arz kartd hun. 
 
 {>5i There is no Accusative case in Hindustani, for, 
 as remarked in 22. there is no declension of nouns or 
 system of case-endings. Hence, after a transitive verb 
 the direct object is unaltered by its position; e.g. (ij'/ri 
 hdl in the example above ; but, inasmuch as both subject 
 and object precede the verb in the Hindustani idiom, it 
 is sometimes necessary, in order to avoid possible con- 
 fusion, to mark the latter by the sign of the object, ko. 
 When a person is the object, ko is always necessary. Let 
 the student, then, bear in mind that he is to use ko with 
 an object of a transitive verb (1) when, for one reason or 
 another, it is necessary to particularise the object ; (2) 
 
 * Fallon specifies more than thirty different usages of this verb. 
 The clue to these is in the context, for, as is often the case in Hindu- 
 stani, the meaning of the word varies with its surroundings.
 
 BXEECISKS IN HINDUSTANI. 39 
 
 when the object is a personal pronoun or a proper name 
 or appellative. 
 
 OOi The duplication of the predicate in such expres- 
 sions as ' he went there and stayed ' is avoided in Hindu- 
 stani by using the base form of the first verb, wahdnjd 
 rahd-, and this base form is called the Past Conjunctive 
 Participle by English writers. The native term is Past 
 Defective, that is, a Past which fails to indicate number 
 or person, except by reference to the context. By way of 
 greater distinctness the dc-signative suffix Tear or Tee, or 
 even karke, is added to this base form. 
 
 The Past Conjunctive Participle is in rational agree- 
 ment with the grammatical subject of the sentence, as in 
 the above example, but, as was observed of the reflexive 
 pronoun apnd in 4-3. it may also refer to the subject of 
 discourse, or to the speaker. It is occasionally constructed 
 independently, and in this form corresponds pro tanto 
 with the Latin Ablative Absolute. 
 
 f>7i A finite verb in the Aorist Tense denotes un- 
 certainty or hesitation in the mind of the speaker ; as 
 ky<i kariin ? ' What shall I do ? ' or ' what am I to do ? ' 
 Even in such phrases as Khudd jane ' God knows,' the 
 uncertainty still resides with the speaker. This accounts 
 for the use of the Aorist in proverbial expressions, which 
 are generally and contingently, not axiomatically, true. 
 
 . Translate into English : 
 
 ^ \ (2) ^ ^JU, (^ (I) 
 U 4 (3) 
 (4)
 
 40 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (5) 
 
 69, 
 
 (1) This sentence occurs in the B&g-o-Bah&r, and may be trans- 
 lated ' What shall I say at all, at all ? ' M. Adalat Khan, who 
 published a version of this romance some years ago, has the in- 
 genious rendering, ' What on earth shall I say ? ' ; but kh'ik doe* 
 not mean ' earth ' in this sense. See 1 1 . 15. 
 
 (2) h'ij'1 munh leke, lit. ' having taken what mouth,' or, as we 
 say, ' with what face.' 
 
 (3) Here dekhkar agrees with the subject of discourse and not 
 with the grammatical subject k&n. 
 
 (4) Itni bart hokar 'so old' in our idiom, 'at your age.' The 
 Post Conjunctive Participle refers to the woman spoken to, that is, 
 to the subject of discourse. 
 
 (5) J'i milt ' falls ' into, lit. ' went and mixed ' with. The idiom 
 of the Past tense here is identical with that of gat in 4-4. 5- 
 
 (6) Milkar ' combined ' or ' summed up.' The sum of two or 
 more numbers is jor ' union ' in Hindi, and jama 4 ' collection ' in 
 Urdu. 
 
 (7) R<l-6a-fcdr likhkar ' the proceedings having been recorded.' 
 The Past Conjunctive Participle is here absolute. The text is an
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 41 
 
 official formula which connects the precis of a case with the order 
 passed on it. 
 
 (8) The Past Conjunctive Participle chhor 'having let go" is a 
 similar usage. Translate ' Let alone one two doctors,' etc. 
 
 (9) Ldn& is a contraction for Ze-dnd, and though it takes an 
 object by virtue of the first member of the compound, is an intran- 
 sitive verb. 
 
 (10) Tal&sh-karnd, ' to search.' See 64-. 
 
 (11) The negative is attached to the second instead of the first 
 verb as in the English idiom. 
 
 (12) Mukhtasar karke, lit. ' having made abridged." Another way 
 of putting it is mukhtasar taur par 'in an abridged fashion,' or 
 more pedantically more Arabico, mukhtasaran. For the form of the 
 word see App. A, Form VIII. 
 
 (13) From Galib. ' The taker down of a reflected picture ' is, of 
 course, ' a photographer.' Taswtr (App. A, Form II.) is the delinea- 
 tion of a shape (s<Jrctf). 
 
 (14) Le jdna, like l&na, is an intransitive. 
 
 (15) See 67. Translate ' Thief knows thief,' which is the 
 counterpart of a well-known English proverb. 
 
 7Oi Translate into Hindustani : 
 (1) Nine, nineteen, and twenty-nine make fifty-seven. 
 
 (2) Some rascal must have gone and carried off my shoes. 
 
 (3) Who brought this letter ? (4) Put all these books 
 in order on the table. (5) How am I to deal with these 
 rebels? (6) The river Indus falls into the Indian Ocean. 
 (7) I am fond of taking the air in the evening. (8) 
 Briefly describe all your adventures. (9) Find out the 
 exact state of the case and write me word. (10) How am 
 I to ascertain the real cause of this emeute ? (11) Not 
 one but three snakes came out of this very drain. (12) 
 With what face shall I encounter my elder brother? 
 (13) Never abuse a man behind his back. (14) I went 
 home and took fever. (15) I admit the force of the 
 Maulavi's objection.
 
 42 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 7ti Directions* 
 
 (1) On the model of 68. & 
 
 (2) There are plenty of words for ' rascal ' in Hindustani. The 
 Arabic word makk'ir, which is a favourite with poets and women, 
 will answer the purpose here. 
 
 (3) Yeh chitthi, not t'x chitthi ko. The student must learn to do 
 without the ko with due regard to the rule in 65 . 
 
 (4) ' In order,' tarttb se. See 6 1 . i o. 
 
 (5) ' How ? ' kis tarah se may be used as a variation of Ici/dnkar. 
 For the form of the sentence see 60. IO The word used for 
 ' rebels ' in the Mutiny was b&gt or bAqt-log. Another Arabic verbal 
 inufnid, which signifies the doer of /twdd, 27. ! > > 8 frequently used. 
 
 (6) See 68. 5- Sindh, originally Hindh, is the Indus. 
 
 (7) Turn this : ' Fondness (a/umq) of eating air is to me.' In 
 India one eats air and drinks smoke, or, as we say, ' imbibes.' 
 Compare the fumum bibere of Horace. 
 
 (8) For ' briefly ' see 69. 12. 
 
 (9) ' The exact state of the case,' haqtqat-h&l. ' To write word, 1 
 likh-bhejnfi, ; ' to send word,' kahl&-bhejnA. 
 
 (10) ' Emente,' either Jas&d alone or dangA-fasad, in which dangA 
 describes the ' row,' aud /osdd the ' mischief.' 
 
 (11) On the model of 68. 8. 
 
 (12) See 68. 2. Instead of mul<iq<lt karn'i. use nn 
 
 (13) 'Behind the back,' ptth-ptchhe. See 5Q. ' 'To abuse' 
 is idiomatically bur a bhald kahn<i ' to speak evil and good,' with 
 to mark the person referred to. 
 
 (14) Turn this : ' To me, having gone home, fever came," the 
 Past Conjunctive Participle being in rational agreement with the 
 person speaking. 
 
 (15) Use tasltm-kamA for 'admit,' which will render the transla- 
 tion of ' the force of ' unnecessary. Mark the object in this sentence 
 by ko.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 43 
 
 EXERCISE X. 
 CAUSAL VERBS. 
 
 Intensive, Potential, and Completive Compound Verbs. Inceptive, 
 Acquisitive, and Permissive Verbal Compounds. 
 
 72 1 Causal verbs are a speciality of the language, not 
 less useful than elegant. Theoretically, every simple 
 Hindi verb is capable of producing, as it were, two secon- 
 daries, the first of which is a causal of the simple, and 
 the second a causal of the causal, or a double causal 
 of the simple. The normal mode of formation is the 
 insertion of d between the base of the simple verb and 
 the suffix nd for the first causal, and similarly of wd for 
 the second. For example, iithnd is ' to rise,' uthdnd ' to 
 cause to rise,' or ' raise,' uthwdnd ' to cause to raise.' In 
 this instance the initial long vowel of the simple is 
 shortened in the causals ; and this and other forms of 
 euphonic modification are easily reduced to system. In- 
 stances will be noticed as they occur below. 
 
 73 1 (1) The addition of jdnd to the base of verbs, 
 whether transitive or intransitive, supplies a class of 
 intransitive compound verbs, known as Intensives, because 
 the state or action denoted by the simple verb receives a 
 more forcible expression. See 39. 
 
 (2) To this class also belong the intransitive compounds, 
 of which the second member is iithnd ' rising up,' and 
 parnd ' falling down,' or ' lying.' As might be expected, 
 the characteristic of the action portrayed by the first set 
 is suddenness. The nature of the state or action in the 
 case of the second set may be appropriately characterised 
 as casual.
 
 1-1 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (3) Similarly contrasted Intensives are those of which 
 the second member is dend ' giving,' and lend ' taking.' 
 Stated generally, the action denoted by the first concerns 
 others, and that denoted by the second, oneself. Both 
 forms are very common in causal verbs. 
 
 Lend is occasionally replaced by dill ml ' throwing,' of 
 which the effect is vehemence or completeness. 
 
 74 Potentials and Completes are formed by the 
 addition of the otherwise unused verbs saknd ' to be able,' 
 and chuknd ' to be finished,' to transitive and intransitive 
 bases. Obviously, when the base is transitive, these com- 
 pounds take an object after them, but they are logically 
 and grammatically intransitive, because action is not pre- 
 dicated by the second member. 
 
 Y5i Inceptives, Acquisitives, and Permissives are 
 compound phrases in which the gerund in the construct 
 state (ko suppressed) is followed by the verbs lagnd 
 ' setting to,' pdnd ' fretting,' and dend ' giving,' respectively. 
 
 The first two of these forms are logically and grammati- 
 cally intransitive, because beginning to act and acquiring 
 the right to act are not acting. The third form, on the 
 other hand, is transitive, because verbs of giving have 
 two objects, and the permission to act, denoted by the 
 compound phrase, passes on to the person who receives 
 it. 
 
 It may be taken as a principle of the verb system of 
 Hindustani that the meaning rules the construction. 
 
 Translate into English : 
 
 ^ <=* V T J^ )) (i) 
 00 >>JKi <=- &&A J5/^ 5** *J<* (2)
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 45 
 
 77, 
 
 (1) Zar-khartd ' purchase -money.' Note that the long vowel of 
 the simple verb bhejnti becomes the homogeneous short vowel in the 
 causal. 
 
 (2) Nik&lnd, for nikaldnti, is the causal of nikalnd. By the 
 addition of dend the verb becomes Intensive, and means 'drive 
 out.' 
 
 (3) Refer to 4-5.9- 
 
 (4) Ban-parnd ' to be effected ' or ' managed.' 
 
 (o) For huztir see 27. 5- Bol-Hthnd 'to exclaim.' 
 
 (6) A very common idiom 'my power does not move,' that is to 
 say, ' I have no power to move,' etc. Mo'Amala (see App. A, Form 
 III.) is an affair in which two or more persons are mutually inte- 
 rested. 
 
 (7) For chand&n see 5 . 9- The force of the Intensive may bo 
 expressed by translating ' to make my son understand (what I 
 wanted),' etc. 
 
 (8) The duplication of the Past Conjunctive Participle denotes 
 persistence.
 
 46 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (9) Nahtn likh-sakA, better than likh nahtn sakA, ' I could not 
 write.' 
 
 (10) The peculiar phrase hdml bharnd means ' to assent ' or ' say 
 yes to.' See Taubat, V., 55, for a note on the origin of the 
 phrase. 
 
 (11) The force of the compound verb may be given by translating 
 it ' has already gone.' 
 
 (12) This idiom cannot be literally translated ; our phrase ' talk 
 about this and that ' is the nearest approach. 
 
 (13) Translate 'Beware! let not this secret be divulged.' For 
 ifshA see App. A, Form IV. 
 
 (14) The sahn is the inner court of a native house. Consult the 
 house-plan given in App. A of the Taulat. 
 
 (15) BalA *e, an expression of impatience, like our ' Bother take 
 it!' 'Hang it!' etc. For bag see 51. '2. Translate here ' :ml 
 have done with it.' 
 
 73 Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) I cannot answer your question off-hand. (2) I 
 could do nothing, and that 's all about it. (3) The cat 
 must have drunk up the milk. (4) Pitch the tent to the 
 north of that tope. (5) He finished his work before my 
 arrival.,. (6) The cultivators began to complain of hard 
 times/ (7) There is no harm in admitting him. (8) Let 
 no one be allowed to go outside the compound. (9) Make 
 an exact copy of this document. (10) Shall I enter a 
 report of the insanitary condition of this village in my 
 diary? (11) Don't let there be any contention among 
 you. (12) Have the cricket-ground watered the first 
 thing in the morning. (13) Hang it ! chuck this rubbish 
 into the waste-paper basket. (14) He will have come 
 through the bazar. (15) Have all the horses shod to- 
 morrow.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 47 
 
 79 1 Directions. 
 
 (1) ' To answer a question ' is, in Hindustani, ' to give an answer 
 of a question." ' Off-hand,' fiar-i-dcut, lit. ' tip of hand," or, as we 
 say, ' finger-tip.' 
 
 (2) See 76. 4 or 6. The second clause may be translated bag, 
 as in 76. 15. 
 
 (3) Place the object first, with ko. ' To drink up,' pt-jAnA. 
 
 (4) ' To pitch a tent ' is ' to make it stand,' kharA Icar-denA. ' To 
 the north ' in the Hindustani idiom is ' in the north.' In addressing 
 servants or villagers Hindi words are more likely to be understood 
 than Persian or Arabic ; uttar is therefore better here than shimAl. 
 
 (5) ' Before my arrival,' mere 6.ne se pahle, in which se marks the 
 lapse of an interval. 
 
 (6) ' To complain of hard times,' zam&na M thikAyat karnA. 
 
 (9) ' Exact ' is to be rendered as ' according to the original,' 
 mutdbiq-asl. 
 
 (10) ' Insanitary condition,' nA-sAft. ' To enter,' darj kardenA. 
 
 (11) ' Among you,' Apas men. 
 
 (12) ' A cricket-ground,' gend-khelne kA maidAn ' an open space 
 for ball-playing ' ; gend-ghar or gend-gAh is used for a ' racquet- 
 court.' There are several expressions for ' the first thing in the 
 morning,' such as tarke, /a/or ko, savere, or munh andhere ' when it 
 is too dark to distinguish a face.' 
 
 (13) See 77. 1 S- ' I nto t^ e waste-paper basket,' raddt men. 
 
 (14) ' Through the bazar,' b&zar hoke. 
 
 (15) Turn this : ' Have the shoeing of all the horses done to- 
 morrow ' (karwA denA~). 
 
 EXEKCISE XI. 
 TEANSITIVE VERBS (COMPLETED ACTION). 
 
 .V' , the Sign of the Agent. Formation of the Past or Perfect 
 Participle. 
 
 3Oi The affix ne marks the Agent of a transitive verb 
 in those six of its tense-forms which are derived from the
 
 I 
 
 48 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 Perfect Participle, and which therefore denote a perfocted 
 action. Under all circumstances, no matter what the 
 gender or number of the subject is, agreement with the 
 verb is barred by the presence of this affix. The verb 
 agrees with what in our idiom is its object; as, ham ne 
 yeh kittlb parhi thi 'we had read this book.' When, how- 
 ever, such object has the affix ko, in accordance with the 
 reservations of 65., concord is again barred, and the 
 verb becomes independent and absolute ; as, ham ne 
 Qulittdn ko parhd thd l we had read the Gulistan.' 
 
 The first of the above examples illustrates the general 
 usage ; the second is a particular variation. 
 
 81 1 In the case of two verbs, viz., bolnd 'to epeak,' 
 and bhulnd ' to forget,' the subject is not marked by the 
 sign of the Agent, because the meaning of the first verb 
 is really ' utterance of a sound,' which may or may not be 
 intelligible ; and, as to the second verb, ' forgetting ' is 
 distinctly an intransitive idea, for there is nothing to pass 
 on. The verb samajhnd ' to understand ' is both transi- 
 tive and intransitive, according to the context; and by 
 some authors sochnd ' to think ' is viewed in the same 
 way. 
 
 82 The six tense-forms which are derived from the 
 Perfect Participle are: (1) the Past Absolute; (2) the 
 Past Proximate; (3) the Past Remote; (4) the Past 
 Presumptive ; (5) the Past Dubious ; (6) the Past Con- 
 ditional Remote. See App. B. The last two will be 
 illustrated under the head of Subordinate Clauses in 
 Part II. 
 
 33 1 Rules for the formation of the Perfect Parti- 
 ciple : (1) When the base of a verb ends in a consonant,
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 49 
 
 the Past Participle is formed by adding d. There are 
 two exceptions, viz., kiyd (karnd) and mtia (marna), in- 
 stead of hard and mard, though these latter forms occur. 
 (2) When the base ends in \ or ^ the same augment is 
 used, but y euphonic is interposed ; and Tiamza replaces y 
 when the participle is in the construct state, or is plural 
 or feminine ; e.g. khdyd, lihae, Ichai,, Tcha'in. Gayd from 
 jdnd and hud from hond are exceptional. (3) When the 
 base ends in ,.5 (e or t), the insertion of y between the 
 base and the augment is unnecessary, because the long 
 vowels e and i are equivalent to iy ; consequently, lend 
 has for its Past Participle liyd and lie, and in the femi- 
 nine, It and tin (contracted) ; and in the same way pind 
 has piyd, p?e, pi, pin. 
 
 Translate into English : 
 
 l (5) 
 
 J (6) U/ 
 
 (7) lJ U 
 
 (8)
 
 50 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 J ^ (13) ^ 
 
 85. 
 
 (1) Translate ' I was forced to take,' etc. The Arabic verbal 
 means one who is under pressure or force, jabr. See App. A, Form I. 
 
 (2) Ap Ice iqbAl se ' by your good fortune ' is the ordinary reply to 
 a complimentary remark. For iqbAl see App. A, Form IV. 
 
 (3) The verb is in agreement with the collective term. See 
 
 17.2 
 
 (4) NAlish karnA (par) is the technical term for ' putting into 
 court, 1 or ' prosecuting.' 
 
 (5) ChartA bhar zamtn se ' (starting) from a hide of land,' which 
 means in India, as much as a pair of bullocks can irrigate in a day. 
 See 73. 3 ' or th force of kar-lenA. 
 
 (6) The object is here particularised in answer to a question ; 
 hence it stands first with ko. The full form of mol-lenA ' to purchase ' 
 is rarely used. A be-chobA is a tent without a centre-pole. The 
 name of the town here mentioned is one which it is difficult to 
 transliterate. Pedantically written it should be Fathgarh, but this 
 would convey no notion of the pronunciation to an ordinary reader. 
 A former generation wrote it ' Futtyghur ' ; and perhaps the most 
 intelligible compromise is ' Fatehgarh.' 
 
 (7) Rah-numA*t, shortened from rah-numA^t ' road-showing.' 
 Ta'tnAt karnA 'to appoint' or 'tell off for duty' (64-. ) Tn 
 vowel sabar before ain sounds almost as A. Observe ^ not 
 
 ns it is often printed. 83.3- 
 
 (8) From Galib. The use of the gerund as an agent is an illustra- 
 tion of its flexibility (48.)* T e meaning of the sentence corre- 
 sponds with that of 5|. 5. 
 
 (9) Galib again. LVdd men likhA hai ' has translated into Urdu '; 
 vlatnA ' to turn ' is another expression; tarjuma karnA is, perhaps, 
 the commonest. The BostAn-Khaynl is a voluminous Persian 
 romance, and the translation spoken of is well written.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 51 
 
 (10) Bh&t bahinon ' brother and sister ' a compound in the 
 Rational Plural. 
 
 (11) Translate ' What led you to, etc ? ' 
 
 (12) Again note the force of the compound kar-ltn. For musta'&r 
 see App. A, Form X. 
 
 (13) ' Your letter to the address of B. K. C.' The proper name 
 and the pronoun (dnfe) change places in the English version. 
 
 (14) Ap ke intix&r men ' in expectation of your coming,' which is 
 what we call the ' Objective Genitive.' For multawi see App. A, 
 Form VIII. 
 
 (15) The idea of the verb is the ' taking up a thing, and not 
 putting it down till it is done with.' Translate ' He left nothing 
 unsaid.' 
 
 Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) I got myself laughed at to no purpose. (2) My 
 companions made this compact among themselves. (3) A 
 Baniya of the name of Earn Lai has caused a false com- 
 plaint to be laid against me. (4) I bought two country- 
 bred mares at Hardwar for my own use. (5) You have 
 written about many subjects in your report. (6) My 
 mother-in-law gave me no share at all in the house-keep- 
 ing. (7) What made you let the gentleman go ? (8) 
 You undertook a very risky business. (9) E found it 
 hard to make both ends meet on twenty rupees a month. 
 (10) Old age has made me useless. (11) The sick man 
 asked after the whole family one by one. (12) Why 
 did you omit this particular item in the account ? (13) 
 The agents collected corn, grass, straw, and everything 
 for the regiment. (14) He shot four tigers in quick 
 succession. (15) You have treated me with great con- 
 sideration in this matter. 
 
 4 *
 
 52 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 S7* Directions. 
 
 (1) 'To get oneself laughed at,' apnt hanst karana. 
 
 (2) The phrase used in 79. " ' 8 equally applicable here. 
 
 (3) Bee 33. i also 84. 4- 
 
 (4) ' For my own use (or riding),' apnt, or kh&d apnt, or nij kt 
 gowart ke li'e. Deaf is generally 'country-bred,' as opposed to 
 wildyati ' foreign,' which describes English horses and ' VValers." 
 
 (5) Omit the word 'about,' and translate 'subjects' by the 
 Arabic masculine plural of matlab, viz., mat&lib. 
 
 (6) The Hindustani idiom has ' entrance ' (dakhl) instead of 
 share' (hissa). 
 
 (7) See 8 4. 'it 
 
 (8) ' A risky business,' jokhim or jokhon. Use the Past Remote. 
 
 (9) This idiom cannot be literally translated. Turn ' With diffi- 
 culty on twenty rupees I made sufficiency.' 
 
 (10) ' Useless * is here nikamma ' do-nothing.' 
 
 (11) ' One by one,' ek ek karke, that is, ' specifying each in turn.' 
 Omit the- word ' after,' as in (5) above. 
 
 (12) ' This (particular) item ' is raqam ko, the position and con- 
 struction both being particular. ' To omit ' is here qalam-andAs 
 karn'i. ' to throw aside the reed,' as opposed to qalam-band. 
 
 (13) For the form of this sentence see 84. 3- 
 
 (14) 'In quick succession,' tipar tale, lit. 'over andQhulcr,' 'one 
 on the top of the other.' ' To shoot,' bandtiq mdrna, in which the se 
 is elided. 
 
 (15) ' To treat with consideration,' qadr-d&nt farmdna.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 53 
 
 EXERCISE XII. 
 THE VERB dend IN COMBINATION WITH CAUSAL VERBALS 
 
 IN I, ETC. 
 Forms of the Imperative. The Verbal ch&hfe. 
 
 3Si The verb dend, in combination with causal verbals 
 in i, has the intransitive sense of 'admit of,' as dikhai 
 dend, ' to admit of being shown,' that is, ' to be visible.' 
 Hence the subject cannot be constructed with ne. This 
 appears very clearly in the following example from the 
 Prem Sdgar : Kristin dp hi bandhai diye ' Krishn let him- 
 self be bound.' 
 
 The same intransitive idea attaches to the compounds 
 suth-demi ' to accompany,' lit. ' to give one's company to,' 
 and chal-dend ' to move on,' ' start off,' etc. 
 
 Ho-lend ' to accompany ' is another example of an in- 
 transitive compound, of which the second member is 
 transitive. 
 
 Compare the remarks made in 74. 75. 
 
 39 1 In addition to the regular form of the Impera- 
 tive, which demands immediate action, Hindi provides 
 the termination iyo for an action which may be deferred ; 
 also iye and iyegd for the intimation of a request or 
 suggestion. In these Latter Hamza replaces the letter ye 
 in Hindustani when the base of the verb ends in a conso- 
 nant, as ^^ chali'e ' pray come.' When the base ends 
 in \ and j hamza separates the base and the termination, 
 as ^^ Id'iye ' please bring.' Lastly, when the base ends
 
 54 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 in t or e, the letter jim is inserted between base and ter- 
 mination, as <= %^ ///jV please take.' 
 
 The precative of hond is hnjfe, from an older base. 
 The use of these forms in subordinate clauses will be 
 considered in Part II. 
 
 i The verbal chdhfe is in all probability a survival 
 of the Prakrit passive in ijja, so that the true meaning is 
 ' desired ' or ' to be desired,' as an obligation or duty, 
 which is the sense of the verbal in Hindustani.* Thus 
 the phrase yiln hi chdhie means ' that 's as it should be,' 
 etc.; tumko koshish karni chdhie thi 'you ought to have 
 tried,' in which chdhCe thi agrees in gender and number 
 with the gerund. 
 
 The use of this verbal as the first member of a com- 
 pound sentence will be noticed in Part II. 
 
 , Translate into English : 
 
 (4; 
 
 y ^ (5) liJ 
 (7) ^ ^J ^ Jltf* Xol *** #*) (6) 
 
 .. 
 
 (8) 
 c ^ 
 
 (11) ^y ; 1^ V T (10) 
 
 * See Kellogg, 610, who quotes sardhiye ' it is praised,' from the 
 Bnmuvan.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 55 
 
 >--. ^ ^^^J (12) 
 / V T (13) ,-A* 
 
 Ua& ^ly^ (14) 
 
 (15) 
 
 92. 
 
 (1) Chor-jahdz ' a pirate-ship.' Compare chor-dan0dza (5) 'a 
 secret door ' or ' postern.' Synonyms for dikhd"i dend are nazai* 
 
 or nazar parnd, the latter of which conveys the sense of a 
 sadden or unexpected appearance. 
 
 (2) Aicdz, the sound of voices of men or animals ; dhat, the sound 
 of steps. For rnutlaq (adverb) see App. A, Form IV. 
 
 (3) Chhtitnd ' being loose ' is the simple verb of which chhornd 
 1 Betting loose ' is the first causal, by change of t to the cognate r 
 (both cerebrals), and modification of the long vowel of the base- 
 The second causal is chhur&nA ' causing to set loose,' ' liberating.' 
 
 (4) Ap hi dp ' of his own accord ' ; merd, sdth ' companionship 
 with me ' (objective genitive). Herd, s&th dend- is therefore much 
 the same thing as mere sdth dnd. 
 
 (6) Asldn, an Arabic accusative, used adverbially in the sense of 
 ' entirely,' ' radically.' Mutlaq (1) might have been equally mutlaqdn. 
 
 (7) Merd n&m leke ' in my name,' like the phrase used at 68. 2 - 
 Mdng-ldnd ' to ask for and bring.' 
 
 (8) Musatvwada ' draft of letter,' etc., conveniently pronounced 
 musauda. This verbal, like muqaddama (84. 1 4) belongs to 
 App. A, Form II. In these cases the participle is nominal ized by 
 the addition of ah. 
 
 (9) The inferior speaks of his house as a ' poor ' house in the 
 usual self-abasing style ; in tashrif farmd^iye, tashrtf means ' honour- 
 ing by a visit ' ; and the sentence may be translated, ' Please, your 
 excellency, do me the honour of entering my humble abode.' 
 Similarly, tashrtf Idnd means ' to come,' tashrif le-jdnd, ' to go ' in 
 native etiquette. 
 
 (11) ' Then, where will you be-pleased-to-go ? ' the position of 
 the interrogative implying there is nowhere to go. 
 
 (12) Note here the form of the Persian iz&fat after a word end-
 
 56 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 ing in d. Pakarnt 'to grasp,' where we nse the milder expression 
 4 take.' For mubtal-l see App. A, Form VJI1. 
 
 (13) Darb&rt kapre, to a native, is ' full-dress.' 
 
 (14) See the example given in 9 . 
 
 (15) Ba-har-hdl, lit. ' under all circumstances ' or 4 in every way.' 
 In the English idiom the negative is joined to the adverbial phrase. 
 Compare with this the idiom of 68. ' ' 
 
 93 Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) The sails of a ship were visible ten miles off. 
 (2) He took leave and departed. (3) He accompanied us 
 half-way. (4) Please wire me information of his approach. 
 (5) He ought to have taken warning from his brother's 
 punishment. (6) Their language was quite unintelligible 
 to me. (7) Explain to me the author's meaning. (8) Be 
 good enough to [write down your instructions in detail. 
 (9) Kindly honour me with a visit to-morrow or the next 
 day. (10) The guns were audible at a distance of forty 
 Jeos. (11) The advance-guard of the enemy came in 
 sight across the Satlej. (12) Pray be not out-of-heart. 
 
 (13) In no case ought you to treat the people harshly. 
 
 (14) Pray make no ceremony about entering the court- 
 yard of my house. (15) There should be no parda 
 between relations. 
 
 i Directions. 
 
 (1) Turn this : ' At a distance (ffaila) of ten miles,' etc. 
 
 (2) Use the Past Conjunctive Participle for first verb, and fee 
 
 44. i. 
 
 ( 3 ) 91.4- ' Half- way,' in the idiom of Hindustani, is 'up to 
 half distance.' 
 
 (4) Turn ' By means of wire send me,' etc. ' Approach,' tashrtf- 
 dwarf, which is the Persian original of the phrase tcahrtfl&nd, 
 
 92.9-
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 57 
 
 (5) On the model of 91. I2 with due regard to tense. 
 
 (6) Use the idiom explained in 98. 
 
 (7) ' Meaning ' has several representatives in Hindustani according 
 to the context, such as ma'nt, matlab, ir&da, manshd. of which the 
 last is best here. ' To explain ' or ' expound,' tathrth-karn&. 
 
 (8) Prefix the phrase mehrbdnt karke. ' To write down,' tahrtr 
 farmdnA. 
 
 (9) Use the verb of 9 1 . 9- Omit the conjunction ' or.' 
 
 (10) See 9J.2; but say ' voice of guns." 
 
 (11) The ' vanguard ' of an army is pegh-lashkar ; the ' rear-guard," 
 pas-lashkar. ' Across the Satlej," Satlaj p&r. For the verb use 
 naznr-parnA. 
 
 (13) See 9|. 15. ' To treat harshly,' ziy&datt karnd (par). 
 
 (14) Turn ' Honour me by entering without ceremony,' etc. 
 
 (15) Turn this interrogatively : ' What parda is wanted (ch&hfe) 
 among relations ? ' 
 
 EXERCISE XIII. 
 
 USAGE AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE PARTICIPLES. 
 (1) Substantival. 
 
 M The Participles, to use the Latin term, play an 
 important part in idiomatic Hindustani ; and familiarity 
 with their usage and construction is a test of scholarship. 
 Native grammarians treat them as verbal nouns, a term 
 which includes adjectives, and have adopted the Arabic 
 terms ism-fd'il (nomen agentis), and ism-maf'ul (nomen 
 patientis) for the Imperfect and Perfect Participles re- 
 spectively. As compared with other nouns, they convey 
 the idea of status, more or less lasting and continuous ; 
 and this is heightened by the addition of the auxiliary 
 hud. See 5. "
 
 58 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 There is no difference in the Participles in the matter 
 of construction, and they will be treated together in the 
 following sections in the order of usage, as, (1) Sub- 
 stantival ; (2) Adjectival ; (3) Adverbial. 
 
 . As verbal nouns, the Participles may stand alone 
 in a concrete or abstract sense, but are oftenest used in 
 the construct form before an affix or postposition ; as, 
 jdgte men ' in a waking state ' or ' while awake ' ; tunte Tee 
 adth 'concurrently with hearing' or 'immediately on 
 hearing ' ; kahe se ' by order,' etc. 
 
 The Perfect Participle, in combination with the pre- 
 positions 6m, be, bagair, etc., all of which mean ' without* 
 privative, supplies a specially useful idiom in such forms 
 as be mere de hue ' without my having come ' ; be khde 
 ' without having eaten,' etc. 
 
 In all these cases the verbal and the postposition or 
 preposition taken together are adverbial phrases. The 
 strictly adverbial construction, in which the governing 
 particles are suppressed, belongs to the third head. 
 See Exercise XV. 
 
 Translate into English : 
 
 (2) V ^ V ^> (1) 
 
 (4) &.*> 
 
 (7) \ lil^J ^ IC.^1 ^JU ^ ^ (6) 
 J>- (8) 1131
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 59 
 
 > (12) 
 
 98, 
 
 (1^ A proverbial expression ' What will not a dying man do ? ' 
 that is, a man will do anything when driven to extremities. 
 
 (2) Also proverbial ; descriptive of a coward. 
 
 (3) R&h-chaltd, exactly our ' way-farer.' Sir hand, for sir par 
 hond ' to pester,' ' sit upon,' etc. As regards the gentry spoken of, 
 it is quite unnecessary to translate the appellatives in detail. 
 ' Religions mendicants ' will answer the purpose. 
 
 (4) Literally, ' Slave, having been called of you, is in attendance,' 
 that is, ' I am present at your summons.' 
 
 (5) J&gte men ' as I lay awake.' Jinn, the ' Genius ' of the Alf 
 Laila. 
 
 (6) Sunte ke s&th ' immediately on hearing (of it).' 
 
 (7) Proverbial. Kahe se ' by order.' 
 
 (8) Sote se ' from a state of sleeping ' or ' sleep.' The Past Con- 
 junctive Participle agrees with the subject of discourse (66.)- For 
 the idiom of ke here see 52. I 5- 
 
 (9) Samjhde se, ' by having been made to understand,' but the 
 sentence cannot be translated literally. For r&zt see App. A, 
 Form I. 
 
 (10) Jaw&n h-de par, lit. ' on having grown up,' that is, ' when he 
 is grown up.' Sdrat is ' personal appearance, 1 generally in the 
 sense of ' good looks." 
 
 (11) Eagair dekhe hti,e martz ke ' without a sight of the 
 patient.' 
 
 (12) Be tipar gate ' without having ascended it.' 
 
 Translate into Hindustani : 
 (1) My fingers are not under my control on account of 
 their trembling. (2) Grief at my departure is still felt
 
 60 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 by them. (3) Give the cartmen the usual return-hire. 
 (4) His proficiency will be first-rate when he is grown 
 up. (5) How can you know the drift of the petition 
 without reading it? (6) He departed without taking 
 leave. (7) On my checking the accounts the treasurer's 
 dishonesty was exposed. (8) Who can tell the breadth 
 of the Ganges without crossing it ? (9) Mere disgust 
 will be caused by such familiarity. (10) He will agree 
 to take service if he is made to understand its advan- 
 tages. (11) We have come at your summons only. (12) I 
 shall have to give the broker his commission. 
 
 1OO Directions. 
 
 (1) ' Under my control,' kuhe men. Omit the pronoun ' their ' also. 
 
 (2) ' Grief at my departure,' mere ya'e id qalaq. ' To be felt,' 
 dil men lagnA. 
 
 (3) ' Keturn-hire,' phirta. 
 
 (4) ' When he is grown up ' see 97. IO - Instead of the word for 
 'proficiency' used at 44. 8, which means rather ' preparedness,' 
 choose here maharat ' skill ' or ' expertness.' 
 
 (5) On the model of 97. n. 
 
 (6) For the verb see 8 8 . 
 
 (7) Use the form given in 97. ^ and express the 'my' by 
 mujhko placed after the adverbial phrase. ' To check accounts,' 
 hit&b sentna. ' To be exposed,' khulnd. The student will have 
 noticed by this time the constant use of neuter verbs in Hindustani 
 where the Passive Voice is the English mode. 
 
 (8) ' Without crossing it," be j>dr fcu'e. 
 
 (9) ' By such familiarity,' t tarah munh-lag&e se. The idea of 
 the term here used is something like that of our ' cheek by jowl.' 
 
 (10) Use the phrase given in 97. 9 omitting in translation ' its 
 advantages.' ' To agree to take,' qabUl kar-lend. 
 
 (11) As in 97. 4. 
 
 (12) For the form of verb see 51. 2 - 'Commission,' dhartil, 
 which lit. means ' putting something down.'
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 61 
 
 EXERCISE XIV. 
 
 USAGE AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE PARTICIPLES. 
 (2) Adjectival. 
 
 lOli (1) -A- 8 attributive adjectives the Participles 
 agree with the nouns they qualify, whether subject or 
 object ; and in this usage the idioms of English and 
 Hindustani are very similar, but in the case of the Imper- 
 fect Participle the English adjectival use of such transi- 
 tives as ' interesting,' ' amusing,' etc., cannot be imitated 
 in Hindustani. Recourse is had to Persian or Arabic 
 verbals, or to the adjectival use of nouns with izdfat, as 
 explained in 24-. Thus, 'an interesting book' may be 
 translated dilchasp Jdtdb ' a heart-clinging book,' or maza 
 k! kitdb a ' book of flavour.' 
 
 (2) As predicative adjectives also the Participles may 
 agree with the nouns to which they refer ; as, woh hanstd 
 hudphirtd Jiai ' he goes about laughing'; but when the 
 Participle thus used has an adverbial sense, as in the 
 example given, where 'laughing ' might be read 'laugh- 
 ingly,' Hindustani, like English, has an alternative method 
 of construction. This will be explained in the next 
 Exercise. 
 
 lO2i Translate into English : 
 (2) ^^ ^b ^ ^ bU (1) 
 
 (5) #a ^i^ j~* ^^ (4)
 
 62 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 tfj) (10) ,3* r K K 
 
 ^ cSAJj 4 (11) 
 
 1O3. Notes. 
 
 (1) Ph&td ' broken,' that is, ' boiling.' Note the difference of 
 idiom in the use of the word ' fill.' In (6), on the other hand, the 
 idioms of the two languages correspond. 
 
 (2) Ankhon (kt) dekht bAt 'an eye-witnessed affair,' in other 
 words, ' the report of an eye-witness.' Sab se barhlcar, an adverbial 
 use of the Past Conjunctive Participle, ' more than all,' equivalent 
 to ztydda. 
 
 (3) Here the adjective bard is used substantively in the sense of 
 ' elder.' Khidmat men, lit. ' in the service of,' is a conventional 
 phrase for ' to.' Dabi tab&n se ' with depressed tongue,' that is, 
 * quietly ' or ' gently ' or ' with bated breath.' 
 
 (4) Chaltt kasr means ' a progressive fraction,' that is, ' a re- 
 curring decimal. Ta'rtf ' definition,' our word ' tariff.' For pronun- 
 ciation of the a see 85.7- 
 
 (5) DCe, the Hindustani form of diye. See 83. 3- Formustaqtm 
 see App. A, Form X. 
 
 (6) Translate rakht hu't ' standing,' so as to avoid the ambiguity 
 of ' placed ' in the English sentence. 
 
 (7) Qol-kamarA, ' company-room,' generally used for our term 
 'drawing-room.' BichhA (Wd) hai, not a Past Tense of the intransi- 
 tive, though in many cases it is very difficult to distinguish between 
 the usages. 
 
 (8) A proverbial expression ' Have yon got henna on your feet 
 (that you are afraid of moving) ? '
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 63 
 
 (9) Illustrative of 1 1 . Pitt&-m&rt kd k&m 'a spleen-striking 
 job,' which may be translated ' irritating (or vexatious or tiresome) 
 work.' Kh&skar ' especially,' not a Past Conjunctive Participle, 
 bat an adjective with designative particle kar attached. 
 
 (10) KothA, the flat roof of Oriental houses. 
 
 (12) Ae din k&jhagrA ' quarrelling every day that comes,' that is, 
 'daily quarrelling.' See 37. 6. 
 
 i Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) Just silence that barking dog. (2) I received this 
 thriving business by inheritance from my forefathers. 
 (3) He presented me to-day with a talking-bird in a 
 cage. (4) All men eat the bread given by God. (5) The 
 cloth is laid. (6) In illustration of this, I remember a 
 very amusing anecdote. (7) These made-up speeches are 
 disagreeable to me. (8) Fill the bucket with boiling 
 porridge. (9) The coward in alarm retraced his steps. 
 (10) A large number of interesting books are in the 
 library. (11) The army in retreat reached the frontier 
 with much difficulty. (12) Proceeding through the 
 market he receives and returns the salutations of the 
 people. 
 
 lO5i Directions. 
 
 (2) Turn ' In inheritance from forefathers to me,' etc. ' A 
 thriving business,' chaltA kdrkh&na. 
 
 (3) 'In a cage' must be expanded in Hindustani to 'placed or 
 fixed in a cage,' pinjre men lagt hUt. 
 
 (4) ' By ' must bo translated here by the sign of iz&fat, as in 
 
 97. 4 
 
 (5) As in 1 02 7. 
 
 (6) For the verb see 44. 3- 
 
 (7) ' Made-up speeches,' band't hdtn b&ten. See also 44. l ~-
 
 64 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (8) For ' boiling ' use here khault-l JU4. 
 
 (9) ' In alarm,' khauf khlkar, i.e. ' having absorbed fear.' Com- 
 P 81 " 71.7- To ' retrace steps ' is ulte pd'on (M) phirnA. 
 
 (10) See |0|. 
 
 (11) 'In retreat,' bh&gtt Wf, in agreement with fauj. 'With 
 much difficulty,' bart mnshkil se, bart bart mushkilon se, hat&r 
 mufhkilon se. 
 
 (12) 'Proceeding through the market,' bdsdr hotA hff&. See 
 79. M- Omit ' and returns,' because the word ind includes this. 
 Ue who does not return a galAm is supposed not to receive it. 
 
 EXERCISE XV. 
 
 USAOE AND CONSTEUCTION OF THE PARTICIPLES. 
 (3) Adverbial. 
 
 The Adverbial construction is that in which 
 the Participle is in the construct form with postpositional 
 affix men suppressed. Thus, to recur to the example 
 given in 96, instead of jdgte men * in a waking state,' we 
 might have jdgte hue or jdgte jdgte 'while awake,' the 
 latter form having sometimes an intensive and sometimes 
 a continuative sense.* 
 
 Similarly, an alternative phrase for sunte ke snth is 
 sunte hi men, or, adverbially, sunte hi ' immediately on 
 hearing ' a form of expression so frequently employed 
 that Platts makes it an integral part of his verb scheme. 
 
 Precisely in the same manner, the predicative Parti- 
 ciple hansld hud, in the example given in 101. (2), may be 
 
 * Examples of Participial adverbs in English are ' lovingly,' 
 'devotedly,' etc., and in Latin, libenter, concise, etc.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 65 
 
 adverbially constructed as Jianste hue ' laughingly,' or 
 hanste hanste ' continuously laughing.' 
 
 lO7i (1) When the subject of a transitive verb 
 takes the sign of the agent ne, concord with a predicating 
 Participle is disallowed, and the Participle must be 
 adverbially constructed. In this case the Participle 
 generally stands before the agent with ne. As, chalte hue 
 Begam ne mujhse kahd,'&8 she was going, the Begam 
 said to me.' 
 
 (2) Similarly, when the object of a transitive verb 
 takes ko, concord with a predicating Participle is barred, 
 and the Participle is either constructed adverbially, or 
 absolutely, without inflection, as, main ne iisko rote (or 
 rota) pdyd ' I found hiir or her weeping.' Main ne ilsko 
 baithe Me (or baithd hud) dekhd 'I saw him or her 
 seated.' 
 
 In these examples, and generally, the absolute con- 
 struction is preferable, as being unambiguous. 
 
 lO8i When the predicating Participle has an object 
 of its own, the adverbial construction is indispensable. 
 For example, (1) main takrdr Tcarte hue (or karte karte) 
 thak-gayd ' I was tired with wrangling.' 
 
 Alternative, but not equally exact, renderings of the 
 English expression would be, main takrar karne se thak- 
 gayd, or main takrdr kar-karke thak-gayd. 
 
 (2) WohbahanaWehnethd 1 he was pretending,' all along, 
 not at some particular time, which would be kartd thd. 
 
 1O9. Translate into English : 
 
 (1)
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 HO. 
 
 (1) Dekhte hi ' as soon as he saw it.' Daxt-khatt is here used as 
 a plural. 
 
 (2) Hole hote ' gradually.' For the verb see 51. '3- 
 
 (3) Translate ' He or she passed the whole day (in) weeping.' 
 
 (4) Mere rahte (men) ' while I am here.' 
 
 (5) See 87. ' Baithe-bith&e (men), lit. 'seated and making 
 others sit,' for an explanation of which see Taubat, VII. 73. The 
 general sense of the phrase is ' doing nothing.' The particular 
 shade of meaning must be determined from the context. Trans- 
 late here, ' without an effort to avoid it.' 
 
 (6) Khatt likhte likhte ' as he was writing his letters.' Hai-.u 
 karna, 'to be seized with cholera.' For mo'allim see App. A, 
 Form II. 
 
 (7) O&fil sold 'sound asleep.' Compare the English phrase 
 ' sleep of forgetfulness." Be-khabar is synonymous with g&fil in this 
 connection. 
 
 (8) Mekh se b&ndhA MA ' tethered to a peg,' in our idiom. 
 
 (9) This sentence (from Naztr Ahmed) illustrates both the 
 adjectival and adverbial usage. Bhdgte htie or bhAgtA /i4'd, (07. 2 > 
 ' scudding.' 
 
 (10) ChirAg Ife We ' lamp in hand ' or ' with a lamp.' Lfe h&e
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 67 
 
 even corresponds with our ' with ' in such a phrase as ' a man with 
 a lion-like face,' sher k& sd munh It a hlPe. Comp. 68. 2 - 
 
 (11) From the Taubat. KTidnd is understood after kd. Trans- 
 late ' the girl has eaten nothing since this time yesterday,' for a 
 literal version is out of the question. 
 
 (12) This short sentence illustrates three participial forms. 
 Dabe p&on (se) ' with subdued or gentle tread,' or, as we put it, ' on 
 tiptoe.' See |Q2. 3- 
 
 1 \ j[ , Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) It is a vexation at my age to be learning the 
 alphabet. (2) Small and great have eaten nothing since 
 this time yesterday. (3) Who is that person with the 
 lion-like countenance ? (4) I found only this shop open 
 in the market-place. (5) As she was going away the 
 Begam offered me a gold inohur. (6) The Afghans con- 
 quered the Panjab by degrees. (7) Unseen by others 
 the women were exposing their heads from inside the 
 zenana. (8) The whole of them were left gazing at each 
 other's faces. (9) A Maulavi, with prayer-mat spread, 
 was engaged in his devotions inside the mosque. (10) I 
 had made up my mind that this valley was my tomb. 
 
 (11) As soon as he heard the rumour, he was dismayed. 
 
 (12) While I am here, do not speak of bribery even by 
 mistake. 
 
 H2i Directions. 
 
 (1) See 68. 4- 'To be learning the alphabet,' alif-be parhte 
 h&e. ' . 
 
 (2) On the model of (09. " The adverbial construction of 
 the Participle is independent of gender and number. 
 
 (3) See ||0. 10. 
 
 (4) ' Open,' khiUA h&&. 
 
 (5) ' As she was going away,' chalte htie. ' Offered ' may be here 
 
 5 *
 
 68 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 idiomatically translated den login 'began to jrive,' the verb 
 being PI. Fern. 
 
 (6) See |09. 2- 
 
 (7) ' Unseen by others,' Ankh bachd, lit. ' having escaped the eye.' 
 Use the idiom of |Q8. ( 2 )> sir nikAle thtn, for the idea is that the 
 women were continuously peeping out at some unusual sight. 
 
 (8) Use the idiom described at 25 . f r the subject, and also for 
 the participial phrase ' gazing,' dekhte ke dekhte. 
 
 (9) ' With prayer-mat spread,' jAe namAz [bichhAe. The ' devo- 
 tions ' of a Moslem are known as sijda, and masjid is the ' place of 
 tijda.' See App. A, Rem. 5 . (3)- 
 
 (10) ' I had made up my mind,' tamjht hfo tha, because descrip* 
 tive of the state of despair the speaker felt at the time. Alf Laila. 
 
 (11) Use the adverbial form of |Q9. ' 
 
 (12) See 109. 4- ' Ev n *>7 mistake,' bh&lkar bht. 
 
 EXERCISE XVI. 
 [JSAOE AND CONSTRUCTION or THE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Supplementary. 
 
 A 
 
 1 13i This exercise is reserved for illustration of the 
 usage of the Participles in connection with time and its 
 measurement. 
 
 The old method of dividing day and night into eight 
 pahar and again the pahar into eight ghari is still cur- 
 rent, especially in the country districts and in native 
 States.* Rude water-clocks (jal-yanfni) still mark the 
 pahar, which is sounded (bajnt'i) ly the jjahni ' watch - 
 
 * The expression Ath-pahar or Athon pahar ' the whole 
 watches,' often occurs in the sense of ' day and night,' ' the twenty- 
 four hours,' etc. Chausath ghart is used in tin- >HIIIC way. Ath- 
 pahrf in a watchman employed day and night.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 69 
 
 man,' on a gong (ghantd). Modern Hindustani appro- 
 priates the word ghari for a ' watch ' or ' clock,' and 
 ghantd for ' hour,' according to the English reckoning* 
 and bajd or baje for ' o'clock.' Thus, do pahar ' noon,' 
 47. 3, becomes bdrah ghante baje or bdrah baje 'twelve 
 o'clock ' ; and the quarters are sawd bdrah, sdrhe bdrah, 
 and paune ek ('quarter less than one'), respectively. 
 Derh bajd is ' half-past one.' The word ' minute ' &a^ is 
 used, and occurs first, in literature, in the Urdu version 
 of the Arabian Nights (1847), Tcai minit Ice ba'd ' after 
 several minutes.' 
 
 1 1 4i Translate into English : 
 
 <Jf (1) 
 * <& ^ (2) <Jj 
 
 ^ (3) 
 
 a? d l^ (4) 
 
 ( 10 ) 
 
 (11) 
 
 (12) liT 4 
 
 /J ^ ^s a i$ (14) 
 ^^ (15)
 
 70 ETEBCI8E8 IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 115. Notts. 
 
 (1) Din charhna ' ascending day,' that is, ante meridiem time 
 from sunrise : the repetition of the Participle marking the gradual 
 progress of time, ' the coarse of the morning.' Do tin ghart is 
 ' about an hour ' of our time ; and, as literal translation is out of 
 the question in idiomatic sentences of this kind, we may render 
 the whole phrase ' about an hour after sunrise.' 
 
 (2) Similarly, din dubnd or din dhalnd is ' declining day,' that 
 is pott meridiem time till sunset. ' The Rani's pankha ' is the local 
 name of a breeze which always springs up towards evening in a 
 gorge near Ranibagh, where the ' KAth-godown ' dak-bungalow 
 used to stand, on the road from Bareilly to Naint T&l. 
 
 (3) Note the variation in the Participle as compared with (1) : 
 and translate ' the forenoon was well advanced when he awoke.' 
 By our reckoning the phrase would mean ' between nine and a 
 quarter to ten.' 
 
 (4) A very useful and common mode of expressing lapse of time. 
 The meaning is obvious. 
 
 (5) ' Why have you come so late at night ? ' The construction is 
 itnt r&t (ke) ga'e (se). 
 
 (6) Similarly, kurhh r&t (ke) rahe (se) ' while it was yet night.' 
 
 (7) Mutatis mutandis, translate as in (6). 
 
 (8) This may be freely translated, ' noon passed as he lay on and 
 on he did not even turn in his sleep.' Tak is adverbially used in 
 the sense of ' so much as,' or ' even.' Kancat means ' lying on one 
 side,' and karwat badalnt is ' changing to the other side.' 
 
 (9) Top dagt is the morning ' gun-fire ' in Indian cantonments. 
 O&rt joto ' put the horses to (the carriage), 1 literally, ' yoke the 
 carriage.' 
 
 (10) Fajar hote M ' as soon as the day breaks.' Comp. |Q9. ' 
 Bart fa jar, like bahut savere (6), means ' very early.' 
 
 (11) Marie dam tak 'up to the time of his death.' For ' after 
 death,' so exact are these usages, the Perfect Participle would be 
 necessary, as mare pichhe uskt sharArat khuH ' his wickedness was 
 exposed after his death.' 
 
 (12) From Nazir Ahmed's graphic description of the cholera in 
 the Taubat. 
 
 (13) Kai baje hain ' what o'clock is it ? ' lit. ' bow many hours 
 have sounded ? ' The answer follows.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 71 
 
 (14) The Past Conjunctive Participle is here adverbial, and, if 
 translated at all, corresponds to our ' counting.' 
 
 (15) Tere ghart ghart kt bald ddr rahe ' for thee may the evil of every 
 ghart be remote,' that is, ' May you be hourly blessed ' a common 
 benediction. Tere, not tujhe, on the principle explained in 52. '5- 
 This sentence is peculiarly interesting as the first bit of Hindustani 
 recorded by an Englishman, and that so far back as the reign of 
 Jehangir, in whose son's time Urdft is said to have first taken 
 shape as a vernacular. Terry writes the sentence tere gree gree kee 
 lultti doore, as it sounded to him. See Voyage to India, p. 216. He 
 records two other words only, viz., ca-ca-ta (sic), by which he 
 meant ky& kahtd 'what does he say ? ' This interesting work has 
 long been out of print. 
 
 1 lf>i Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) At what o'clock will the train leave ? (2) It is 
 some twenty days yet to the examination. (3) It must 
 be a month since he went on tour. (4) Why do you 
 leave off work so early ? (5) Why did you get up so 
 late ? (6) Office-work goes on from ten till five. (7) Our 
 regiment reached the camping ground -before day- 
 light. (8) Who can have come to see me so late at 
 night ? (9) As the morning advanced an island began 
 to be visible in the distance. (10) As day declined all 
 adverse wind began to blow. (11) Do not strike the 
 hour without my giving you the signal first. (12) The 
 moon rises at eleven to-night. (13) Will you not see 
 him when you start? (14) After having been ad- 
 monished he coolly committed another bit of villainy. 
 (15) I shall not forget your kindness as long as I live. 
 
 1 1 7i Directions. 
 
 (1) Rel stands for ' train ' as well as ' railway.' The right word 
 here for ' leave ' is chhtitna. See 92. 3- 
 
 (2) Turn thus : ' As yet of the examination some twenty days
 
 72 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 are lying (pare hain).' For the use of the sign of izAfat compare 
 the phrase given at 54. - The .idea of pare hain is that the 
 days are lying unspent as yet. 
 
 (3) As in H4-. 4- The tense of the verb will be Past Presump- 
 tive. 
 
 (4) ' So early,' itnd din rahe . ||4. 7- 
 
 (5) ' So late,' itnd din charhe. 1 1 4. 3. 
 
 (6) See ||4. I 4- ^ ag baje *e lekar pdnch tak. 'Togo on,' in 
 this sense, j'irt hond. 
 
 (7) See ||4. 6- 
 
 (8) See ||4. 5- 'To come to see,' muliqdt ko And. Use the 
 Past Dubious tense. 
 
 (9) See ||4. i. Also 91. 6. 
 
 (10) See ||4. 2 - 'Adverse wind,' ultl hawd, or bdd-i-mukhdlif. 
 
 (11) ' Without my,' etc., be mere ishdra dfe h&e. See 96. 
 
 (12) The rising of the moon may be picturesquely rendered khet 
 karnd, of which the idea is the gradual clearance of the sky and 
 land from the previous darkness. Otherwise the common verb 
 nikalnA suffices. 
 
 (13) ' When you start,' chalte waqt. Milnd is the proper ex- 
 pression for ' see ' here, as in (8) above, where muldqat is equivalent 
 to milnd. 
 
 (14) 'After having been admonished,' tambth hue ptchhe. For 
 coolly ' i;.-e the adverbial expression explained at ||0. 5- 'An- 
 other bit of villainy,' ek aur shardrat. 
 
 (15) ' As long as I live,' jtte jt. 
 
 EXERCISE XVII. 
 
 THE PARTICIPLES IN COMBINATION WITH jihui. 
 
 (I) Progressives. (2) Passives. 
 
 The addition of the tenses of the verbj'una to 
 
 the Imperfect Participle in predicative concord with the 
 subject of a sentence supplies a verbal combination,
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 73 
 
 which is called by some grammarians a Progressive Com- 
 pound verb. Thus, woh Jcahtd gayd ' he went on saying.' 
 
 The verb rahnd may be used in the same way, and is 
 perhaps preferable when the Participle is intransitive, 
 but there is little to choose between them, just as in 
 English, 'to go on sleeping* or 'to remain sleeping' 
 are much the same thing. 
 
 We may notice here the curious combination jdtd rahnd 
 1 to remain going ' till the vanishing point is reached ; 
 hence, ' to vanish.' 
 
 1 1 9 1 Similarly, the addition of the tenses of jdnd to 
 the Perfect Participle of transitive verbs supplies the 
 verbal conjugation known to us as the Passive Voice : as 
 woh mdre jdenge 'they will be struck.' Native gram- 
 marians have borrowed the Arabic term majhul ' un- 
 known ' for this form of the verb, because the agent is 
 not specified, in opposition to ma'ruf ' known,' our Active 
 Voice. 
 
 Except in translations from English, which even in 
 native hands are too apt to follow the English idiom, the 
 use of the Perfect Participle in this construction is com- 
 paratively infrequent in Hindustani, for, in addition to 
 Hindi intransitives of passive signification, the language 
 has been enriched by a large store of Persian and Arabic 
 verbals, which combine with the substantive verb hond in 
 a passive sense. To take an example, ' to be conquered ' 
 is no doubt capable of being rendered jitd jdnd, from 
 jitnd ' to conquer ' ; but hdrnd, shikast khdnd, maglub hond, 
 etc., are best suited to the idiom of the language. 
 
 12Oi Again, though the patient in the passive con- 
 struction poses as the subject of the verb, it is still the
 
 74 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 object of the act ; and in recognition of this the Hindu- 
 stani idiom admits the use of the sign of the object with 
 pronouns and proper names (comp. 65 . ), in which case the 
 passive become impersonal, as, nsko dekhil jdegd ' he shall 
 be looked to.' Hence the use of dekhd jdegd in the 
 general sense of ' the matter shall be seen to/ 
 
 A similarly impersonal usage is observable in negative 
 expressions which convey the idea of impossibility, such 
 as, /fiffflfll * Ifuffi nsihtn j'ff/ff, * fhprg is no fighting against 
 fate.' Compare with this the construction explained in 
 56. 
 
 121. -A. curious but common idiom is the addition of 
 the verbs jdnd and and to the Perfect Participles of in- 
 transitive verbs of motion, in a progressive or completive 
 sense according to the context ; as, sab log chale gae ' all 
 went away ' ; larki dauri dti hai ' the girl comes racing 
 along,' etc. 
 
 122. Translate into English :
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 75 
 
 (10) 
 
 cr- 
 
 (12) ^ UT 
 
 123, 
 
 (1) B&rt bdrt se ' each in turn* ; the repetition is distributive. 
 
 (2) Ta'llm-i-nisw&n ' female education.' Merd, zimma ' my war- 
 rant for it,' or ' I warrant," is parenthetic. 
 
 (3) Pahchtin patu-hAn ' as he recognised them in turn ' ; har ek se 
 depends on gale miltd gay&, ' he went on embracing.' 
 
 (4) He was to begin at one end of the row of oil-skins and in- 
 spect each. From the story of the Forty Thieves. 
 
 (5) Hold gayd ' he grew more and more,' etc. very different 
 from ho-gayd ' became.' 
 
 (6) Ankh kholke ' with eyes wide opened ' in astonishment. 
 
 (7) See ||8. *ubfinem. 
 
 (8) Multavt kiy&j&n& 'the being adjourned,' ' adjournment.' The 
 verbal iltiwA, from the same root, means the same thing. See 84. J 4- 
 
 (9) Mare ga"e ' were killed.' Khet rahe ' were left on the field ' 
 is an alternative expression. 
 
 (10) ' Let the editor of the paper be searched for ' ; talash-karnA 
 being a compound verb. See_ 1 2 . 
 
 (11) Chald did hai ' comes regularly in.' 
 
 (12) Munh andhere, lit. ' when it was too dark to distinguish 
 faces,' that is, before daylight. See the expressions used at ||4. 6. 
 and 79. I2 - DaurA gay& ' ran off." 
 
 124i Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) At the battle of Assaye (Asdi) some fifteen hundred 
 men were left upon the field. (2) Let the murderer of this 
 woman be well searched for. (3) He grows more and 
 more saucy and unmanageable every day. (4) From 
 small beginnings such a habit as this grows stronger and 
 stronger. (5) That shall be seen to when we have done
 
 76 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 with this. (6) The children were disgusted at the 
 postponement of the story. (7) Keep watch upon him 
 as he comes and goes. (8) I could not restrain myself. 
 
 (9) Owing to your folly my character too will be lost. 
 
 (10) One bj one the worthless servants were turned off. 
 
 (11) A kind of numbness creeps over my hands and 
 feet. (12) The wine is oozing from the cask. 
 
 125 Directions. 
 
 (1) For the verb see |23. 9- 
 
 (2) See |22. 10. 
 
 (3) ' Every day,' roz ro, or roz-ba-roz. See |22. 5- 
 
 (4) ' From small beginnings,' thore se shurd' hokar. 
 
 (5) ' When we have done with this,' is se J&rig hokar, impersonal. 
 See |20. 
 
 (6; On the model of 122. 8. 
 
 (7) See |22. 6- 
 
 (8) See (20. f r tne idiom. Mujhse rah& nahtn gay d. 
 
 (9) Torn ' my good name will vanish." |22. 7- 
 
 (10) 'One by one," ek ek karke, impersonal. Comp. 87. " 
 
 (11) 'A kind of numbness,' sansant at. 59. For tne verb see 
 
 122. ". 
 
 (12) 'Is oozing,' m'JWd did hai. 
 
 EXERCISE XVIII. 
 THE PERFECT PARTICIPLE IN COMBINATION WITH karnd 
 
 FORMS A CONTINUATIVE COMPOUND VERB WITH 
 
 chdhna, A DESIDERATIVE. 
 
 Subsidiary Verbal Compounds with jdnd, dend, etc. 
 
 The Perfect Participle as a verbal noun in 
 combination with the tenses of karnd denotes continuance
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 77 
 
 of state or action ; and, since the state or action described 
 by the verbal is by the nature of the case incomplete or 
 unfinished (nd-tamdm) , the compound is constructed in- 
 transitively in those tenses of karnd in which the subject 
 ordinarily takes the sign of the agent, ne. Thus, woh 
 (not iisne) likhd ki f she continued writing.' Likhd ki is, 
 in fact, just as much a Past Imperfect (mdzi-nd-tamdm) 
 as likhti ihi * she was writing ' ; and in this we have 
 another illustration of the principle laid down in 75. 
 that the meaning rules the construction. 
 
 !2Ti Similarly, in combination with the transitive 
 chdhnd 'to wish for,' the Perfect Participle denotes a 
 state or action, which is wished or willed, and therefore 
 possibly imminent; and this compound, which is called 
 a Desiderative, is also, by the nature of the case, intran- 
 sitive. Thus, woh likhd chdhi ' she wished, or was about, 
 to write ' ; not usne likhd chdhd. 
 
 \ 28, The Perfect P.articiple, in the construct state, 
 with object (see I08.)> is occasionally combined with 
 j'/ita or rahnd in an intermittently continuative sense ; as 
 dawd pild*e jd"o 'continue giving the medicine (at the 
 proper intervals),' a different thing from either pildte jdo, 
 or pildyd karo. 
 
 129i Lastly, the verb dend, and sometimes ddlnd 
 (see 73. 3), is used in combination with Perfect Parti- 
 ciples in the construct form, by way of energizing the 
 action denoted by the associated Participle. This quasi- 
 compound is of rare occurrence, and is practically limited 
 to the first person singular of the present tense ; as, 
 main tvjhse kahe detd hun, ' I tell you once for all.'
 
 78 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 1 3d Translate into English : 
 \l\lf ^ ^JLJ; O&J ^Jj y^LJ J\V (1) 
 
 131, 
 
 (1) The repetition of b/id'f here signifies plurality. Bare lutf o 
 tap&k $e ' with mach zest and zeal.' 
 
 (2) The Arabic verbal mutaw&tir 'consecutively,' is redundant. 
 See App. A, Form VI. Jayd is used for yat/d, when part of a com- 
 pound verb. 
 
 (3) Mert dekhh-deltht ' in imitation of me.' The union of a 
 masculine and feminine verbal in this way generally denotes reci- 
 procity of action, as mdrd-mdrt ' mutual strife.' 
 
 (4) Translate ' How are we to be kept regularly informed of P ' 
 etc. See also 67. 
 
 (5) See 76. I2 - H&& W ' was kept up.' Hott rahin would be 
 an alternative expression. 
 
 (6) Translate ' Yon will be pleased to keep in your own hands 
 the general superintendence only.' MJd'f, from the Persian bdid 
 ' over.' 
 
 (7) Mutabanmi 'adopted son.' See App. A, Form V.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 79 
 
 (8) Translate ' Something awful is about to happen." Oasab has 
 already occurred at 27. 8. 
 
 (9) Shahrzad loquitur, ' I shall go on asking you from time to 
 time,' etc. 
 
 (10) H<ith rakhe rahiyo ' keep your hand placed.' 
 
 (11) Bheje detd hti,n ' I will send at once,' etc. 
 
 (12) From one of Nazir Ahmed's fables. The man boasts that 
 he will split the beam in two in a moment as a specimen of his 
 power. 
 
 1 32 1 Translate into Hindustani : 
 (1) Undoubtedly female infanticide is practised in this 
 district. (2) The marriage rejoicings continued for 
 several days in succession. (3) It is on the stroke of 
 twelve. (4) Continue giving the patient iced water. 
 (5) I shall wear this ring on my finger in remembrance of 
 you. (6) She came to and fro to inquire after me every 
 day for a fortnight. (7) I am bringing dinner at once. 
 (8) This criminal ought to be put to death. (9) I forbid 
 you once for all. (10) On hearing the sentence the plain- 
 tiff and defendant stared at each other in astonishment. 
 (11) While I am here let this custom be kept up. (12) Pray 
 continue to allow him to come to me as opportunity offers. 
 
 133i Directions. 
 
 (1) ' Female infanticide,' rasm-i-dukhtar-kushi. ' To be practised,' 
 liu-'i ktirn'i. 
 
 (2) ' To continue,' hM JcarnA again. 
 
 (3) Turn this, ' It is about to strike twelve ' ; as in 130. 8. 
 
 (4) For the form of the verb see 128. ' Iced water ' is ' water 
 of ice ' in the Hindustani idiom. 
 
 (5) Use the same form of verb as in the last sentence, with 
 rahnfi instead of jdnA. ' In remembrance of you,' dp kt yddgfiri 
 (nwn). See also 50. (') 
 
 (6) On the model "t 1 3 . - 'To inquire after me ' may be 

 
 80 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 translated by the Arabic gerund 'ey&dat, which is the technical 
 word for visiting the sick. 
 
 (7) Put the verb in the form given in (29. 
 
 (8) 'Ought to be put to death,' qatl-kiyA chAhi'e, in which <intl- 
 Jkt'yd is the grammatical subject of ch&hi'e. The affix ko will be 
 required for the person affected. 
 
 (9) The verb as in (7) above. 
 
 (10) ' On hearing,' tiunlcar, not sunte ht, which would be out of 
 harmony with the rest of the sentence, the verb being in the Con- 
 tinuative form. Turn 'the plaintiff and defendant' by 'plaintiff 
 defendant both,' (0*>4<J *^ VCJL* ^* These common law 
 terms mean ' the plaintiff and the person against whom the plaint 
 is laid.' For the verbals see App. A, Form VIII. In both cases 
 the augment t coalesces under tashdtd with the first radical. 
 
 (11) See |09. 4- ' To be kept up,' h<L& fearnd. 
 
 (12) ' As opportunity offers ' may be rendered by the idiomatic 
 waqt pare par ' on occasion be-falling.' For the sense of parnA see 
 a remark made in 73 . ( 2 )- 
 
 END OP PART I.
 
 81 
 
 PART II. 
 THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 
 
 EXERCISE XIX. 
 
 SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 
 
 (1) Relative. 
 
 \ 34 WTien a sentence is enlarged by the insertion 
 or addition of explanatory clauses, it is said to be a Com- 
 pound Sentence, and the additional clauses are called 
 Subordinate. 
 
 They may be conveniently classed as (1) Relative, 
 (2) Predicative, and (3) Adverbial. The first of these is 
 the subject of this Exercise. 
 
 135i Relative clauses are introduced by the pro- 
 noun jo 'who' or 'which,' and by the pronominal adjec- 
 tives of quality and quantity, jaisd and jitnd, for which 
 English has no exact equivalents, and, as a rule, take 
 precedence of the principal or correlative clause to which 
 the noun explained belongs. It is customary, however, 
 in order to avoid the uncertainty which might arise from 
 the deferred mention of the subject of discourse, to 
 transfer the noun to the clause which explains it. Thus : 
 ' The man, who does not know how to read, is ignorant,' 
 jo ddmi parhnd nahin jdntd (woh) ndddn hai. Some 
 
 6
 
 tfl EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 authors are fond of adding the explanatory particle Jci to 
 the noun in this position ; &s,jo ddmi ki parhnd, etc. 
 
 When the relative clause follows the noun which it ex- 
 plains, as in English, it is a common practice to place this 
 same particle ki either before or after the relative pronoun, 
 or to allow it to stand alone, as the Persian representative 
 of jo. Thus : woh ddmi kijo (or jo ki) parhnd nahin jdnii 
 ndddn hai, or woh ddmi ki parhnd, etc., or ddmi ki woh 
 parhnd, etc. 
 
 13Oi The Hindi correlatives so, fawa, utnd are very 
 rarely used in Hindustani. For the latter, the contracted 
 form iis qadr is chiefly used, as also is is qadr for Una, 
 jis qadr forjitnd. 
 
 \ 37 't Translate into English : 
 
 J (1) 
 
 => W 
 
 "^) 
 
 s *SSK _5C-I wklU (5) 
 
 x (6) 
 
 * <. K 
 (8) 
 
 <> U-,ex (10) 
 lyt (12)
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 83 
 
 (15) 
 
 (16) 
 
 ,3 a/vJJ ^ K ^j ,J l^j ^ /T 
 
 138, Notes. 
 
 (1) Aaihtd ho, the Present Dubious tense the use of which here 
 implies that one of the persons addressed has the right of precedence, 
 but the speaker is uncertain which. 
 
 (2) Ki jfre, Passive Aorist in agreement with 6dU. Farq has the 
 sense here of ' dissension,' nif&q. 
 
 (3) SamjhA ho, the Past Dubious tense in agreement with jo kuthh. 
 See 81. 
 
 (4) Indefinite pronouns in a relative clause often take the form 
 of a relative pronoun, notwithstanding the presence of another 
 relative. Jtsfeo here stands for kist ko, and should be translated 
 accordingly. 
 
 (5) See 5 5 . The Verb in the subordinate clause is assimilated 
 to the jussive in the principal clause. The construction is jo ch&hn& 
 (/kit) pahnnti (feat) ' it is for you to wear what you wish to wear,' 
 that is, ' wear what you please.' 
 
 (6) Another instance from the Alf Laila of the same kind of tense 
 assimilation. Fi'lfaur, one of a few Arabic phrases in this form 
 which are current in Hindustani. The sense is ' on the instant ' ; 
 fauran ' instantly ' is equally fashionable. The Persian jald is less 
 forcible. For ittiW see App. A, Form VIII. , and what is said of 
 this word in the Remarks attached. 
 
 (7) Pesha is the object of the continuative kiy& kartft hUn ' I am 
 practising.' Ki jo might have been written jo ki, or jo might have 
 stood alone. Similarly, ki might have stood alone, or we might 
 have had ki woh. These alternatives exhaust the possibilities of 
 construction in this form of sentence. 
 
 (9) Ki is here equivalent to jis men, and elegantly avoids the 
 repetition of the locative. 
 
 6 *
 
 84 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (10) Reverse the order of the clauses in translation, and remember 
 that jaitA is in concord with khamydta. 
 
 (11) MulAhata is the 'consideration' of a, thing, as compared 
 with the sister verbal lih&M (84. 3). which generally means ' con- 
 sideration ' for. See App. A, Form III. 
 
 (12) It was remarked in (35. tnat English has no exact equiva- 
 lent for jaisA and jitnA. JitnA bojh is ' the amount of weight which,' 
 aa compared with jo bojh ' the weight which ' ; bnt the latter is a 
 sufficient rendering of the former, so far as English is concerned. 
 
 (13) For the verbs see 1 1 8 . and translate " The higher I 
 ascended,' etc. 
 
 (14) See (4) above. For mutasawwar see App. A, Form V. 
 
 (15) The construction here is analogous to the old English form, 
 ' Mr. Pepys his diary.' The ordinary phrasing would be gartb Admiyon 
 kt bahd-betiy&n ; but if this had been adopted, the relative clause 
 could not have been satisfactorily placed. Bahti-bctiyln is a col. 
 lective term for the daughters of the house, among whom, in an 
 Indian home, the sons' wives are included. 
 
 (16) The speaker means : ' What I observed when I came into 
 your family was, that ' etc. 
 
 i Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) How miserably passes the time of women who do 
 not know how to read. (2) The girl was some six years 
 old in short, just the age of our Hamida. (3) I am 
 that very Sindbad who you suppose is dead. (4) The 
 voices were quite inaudible owing to the cotton with 
 which his ears were stuffed. (5) I have nothing more to 
 say beyond what I have already told you. (6) It is very 
 unkind to forget the past claims of aged servants who 
 can no longer work. (7) We are in the same fix that you 
 are. (8) The more I cherished you, the lazier and idler 
 you became. (9) The wages which are due to anyone 
 will be given him. (10) There is no such verse in the 
 Qoran as you describe. (11) Is there any particular 
 trouble which causes him annoyance? (12) What has
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 85 
 
 happened is the best for my interests. (13) The price 
 you named was absurd. (14) Send me word immediately 
 of whatever rumours you hear in the bazar. (15) I have 
 no horse in my stable which is fit for you to ride. 
 (16) What I observed when I came to court was that 
 hair-splitting was the fashion. 
 
 14Oi Directions. 
 
 (1) Turn thus : ' Women who do not know (how) to read,' as in 
 1 3 5 : an ^ insert unki in the correlative clause. 
 
 (2) ' In short ' may here be idiomatically translated by baa, 
 parenthetic. See 5 1. I2 - 'Just, the age of,' bi-'ainihi jitnt. The 
 Arabic bi-'ainihi lit. means ' in the eye of it,' i.e. ' exactly.' 
 
 (3) Place ' that very Sindbad ' first, and ' I am ' last, with the 
 relative clause between. 
 
 (4) Place ' owing to the cotton,' ba-sabab rtft ke, first ; see also 
 
 102. J and 9I. 2 - 
 
 (5) Turn ' Except this which I have,' etc. See 77. ll - 
 
 (6) The construction may be imitated from |37. '5 'aged 
 servants from whom work is not possible,' etc. ' Very unkind ' 
 may be translated ' great unkindness.' See |3 . -' 
 
 (7) On the model of |37. 9- 
 
 (8) On the model of (37. 1 3- 
 
 (9) On the model of (37. 4 but use jitnt instead of jo, in agree- 
 ment with tankhw&h. 
 
 (10) Place ' in the Qoran ' first, followed by the relative clause. 
 ' Describe,' bat&na. 
 
 (11) Follow the order of the clauses in the original, and begin 
 with khdsskar, instead of using the adjective khdss ' particular.' The 
 tense in the relative clause is the Present Dubious. 
 
 (12) ' To happen,' zuhdr men dnd, ; ' for my interests,' mere haqq 
 men. 
 
 (13) Bepeat the verb, as in 1 3 7. 3 thus, ' The price you named 
 (kuiiiri ) you named absurd.' 
 
 (14) On the model of 1 3 7 . 6- ' Whatever ' is here best translated 
 by jo jo. 
 
 (15) See 63. 4. and 97. 4. 
 
 (16) On the model of (37. 16.
 
 86 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 EXERCISE XX. 
 
 SUBORDINATE CLAUSES continued. 
 (2) Predicative. 
 
 141 1 Predicative clauses, that is, clauses which 
 are part of the predicate, and without which it would be 
 incomplete, follow the predicating verb, and are linked 
 to it by the connectives ki or jo. 
 
 The statement, question, order, or whatever it is, by 
 which the predicate is thus completed, is uniformly worded 
 in direct terms (oratio recta), whereas in English oblique 
 or indirect forms of expression are preferred, or the addi- 
 tion of a clause is avoided by the use of the infinitive or 
 a participle. 
 
 142 1 This difference of idiom is specially puzzling 
 to native students of English. The following examples 
 contrast the variety of oblique expression peculiar to 
 English with the uniformity of the Hindustani mode : 
 
 (1) ' He sent word that he would come to-morrow/ 
 kahla-bhejd ki kal diingd ; lit. ' He sent word that " I will 
 come to-morrow." ' 
 
 (2) ' I am glad that you have come,' khuth hiin jo turn 
 cfe ho. Hereto, as compared with ki, has the force of ' in 
 that ' without being distinctly causal. 
 
 (3) ' I regret that I came,' or ' I regret having come,' 
 pachhidtd hiin ki main Tcyun dyd ; lit. ' I regret that " Why 
 did I come? "' as if the speaker was soliloquising. 
 
 (4) ' I fear that he will come to-day,' dart*' hi'm aisd
 
 IXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 87 
 
 na ho ki woh dj d-jd^e ; lit. ' I fear " let it be not that he 
 come to-day," ' in which the fear is expressed in words. 
 
 (5) ' He asked me who I was,' mujhse puchhd ki turn 
 kaun ho ; lit. ' he asked me that " Who are you ? " 
 
 (6) 'Ask if anyone is here,' piichho ki yahdn koi hai ; 
 lit. ' Ask that " Is anyone here ? " ' To an Englishman 
 the temptation to use ayar instead of ki in this form of 
 inquiry is almost irresistible. 
 
 (7) ' Tell him to go home,' us se kahdo ki turn ghar jdo ; 
 lit. ' tell him that " you go home." ' 
 
 (8) ' You ought to go home,' dp ko chahie ki ghar jd"iye. 
 Here gJiar jd*iye ' pray go home,' is the thought in the 
 speaker's mind. 
 
 (9) ' My custom is to read the paper daily,' merd yeh 
 ma 1 mid hai ki roz roz akhbdr parhtd hun. Here the speaker 
 states his custom in the predicative clause. 
 
 (10) ' I thought of going to Agra to-morrow,' khaydl 
 dyd ki kal Agra jd^iln ; lit. ' the thought came to me that 
 "I go to Agra to-morrow," ' the aorist merely indicating 
 the uncertainty of the speaker's mind. 
 
 (11) ' I saw a gorilla advancing from the opposite 
 direction,' dekhd ki udhar se ek ban-mantis chald dtd hai, 
 or more dramatically still, kyd dekhtd hun ki udhar se, etc., 
 ' what do I see ? that, etc.* 
 
 143i Translate into English :
 
 88 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 ^ V T (13) 
 (14) O yr> 
 (15) 
 
 144 1 Notes. 
 
 (1) See (4-2. ( 2 )- The words are addressed to a lady visitor. 
 A"f6 ' fortune ' or ' destiny ' is treated as a plural in Hindustani. 
 
 (2) In reply to a suggestion ; hence the Past Dubious tense. 
 
 (3) For be gine see 96. 
 
 (4) See (4-2. (") A* 1 allusion to the firing of the t hatchers' 
 ricks at Allahabad, some years ago, as a cure for incendiarism. 
 
 (5) In this example translate the subordinate clause in the oratio 
 recta, reserving the oblique form of expression for the clause intro- 
 duced by the second Jki. See (4-2. (6)- 
 
 (6) See (42. ( lo )- Lahar is rather a favourite word of Gnlib's 
 in the sense of ' idea.' 
 
 (7) For jo see |42. (2). See also 87. 8. 
 
 (8) The subordinate clause hero conveys the exact words of the 
 request.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 89 
 
 (9) Ehtim'il ' presumption,' in correspondence with the tense of 
 the subordinate clause. See App. A, Form VIII. 
 
 (10) For munsarim ' manager ' see App. A, Form VII. 
 
 (11) The subordinate clause explains the predicative participle 
 likhA in the exact words of the newspaper. For t&rikh see App. A, 
 Form II., and see the Remarks for explanation of the d. 
 
 (12) Compare 14-2. (3)- Sir pitne kt bdt 'a matter of head-beat- 
 ing ' (in token of sorrow), ' a sad job.' See 24 Q ^ e form of 
 the word ijazut, see App. A. Rem. F. IV. 
 
 (13) Translate ' He said that he was expecting you,' the phrase 
 4p k& n&m leke being redundant in the English idiom. Where a 
 third party is mentioned, an adjustment of this kind is necessary 
 for the proper understanding of the Predicative clause. 
 
 (14) See (42. (6)- The sard&r is the chief house-servant, gene- 
 rally a ' bearer.' 
 
 (15) See (4-2. (4)- The Persian mdb&dd, preceded by fct, is 
 often used for a*d na ho. 
 
 \ 45 1 Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) I saw it stated in the Oudli Akhbar that a meet- 
 ing of Taluqdars would be held at the Pavilion of the 
 Kaisar Bag at two o'clock on Saturday. (2) It behoves 
 you to be cautious in the adjustment of this dispute. 
 (3) Ask the witness if he speaks English. (4) Tell the 
 syce to go and wait half-way. (5) You did a very pru- 
 dent thing in setting him free without security. (6) I 
 am at a loss how to refute this calumny. (7) He boasted 
 that he would mate him without his queen. (8) You did 
 a great service to the Government in putting down the 
 rebels at the very first. (9) I have a strong suspicion 
 that he, too, was concerned with you in this dacoity. 
 (10) I do not approve of your habit of flattering me at 
 every turn. (11) It was his custom to take a stroll in the 
 early morning. (12) The four agreed among themselves
 
 90 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 to hunt in company. (13) Knock at the door and ask if 
 the master is at home. (14) He told my son he was 
 coming to my house to-morrow. (15) I entreat you to 
 overlook this my first offence. 
 
 14{>i Directions. 
 
 (1) On the model of 143. 11. 'Stated' likh'i, because native 
 papers are lithographed. 
 
 (2) As in (4-2. (8 ). 'To be cautious' may be picturesquely 
 rendered dd b&en dekhnA ' looking to the right and left. 1 
 
 (3) ' Do you speak English ? ' tumse angrezi &tt ; better than turn 
 angrezl bolte. 
 
 (4) Turn the subordinate clause ' having gone half-way, sit." 
 
 (5) Turn You did great prudence in that, without having taken 
 security, you gave him release (chhutk&rA).' See 96. f r ^ e P ar " 
 ticipial phrase. The sentence is ironical. 
 
 (6) On the model of |43. 10. 
 
 (7) ' Without his queen,' in the Hindustani idiom, ' having 
 removed the queen,' farztn uthdke. 
 
 (8) ' Service to the Government ' is here sufficiently translated by 
 khair-khicftht ' well-wishing.' ' At the very first,' paMe pahal men. 
 
 (9) 'A strong suspicion,' gum&n-i-g&lib. 'Concerned with yon,' 
 <*rd thdmil-h'U, lit. ' included in your condition.' 
 
 (10) Turn ' I am not approving (raudddr) of this custom in that 
 you flatter me at every turn (har phirkar).' 
 
 (11) See (42. (9)- Th& may be omitted in the subordinate 
 clause. ' To take a stroll,' chihal qadamt karn'i, with which com- 
 pare our phrase ' forty winks ' for ' a nap.' 
 
 (12) Turn ' They made compact ('a/id) among themselves that, 
 come, we all four together (miJfcar) will hunt.' See 68. 6. 
 
 (13) See |42. ( 6 )- Use the Past Conjunctive Participle in the 
 first clause. 
 
 (11) Here the oratio recta of the subordinate clause is, ' I am 
 going to your father's to-morrow.' 
 
 (15) On the model of (43. 8 ' 1 entreat,' multamis Jidn or mer& 
 iltim&t hat. ' To overlook ' or ' pass over,' dargutar karnA (e .
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 91 
 
 EXERCISE XXL 
 
 SUBORDINATE CLAUSES continued. 
 
 (3) Adverbial : viz. a. Temporal ; 6. Local ; c. Modal. 
 
 i Adverbial clauses are those which refer to the 
 (a) time, (6) place, or (c) manner, and to the (<i) ends, 
 (e) reasons, or (/) conditions of the action of the 
 principal verb. This Exercise deals with the relations 
 of time, place, and manner. 
 
 148i The construction of clauses of this kind is 
 similar to that of the Relative clauses explained and 
 illustrated in Exercise XX. that is to say, the adverbial 
 clause, with job, jahdn, jidhar, jyun, or jaun, stands first 
 as a rule, and is followed by the chief clause with or 
 without the respective correlatives. In short, the normal 
 shape and order of the clauses are those of the line 
 Where the bee sucks there suck I. 
 
 The particle ki may be combined with jab, etc., in the 
 same manner as it is with jo, jaisd, andjitnd (I35.) The 
 same particle also, in cases where the adverbial clause is 
 not initial, may take the place of jab or jabse ' when ' or 
 ' since.' 
 
 Jdbtak * as long as,' with a negative verb corresponds to 
 our ' until.' 
 
 149i The relative phrases jis waqt, jis jagah, jis 
 taraf, jis tarah, or jaise, constantly replace the adverbs 
 named in the preceding section. Jyun, jaun, jon, are 
 very rarely used, but the phrases jaun taun ' somehow,' 
 jon Ted ton ' as before,' and jonhin ' precisely as,' or ' pre-
 
 92 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 cisely when,' are common enough in colloquial Hin- 
 dustani. 
 
 The correlatives in general use are us vxiqt, u-ahdn, 
 udhar, us tarah, aise, etc. 
 
 The adverbial combinations, ' before that,' priusquam 
 or antequam, ' after that,' postquam, etc., are represented 
 in Hindustani by qabl itke Jci, ba'd iske, etc. 
 
 15O. Translate into English : 
 
 (1) 
 
 f &*> (2) 
 Ax^ (3) 
 - (4) 
 
 (5) 
 
 (7) 
 l ,J ^1 y> (8) 
 
 (9) liie 
 
 o) 
 
 ^ (11) 
 
 (12) 
 
 ^T (14)- 
 (15)
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 93 
 
 151, Notes. 
 
 (I) YAd-pam& ) as compared with y&d-hon&, is ' chance recollec- 
 tion.' Compare 73. 2 - Bt-ikhtiy&r, lit. 'without power,' like 
 majbur, 84. ' Translate ' I cannot help laughing,' etc. 
 
 (3) See (48. sub Jin. Baranda (Hindi) or bar&mda (Persian). 
 
 (4) The collocation is elegant. QazA is the ' sors suprema.' Comp. 
 the expression haiza karnd. 
 
 (5) The action denoted by the gerund with th& is immediately 
 antecedent to the event described in the succeeding clause. Trans- 
 late ' He had no sooner . . . than,' etc. 
 
 (6) See (38. 5- Ba-taur gumbaz ke ' in the manner of a dome,' 
 a pedantic paraphrase of gumbaz-ddr ' domed.' 
 
 (7) See |38. 4- 
 
 (8) Bi-jinsihi, ' intact,' lit. ' in the nature of it.' Compare the 
 similar Arabic phrase given at 140. 2 - 
 
 (10) Tasawwur kam& in the modal clause is ' to imagine.' For 
 this verbal see App. A, Form V.; see 68. 1 3 an ^ 137. *4 f r 
 verbals from the same root. 
 
 (II) See ||7. i. 
 
 (12) This sentence is very neatly worded. Translate ' The only 
 plan I could think of was,' etc. 
 
 (13) Qartb hai, impersonal, equivalent to ' nearly.' 
 
 (14) In this example the correlative adverb only is expressed. 
 Saht is one of those idiomatic terms which it is often easier to under- 
 stand than translate. The original sense of the word is ' endured ' 
 or ' allowed ' (saTmd), and the clause may be rendered here ' Then 
 you will allow I am right.' See Taubat, VII, 69. 
 
 (15) Translate ' One more blemish may be put up with where 
 there are a thousand already.' From Galib. 
 
 152 1 Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) You have no resource left but to take service. 
 
 (2) I will not leave you till you grant my petition. 
 
 (3) So far as it is possible to prevent it, do not let this 
 secret get abroad. (4) It must be more than fifty years 
 since the Queen ascended the throne. (5) Sit where iny
 
 94 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 voice may easily be heard. (6) When you have wasted 
 so many years already, a few more days won't signify. 
 
 (7) When it was his own turn to suffer, he roared out. 
 
 (8) The stars were still shining when he rose as usual 
 for morning prayer. (9) His eyes were no sooner closed 
 than he was in another world. (10) Wherever you find 
 any curiosity, bring it me just as it is. (11) He could 
 not have gone five or six steps when he heard a man's 
 voice close by. (12) Go and wait at the place where I 
 first met you. (13) Why should I begin to ill-treat you 
 now, after having treated you so well before ? (14) 1 
 saw what was in his mind before he could make any 
 complaint. (15) He went out shooting a week ago. 
 
 153 Directions. 
 
 (1) See |50t '- 'Resource,' s&rat, something like the Latin 
 modus vivendi. The word has many meanings, and is a noon of 
 unity from the same root as the verbals noticed in |5I. IO - 
 
 (2) See (50.3- 'I W 'M not leave yon ' may be turned by the 
 phrase pind na chhordngb. 
 
 (3) Omit ' to prevent it.' Turn ' Let not a disclosure of this 
 secret take place.' See 76 '3- 
 
 (4) On the model of |50. 4- 
 
 (5) Turn ' Sit (in) such a place that wherefrom my voice may 
 be well heard ' (idn parnd). 
 
 (6) For the second clause see (50. *5 chand din aur saht. 
 
 (7) Torn ' When (misfortune) lighted on (dn-bannd) his own 
 head he squeaked ' chtn bolnA ' the cry of a trapped animal.' 
 
 (8) For ' when ' use ki. ' As usual,' apne ma'rn&l par. 
 
 (9) On the model of |5Q. 5- 
 
 (10) Remember the hint of |38. 4- 'Just as it is ' may be 
 translated by the phrase noticed at |SI. 8, or by the word 
 amdnat. 
 
 (11) The tense of the first verb is the Past Presumptive. 
 1 When,' ki. ' Close by,' nazdik $e.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 95 
 
 (12) ' To meet," do chdr hond (se). The idiom of two becoming' 
 four refers of course to the eyes. 
 
 (13) On the model of 150. ll - Use nekt karnd and burdff 
 karnd for the verbs. 
 
 (14) Construct as in the last sentence. ' What was in his mind,* 
 m& fl xamtr an Arabic phrase. 
 
 (15) Turn ' To him a week was (hiW) that he had gone,' etc. 
 
 EXEECISE XXII. 
 
 SUBORDINATE CLAUSES continued. 
 (3) Adverbial : viz. d. Final ; e. Causal. 
 
 154-1 Resuming from 147. the present Exercise 
 shows the construction of those adverbial clauses which 
 express the ends or the reasons of the state or action 
 denoted by the principal verb, and are therefore called 
 Final and Causal. 
 
 155i Final clauses are constructed like Predicative 
 clauses (I4I.)> that is to say, they follow the principal 
 verb and are linked to it by Jci ' that,' ' so that,' ' in order 
 that,' or by id ki or ki id, or by td alone, which is the 
 Persian mode. 
 
 Negatively final clauses, which, in English, are prefaced 
 by the conjunction ' lest,' are introduced by the phrase 
 aisd naho ki, which has been already noticed, 14-2. (4). in 
 connection with verbs of fearing. 
 
 Causal clauses, on the other hand, generally
 
 96 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 precede the principal clause, after the manner of the tem- 
 poral, local and modal clauses which were the subject of 
 the last Exercise, and are introduced by jo A-i or chiinki, 
 meaning ' since ' or ' because,' or by az-bas-ki, a Persian 
 compound which signifies ' inasmuch as.' 
 
 They may, however, follow the principal clause, and, 
 in this case, are linked to it by the conjunction kyunki, or 
 the phrases kis l?e ki, Tcis waste ki, etc., or by ki alone, 
 with an anticipative phrase, such as is sabab se, in the 
 leading clause. 
 
 1 57i Translate into English :
 
 EXEBCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 97 
 
 158. Notes. 
 
 (1) The compound par-j&nti here means ' to be exercised,' or 
 ' brought to bear.' 
 
 (2) From the Alf Laila, where Sindbad and his companions fall 
 into the hands of a man-eating Polyphemus. Aise bure marne se 
 1 from such a cruel death,' or ' way of dying.' See 48 . su ^ fi n " 
 
 (3) The Final clause in this example is easily converted into a 
 Predicative by the omission of t&, and the adoption of the oratio 
 recta. 
 
 (5) See 106. for tne duplication of the Participle, and also 
 130. IO - f r the leading clause. 
 
 (6) From a native Grammar, to the effect that the sign of the 
 agent is not used when the verb is intransitive. Note use of Per- 
 sian izdfat. 
 
 (7) Mert kh&tir ' obliging me.' Khdtir is here equivalent to 
 khdtir-d&rt. 
 
 (8) Translate ' You had better post a sentry,' etc. See 91.5- 
 
 (9) Khod khodlce ' digging and digging,' the reduplication of the 
 Past Conjunctive Participle denoting persistence. Close question- 
 ing is the sense here. Take is sabab se and ki together, ' because.' 
 For mutatcaffd see App. A, Form V. The word is of the same form 
 as mutabannd, 1 3 . 7- 
 
 Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) I should not wonder if he has deceived you, in 
 order to win your good will. (2) Inasmuch as nothing 
 was found against me in the informers' statements, I was 
 not summoned. (3) Write me word of his departure 
 thence, in order that I may set on foot the preparations 
 for his reception. (4) Grease his palm a little lest he 
 put a spoke in our wheel. (5) As this verb in transitive, 
 the sign of the agent is used in the past tenses. (6) You 
 ought to confess your fault, for reconciliation is impos- 
 sible without it. (7) Chastisement ought to be inflicted, 
 
 7
 
 98 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 to the intent that people may see it and take warning. 
 (8) Be careful what you say, for the abuse- of others will 
 not advance your own cause. (9) He shook the pot to 
 find out what it was filled with. (10) As he learned 
 English in his childhood, he must be more or less a 
 proficient in the language. 
 
 i Directions. 
 
 (1) Turn ' What wonder that he may have given deceit that (<d) 
 he may make you satisfied (rd*f) with himself.' 
 
 (2) A z bos ki followed by lihazti. ' therefore ' in the correlative 
 clause. ' Against me,' meri taraf. ' I was not summoned,' tahibt 
 nahin h&'t, lit. 'A summons was not (sent me).' The Passive 
 should be avoided when the sense can be expressed without it. 
 
 (3) ' To set on foot,' bar-p& kar-denA. ' Reception,' istiqbal, the 
 technical term for meeting a visitor and escorting him to his 
 destination. 
 
 (4) Literal translation is impossible in expressions of this kind, 
 and the idea of ' greasing ' the palm would disgust a high-caste 
 Hindu. The nearest equivalent phrase must be sought for, and 
 among other expressions for bribery, munh mitha kurna 'the 
 sweetening of the mouth,' will serve the turn here. ' To put a 
 spoke in our wheel ' may be rendered ' cast an impediment in our 
 business.' There is, however, a somewhat similar idea in the 
 phrase pahfe men ot ard-dend ' to put a catch under the wheeL* 
 
 (5) On the model of 1 5 7 . 6 - 
 
 (6) ' Without it ' should be fully rendered bagair iqr&r kfe. 
 
 (7) Turn ' With this intent (murdd) chastisement ought to be 
 given, that people, seeing it (Past Conjunctive Participle) should 
 grasp warning.' See 91. I2 
 
 (8) Turn ' Having controlled (your) tongue, speak, because (fcw 
 lie ki) abuse of others will not answer (peak-j<iit>i) in your 
 interests.' See (4-0. 12. 
 
 (9) ' To find out,' <d dary&ft ho. 
 
 (10) ' As,' jo ki. Turn tho correlative clause ' He will be holding 
 (rakht'i hogd) little [(or) much proficiency,' omitting ' in the lan- 
 guage ' as unnecessary.
 
 EXEECISES IN HINDUSTANI. 99 
 
 EXERCISE XXTTI. 
 
 SUBORDINATE CLAUSES continued, 
 (3) Adverbial : viz. /. Conditional. 
 
 A Conditional clause conveys the conditioner 
 limitation under which the state or action denoted by 
 the principal clause holds good. 
 
 It stands or is put forward first (hence the term pro- 
 tasis), and is introduced by the conjunctions agar or jo 
 ' if,' and is followed by the apodosis, or consequent propo- 
 sition, prefaced by the illative particle to. 
 
 The introductory particles of both protasis and apo- 
 dosis are often omitted, when the sense is obvious with- 
 out them. 
 
 There are two classes of conditions, viz. 
 
 (1) those which may be or may have been realised; 
 
 (2) those which might have been, but were not, realised. 
 The present Exercise deals with the first only. By the 
 
 nature of the case, the tenses generally used in the 
 expression of conditions of this character are the 
 Dubious tenses, viz. the Aorist and the Present and Past 
 Dubious ; but the historic tenses are also employed 
 when the speaker, so to say, begs the question of the 
 realisation of the condition. Thus, for example, (agar) 
 hukm ho (to) jd un ' If the order is (given), I go ' ; 
 but, if tht> realisation of the condition is assumed, as in 
 ' If he gives you the money (which he will do), bring it 
 to me,' we shall have jo usne rupaya diyd mere pas le-do. 
 And the same construction is lawful, if the clause is 
 
 7 *
 
 100 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 temporal, that is to say, if instead of jo ' if,' we read jab 
 ' when.' 
 
 Conditional clauses are on occasion convertible 
 into Predicative by inverting the order of the clauses 
 and using Jci in place of agar ; e.g., kyd Tchub hai ki ijdzat 
 ho ' how nice if leave is allowed ! ' And hence arises the 
 optative form of the Conditional clause, where Icdsh takes 
 the place of the leading clause, with or without ki or jo ; 
 as, Msh ijdzat ho ' would that leave be allowed ! ' or, ' if 
 only leave be allowed ! ' 
 
 Translate into English : 
 
 (10) 
 
 165, 
 
 (1) From the XA-hZdqt N&tiri. Compare the English proverb, 
 ' One swallow does not make a summer.'
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 101 
 
 (2) Forward zimma, see |22. 2 - See (37. 6 for the form of 
 the tense in the protasis. 
 
 (3) See |27. 
 
 (4) (Agar) bane ' if the thing can be done,' equivalent to (agar) 
 hosake, or (agar) mer& baa chole. See 76. 6. 
 
 (5) Hai, not ho, because the love of life is taken for granted. 
 
 (6) An astrological forecast, in which the result is stated as cer- 
 tain to follow the fulfilment of the condition. Our idiom requires 
 a present tense in the protasis and a future in the apodosis. 
 
 (7) Warq is the ' leaf of a MS. The sentence is from Galib. 
 
 (8) Auq&t, the Arabic plural of waqt. The sense of the word 
 here is 'condition.' Comp. our phrase ' hard times.' Auq&t also 
 means ' wages ' (means of living or passing time). Gralib, in using 
 the future in the apodosis, evidently looks forward to a visit from 
 his friend. 
 
 (9) Sahvan, Arabic accusative of sdhv 'inadvertence,' used ad- 
 verbially 'inadvertently.' 
 
 (10) From the Alf Laila. See 1 63. 
 
 , Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) If you ask me the truth, I should say he was a 
 fool. (2) I will get him shod somewhere, if possible. 
 (3) If you are not angry, why speak crossly ? | (4) I 
 shall certainly kill you, if you scream out. (5) Which- 
 ever of the three I marry you to, the remaining two will 
 be displeased. (6) Leave off talking nonsense, if you 
 wish to be respected. (7) If an opportunity occurs, I 
 will make good the deficiency to-morrow. (8) How nice 
 if the rains have begun ! (9) Oh ! that I may get 
 privilege leave ! (10) The prevention of bribery shall be 
 contrived, if I can manage it. 
 
 167- Directions. 
 
 (1) Omit agar in the protasis, and remember that the Predica- 
 tive clause after ' say ' must be in the oratio recta.
 
 102 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (2) The protasis, aa in (64. 4- The form of verb in the apo- 
 dosis will be causal. See 79. I 5* 
 
 (3) Let jo introduce the protasis, and turn the apodosis ' of cross 
 (ukhrt ukhrt) words what is the intention (jgarz) ? ' 
 
 (4) Put the verb of the protasis in the Past tense, aa the more 
 forcible way of making the person realise the threat. 
 
 (5) The protasis should be arranged thus : ' If jour marriage 
 with whom of these three (in tinon men se jiske s-lth) I shall make,' 
 etc., with attention to the principle laid down in 1 3 8 . 4- 
 
 (6) Turn the protasis ' If your honour is dear (manrdr) to yon,' 
 translating ' your ' by the reflexive pronoun. 
 
 (7) Omit agar, ' To make good a deficiency * may be idiomatically 
 rendered by ka*r nik&l-lend, lit. ' to cause the fraction to come out,' 
 ' make up the balance,' etc. 
 
 (8) See |63. 
 
 (9) See 163. Turn 'Would that to me privilege leave be 
 received (miZ-jdnd) ! ' Rukhsat ri'dyati is the technical term. 
 
 (10) The third of the phrases mentioned at 165. 4 ma y be 
 adopted for the protasis. ' To be contrived,' tajiotz~h<m&. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIV. 
 
 SUBORDINATE CLAUSES continued. 
 
 (3) Adverbial : viz. /. Conditional continued. 
 
 \ f>8i We now come to the second of the two classes 
 of conditions named in 162., viz. those conditions which 
 might have been, but were not, realised ; in other words, 
 the time for the realisation of which has passed by. 
 Hence the propriety of the native term Past Conditional 
 for those tense-forms of the Hindustani verb which are 
 reserved for use in this connection, either in the protasis 
 or apodosis of the compound sentence. 
 
 The Past Conditional is formed from the Past Iraper-
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 103 
 
 feet by dropping the auxiliary thd, or by using hold 
 instead of thd. A third form is obtained by using hold 
 instead of ih<i in the Past Remote ; and the tense thus 
 formed may be distinguished as the Past Conditional 
 Remote.* 
 
 lOOi But while one or other of these three forms is 
 indispensable in the protasis of conditional sentences of 
 this class, the Past Imperfect is frequently retained in 
 the apodosis, when the substantive verb is used in com- 
 bination with nouns or adjectives. For example, in such 
 a sentence as ' It would have been well if he had under- 
 stood the order,' the protasis is either agar (or jo) woli 
 hukm samajhtd (or samjhd hotd, if the period spoken of is 
 comparatively remote), but the apodosis may be to 
 achchhd thd, as well as to achchhd hotd. 
 
 17O. The alternative construction explained in 163. 
 is equally available in the case of the unrealised condi- 
 tion. Thus we have kyd Tchiib hotd (or thd) ki woh hukm 
 samajhtd ' how well it would have been had he understood 
 the order.' And similarly for the Past Optative, kdsh woh 
 hukm samajhtd, ' would he had understood the order ! ' 
 
 171 1 Translate into English : 
 
 ^ yj** \ (1) 
 
 (2) 
 
 * On this it may bo remarked that the proper place for the Past 
 Conditional in the verb scheme is immediately after the Past Im- 
 perfect (See App. B), and not, as English grammars have it, af, the 
 head of the tense-forms derived from the Imperfect Participle, ss 
 if it Were a Present tense.
 
 104 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 172. Note*. 
 
 (1) The apodosis means ' he would not have left me alive ' (to 
 tell the tale). A common exaggeration. For jtta, sec |07 ( 2 )- 
 
 (2) H'ljat hott ' had there been any need.' Mohtdj ' needy,' a 
 verbal from the same root as hdjat, will be found below (7). H'ljah 
 is an everyday word in modern Arabic for ' anything,' as turld 
 h'ljah ' do you want anything ? ' For be kahe tumh'irc see 9 6 . 
 
 (3) Jdntd hot'l, the second form of the Past Conditional, in which 
 hotd takes the place of th& in the Past Imperfect. The shade of 
 meaning which this rare tense implies cannot always be rendered 
 in English. Translate ' had he been familiar with ' rather than 
 4 had he known.' 
 
 (4) A lady is here addressing a female relation. For kabht JH, 
 see 45. 9- The remoter sense of the third form of the Past 
 Conditional is obvious in this example. 
 
 (5) A proverbial form of expression, which denotes an intense 
 feeling of shame. 
 
 (6) For the construction of the apodosis, see (69. 
 
 (7) See |70. The tense in the subordinate clause is the Past 
 Conditional Passive. For mohtdj see App. A, Form V1I1. 
 
 (8) Translate ' You ought to have inspected,' etc. 
 
 (9) Translate ' Would that all possessed the discretion, 1 etc.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 105 
 
 (10) A wife here remonstrates with her husband for inviting a 
 friend to dinner without giving her notice. From the Mirdtu-l-ards 
 of Nazir Ahmed. 
 
 173 1 Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) If we had lived in accordance with our means, we 
 should never have experienced this want of money. 
 (2) He kept on complaining, ' Would that I had not been 
 born ! ' (3) I should have put down gambling, if I had 
 had the power. (4) It was beyond his sagacity to under- 
 stand this hint, j (5) I should have half killed him, if 
 the people had not rescued him. (6) You ought to have 
 sympathised with me at this critical period. (7), Had we 
 been on the alert, yonder intrigues would have been 
 detected. (8) Had I followed the doctor's instructions, 
 I should have given up drink long ago. (9) Would I 
 had not been entangled in this mess. (10) If re- 
 conciliation had been effected then, I should have been 
 pleased. 
 
 1 74 1 Directions. 
 
 (1) 'In accordance with our means,' haistyat se, at the beginning 
 of the sentence. Turn the apodosis ' this empty -handedness (tiht- 
 dastt) would never have been.' 
 
 (2) Use here the Past Conditional Remote in the optative 
 clause. 
 
 (3) Compare this with |66. IO - 
 
 (4) Turn thus : ' To him so much sagacity where was that he 
 should have understood this hint ? ' An assertion in the interroga- 
 tive form. 
 
 (5) Turn the apodosis ' I should have already made him half 
 dead,' &dh-m&<i kar-chukd thd. 
 
 (6) On the model of |7I. 8. ' To sympathise with me,' meri 
 hamdardt knrn'i.
 
 106 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (7) Tarn thas : ' From hither (if) alertness hod been, the intrigue 
 of thither would have been detected (fchuZ-parnd).' 
 
 (8) ' Instructions,' kahd. 95. 
 
 (9) Use the 2nd form of the Past Conditional (Optative). 
 
 (10) Tarn thas : ' I should then indeed (tab/it) have been pleased 
 that when reconciliation had become ' (Past Conditional Remote). 
 
 EXERCISE XXV. 
 
 SUBORDINATE CLAUSES continued. 
 (3) Adverbial : viz. /. Conditional (Concessional}. 
 
 175 1 The Concessional is a form of the Conditional 
 clause, of which the construction is illustrated in Exer- 
 cise XXIII., the difference being that, instead of being 
 introduced by agar ' if,' the protasis begins with agarchi 
 1 although.' The conjunctions har chand, go, go lei mean 
 the same thing, and are convenient alternatives. Hnl'mki 
 1 albeit,' bd-wujiideki ' notwithstanding that,' mdnd ki 
 ' granted that,' etc. are additional forms ; and the collo- 
 quial sahi, 151, 14. is sometimes used at the end of a 
 concessional clause, just as mdnd ki at the beginning. 
 
 Our phrase ' no matter how . . .' is idiomatically repre- 
 sented in Hindustani by kaisd hi . . . ley tin na . . . or 
 kitnd hi . . . kyun na . . ., with or without agarchi. 
 
 The correlative conjunctions used in the apodosis are 
 magar or lekin ' but,' and io bhi, phir bhi, tdham, etc. 
 ' yet ' or ' still.' 
 
 17{>i Translate into English :
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 107 
 
 177, 
 
 (1) Ba-zab&n-i-hdl, lit. 'in the present language,' that is, 'in 
 such means of communication as they possess." The speaker uses 
 the Present Presumptive, as he hears the monkeys chattering. 
 
 (3) The concessional clause is here parenthetic. For muydssar 
 see App. A, Form II. 
 
 (4) For rah& see \J a (3). Mahabbat, root s_o. , a mtmated noun 
 of action. See App. A, Remarks 5. (3). 
 
 (5) Tumhen aine ' like yourself.' 
 
 (6) For saht see |5 1 . '4- Translate hero ' no doubt,' or ' if you
 
 108 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 choose to say so.' From a scene in the Taubat, where Kalim 
 argues with his mother against what he considers unwarranted 
 interference with his mode of life. For ta'arruz, App. A, Form V. 
 
 (7) Translate ' No matter in what circumstances,' etc. 
 
 (8) Pesht men ' in presentation,' that is, ' ready to be brought 
 up.' Faitfala-hond ' to be decided.' (38.J 
 
 (9) Here the concessional clause stands at the end of the sen- 
 tence as an afterthought : ' though it may be four /..- distant.' 
 
 (10) JahAn, as in |50. '5- 8&IM, U (Persian plural and 
 singular combined) ' year after year." Comp. tanh& tan, or tan 
 fan/id ' quite alone.' Raht, Past Absolute, instead of rahc, Aorist, 
 because the speaker assumes the case to have occurred. Khw&h ma- 
 khw&h ' will he nill he ' : but translate freely, as in 1 5 1 . ' 
 
 1 7&i Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) Though the debtor kept excusing himself on the 
 ground that the bond was forged, yet when pressed he 
 could not deny his own signature. (2) Though you do 
 not know me, I know you well. (3) However easy a 
 thing is, it always seems difficult to a beginner. (4) Not- 
 withstanding that you have disguised yourself in man's 
 attire, I know from your voice that you are a woman. 
 
 (5) Granted that men's natures are different, yet this is 
 no reason why there should not be concord in a family. 
 
 (6) Though the education and correction of children are 
 indispensable matters, yet a good example is a sine qua 
 non. (7) I shall not sell it, no matter how much you 
 offer. (8) Though the story is very long, it is very in- 
 teresting indeed. (9) Though so enduring and gallant, 
 the army was not victorious. (10) You are addicted to 
 drink, albeit the practice is altogether contrary to the 
 law of Islam.
 
 KXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 109 
 
 179 1 -Directions. 
 
 (1) Turn thus: 'The debtor, although he kept making (||8.) 
 excuse that " this bond is forged," yet (t&ham),' etc. ' Being 
 pressed ' may be rendered hdrkar. 
 
 (2) ' Though,' go ki t less formal than harchand. 
 
 (3) The concessional clause is Araisd ht Asdn Mm ho, without a 
 following correlative. Instead of literally translating ' always,' 
 use the Continuative MA karnd (|26.) 
 
 (4) Turn ' Notwithstanding (bti-iouj&deki) you have made your- 
 self in the disguise of men," etc. 
 
 (5) Put the assertion of the correlative clause interrogatively, 
 yeh Ari/d sdbab hai, etc. 
 
 (6) ' Good example is a sine qua non,' namuna shart hai. Comp. 
 
 44. is- 
 
 (7) Place the chief clause first and use the idiom described in 
 56. followed by agarchi. 
 
 (8) Instead of translating ' very long ' literally, use the com- 
 pound phrase t&l-tawtl. 
 
 (9) ' To be enduring and gallant,' mehnat o j&n-fishdnt karnd. 
 
 (10) Follow the English order of the clauses. A strong expres- 
 sion for ' being addicted to ' is marnd (par). The law of Islam is 
 the ishar' _a . 
 
 EXERCISE XXVI. 
 CO-ORDINATE CLAUSES. 
 (1) Appositive or Collateral. 
 
 Another form of the Compound sentence is 
 that in which a simple sentence is extended by the 
 annexure of Co-ordinate clauses. These differ from 
 Subordinate in being accessory, or even antithetic, to the 
 leading sentence rather than explanatory of its parts. 
 They may indeed be connected with it by conjunctions
 
 110 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI 
 
 argumentativelj appropriate to the meaning they convey, 
 but are constructively independent, and this too though 
 they may have common terms. 
 
 Thus, in the proverb kisi ka hath chale, kisi ki zdbdn 
 chale ' one acts, another talks/ chale is a common term, 
 and may be omitted in the co-ordinate clause, as in 
 English, if we translate 'of one the hand moves, of 
 another the tongue.' 
 
 1 3 1 1 Co-ordinate clauses may be conveniently classed 
 as (1) Appositive, (2) Adjunctive, (3) Alternative, (4) Ad- 
 versative. 
 
 The Appositive or Collateral relation is that in which 
 no intermediary conjunction unites the clauses, as in the 
 proverb above quoted. This form of the Compound sen- 
 tence is common in Hindustani, a graphic and fluent 
 language which dispenses as far as possible with punctua- 
 tion either by signs or particles. 
 
 182, Translate into English : 
 
 0) 
 
 (4) 
 
 ))\j* (5) 
 
 (6)
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. Ill 
 
 ,-Ajl <+ ^ (9) 
 
 (10) ^^ / 
 
 183, 
 
 (1) A well-known proverb, which literally means ' Call others jt 
 and be called ji yourself.' KahldnA is a unique example of a verb 
 which is causal in form and passive in sense. 
 
 (2) The co-ordinate clause is here contracted into na ' did I 
 not?' 
 
 (3) See 37. 14. 
 
 (4) The pronoun ilsne is understood in the co-ordinate clause. 
 The Persian hast o ntst ' it is and it is not ' has here the meaning of 
 1 yes or no.' Preserve in translation the etymological connection 
 between the verbals stial and s<J % ii. 
 
 (5) Ifdrd phirnti is an idiomatic expression which applies to a 
 person wandering about in distress. Our phrase ' knocking about ' 
 is something analogous. The speaker alludes to ' the unemployed.' 
 Comp. |76. 5- The co-ordinate clause means 'no one notices 
 (lit. questions) them.' 
 
 (6) Dekhn& ' to look for.' 3d il& is often used for thd in this 
 kind of phrase. Sec |Q. 12. 
 
 (7) The co-ordinate clause in this example is a common idiom. 
 Literally, ' What mention of seeing it ? ' that is, ' Let alone having 
 seen it.' Another mode of expressing the idea is us jagah k& 
 dekhnu. dar kin&r main ne n&m bht nahtn sund ' Setting aside seeing 
 the place, I have not even heard its name.' 
 
 (8) A remark of Galib's on receiving a friend's photograph. See 
 
 60.4. 
 
 (9) Apne sarf-i-zar se ' at my own expense ' ; apnt bikrt ko ' for 
 his own selling,' that is, for recovery of outlay by the proceeds of 
 the publication. 
 
 (10) This, from the Bin&tu-Nfoh of Nazlr Ahmed, is a useful 
 illustration of the concessional sense of saht, (76. 6. The last 
 three clauses are a rejoinder to the first.
 
 112 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) Some are devoted to philosophy, others have a 
 greater liking for mathematics. (2) 1 dared not speak 
 even, let alone laugh. , (3) I asked for leave, and received 
 a flat refusal. (4) You have seen the Taj, haven't you? 
 (5) Some wretch is peeping in by chinks in the door ; 
 scare him away. (6) We have beaten the whole jungle 
 without finding a trace of game anywhere. (7) Why should 
 I object ? I am at the service of my friends. (8) I too 
 was a tremendous sleeper ; I could have backed myself 
 against the dead. (9) A new paper is being started here ; 
 I send two prospectuses with this letter. (10) 1282 A.H. 
 has begun ; I was born in 1212 ; my seventieth year will 
 begin next Rajab. 
 
 185i Directions. 
 
 (1) 'Devoted,' see 176. 4- For co-ordinate clause, see 71. 7- 
 
 (2) On the model of |82. 7- Turn the first clause, 'Tome of 
 speaking (b&t karnA) even daring (ydrd) was not.' 
 
 (3) Omit the conjunction. ' Flat refusal,' sAf jawAb. 
 
 (4) In the form of 1 8 2. 2. ' The Taj,' TAj mahall. 
 
 (5) ' Scare away,' hushkArnA, a rustic word for scaring away 
 birds from the crops. 
 
 (6) ' To beat,' jhArnA. The word was used at |50. " m tne 
 usual sense of ' sweeping.' See 1 8 2 . 6 f r the form of the co- 
 ordinate clause. ' Finding a trace,' aurAg milnA. 
 
 (7) Turn 'In this what is my objection? I am the servant 
 (fchddim) of friends.' 
 
 (8) See 60. 3- The co-ordinate clause is murdon se shart bAndh- 
 kar aott (tht), the speaker being a woman. Shart b&ndhnA ' to 
 wager.' 
 
 (9) ' To be started,' jArt honA ; use the gerund with affix wAld. 
 
 (10) Turn as follows: "The year 1282 hijrt have begun (pi.);
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 113 
 
 my birth is of the year 1212 ; from month of next Kajab seventieth 
 year (sdl) will begin.' ' Next ' may be elegantly translated by ab ke. 
 See the remark made at 4-5. 4 on the nse of izdfat in this con- 
 nection. The sentence is taken from Galib's Letters. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVII. 
 
 CO-ORDINATE CLAUSES continued. 
 (2) Adjunctive. 
 
 n the Adjunctive relation the chief connective 
 is aur. 
 
 This conjunction sometimes denotes simultaneity of 
 event or action, especially with the gerund. It is also 
 employed to mark contrast or antithesis, like ' and ' in 
 English. 
 
 In cases where the adjoined clause implies a logical 
 sequence of thought, aur may be replaced by phir ' then,' 
 phir bhi ' moreover,' pas ' so,' chundnchi ' accordingly.' 
 
 What are apparently adjunctive clauses, introduced by 
 is ICe ' therefore,' or other similar phrases, are de facto 
 principal clauses, which are preceded by causal clauses in 
 which the conjunctions churiki, etc. have been omitted. 
 See 156. 
 
 187i Translate into English: 
 
 ^ (1) 
 
 (2) ^ 
 (4) ^J 1C* ^\ ^. \+], ^ (3) 
 
 ^' (5) ^ ^jt^jj] c^i 
 
 8
 
 114 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (6) 
 
 fl) Sal&h properly means ' what is right,' and may be so ren- 
 dered here, in which case dil let khw&hish may be translated ' what 
 one wishes.' Note the distinction between hai and hott hat. 
 
 (2) From Naztr Ahmed's powerful description of cholera in the 
 first chapter of the Taulat. Jt k& matldna expresses the feeling of 
 nausea, which is one of the first symptoms. The point is that a 
 man was no sooner taken ill than he died. Compare the alternative 
 construction at ISO. 5- 
 
 (3) A well-known proverb. Translate ' What comparison is there 
 between ? ' etc. Raja Bhoj is one of the dominantia noinina of 
 Hindu Literature. 
 
 (4) The aur of contrast in this example may be literally trans- 
 lated. 
 
 (5) We have nothing like this in English. Translate ' Look to 
 your own insignificance before,' etc. Compare the idea of the pro- 
 verb chhot'i munh barf bdt ' Small mouth, big words.' 
 
 (6) For bol-<LthnA, see 73 . (2). Bdt kAtnd ' to out the speech (of 
 another),' that is, to interrupt or contradict. 
 
 (7) For gazab k&, see 24. Bi-z&t-i-kh&d ' in his own person.' 
 
 (8) Fdd /armdnd ' to call for,' used of a superior something like 
 our ' condescend to remember.'
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 115 
 
 (9) This and the next example are specimens of Galib's stylo, 
 of which several have been given already. Galib wrote as he 
 spoke ; and to hear him speak Hindustani was a lesson in itself. 
 Jaztra, of course, means the Andamans. Maulavi Fazl Haqq, whose 
 trial I remember, was a ringleader in the Mutiny of Fifty-seven. 
 
 (10) For socfcd kiyd see (26. Rakh-lt, see 73. (3). 
 
 1 Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) What comparison is there between you a man and 
 me a woman ? (2) First that man came ; then this one ; 
 more yet will be coming. (3) My son, and capable of 
 theft ! (4) This amount of labour, and you gasp for 
 breath ! (5) The autumn harvest was got in, then began 
 cultivation for the spring harvest. (6) You have stuffed 
 in so much wood that there is no passage for the air, and 
 yet you ask why the fire does not burn. (7) It is not ad- 
 visable to leave him to live alone, accordingly let you and 
 him continue together. (8) The Sahib won the first game 
 and I got the second and third : he was vexed at losing 
 two games. (9) It is the property of the loadstone to 
 attract iron, and the nearer the iron is placed to it, the 
 greater is the attracting force. (10) This companionship 
 has altogether spoiled you ; and I regret now that I gave 
 you permission to go to his house. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) On the model of 187.3- Hard, not ddmi, in opposition to 
 'aurat. 
 
 (2) The Past Remote in the first clause, the Past Absolute in the 
 second, and the Present Presumptive in the third. 
 
 (3) ' Capable of theft,' chart karne (ke~) qtibil. 
 
 (4) Use the gerund in the co-ordinate clause : ' gasping for 
 
 8 *
 
 116 EXEBCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 breath/ which in the Hindustani idiom is ' breath coming into the 
 nose/ dam n&k men dnd, an expression which is often used to 
 denote worry or alarm. 
 
 (5) ' To be got in ' may be picturesquely rendered by btr& pdr 
 hon d ' crossing of the raft,' metaphorically applied to a successful 
 result. KhetiyAn pi., better than khett, for ' cultivation,' to denote 
 the various kinds of cultivation for the spring crops. 
 
 (6) Lakriyln, not lakri. Use the Past Absolute for both verbs 
 in the leading clause. 
 
 (7) Omit * to live ' in the first clause, and turn the second 
 'your his companionship (s&th) let remain (rahd tare).' 126. 
 
 (8) Turn the final clause, ' to the Sahib from losing two games 
 (do b'izt h'irne e) vexation was/ 
 
 (9) Turn the first clause, ' In the loadstone this property is that 
 it attracts iron.' ' The nearer,' jix qadr nuzdik. 
 
 (10) ' Altogether ' may be idiomatically rendered pet barhkar 
 ' belly-full.' For ' and ' use pas. For the co-ordinate clause see 
 
 142. (3)- 
 
 EXERCISE XXVIII. 
 
 CO-OEDINATE CLAUSES continued. 
 (3) Alternative. 
 
 191 When the relation between the clauses is 
 Alternative, the Persian conjunction yd ' or,' is used. 
 
 4 Either . . . or ' is yd to . . . yd ; but when the sentence 
 is interrogative, the first yd becomes ayd ' whether/ in 
 which the initial a is apparently vocatival, after the 
 manner of a in are, aji, 5 . 2, though it is true that the 
 particle is written dyd by most authors. 
 
 The conjunction yd occasionally serves to denote a 
 marked difference of conduct or condition, in which case 
 it represents our ' instead of this,' or ' whereas now.'
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 117 
 
 Other alternative conjunctions are the Hindi verbal 
 forms chdhe or chdho, and the corresponding Persian 
 khwdh, the exact counterparts of the Latin vel, sive, sen. 
 
 The interrogative kyd also acts the part of an alterna- 
 tive conjunction, when things or persons are contrasted. 
 
 102 1 Negative alternation is expressed by na . . . 
 aur na ' neither . . . nor,' the Latin nee . . . neque. 
 
 Na . . . na is also used, and occasionally the first na is 
 dropped, especially in set phrases, such as sdn na gumdn 
 ' nor sign nor suspicion,' that is, ' unexpectedly,' ' without 
 warning ' ; ziydda na kam ' neither more nor less.' 
 
 The English alternative particle ' else ' is represented 
 in Hindustani by the compounds nahm to or warna (wa 
 agar na ' and if not '), which are in reality conditional 
 clauses in a contracted form. 
 
 103 1 Translate into English : 
 u^o*. ^^ ^ ^1 \ ^ f (1) 
 
 (3) T>i U^i UUb / r K m y li (2) 
 
 (5) ^y* u*s ^i^j IH) \ 
 
 . y 
 
 (6) 
 
 (8) 
 ^ ^ J 
 
 (9) 1^50 r i c^l^ <>
 
 118 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 194. Notes. 
 
 (1) Compare 60. 5- -f* wahfn may be used for t/d nahfn when 
 the clause is subordinate. 
 
 (2) The alternative clause is a proverbial expression, which 
 means literally ' appear moving about,' and may be rendered ' move 
 on ' or ' be off. 1 
 
 (4) The sentiment is Galib's. Nasr&n (pi. Tictadrd), ' Nazarene,' 
 is the term used in the Qoran to describe Christians. Krishtln is 
 the term in ordinary use. 
 
 (5) The construction is peculiar. Literally translated, we should 
 have, ' Searching will not find,' etc. The sense is, ' Search as you 
 may, yon will not find,' etc. Ahl-i-hirfa ' persons engaged in trade,' 
 ' tradesmen.' 
 
 (7) Proverbial. Men are supposed to be squatting round a fire, 
 and the superstition is that if a person pushes in between two of 
 them to procure a light, there will be a quarrel. 
 
 (8) Hawdla dend ' to refer to.' The co-ordinate clause is a com- 
 pound conditional sentence interrogatively stated : ' It was impos- 
 sible but that I should have answered it,' or ' I should of course 
 have answered it.' 
 
 (9) This distich is from a poem by Mnnsif on the Mutiny, and 
 expresses his idea of the cause. Rum and RUBS always stand for 
 the Turkish and Russian empires in Persian literature. Observe 
 that the first no. is dropped, (92. ^ a * parenthetic, may be trans- 
 lated here ' and nothing else.' 
 
 (10) This graphic bit of description is from the Taubat, Ch. II. 
 Observe the our of simultaneity, and translate ' He no sooner set 
 foot inside,' etc.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 119 
 
 Sahm charhft ' a panic mounted on,' where the English idiom is 
 ' fell upon.' Yd ab ' whereas now.' 
 
 The idiom of the Aorist bajtio corresponds exactly with our own. 
 
 195 1 Translate into Hindustani : 
 (1) I have committed no offence either against God or 
 against man. (2) Either accompany me or go about 
 your business. (3) Put the lota in the shade or the milk 
 will turn. (4) The whole city, Hindus and Mahomedans 
 alike, are praying for his recovery. (5) Have the Mau- 
 lavis decreed that India is a ' habitation of war ' or not ? 
 (6) If it will answer your purpose to mortgage the 
 house, well ; if not, sell it. (7) A week ago I despaired 
 of life, whereas to-day I was able to get up and join the 
 company. (8) I am perplexed whether to go home or 
 spend the hot weather on the hills. (9) Did you confess 
 of your own accord, or did someone prompt you to do 
 so ? (10) My paper is used up, or I would have written 
 on for your amusement. 
 
 19f> i Directions. 
 
 (1) In the Hindustani idiom ' any offence neither,' etc. ' Against ' 
 may be translated here by the sign of izdfat the objective geni- 
 tive. 
 
 (2) For the first clause, see 91.4; f r the second clause, 1 93 . 2 - 
 
 (3) Either literally, sdya men rakho or dhdp se bachtfo ' protect 
 from the sun,' followed by nahtn to. 
 
 (4) ' H. and M. alike,' chdho Hindd chdho Muxalmdn. 
 
 (5) ' To decree,' in the Islamic sense, fatwd dend. ' Habitation 
 of war,' ddru-l-harb, the technical term for a country in which a 
 jehdd or ' crescentade ' is lawful, if it is feasible. 
 
 (6) Omit ' if ' and ' your." ' To answer one's purpose,' k&m ni~ 
 kalnd (se). 
 
 (7) ' A week ago,' ek hafta hOd. ' To despair of life,' jdn se hdth 
 dhond.
 
 120 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (8) ' To go home,' wil&yat j&nd. Turn the second clause, ' in the 
 heats ((jarmi'on men) to reside on the hill.' 
 
 (9) ' Of yoar own accord,' dp e dp or apne dp u. Omit ' to do 
 so ' in the co-ordinate clause. 
 
 (10) Omit all the pronouns. The verb in the co-ordinate clause 
 will be in the Past Conditional tense. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIX. 
 
 CO-OBDINATE CLAUSES continued. 
 
 (4) Adversative. 
 
 . When a co-ordinate clause restricts or qualifies 
 the first, the relation is Adversative, and the conjunctions 
 in use are par, lekin, magar, or balki, all of which have 
 the general sense of * but.' Of these magar is preferen- 
 tially used for the introduction of an exception or after- 
 thought ; and lalki generally has the enhancive sense of 
 ' nay more,' or ' nay rather.' To bhi l nevertheless ' and 
 ('ilium ' yet still ' are also used as adversative conjunc- 
 tions. 
 
 Compound sentences of this class are often little more 
 than a rhetorical variation of those which form the 
 subject of Exercises XXIII. and XXV. 
 
 1 98. Translate into English : 
 
 (2)
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 121 
 
 *Jb (3) 
 
 199, N 
 
 (1) For 6aM se see 77. 15. For auqdt see |65. 8 - Observe 
 the structure of the adversative clause in this example and in (3). 
 Comp. the phrasing of |37. I S- 
 
 (3) Magar hdn (the French mats out), in English generally 'yes,' 
 introductory of an afterthought. MerA kh&tir-khw&h ' suited to my 
 ideas.' Comp. |57. 7- 
 
 (4) The interrogative kyA strengthens the adversative lalki, ' nay 
 more,' by deprecating, as it were, the previous remark. Batki may 
 even be omitted, as in (6), (9). Lend means ' taking ' something 
 which is given. 'Ain tumhtirti rupdya, literally, ' exactly your 
 money.' See (40. 2, and compare the phrases 'ain waqt par ' in 
 the nick of time,' 'am ara^ men ' right in the road.' The clause 
 may be rendered, ' his money is really yours.' 
 
 (5) Khali Hasan karke, literally, ' specifying him as Hasan only.' 
 Compare the phrase ek ek karke ' one by one.' |25. IO - For the 
 position of the negative see 68. "
 
 122 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (6) ' Black indeed ! Why, ho is, so to say, an upturned griddle.' 
 Our way of putting it would be, ' Dark indeed ! Why, he is as black 
 as my hat.' 
 
 (7) Ap ke duahman (or diuhmantin-i-hu:Ar) 'your enemies,' 
 meaning ' yourself.' Oriental politeness, or servility, avoids the 
 association of illness with the person of a superior, and prefers to 
 ascribe it to an enemy. Ga'f guzrt bdt ' a thing of the past.' 
 
 (8) Translate the adversative clause, ' but no one was kicked.' 
 K ist ke, not kist ko. See 51. I Si where it was explained that ke t 
 not ko, marks the person affected, when the verb used is not transi- 
 tive. 
 
 (9) Translate ' This is not a dog you keep, but a money-changer.' 
 From the story in the Alf Laila, where a dog is described as able 
 to detect counterfeit coin. For aorrd/seo App. A, Rein. 5 (5). 
 
 (10) Ba-muq&bala-i-yakdigar ' in comparison with one another.' 
 For mutawcuiit see App. A, Form V. 
 
 2OOi Translate into Hindustani : 
 
 (1) Your comfort, nay more, your safety depends on 
 your withdrawing from their society. (2) He and I had 
 a long consultation in the matter of this outbreak, but 
 no remedy was arranged. (3) No such book is obtain- 
 able ; but stay, there are several works on grammar in 
 the Government Library : if you wish it, I will send for 
 them. (4) I tried very hard: the cotton kept coming 
 into the eye of the needle, but never got threaded, 
 (o) You have performed a cure ; nay, a miracle. (6) What 
 do you mean by misapprehension of orders? The plain 
 fact is you have been guilty of wilful disobedience. 
 
 (7) Neither you nor I will read, but he whose turn it is. 
 
 (8) You may well call him intelligent he has an old 
 head on young shoulders. (9) Not we alone the whole 
 city, I may say, long for his advent. (10) Talk as much as 
 you please, a man's life is the dearest of his possessions.
 
 EXEKCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 123 
 
 2Oli Directions. 
 
 (1) Turn ' Depends on (men) this that you withdraw,' etc. 
 
 (2) Turn ' For a long time (der tofc) in the matter (bdra) of this 
 outbreak my his together (6<17iam) consultation was,' etc. ' To be 
 arranged," ban-parnd. 
 
 (3) On the model of (98. 3- 'Grammar,' sarf-nahv, lit. ' in- 
 flection and syntax.' ' If you wish it,' irshdd ho. 
 
 (4) ' Cotton-thread,' d/idgrd. The ' eye ' of a needle is the 
 ' mouth* in Hindustani. ' Never got threaded,' piroyA nahtn gay&. 
 
 (5) On the model of 198.9 
 
 (6) Turn ' misapprehension what meaning P Rather (balki") the 
 plain (sd/) word is this that you have knowingly done disobe- 
 dience-of-orders.' 
 
 (7) Turn ' neither I will read nor you will read, but (balki) whose 
 turn (it) will be.' 
 
 (8) Turn ' Intelligent what ! thus say, that a beard is on (men) 
 his belly ' meaning that he has a long beard. The phrase is pro- 
 verbial, and is perhaps the nearest equivalent to the English of the 
 text. 
 
 (9) Turn ' We folk indeed well the whole city is desirous 
 (musht&q) of his advent (dmad).' 
 
 (10) Turn ' One may say a lakh (Idkh kot kahe~), but more than 
 all his own life (apnl j<in~) is dear to everyone.' 
 
 END OP PART IF.
 
 124 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 PART III. 
 
 SELECTED PASSAGES FOR 
 TRANSLATION INTO HINDUSTANI. 
 
 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. 
 
 t, The illustrations of Grammar and Syntax and of 
 the more important differences of idiom between Hindu- 
 stani and English, which are contained in the foregoing 
 Exercises, are by the nature of the case fragmentary and 
 unconnected ; and, though they are sufficient for their 
 immediate purpose of teaching colloquial Hindustani, 
 something more is wanted before the student can attempt 
 with confidence the task of translating continuous 
 English narrative, even of the simplest kind, into good 
 Hindustani prose. In a word, the diction of the. lan- 
 guage must be studied and an insight gained into the 
 formation of periods and paragraphs and their linkature 
 tantum series juncturaque pallet before satisfactory 
 progress can be made in this direction. Under ordinary 
 circumstances this kind of knowledge is best acquired 
 by an observant study of the best authors, but the short 
 time usually at the disposal of the learner in this country 
 is absorbed, so far as the text-books are concerned, in
 
 EXEBCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 125 
 
 spelling out and committing to memory the words, and 
 in grappling, among other novelties, with the want of 
 punctuation ; and the consequence is that translation 
 from English into Hindustani is the bugbear of the 
 Examination room and ever afterwards. 
 
 It may, therefore, be useful at this point to summarise 
 in brief the more obvious features of the literary lan- 
 guage, as a help to appreciation of style, and as a basis 
 of a few suggestions for the encouragement and guidance 
 of scholars in their first attempts at imitation. 
 
 *2 M Urdu was, in its beginnings, a modus vivendi 
 between the Hindu tribes of Northern India and their 
 Moslem conquerors, which owed its origin to the neces- 
 sities of the times, and is now their most valuable relic. 
 It has become by gradual refinement and adaptation the 
 mother tongue of Hindus and Mahomedans alike, and 
 lends itself to their respective needs and prejudices with 
 equal facility. Both parties in the compromise have held 
 their own ; for, though the Persian character and vocabu- 
 lary have been naturalised without essential change, 
 much in the same way as the Mahomedans themselves 
 have become part and parcel of the population, the core 
 and structure of the language are Hindi and Hindi 
 alone. The student will do well, therefore, to bear in 
 mind from the very first that a due recognition of the 
 Aryan basis of Hindustani is essential to a right under- 
 standing of the genius of the language.* 
 
 * See, when opportunity occurs, the remarks made on this sub- 
 ject by Raja Siva Prasad in the English preface to the first edition 
 of his Grammar of the Vernacular. The prose of Haulavi Xa/.ir 
 Ahmed and MirzA Nausha (Galib), both of Dehli, and the verse
 
 126 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 3 1 Simplicity and directness, for example, are among 
 the most valuable qualities of Hindustani, which it owes 
 to its base-form. This may be discerned in various par- 
 ticulars, to which the attention of the student has been 
 already drawn ; such, for example, as the use of words of 
 which the meaning varies with the context, the device of 
 doubling words to denote energy or distribution, the 
 absence of case-endings, the avoidance of epithets, the 
 large use of the Substantive Verb and of elementary 
 verbs of action and movement, the terseness effected by 
 the use of the Past Conjunctive Participle and of Causal 
 and Compound Verbs, the exactitude of the tense- 
 system, the preference for realistic description which is 
 manifested in the use of the oratio recta and in the 
 avoidance of impersonal statements, and lastly, a certain 
 old world mannerism which proceeds from the love of 
 what is familiar and conventional. 
 
 4, The Semitic aftergrowth has supplemented the 
 expressiveness of Hindustani, without obscuring the 
 native simplicity of the ground-form, for the exercise 
 of a choice in words has tended to the survival of the 
 fittest, irrespectively of their origin. The best writer is 
 he who uses these ' fittest ' words, and the best scholar 
 he who knows why they are the ' fittest,' either per se, or 
 with reference to the circumstances under which they are 
 employed. 
 
 *>, Another characteristic of the Vernacular is the 
 
 of Naztr of Agra, owe their excellence to the fact that these 
 writers, albeit Mahomedan by birth and education, have accepted 
 the circumstances under which Urdu became a language and 
 have used it accordingly.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 127 
 
 occasional ceremoniousness of the phraseology. The art 
 of putting things vernaliter, i.e. with attention to etiquette 
 and custom, is a feature of orientalism which adds dignity 
 to the affairs of common life ; and though, in the case of 
 Hindustani, the forms used are mostly Persian, they are 
 sufficiently in accord with Hindu sentiment to be very 
 generally appropriate. 
 
 f> M More distinctly rhetorical characteristics of the 
 language are the regard paid to euphony and rhythm, 
 not only in words and clauses, but throughout whole 
 periods, and the management of the linkature rather 
 by subtle changes in the form and setting of the diction 
 than by the use of connective particles.* 
 
 Y M Suggestions for Guidance. 
 
 (1) Alteration in the normal order of the words in a 
 transpositive language like Hindustani is a natural 
 
 * Part II. deals with the principles of clause formation rather in 
 a syntactical point of view than as an element of style, which, as 
 said above, is best studied at first-hand from books. Students are 
 now exceptionally fortunate in the possession of an admirable text- 
 liook, the Taubat of Naztr Ahmed. This is a story of everyday 
 life among a class of natives who speak Hindustani in its perfec- 
 tion, by one of themselves. It abounds in dialogue, is didactic 
 and rhetorical in parts, and supplies incidentally a large number of 
 words used in public as well as private life, and is the best avail- 
 able resource (no better could be desired) for obtaining a mastery 
 of the language, for whatever purposes it may be required. It is 
 most earnestly hoped that Probationers for the Indian Civil Service, 
 or officers who desire to cultivate the ' great Indian Vernacular ' for 
 practical purposes, will not rest content with a hasty perusal of 
 the first few chapters only which the Examiners demand, but that 
 they will complete the study of the entire work after they have 
 become domiciled in India, and make it their vade mccum, for such, 
 in more ways than one, it deserves to be.
 
 128 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 means of emphasis, which the translator should make 
 the most of, so long as he is careful to avoid ambiguity 
 or dissonance. 
 
 (2) It has been alieady pointed out that expressions 
 connected with the use of Time take the precedence. 
 Time also is the chief function of the verb, and closes 
 the utterance. Of all tenses none require more care in 
 translation than the English present. Thus, in such a 
 sentence as ' Send him to me when he comes,' the tem- 
 poral clause means 'when he has come,' and the verb 
 must be rendered in Hindustani by a Past tense. Com- 
 pare the sentences given at 4*4. 5 and 68. 5- See 
 also 162. 
 
 (3) Where there is a choice of terms or phrases, the 
 most familiar is likely to be the fittest, but it is good 
 style to vary the rendering, if the term recurs. In 
 examinations, the student should remember that the 
 knowledge of a word includes ability to spell it correctly 
 (see 6. 4). If he is at a loss for the representative 
 of a word, of which the meaning is important to the 
 general sense of the passage before him for translation, 
 he should use a paraphrase rather than leave a gap or 
 resort to transliteration. 
 
 (4) Exactitude in the use of pronouns, whether as a 
 matter of grammar or etiquette, is essential. They are 
 omitted only when the sense is unmistakeable without 
 them. The usage of the Reflexive apnd (see Exercise VI.) 
 is specially important. 
 
 (5) The realism of Hindustani bars the easy transfer 
 of personal qualities to things inanimate and vice versii, 
 which is characteristic of English. (See 24.) It is better 
 to omit an epithet than translate it unidiomatically.
 
 BXEECI8ES IN HINDUSTANI. 129 
 
 (6) Personal and individual expression being charac- 
 teristic of Hindustani, the English Passive should not be 
 literally reproduced in translation, except when the 
 agency is necessarily or intentionally vague. For 
 example, such a sentence as ' The throne was occupied by 
 a tyrant ' can only be rendered ' A tyrant sat upon the 
 throne,' whereas ' Many men were killed in the battle ' 
 may be translated literally. 
 
 Hindi neuter verbs and Arabic and Persian verbals in 
 combination with hond are often convenient representa- 
 tives of the English Passive. (See 119.) 
 
 (7) The English prepositions ' of,' ' to,' ' for,' ' by,' and 
 ' with ' after adjectives and verbs require careful atten- 
 tion, or breaches of idiom will be inevitable. In this 
 matter, the earlier sections of this work are very im- 
 portant. 
 
 (8) Clause for clause translation is equally ineffective 
 with word for word translation, whether from English 
 into Hindustani or from Hindustani into English, for 
 the English arrangement of sentences and their parts, 
 pauses, and parentheses is no guide to the formation of 
 a Hindustani period, and must often be broken up by 
 inversion or detachment to suit the methods of the latter. 
 The translator should realise the general sense and argu- 
 ment of the passage he is engaged upon, and think how 
 best he could explain it in outline to a native ignorant of 
 English. 
 
 (9) In particular, the initial sentence should always 
 be clearly and concisely worded, by the detachment of 
 accessories, which may either form a separate sentence or 
 be pieced in with what follows. 
 
 (10) The adjustment of relative clauses is often a key 
 
 9
 
 130 EXERCISES IV HINDUSTANI. 
 
 to the cast of a period or paragraph. These clauses, and 
 indeed all clauses which, in the idiom of Hindustani, 
 precede the main statement, are especially useful in the 
 passage from point to point of a description, without the 
 more formal linkature of conjunctions, and at the same 
 time without sacrifice of coherence. As in Latin, a great 
 point is to let the verbs have room. 
 
 Punctuation is, or ought to he, inherent in the dic- 
 tion.* 
 
 (11) A good prose style includes attention to sound as 
 well as to sense ; in other words, to the choice of harmo- 
 nious words and phrases, and to concinnity and congruity 
 in their combination, and to the symmetrical and rhythmic 
 balancement of clauses.f 
 
 (12) Finally, the student will find it an invaluable 
 assistance in translation to have stored his memory with 
 specimen passages from the text-book, or with any well- 
 told tale or description he may meet with. 
 
 * Native publications are never punctuated, but a good reader, 
 though he makes no pauses except in the momentary action of 
 taking breath, is always intelligible to the practised listener. I 
 have among my papers a tract lithographed for private circulation 
 in 1863, in which the writer instructs his compatriots in the art of 
 humouring the foibles of the ' Sahib-log.' One suggestion, under 
 the head of Office- work, is that when a Mnnshi has t read papers 
 to the Sahib, be should make pauses in the English fashion so as to 
 enable him (the Sahib) to understand. 
 
 t Carried to excess, this is the rangtnl 'eb&rat (or ' florid style ') 
 of the Lucknow school. The plausibility of native ' petitions ' and 
 the skill with which half-truths and the inferences therefrom are 
 disguised by a caressing smoothness of diction, have often been 
 noticed. This is the charb-zabdnt, or ' oiliness of speech,' of the 
 professional scribe, and is a very different thing from the *htrtn- 
 tabAnt of the accomplished author.
 
 EXEECISE8 IN HINDUSTANI. 131 
 
 3, The Selected Passages which follow are divided 
 into four sections of gradually increasing difficulty, 
 though it is necessary to remember that the simplest 
 English is not always the easiest to translate. 
 
 (1) Fables and Apologues. Many of these are ancient 
 friends in a slightly altered guise. They are adapted, 
 for the purposes of this work, from the original Hindu- 
 stani of Nazir Ahmed. 
 
 (2) Easy Narratives from Modern Indian History. 
 These extracts are translated from a History of India 
 written in the Hindi language for the use of country 
 schools by Raja Siva Prasad, C.S.I., whose name has 
 been mentioned in the note at p. 125. 
 
 (3) Miscellaneous Pieces, relating to Indian subjects. 
 The first nine of these form a single narrative from the 
 pen of the late Lord Lawrence, which is quoted in Vol. I. 
 of Mr. Bosworth Smith's admirable Life, and are chosen 
 partly for their continuity and partly for the interest 
 and suitability of the subject-matter. The remaining 
 Pieces of this Section are selected for exercise in trans- 
 lating from a style of English which is not easily handled 
 in Hindustani. They are borrowed from Dow son's Exer- 
 cises, a work which contains no sufficient hints for the 
 guidance of the student, and is, therefore, little used. 
 The notes refer to a translation of my own, which was 
 made for the benefit of Officers under my instruction at 
 the Staff College in 1882. 
 
 (4) Her Majesty's Proclamation on assuming the 
 Empire of India at the Close of the Mutiny. This was 
 read aloud in the first instance at a Darbar held at 
 Allahabad on November 1st, 1858. The authorised ver- 
 sion of this document, which was recited upon the same 
 
 9 *
 
 132 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 occasion, was the work of the Mir Munshi of the Foreign 
 Office at that time, and is referred to in the notes 
 attached. The stateliness of the English original is 
 fairly represented in translation, and the terms are well 
 chosen.* 
 
 SECTION I. 
 FABLES AND APOLOGUES. 
 
 1. 
 
 'A starving fowl was scratching at a dung-hill in 
 search of a grain of corn, when after a long time it 
 suddenly 2 came upon a costly pearl. 8 ' Alas ! for my 
 
 * Farther practice for the advanced student may be found in the 
 study of the Urdu versions of the Indian Penal and Civil Proce- 
 dure Codes, which illustrate the efficacy of the language as a legal 
 instrument. They who wish to proceed farther may consult the 
 translation of Mill's Political Economy, which was published by the 
 Aligarh Society some years ago, or a recently finished version of 
 the First Part of Butler's Analogy, by Mr. Williams of Shahjehan- 
 pur. Both these works are fairly successful illustrations of the 
 adaptability of Hindustani for the purposes of sustained argument 
 and philosophical disquisition. For Logic, the best available 
 treatise in the Vernacular is M. Naztr Ahmed's Mub-nli ul Ilikmat 
 (1st Edit. 1871), which is based on Persian and Arabic works in 
 use among the Mohamedans. A work in English and Urdu, by 
 Rev. T. J. Scott, of the American Mission in Oudh and llohilkhand, 
 called Quw'Cif ul Mantiq (1873), (should be an equally valuable aid 
 to Missionaries and others who are interested in the inner life of 
 the Indian Moslems.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 133 
 
 ill-luck ! ' sighed the unhappy fowl. ' After all this toil 
 4 I have got only a pearl, 5 which can neither soothe my 
 feelings nor appease my hunger. 6 If some jeweller 
 or rich man had found it, he would have prized and 
 loved it ; 7 but I am hungry enough to prefer a single 
 grain of barley to any number of such pearls as this.' 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) Omit ' when ' before the second clause, so as to make the 
 clauses co-ordinate. Note that of the five indefinite articles in the 
 first sentence the first and last are to be represented by ek. Omit 
 ' of corn,' as the term is general, but retain ' of barley ' in the last 
 sentence. ' Starving ' would be insufficiently rendered by bhdkhA 
 'hungry.' The better way is to avoid the epithet and say 'being 
 distressed by hunger,' bh&k se be-tdb hokar, to follow the noun. 
 For the verb use kurid-rahnti, and omit ' at,' which is really a part 
 of the verb. Use ko with the object. 
 
 (2) The independence of the second clause will be increased by 
 changing the subject of the verb. Say, therefore, ' a pearl turned 
 up' (ntftoZnd). See 198. 4- 
 
 (3) This sentence requires consideration. To begin with, the 
 parenthetical use of the verb is impossible in Hindustani. Then 
 again, our peculiar use of the verb ' sigh ' cannot be reproduced, 
 and ' unhappy ' is best avoided as an epithet of ' fowl.' Turn, 
 therefore, ' Seeing the pearl, the fowl sighed dolefully and said, 
 Alas ! ' etc. (to end of piece). 
 
 (-4) The contemptuous turn of the expression may be given by 
 inverting the order of the words and introducing the emphatic 
 particles bhi and to, as mujhko mild bhi to mot I. 
 
 (5) Avoid the idea of agency, which the English idiom easily 
 attributes to inanimate things, by turning thus : ' from which neither 
 solace can be to my heart nor quieting to my hunger.' 
 
 (6) Begin with yeh mott instead of the pronoun ' it,' and see 
 Exercise XXIV. for the tense of the verbs. 
 
 (7) The adversative clause should be constructed in harmony 
 with the preceding, as follows : ' but in my behalf in such hunger
 
 134 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 one grain of barley would havt been (tha) much better than a l<ikh 
 (see 201. IO ) f BQC h pearls as this.' To express ' such . . . aa 
 this,' double the pronominal adjective. 
 
 2. 
 
 1 Someone taxed a lazy fellow with lying long in bed 
 after he was awake, and asked him how he occupied him- 
 self. He replied that - he occupied himself in deciding 
 a very intricate case. 3 'When I wake up,' said he, 
 'two fellows, 4 called Activity and Sloth, come to me. 
 5 Activity tells me to get up at once and engage in my 
 worldly duties. Sloth replies that there is no need to 
 get up yet the whole day 6 is left for worldly duties ; 
 
 7 one should take one's ease in the cool of the morning. 
 
 8 And so they go on, each trying to convince his oppo- 
 nent, while I arbitrate between them. 9 Surely you will 
 allow that such a difficult case cannot be decided in a 
 hurry ? ' 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) This piece consists of two parts, a question and the reply. The 
 first sentence contains the question, and may be turned as follows : 
 
 ' ' Someone asked a lazy fellow that your eye indeed opens rarly 
 in the morning, but what do you keep doing lying on and on in bed 
 till so late?' See 1 14. 3,8. 
 
 (2) Begin the reply here with the oratio recta, omitting ' said he ' 
 in the next clause. 
 
 (3) Repeat the phrase used by the questioner. 
 
 (4) Express this parenthetically : ' the name of one is A. and the 
 name of the other 8.' 
 
 (5) To bring out the personality, instead of ' Activity,' say ' that 
 person whose name is Activity'; and so for 'Sloth' in the next 
 entencc. 
 
 (6) ' Is left,' par A hai. See ||7. 2.
 
 EXEBCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 135 
 
 (7) Omit the conjunction and tuin ' This time of coolness is for 
 ease.' 
 
 (8) Turn 'In short, the two opponents go on convincing one 
 another, and I,' etc. Use the Progressive form ofverb(||8.) i 
 the first clause, and the Continuative (| 26 ) * n tne other. 
 
 (9) This form of appeal to justice is more directly expressed in 
 Hindustani, as follows: 'Do you do justice (imp.), that, how can 
 such a difficult case be decided quickly ? ' Comp. 176. 8. 
 
 3, 
 
 1 An old man and his son were on a journey. They 
 had a pony with them for carrying their traps, and went 
 on foot themselves. The people said, 2 ' What idiots 
 these two are ! 3 They keep the pony for show and do 
 the hard work themselves.' 4 On this the old man 
 mounted the pony, and then they said, ' What a cruel 
 father ! He rides 5 at ease himself, and the son 6 plods 
 wearily along behind.' Then the old man got off and 
 made his son ride ; 7 and the cry was, ' What a grace- 
 less son ! The aged sire walks, and 8 the sturdy youth 
 is not ashamed to ride.' Then the old man rode in 
 front himself and mounted his son behind. Again the 
 people said, 9 ' Apparently it is a borrowed pony, and 
 carries the men and the baggage too ! 10 Have the 
 fellows no pity ? ' 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) The form of this piece needs little alteration. The difficulty 
 is the choice of natural and congruous terms suited to the simple 
 humour of the piece. The second sentence may be introduced by 
 aur, and more pointedly expressed as follows : ' A pony was with 
 (them) (they) loaded on the pony (their) clothes and bedding, 
 and both father and son went on foot.' P<Ton p&on chalnA, better
 
 136 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 here than paidal chalnA (|43 . ?) 2*hd being the verb of the first 
 clause, omit the auxiliaries of the two Past Imperfects which follow. 
 
 (2) Introduce this, and the corresponding clauses which begin 
 with ' What,' by dekho ' See ! ' 
 
 (3) The idiomatic phrase total rakhnA closely corresponds to the 
 idea of ' keeping for show ' in this connection. The next clause 
 may be turned ' themselves (kh&d) take up trouble.' 
 
 (4) ' On this ' is best given by yeh tunkar ' hearing this.' 
 
 (5) ' At ease,' maza men, or maze men, as the translator chooses 
 lit. ' in taste,' ' nicely.' 
 
 (6) The purposed dragging of this clause may be represented in 
 Hindustani by a similar lengthening of the phrase, pA'on pffon 
 ptchhe ghatittA hu& chalA At A hai. See 1 2 1 . 
 
 (7) The English phrase may be replaced by ' Then too the people 
 said,' to correspond with the terms already used. 
 
 (8) Turn thus : ' Himself (kh&d) the shameless sturdy youth is 
 riding.' 
 
 (9) ' Apparently,' ma'ldm hot'i hai. See 5 . '4- Turn the 
 next clause, ' besides the baggage two men are loaded (on it),' lad- 
 Ife hain. 
 
 (10) Turn ' To them even does no pity come ? ' Comp. 68.4- 
 
 4. 
 
 1 A Lion, a Bear, a Leopard, and a Wolf, in search 
 of prey, settled to go to the river marshes and hunt in 
 company, 2 on the understanding that they were to 
 share and share alike in what was captured. 8 As it 
 happened, they killed a nylghau, and this they divided 
 into four equal shares in accordance with their agree- 
 ment. * Each was about to take his share, when the 
 Lion said, ' Listen, uiy friends ; one of these shares is 
 mine by right of treaty ; I claim the second 5 because 
 I am king of the forest 6 and receive a fourth of what- 
 ever is killed there by way of tribute ; I shall take the 
 third share 5 because it includes the heart and liver, 
 which you are aware is my 7 favourite food ; 8 and as
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 137 
 
 for the fourth share, to avoid the difficulty of dividing 
 it between you three, 9 1 may as well consume it 
 myself.' 10 With this, the Lion devoured all four 
 shares, while his friends looked blankly on. 
 
 Directio-ns. 
 
 (1) The first sentence is the most difficult here, and may be 
 broken up as follows to suit the Hindustani idiom. Begin with a 
 short sentence in these terms : ' A Lion and a Bear and a Leopard 
 and a Wolf, the 4 four (c/idron) were in search of prey,' omitting the 
 indefinite articles in translation. The next sentence will be, ' They 
 all agreed that,' followed by the oratio recta. See 1 4-6 . 12. 
 
 (2) The junctura here may be effected by the use of a relati ve 
 clause, ' What prey will be found, we will all four together divide 
 into equal shares.' 
 
 (3) All the pronouns may be omitted in this sentence. ' As it 
 happened * is best translated by the Arabic adverb ittifdqan. 
 
 (4) Turn 'It was near that,' etc. (150. !3)> an d take care to 
 double the reflexive pronoun. Begin a fresh clause at ' when,' 
 itne men. 
 
 (5) For ' because,' see 156. nub fin. 
 
 (6) Here again the junctura is best effected by a relative clause, 
 jo kahin shikar ho. For ' by way of,' see (51.6 
 
 (7) The Arabic giza, may serve for adjective and noun together. 
 
 (8) The best way of turning this is ' There remained the fourth 
 share,' raha, chauthvi hissa, followed by the correlative no, and the 
 sentence then proceeds ' I do not know how to divide,' etc. 
 
 (9) A fresh clause, ' than this it is better that,' etc. 
 
 (10) ' With this ' should be translated yeh kahkar ' so saying.' 
 Compare Note (4) to last Piece. ' To look blankly on,' or ' gaze 
 stupidly,' munh-dekhtd rah-jdnd, and see ||2. 8 fora suitable turn 
 of the expression. 
 
 5. 
 
 1 A Cock, perched on the bough of a tree, was 
 crowing away to his heart's content, when a Cat observed
 
 138 
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 him, and 2 being desirous of tempting him into her 
 clutches, saluted him in a free and easy manner, and 
 said : 8 ' Well, Mr. Cock, have you heard the proclama- 
 tion ? ' What proclamation ? ' said the Cock. * ' Ha ! 
 ha ! ' laughed the Cat, ' then you don't yet know ? 6 A 
 Committee of all the animals, beasts and birds, has been 
 sitting these ten days since, and they have solemnly 
 agreed that for the future no animal shall oppress or ill- 
 use another, but that all shall pass their lives in peace 
 and harmony. 'A declaration to this effect has been 
 signed by all the animals, and read aloud in the King's, 
 that is to say, the Lion's, Darbar.' ' Praised be God ! ' 
 cried the Cock. ' I am rejoiced to hear it. A great 
 7 cause of anxiety is removed.' 8 He had no sooner said 
 this than he stretched out his neck and 9 clucked in an 
 ominous fashion, just as if something alarming had 
 come in view. 10 ' Bless me ! What are you frightened 
 at? 'asked the Cat. 'Oh! nothing,' said the Cock; 'a 
 couple of hounds n are racing in this direction.' ^Oii 
 this the Cat tucked in her tail and prepared to move 
 on. The Cock said : 13 ' How now ? Madam Puss, where 
 is your ladyship off to? I thought this was the era 
 of peace and harmony.' ' True ! ' said the Cat, ' but 
 how can one tell whether these dogs have heard the 
 proclamation or not ? Perhaps, like you, they don't yet 
 know.' 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) Begin, as in the last piece, with a simple sentence, and omit 
 the ' when ' of the succeeding clause. The idea of ' was crowing 
 away ' may be conveyed in the Hindustani idiom by ' was giving 
 crow on crow ' ; and a certain piquancy may be communicated to
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 139 
 
 the expression by using, in place of the ordinary word bdng ' crow,' 
 the term azdn ' call of the Muezzin,' which is permissible by asso- 
 ciation of ideas. Such a phrase as ' to his heart's content ' cannot 
 be literally translated ; khfaht ki hdlat men ' in a state of happiness ' 
 conveys the idea. 
 
 (2) This may be conveniently broken up as follows : ' Desired 
 that having brought him down by some stratagem (d/iab) she may 
 finish his job. The Cat in a free and easy manner,' etc. 
 
 (3) ' Well ' may be omitted, though bhald is common enough. 
 ' Mr. Cock,' miy&n murghe (vocative). 
 
 (4) In Hindustani ' The Cat said ahd,' etc. 
 
 (5) Put the temporal expression first, and instead of saying ' a 
 committee of all the animals,' etc., turn thus, ' a Committee has 
 been going on : the animals of the whole world, beasts and birds, 
 were collected,' etc. 
 
 (6) Turn : ' A declaration of this agreement having been made 
 (bankar~), the signatures of all the animals were attached (h&e) 
 t hat declaration was read out,' etc. 
 
 (7) ' Cause of anxiety,' in one word, khadsha. 
 
 (8) Either turn this in the way shown in |50. 8, or use the 
 expression ' in this interval,' ist danniy&n men, or simpler, itne 
 men. 
 
 (9) Turn thus : ' clucked in such a manner that, as it were, some 
 alarming thing came suddenly in sight.' See 92. ' 
 
 (10) The corresponding interjection is khair to hai ? followed by 
 ' having seen what are you afraid ? ' 
 
 (11) For this idiom see 1 21 . 
 
 (12) Turn thus : ' Hearing this the Cat having depressed her 
 tail began-to-move ' (Inceptive compound). 
 
 (13) Turn thus : ' Why, lady, Madam Cat, where are you taking 
 yourself off to ? ' Ky&n bi gurba khdnam kahdn tashrif le-jdte JM, 
 or He might be used for lc. See |Q8. ( 2 )- 
 
 6. 
 
 A poor countryman collected honey from the combs 
 and l carried a jar full to the town for sale. - He 
 was alone, and imagined to himself as he went along 
 what arrangements he would make. 'I shall sell the
 
 140 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 honey,' he soliloquised, 'and buy a pair of fowls. As 
 soon as they lay a good score of eggs I shall hatch the 
 chickens ; and when the chickens grow up and begin to 
 lay, I shall set them on the eggs ; 3 and when I have 
 a hundred fowls, I shall sell them and rear a flock 
 of goats ; 4 and after them in due course cows and 
 buffaloes. Thus I shall become a great man, marry into 
 a noble family, have an heir, 5 employ a tutor for my 
 son, and as I go in and out shall see him reading, 
 and in my delight shall take him up in my arms and 
 kiss him.' ~ Suiting the action to the word, he stooped : 
 the jar of honey fell to the ground and was broken ; 
 8 and eggs, chickens, goats, cows, buffaloes, wife, son, 
 tutor, the whole family, floated away with the spilled 
 honey. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) Turn ' having filled a jar with (it) (|Q2. 1) carried (it) away 
 towards the town to sell.' 
 
 (2) The word ' soliloquised ' should be brought into this sentence 
 from below, and the whole turned thus : ' (He) was alone in the 
 way (he) went on talking in (his) mind (dil ht dil men) he 
 formed this imaginary plan, that,' followed by the oratio recta, the 
 verbs in which should be in the Aorist tense, not the Future as in 
 English. 
 
 (3) Thejunctura may be varied here by turning the sentence 
 thus : ' In this way having collected a hundred fowls,' etc. 
 
 (4) Turn ' then increasing from goats,' etc., phir bakrton se bar- 
 h&te barh&te, etc. |Q6. 
 
 (5) Translate bete ke wlnte darw&za par uMd naukar rakhdn. 
 The insertion of dancdza par 'at the door,' that is, in the rooms in 
 the entrance portico, is useful with reference to the expression 
 ' going in and out ' in the next clause. 
 
 (6) ' Reading ' means ' reading aloud,' pufcdr puk&r parhtA kAA,
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 141 
 
 but ' see ' may be literally translated, because it was the sight of 
 hia boy thus occupied which pleased the father. 
 
 (7) Turn thus : ' In the idea of taking up the boy his head (on 
 which he was carrying the honey) stooped.' 
 
 (8) Precisely as in English ; but see ' for the whole family,' 25 . 
 and for the last clause omit the word ' spilled,' and say ' floated 
 away in that very honey ' (bah-jdnti). 
 
 7. 
 
 1 A poor man suddenly became great. 2 Whatever 
 he put his hand to prospered and all his commercial 
 ventures turned out well. 3 He was in the habit of 
 lauding his own wise management as the chief agent in 
 the creation of his wealth. ' In a certain year,' he used 
 to say, 'I bought up cotton 4 in the expectation that 
 war would break out in America and that the price 
 would rise. 5 My anticipations were realised. 6 A certain 
 village which I purchased was a losing concern at the 
 time, but now, in consequence of my administration, 
 there is a surplus revenue of thousands of rupees. I 
 bought ten calves at the Batesur fair, and people thought 
 them dear at the price, but I sold them in Rajwara 
 7 for four times what I gave.' 8 And thus he would 
 go on quoting instances by the thousand. 9 After a 
 time fortune turned and he became the victim of bad 
 luck. In two years he was again a pauper. His houses 
 began to tumble down ; his tenants paid no rent ; no 
 rain fell in the village, and no corn was grown ; 
 
 10 cows, buffaloes, horses, camels died of a murrain ; 
 his mansion caught fire and his furniture was destroyed ; 
 
 11 and his money was all stolen. Then he abused 
 Fate ; 12 but Fate said : ' Ungrateful wretch, 13 you
 
 142 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 referred all your prosperity to your own wise manage- 
 ment, and now you blame me for your adversity.' 
 
 Directiont. 
 
 (1) ' Suddenly ' cannot be translated here by the ordinary 
 Hindustani adverbs yak-A-yak, or nAyAh, or b'jf kt bAt men, for it 
 means ' comparatively soon ' with reference to the circumstances 
 told below. Thore dinon men, placed in the middle of the sentence 
 is best. For ' great,' the somewhat exaggerated phrase amtr-kdbfr 
 is better than plain bard in this connection ; and it is good style to 
 balance this double term by a slight extension of the subject. We 
 shall have, therefore, ek gartb aur mujlis Admt thorc dinon men 
 amtr-kabtr bangayA. Compared with hogayA, bangayA implies a 
 power behind, in accordance with the teaching of the Apologue. 
 
 (2) Turn this by collateral clauses, each beginning with the 
 Relative, as ' in what work (he) was putting (his) hand, profit was 
 what commerce (he) was doing, (to him) advantage was being 
 received.' Omit the auxiliary of the Past Imperfect in all these 
 verbs, it being obvious from the opening sentence that past time 
 is spoken of. Comp. Piece 3 . D* r - * 
 
 (3) Again omit the auxiliary th&. Avoid the translation of ' wise ' 
 by the use of two nouns, ' wisdom and management,' and begin the 
 oratio recta with the clause ' as the chief agent,' ki main ne, etc. 
 omitting ' he used to say ' in the next sentence. Comp. (45 . 7- 
 
 (4) Turn '-thus, by way of adding force to the egotism, ' and I 
 understood that,' etc. (samajh-lenA). Use the future tense in the 
 subordinate clauses. 
 
 (5) Turn ' Accordingly as I thought (Past Remote), so indeed it 
 came to pass.' JaitA tcatad. See 1 3 5 . 
 
 (6) Turn ' When I bought a certain village there was a loss 
 (khasArd) in it every year. I so managed that now,' etc. 
 
 (7) Chaugune dAmon par. 
 
 (8) Turn ' and he continued-describing thousands of examples of 
 this tenour (tarah) before the people.' 
 
 (9) This may be put as follows : ' After some days the turning 
 of fortune and bad-luck surrounded him.' 
 
 (10) Turn ' such a murrain came that all his cows, etc., perished,' 
 but place the subjects of the subordinate clause first, after the 
 manner of 150. 4-
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 143 
 
 (11) Effect the junctura here by a relative clause, jo kuchh naqd 
 th&... 
 
 (12) Omit ' but,' and with reference to the bur& kahn& of the 
 preceding clause say ' Fate hearing himself abused ' (apnt bur&'t 
 sunkar). Comp. 87. ' 
 
 (13) This will be most idiomatically turned by the use of two 
 relative compound sentences, jitnt behtart, etc., jit qadr bur&t, etc 
 being the respective commencements. 
 
 8, 
 
 1 A traveller in the desert was sorely pressed by 
 hunger, and 2 seeing a date-palin with ripe dates upon 
 it s put a rope round his feet and climbed the tree. 
 When he arrived at the top, the rope became detached 
 from his feet and fell to the ground. 4 In this plight, 
 his limbs refused their office and the man forgot to pluck 
 his dates. He shouted and shouted ; 5 not a soul was 
 visible. He felt convinced that his end was come ; 
 G there was no rope to descend by ; nobody was in sight 
 to help him ; 7 he could not cling to the tree for ever ; 
 in another moment he must fall and be dashed in pieces. 
 In his despair he vowed 8 that if he reached the ground 
 alive he would sacrifice a she-camel when he got home. 
 On this he began cautiously to slide down the stem. 
 9 When he was nicely half-way down, he changed his 
 mind. It occurred to him that the camel was pregnant, 
 and that it would be wrong to sacrifice her ; he would 
 kill a cow-buffalo instead. 10 Sliding down a little 
 farther, he reflected that the cow was in milk ; her too 
 it would be a waste to sacrifice a goat would do as 
 well. n He was now close to the ground, and gave up 
 12 the idea of the goat. 13 The goat, he remembered,
 
 144 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 gave two sen of milk and threw three kids twice in 
 the year it would be hard to find such another goat; 
 the object was to sacrifice a life of some kind, u and 
 a fowl would answer the purpose. 15 When he reached 
 the ground, he begrudged the fowl, though he told him- 
 self that it was wicked to break his vow, and that, having 
 promised a life, he was bound to give one. l6 Just 
 then Satan suggested to him that he might catch a louse 
 in his breeches and pay his vow with that. 17 So he 
 quickly found and cracked his louse : and thus what was 
 a camel at the top of the tree became first a buffalo, then 
 a goat, then a fowl, and then a louse ; and in this last 
 shape was sacrificed to God. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) As in former examples, begin with a simple sentence, and 
 omit the conjunction ' and.' Avoid the Passive, and say ' to a 
 traveller . . . violent hunger was known.' For the adjective see 
 
 25. 
 
 (2) Torn thus : ' (He) looked and (to) red ripe (l&l l&l) dates are 
 hanging on a date- tree.' 
 
 (3) Begin fresh sentence with 'this person," etc. For 'rope* say 
 skein or ring of rope, raxst kt Antt, descriptive of the mode in 
 which natives ascend a branchless tree. See also 50. ' 
 
 (4) 'In this plight,' yeh hAl dekhkar, and see also 58. 3- I Q 
 place of ' refused their office ' use the idiomatic phtil-j'ln& ' to 
 swell,' and thus become incapable of motion ; and Mu/-./'in<t in the 
 next clause, as an echo of the first verb. 
 
 (5) Our phrase here is impossible in Hindustani. Turn ' up to 
 the range of vision there was no trace of a human being,' >idam-zad. 
 
 (6) Begin here with the oratio recta, connecting it with the pre- 
 vious clause by ATI. 
 
 (7) Put this interrogatively, ' How long shall 1 remain clinging 
 to the date ? ' Proceed thus : ' some short time (dam) passes, 
 when (Art) I have fallen and been dashed in pieces.' For this 
 realisation of the Future, see (62. 'And* is here the am of 
 simultaneity. See |86.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 145 
 
 (8) Torn : ' in this state of despair he vowed that,' followed by the 
 oratio recta. ' On this ' in the next clause will, therefore, be yeh 
 kahkar. 
 
 (9) Turn thus : ' he descended half-way nicely ' (Piece 3 . D* r - 5 
 above) ; then his intention (ntyat) changed, and he thought that,' 
 followed by the oratio recta. 
 
 (10) Turn ' then (pfctr) he slid a little farther and thought,' etc. 
 
 (11) Effect thejuncfttra here by yahan tak Art. 
 
 (12) The Hindustani idiom is bakrt ka ir&da ' his intention as to 
 the goat.' 
 
 (13) Continue the sentence with ' and thought that ' with the 
 oratio recta down to ' purpose,' as follows : ' The goat is of two sen 
 milk, every sixth month (she) gives three young ones,' etc. 
 
 (14) Simply ' a fowl is enough.' 
 
 (15) Turn thus : ' having reached the ground, desire of the fowl 
 came, and he began to say,' etc. 
 
 (16) ' Just then,' itne men ; but the interruption is unnecessary. 
 The suggestion may be put in the Imperative 2nd pers. sing. 
 
 (17) Turn ' he having quickly (jhat) got out (nikal) a louse 
 cracked (it) ' (chat ?ndr-dend), the jingle of jhat and chat giving 
 point to the expression. The last clause is ' and that she-camel, 
 which was at the top of the tree, becoming first a buffalo, then, 
 etc., was killed in the way of God ' (khudA kt rah men). 
 
 9. 
 
 1 Once on a time all the Members of the body hand, 
 foot, mouth, tongue, teeth, throat, etc. mutinied against 
 their king, the Belly. 2 They made out that they were 
 over-tasked, and that he had no right to keep them in 
 subjection. The hand said he was 8 tired of working 
 for the Belly, 4 now splitting wood, now carrying loads. 
 The foot said he was fatigued with running errands. 
 The mouth said the Belly had turned him into a mill. 
 In short, every member had a complaint to make ; and 
 all agreed that they would serve the Belly no longer. 
 
 10
 
 146 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 6 The army having thus swerved from its allegiance, 
 King Belly began to suffer all kinds of inconvenience. 
 6 The hand would not reach for water when the Belly 
 was thirsty, nor the foot stir to fetch it. When he was 
 hungry, the hand would not break the bread nor the 
 mouth receive it. 7 He then stopped the army's pay 
 and allowances, and suspended the issue of the blood 
 ration. 8 The Mutineers began to starve and lose their 
 vigour; 9 and at last in despair presented themselves 
 before His Majesty, were pardoned, and resumed service 
 on the old terms. 
 
 Direction*. 
 
 (1) For the method 'of dealing with a plurality of subjects see 
 
 17. (2)- 
 
 (2) This may be expanded as follows : ' and all agreed among 
 themselves that See ! we are all engaged in his service night and 
 day, and the belly keeps us in his slavery without reason.' 
 
 (3) See |08. 
 
 (4) Turn ' Sometimes I have to split wood, sometimes,' etc., and 
 see 5 1 . 2. 
 
 (6) Turn as follows : ' When all this army,' etc. 
 
 (6) Begin with the temporal clause, as in the next sentence. 
 ' The hand would not reach for water ' is ' the hand was not moving 
 (hilnd) to take water '; and similarly, ' the foot was not moving 
 (chalnA) to the water-stand.' The auxiliary th'i may be omitted 
 here, and in the next sentence, as in former examples. 
 
 (7) The noun is here preferable to the pronoun in Hindustani. 
 Translate 'allowances ' by jdgtr, an estate given in consideration of 
 military service. ' Suspend issue,' band-karn&. 
 
 (8) Turn thus : ' the army of mutineers began to die of hunger 
 and every soldier became weak.' 
 
 (9) Turn thus : ' at last in despair (wajMr hokar) all the 
 members being present in the belly's presence (hazir and huztir) 
 got (their) fault pardoned,' etc. ' On the old terms,' ba-dast<ir-i- 
 tftff.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 147 
 
 10. 
 
 1 A tortoise who was bound on a journey was on the look 
 out for a companion of his travels. A hare chanced to be 
 going in the same direction, and the tortoise proposed 
 3 that they should travel together, 3 The hare could 
 not help laughing. ' You idiot,' said he, 4 ' what com- 
 parison is there between you, a sluggish unwieldy crawler 
 at the rate of a span for hours, and me, who rush like 
 lightning and fly like the wind ! 5 1 should like to 
 know how we can keep company.' ' True,' replied the 
 tortoise ; ' but, please God, I shall reach the end of the 
 stage before you do. If you do not think so, 6 I am 
 open to a bet.' So they agreed that whichever lost 
 should have his ears cut off. 7 The tortoise started at 
 his own deliberate pace, and the hare was out of sight in 
 a couple of bounds. 8 When he had gone a short way, 
 the latter reflected that he had already travelled a dis- 
 tance which the other could hardly make up by the 
 evening. Why should he hurry ? It would be well to 
 have a sleep ; and to sleep he went. Hours after, the 
 tortoise dragged himself slowly up, and, seeing his rival 
 asleep, quietly went on. 9 Late at night the hare woke 
 up, and, seeing nothing of the tortoise, said to himself 
 10 that Mr. Slow-pace had not yet arrived ; he would, 
 therefore, go on and put up in the serai : n no doubt 
 friend Tortoise would arrive on the morrow. 12 He 
 had no sooner entered the serai than lo ! there was the 
 tortoise. 13< Nowfor your ears, my fine fellow !' cried 
 the tortoise, as soon as he saw him; M but the hare 
 tucked in his tail and tore off at such a pace that he is 
 tearing about to the present day in dread for his ears. 
 
 10 *
 
 148 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) Hindustani, like Latin, avoids the parenthetical relative 
 clause, which is so convenient in English, because it is apt to bring 
 the subordinate and principal verbs together. Hence, it is best to 
 turn the initial sentence thus : ' To a tortoise a journey was on-the- 
 tapis (darpe/i); search of this was that (if I) get a companion 
 then (I) may travel.' 
 
 (2) Or at to recta, and see (8.8 for the form of expression. 
 
 (3) See |50. I- 
 
 (4) See |87. 3> f r the general idiom. ' Crawler at the rate of 
 a span for hours ' may be turned by the aid of the Past Conjunctive 
 Participle repeated. ' Crawling and crawling in paharg a span 
 (of) land.' Omit ' who ' in the next clause. ' Fly ' may be literally 
 translated by urna, or better still by the phrase farr&te lend. 
 
 (5) See 27. '5- 'I should like to know' may be translated by 
 NUM. 
 
 (6) Turn ' pray make a bet,' and proceed ' accordingly this was 
 the bet, that who loses (Mrnd) his ears be cut off.' 
 
 (7) Avoid the adjective by using the adverb Ahista (bis). 
 
 (8) Use the Past Conjunctive Participle, and put the reflections 
 of the hare in the oratio recta down to ' sleep.' There is nothing iu 
 Hindustani to correspond to the ' latter ' and the ' former.' Either 
 repeat the noun, or use the demonstrative pronouns, taking care to 
 be consistent in the application of yeh or woh. The verbs will be 
 in the Aorist throughout. Begin the reflections with jitnd, and 
 the rest is easy. For ' already ' see 77. ll - 
 
 (9) See 1 14. 5. 
 
 (10) Oratio recta. ' Goodness ! (allah re) Slow-paced Mr. Tor- 
 toise (pi.) has not yet arrived ! ' For the verb use the ceremonious 
 term which occurs in (98. 2 - 
 
 (11) ' No doubt would arrive,' d M j&enge. 
 
 (12) Begin with jaun. See |49. 
 
 (18) Turn thus : ' on seeing the hare the tortoise said, " Please 
 bring (your) ears, my fine fellow," ' la'iye hazrat fcdn, the order 
 of the words being purposely pointed and emphatic. 
 
 (14) The Hindustani junctura dispenses with ' but.' ' In dread 
 for his ears,' Jcinon Jce dar ke mare.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 149 
 
 11. 
 
 1 The Sun and the Wind once fell to arguing which 
 was the strongest. The Wind said 2 she could tear up 
 and toss away mighty trees and grand buildings, and 
 even mountains ; she could create tempests on the ocean 
 and sink ships, 3 turn day to night, 4 and with a mere 
 shudder stop the business of the world. The Sun 
 said nothing could withstand his heat ; mountains took 
 fire, 5 tons of ice were melted, the very ocean boiled ; 6 and 
 if any man dared confront him he simply scorched his 
 face. At last they agreed to try their strength upon 
 some special object. 7 The victim was a poor traveller 
 wearing a cloak ; and the test was, which could make 
 him take it off. The Wind set to rage, and, filling the 
 cloak, 8 lifted the traveller off his feet ; but he only 
 wrapped it the more closely round him. Then the Sun 
 gently 9 put forth his warmth, and by-and-by the 
 traveller doffed his cloak, 10 and the Sun was master of 
 the field. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) The initial sentence may be rendered conveniently here by 
 two collateral clauses ; as, ' Once between the Sun and the Wind an 
 argument befel (ho-parnd~) : each was calling himself strong.' 
 
 (2) Oratio recta, ' I am tearing up,' etc. 
 
 (3) Expand here ' becoming a storm I am making day night.' 
 
 (4) The junctura is here best effected by a relative clause ; thus, 
 ' When I shudder a little, I stop the whole work of the world.' 
 
 (5) ' Tons of ice (JdWwm man barf) melting become water ' 
 (verb in sing.). 
 
 (6) Effect the junctura as above (4) by way of rhetorical corre- 
 spondence.
 
 150 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (7) Turn thus : ' A poor traveller's misfortune (ahAmat) came 
 be was going along dressed in a cloak : this was the condition that, 
 Let us see who can make him take off his cloak.' Potential com- 
 pound of double Causal verb. 
 
 (8) Use the compound le-urnA. 
 
 (9) ' Put forth his warmth,' dhQp nik6.lt. See 1 3 . 2. 
 
 (10) Turn thus : ' and the field remained (in) the Sun's hand.' 
 
 12. 
 
 1 A Wolf, a Pox, and an Ass were conversing 
 together on the instability of the present world. 2 They 
 came to the conclusion that it would be the right thing 
 to confess their sins at the shrine of some holy man and 
 repent of their misdeeds. There was a saint's tomb in 
 the forest, and, arrived here, jeach began to declare his 
 sins. 
 
 The Wolf said : * Alas ! 3 how can I hope for pardon ? 
 4 My hair stands on end when I recall one particular 
 piece of cruelty. There was a confounded goat which had 
 four kids, 5 and she used to leave these and wander 
 about to people's houses in search of food. 6 I dis- 
 approved of the goat's unkindness in thus neglecting her 
 young ones, and I killed her. 7 Then I reflected that 
 the kids would certainly die without their mother. Why 
 should they suffer such a misfortune r* And God knows 
 this was my sole reason for eating them up as well.' 
 8 With this the Wolf began to weep. 
 
 (To be continued.) 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) As in the last piece, the first sentence may bo rendered in 
 two clauses. Insert in the first ' all three seated,' by way of sum-
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 151 
 
 mation. The second clause may run, ' there was mention of the 
 world's instability.' 
 
 (2) The idea of ' conclusion ' may ' t be conveyed by turning the 
 phrase thus : ' At length they agreed (sal&h fcarnd) that,' followed 
 by the oratio recta, but omitting the clause ' it would be the right 
 thing,' because the verb chosen is sufficiently expressive. 
 
 (3) Turn ' How will my pardon be ? ' 
 
 (4) Turn thus : ' I have committed one such tyranny, that, when 
 I remember it, my hair,' etc. 
 
 (5) Use the Past Conjunctive Participle, with Continuative form 
 126. f r the second verb. ' In search of food ' may be rendered 
 here apnd pet bharne Tte Ife. 
 
 (6) Turn thus : ' This unkindness of the goat in that (fci) she 
 was not taking care, etc. . . . was displeasing to me.' 
 
 (7) As always, put the reflections in the oratio recta, the first 
 verb in the Future, and the second in the Aorist. 
 
 (8) See Piece 4-. 10 above. 
 
 13. 
 
 (Continued.) 
 
 The Fox said : 1 ' Do not grieve, my good tender- 
 hearted friend. Though you did kill the goat and her 
 kids, God looks to the motive, and 3 your motive was 
 righteous on both occasions. The goat deserved death 
 for neglecting her young ones ; and in killing them too I 
 feel sure 3 you had no thought of self. You saved 
 them from orphanage and the sad fate of being mother- 
 less, and may certainly hope for a reward in Heaven. 
 * My sad case, on the other hand, is really difficult. 
 What is to become of me on the Day of Judgment, or 
 how I can expect to be pardoned, I do not know. 6 Hell 
 itself would be scared at something which I did. Some- 
 body had reared a lot of fowls, and the wretches were 
 always quarrelling and screeching and making a noise ; 
 6 the neighbours were worried to death ; the fowls
 
 152 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 dirtied not only 7 their own place but the whole 
 quarter ; 8 their filth and stench were everywhere ; 
 9 and they had the impertinence to drink water out of 
 the citizens' plates and dishes. 10 It was the dailj 
 complaint. n My soul was vexed at hearing of these 
 annoyances, and one day when I could bear it no longer 
 I went to the fowl-house and 12 made a clean sweep of 
 all the fowls.' With this the Fox began 13 to shed 
 floods of tears. ' My good lady,' said the Wolf, ' why 
 weep so bitterly ? You have done nothing wrong. The 
 fowls one and all deserved their punishment; and in 
 putting them to death ll you have won the guerdon 
 of a safe entrance into Paradise.' 
 
 (To be continued.) 
 
 , 
 
 i 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) Place the vocative first with ae initiatory, and expand the 
 rerb to balance the double epithets by turning ' do not weep and 
 do not lament ' (2nd pers. sing.). 
 
 (2) Turn ' in your motive was goodness.' 
 
 (3) Turn ' there was no object of your own," ferd kuchh opnd 
 matlab na th&. 
 
 (4) The point of this clause may be given in Hindustani by 
 turning ' the difficulty indeed is of unfortunate me,' in which the 
 particle to serves for ' on the other hand.' In the next sentence, 
 the final ' I do not know ' may be idiomatically given by placing 
 dekhie at the beginning. 
 
 (5) Turn as follows : ' I have done such a deed that even Hell 
 will seek refuge from me.' 
 
 (6) Use here the phrase given in 1 9 . 4- 
 
 (7) 'Their own place,' that is, the fowl-house, and translate 
 accordingly. 
 
 (8) The proper way to turn this is, ' Wherever yon look, dung ; 
 wherever you go, stench.' For the use of the Aorist, see 193. Io>
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 153 
 
 (9) Turn ' and these fowls were so ill-mannered that they were 
 drinking water in the crockery of the people of the quarter.' 
 
 (10) The Continuative form JiM karnA should be used here. 
 
 (11) This kind of phrase can only be met by the use of some 
 corresponding idiom, such as kalejA pak-uthn& ; and for ' hearing ' 
 recollect the idiom noticed at 1 6 . 
 
 (12) Similarly for this phrase, the meaning may be expressed by 
 ' tearing them in pieces I swept the platter clean,' sa/4 chat kar- 
 idld. 
 
 (13) Here, too, either use thte phrase dth &th dnsti rond or be- 
 tah&shA rond ' to weep unrestrainedly." 
 
 (14) Turn as follows : ' you have won such a reward (sawxlb) that 
 you will go (chalfa j'dnd) into Paradise without account.' 
 
 14. 
 
 (Concluded.) 
 
 Then the Wolf and the Fox told the Ass to declare his 
 misdeeds. The Ass said : ' I have neither claws l to 
 rend with nor teeth to bite with. In my whole life " I 
 have only twice done wrong. Once, when I was very 
 hungry and carrying a load of grass, I took a little of it 
 without my master's leave. Another day, as I was going 
 along, the boys began to torment me, and I lashed out at 
 one of them, but s no one was kicked. Nevertheless, 
 I admit that I was wrong.' 
 
 The Wolf said : ' You villain ! 4 Two such enormities, 
 and yet you hope for pardon ! You embezzled your 
 master's property, and ate grass 5 for want of which 
 there is no knowing how many animals died of hunger. 
 * You lashed out, as you say, at a poor boy. If the 
 boy had been killed, 7 a life would have been lost, and 
 his parents and relations, a whole family, in fact, would 
 have perisheil of grief.'
 
 154 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 The Fox said : ' Verily, such sins as these are unpar- 
 donable. I never heard such a tale before. This Ass is 
 not merely a sinner, 8 but an ingrate, a thief, and an 
 assassin, and as such is worthy of death.' 
 
 On this, the Wolf and the Fox seized upon the Ass and 
 tore him in pieces. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) It is necessary to insert 'anyone* after each of the two 
 verbs, ' with ' being omitted. 
 
 (2) Torn ' by me two faults were done (hud) ' ; and in corre- 
 spondence with this translate ' once ' by ek to yeh ki ek din, etc. 
 and ' another day ' by duare, ek roz, etc. 
 
 (3) For the idiom here see 52. *5 v z - ^e for ko. 
 
 (4) An illustration of this mode of expression occurs at 187.4- 
 In order to express ' enormities ' and emphasise the tu-o, translate 
 aise bare bare ikhatte do do gunah. 
 
 (5) Turn ' from which (it is) not known how many,' etc. 
 
 (6) Repeat the ass's words with alteration of Pronoun, and omit 
 1 as you say.' 
 
 (7) Avoid the Passive by saying ' there would have been loss of 
 a life ' (Jifid tha). Comp. Piece |. Dir. 7. 
 
 (8) Turn thus : ' but (balkt) on account of being a sinner, etc. 
 is worthy of death.'
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 155 
 
 SECTION II. 
 EASY NARRATIVES FROM INDIAN HISTORY. 
 
 I, 
 
 1 European nations were for long ages unacquainted 
 with a maritime route to India. 2 Commerce in India 
 itself was carried on with the neighbouring countries of 
 Persia (Iran), Arabia ('Arab), Egypt (Misr), and China 
 (Chin) only, 3 navigation being confined to the Arabian 
 Sea and the Bay of Bengal. The mariners never ven- 
 tured out into the open sea, 4 and were not likely to 
 pass round Africa to the Atlantic. 6 But the treasures 
 of India, conveyed by sea to Egypt and Bussorah (Basra), 
 and thence overland to Europe, were a source of so much 
 profit, that 6 the discovery of a direct route became a 
 passion with Europeans. 7 Some, believing that the 
 earth was round, sailed westwards and found themselves 
 brought up by the American coast. Others, under the 
 impression that the land was surrounded by water on all 
 sides, coasted northwards, and came to a standstill in the 
 frozen waters of the Arctic Ocean. Others again, be- 
 thinking themselves that India was to the east of Africa, 
 attempted to sail round that continent, 8 but were 
 driven back by tempests, and named the point of their 
 retreat the Cape of Storms. 9 At length, in 1497 A.D., 
 Emmanuel, King of Portugal, sent out an expedition of 
 three vessels under Vasco da Gama, 10 who made light 
 of the dangerous Cape, and, after a voyage of eleven 
 months, cast anchor off Calicut (KalWcof) on the Malabar 
 (Malebdr) coast.
 
 156 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 Direction*. 
 
 (1) The initial sentence may take the form suggested at 8. (0 
 in the preceding section. 
 
 (2) Give greater personality to this by saying ' people ' rather 
 than ' neighbouring countries,' and express ' people ' by the affix 
 tpdZd, in the plural, attached to the country last named in the list. 
 
 (3) Begin a fresh clause here and arrange the clauses in the 
 following manner : ' People (l*g} were sailing their ships as far as 
 the gulfs of A. and B. thinking the sea (to be) a shoreless ocean 
 they were not stepping outside those gulfs,' omitting the auxiliaries 
 of the Past Imperfect, because tht will hare been mentioned in the 
 preceding sentence. 
 
 (4) This terse sentence may be most effectively turned by 
 placing it in the interrogative form, and using the Past Conditional ; 
 as, ' When could they have had the spirit? ' etc. See (74. 4- 
 
 (5) idagar immediately followed by a relative clause. 
 
 (6) Turn ' Europeans were remaining very enthusiastic in find- 
 ing,' etc. 
 
 (7) Express this and the similar beginnings of the next two sen- 
 tences by *ot yeh samajhkar ki, varying samajhkar by sochkar, or is 
 khaydl se. The auxiliaries of the Past Imperfects may be omittod 
 throughout. 
 
 (8) Turn ' And having gone half-way on account of storms were 
 turning (mur-dnd) back, and were calling the name of that place 
 Bd-l/dn.' 
 
 (9) The juncture may here be effected by yahan tak ki. See last 
 Sect. 8 . 
 
 (10) Conclude with a fresh sentence in the following form : 
 ' Accordingly he thought nothing either of the storms or the Cape 
 of Storms, going on and on (|Q6.) rounding Africa in a period of 
 eleven months,' etc. 
 
 2. 
 
 1 Following the example of the Portuguese (Portugal- 
 u?aZe), the Dutch (Dach) and the French (Faro*i) began 
 to voyage hitherwards ; 2 and it was hardly possible 
 that the English (Angrez) should remain inactive. 3 An
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 157 
 
 association of merchants was formed in London in 
 1599 A.D., with a capital of thirty lakhs, and a charter 
 was granted them by Queen Elizabeth, which secured a 
 fifteen years' monopoly of the eastern trade. 4 Such 
 an association is called a ' company ' in English : hence 
 the name ' East India Company.' 5 The shareholders 
 held quarterly meetings known as the ' Court of Pro- 
 prietors,' 6 and those of them who held shares of five 
 thousand rupees or more were entitled to vote, pass laws 
 and regulations, and declare dividends. 7 The general 
 superintendence was vested in a body of twenty-four pro- 
 prietors, who held shares to the amount of not less than 
 twenty thousand each. These were called the ' Court of 
 Directors,' and were presided over by a ' Chairman.' 
 8 The Company's Indian possessions were gradually 
 known as the Presidencies of Calcutta, Bombay, and 
 Madras, and each of these was ruled by a ' President ' in 
 * Council.' 
 
 9 At that time the Company's servants were divided 
 into four grades, viz., Writers, up to five years' residence 
 in India ; Factors, from five to eight years ; Junior Mer- 
 chants, from eight to eleven years ; and Senior Merchants, 
 from eleven years upwards ; and from these latter the 
 ' Members of Council ' were selected. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) See for this idiom (30. 3 
 
 (2) Put thin clause interrogatively, much in the same manner as 
 was suggested in Note (4) to last Piece. 
 
 (3) The beat way to reproduce this [sentence will be gathered 
 from the following skeleton form : Some London merchants made 
 an association and collected a capital, and received a charter.to the
 
 158 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 effect that for fifteen years no fellow-countryman be allowed, etc. 
 The student will observe that the Passives are avoided, and that 
 1 monopoly,' for which there ia no corresponding term in the lan- 
 guage, is paraphrased. 
 
 (4) The words in guillemots are to be transliterated. 
 
 (5) Begin with relative clause as follows: 'The assembly of 
 shareholders which,' etc. After the transliteration of Court of 
 Proprietors add the literal meaning in Hindustani. 
 
 (6) The junctura is here : ' In this assembly the person who,' 
 etc. 
 
 (7) Considerable alteration will be found necessary to avoid the 
 English Passives. In skeleton form : ' For general superintendence 
 (130.6). . . the twenty-four men whom they were appointing, 
 etc. . . . their title was . . . ; and the shareholder who had less 
 than . . . could not be chosen for the " Directory "; and they called 
 the president of this " Court " " Chairman." ' 
 
 (8) Turn thus : ' In India '.gradually three Presidencies became, 
 which are known by the name of, etc., and in the three three 
 " President " with their respective " Council " began to dwell.' For 
 
 'respective' see 4-4-. " 
 
 (9) For ' Company ' say sarfcdr kampant. Omit ' viz.' and use ek, 
 dtore, ttsre, chauthe for the several descriptive clauses. 
 
 3. 
 
 In 1715 A.D. the President of Calcutta sent two 
 Factors with presents l on an embassy to the Court of 
 Farrukhsiyar. His 8 Majesty was then labouring 
 under a severe illness, and, as luck would have it, was 
 cured by a Dr. Hamilton who accompanied the envoys. 
 For this service he was desired to name his own reward. 
 He asked nothing for himself, but 8 on the Company's 
 behalf besought the imperial permission to purchase 
 thirty-seven townships in Bengal, with the privilege of 
 introducing and conveying merchandise free of search 
 and duty. * We admire Dr. Hamilton's magnanimity
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 159 
 
 in preferring his country's interest to his own. 5 India 
 in those days exported chintz and cotton cloth to Eng- 
 land, 6 and the object of the Company's servants in 
 purchasing territory in the neighbourhood of Calcutta 
 was to settle there a sufficient number of weavers to save 
 them the trouble of bringing in cloth and chintz from 
 remote villages. 7 Marvellous are God's ways ! 8 The 
 Indian weavers have remained stationary, and English 
 enterprise has won possession of the export trade to 
 India. 9 The expected acquisition of territory was 
 frustrated for the time by the Subahdar of Bengal, 
 10 who prohibited the owners from selling their landed 
 property. ll But the permission of free trade materially 
 affected his interests, for the President conveyed not only 
 the Company's goods under his seal and signature free of 
 search and duty, but also his own and his friends' mer- 
 chandise. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) ' On an embassy ' should be personally expressed ' in the way 
 of ambassadors,' ba-taur elchfon ke. See J50i 6. 
 
 (2) The next two sentences may be combined as follows : ' At 
 that time the Emperor was very ill, but when, as luck would have 
 it, the Emperor recovered under the treatment of Dr. H., who ac- 
 companied the envoys, he commanded that Ask your reward, 
 what yon ask you shall have for the asking.' Our phrase ' as luck 
 would have it ' may be turned by huan-ittif&q se. The use of the 
 oratio recta in the final clause adds much to the force of the narra- 
 tive. 
 
 (3) The oratio recta again : ' If Your Highness approves, then let 
 leave, etc. be received by the Company, and whatever goods of the 
 C. are despatched let them remain exempt from search on account 
 of duty.' The Passives here are avoided by the use of the verbs
 
 160 EXERCISES IK HINDUSTANI. 
 
 mtlnd and rau-una hond, the latter of which should bo in the Con- 
 tinnative forni. 
 
 (4) The idiomatic rendering is, ' (If) you ask the truth, Dr. H. 
 did a work of great magnanimity in that he,' etc. See |66. ' 
 
 (5) Torn thus: ' In those days from India chintz, etc. was much 
 going ' (Continuative). 
 
 (6) Effect the juncture here by chunAnchi. The final clause of 
 this sentence may be turned ' that they may not again have to go 
 about from village to village (jjd'on gd'on phirnA), in search of 
 cloths.' 
 
 (7) A common phrase is fcyd *hAn 'izadt hai, followed by ki. 
 
 (8) Turn thus : ' The weavers here remained the same weavers, 
 and Englishmen becoming experts in this art instead (ulte) them- 
 selves began to bring,' etc. 
 
 (9) Avoid the passive construction by making the subahdAr the 
 subject of the verb, and express ' expected ' by placing ' territory ' 
 (zamtndilrt to) at the beginning of the sentence. 
 
 (10) The relative clause here is not in accordance with the 
 idiom of the language. An appositive clause introduced by ya'nf , 
 ' i.e.,' is the best resource. Translate ' owners ' by zamfnddr, and 
 then ' landed property ' may be omitted. 
 
 (11) Turn thus : ' but from the C.'s goods becoming exempt from 
 duty he had much loss, for the P., besides the C.'s goods, waa 
 making signature of exemption of,' etc. 
 
 4. 
 
 Sirajuddaula then sent 1 a verbal message to the 
 English prohibiting the strengthening of the Fort; 
 2 and, being wild at their contemptuous disregard of 
 his order, commenced hostilities by seizing the Factory 
 at Kusimbazar. He* next laid siege to the Fort of Cal- 
 cutta, 8 which was held at that time by less than a 
 hundred men. As there seemed no hope of saving the 
 Fort, many of the English community followed Governor 
 Drake's example and took refuge on board ship; and
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 161 
 
 those who remained were taken prisoners next day by the 
 Nawwab's troops. 4 Mr. Holwell, who was the officer 
 in command, was brought handcuffed into the Nawwab's 
 presence, but was at once released from this indignity 
 and assured by Sirajuddaula that he and his men should 
 be unharmed. At night, however, 6 in default of other 
 accommodation, the Nawwab's men confined their priso- 
 ners, one hundred and forty-six in number, in a chamber, 
 8 henceforth known in English as the ' Black Hole,' 
 which was only eighteen feet long by fourteen broad. 
 7 Of that night the prisoners alone could tell the 
 horrors. Many of them were wounded, many were in- 
 toxicated, 8 the heat and thirst were intolerable ; and 
 when the door was opened in the morning only twenty- 
 three came out alive, 9 and they more like dead than 
 living men. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) Torn this by saying ' Sent word by the mouth of a messen- 
 ger' (34. 3)> followed by the prohibition directly expressed. 
 
 (2) The description is best carried on in Hindustani thus : ' The 
 E. paid no attention to this order (bdt) ; then S.'s blood boiled, and 
 being angry, he first, etc. . . . and after that,' etc. (down to ' Cal- 
 cutta '). 
 
 (3) See last Piece, Note ( i o). In this instance, begin the new 
 clause with ittifAqan. 
 
 (4) Avoid the passives throughout this sentence by the following 
 arrangement: 'When they brought their (unke) officer H. s&hil 
 handcuffed before 8., then he immediately had the handcuffs opened 
 and said that, " All of you be of good cheer ; there shall no harm 
 be yours." ' 
 
 (5) Turn ' When they found (mtiwd) no other place for the prisoners 
 to remain in.' See 52.5- 
 
 (6) Here are two relative clauses, of [which the first should be 
 
 Jl
 
 162 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 detached in the form of a fresh sentence, as an additional particular, 
 as follows : ' They call this chamber in English the " Black Hole," 
 that is, fcdid bil.' 
 
 (7) The native idiom here is more realistic. ' Whatever passed 
 on the lives of those prisoners, they indeed (woht) will be know- 
 ing.' Use the Prea. Pros. 
 
 (8) Use a doable clause, ' There was violence of heat ; thirst was 
 incalculable.' 
 
 (9) Turn thus : ' But their persons (<lra<) were worse than even 
 dead men.' 
 
 5. 
 
 Clive marched from Calcutta with three thousand men 
 and nine guns. Sirajuddaula, ' on the other hand, 
 reached Plassy (Paldsi) with a force of fifty thousand 
 horse and foot, including forty or fifty Frenchmen, and 
 over forty guns. The battle was fought on the 23rd of 
 May 1757 A.D. - Before the commencement of the 
 action Sirajuddaula placed his turban at Mir Ja'far's feet 
 and asked his forgiveness. In reply, he advised him 
 3 to defer the engagement till the next day and to fall 
 back in the meanwhile ; and the Diwan Rai Dallabh also 
 expressed himself in favour of retirement on Murshid- 
 abad. * The army had no sooner begun this movement 
 than the English sprang upon it like leopards on a herd 
 of deer. 5 The .Nawwab's men fled, and the pursuit 
 was continued for six miles. 6 Such was the victory of 
 Plassy, which may well be called the foundation of the 
 English empire in India. " Sirajuddaula was unable 
 to stay his flight even at Murshidabad. " He could 
 trust no one ; indeed, How could he ? for he had wronged 
 all. ' He fled towards Rajmahal with one of his 
 Begarns and a eunuch, but was recognised near that
 
 EXKECISES IN HINDUSTANI. 163 
 
 place by a Faqir whose nose and ears he had ordered to 
 be cut off on some previous occasion, and who now at 
 once reported his discovery to the Governor of the 
 District. This mau, a brother of Mir Ja'far, sent the 
 Nawwab back a prisoner to Murshidabad. 10 Mir 
 Ja'far was disposed to clemency, but his son, the hard- 
 hearted Miran, had the captive put to death n without 
 his father's knowledge. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) Express this by tidhar se at the beginning of the sentence, in 
 correspondence with the foregoing Kalkatta se. 
 
 (2) Pahle to will suffice for the first six words. 
 
 (3) Use the oratio recta here, and in the next clause. 
 
 (4) Turn this sentence in the fashion of |87. 2 - 
 
 (5) Use fauj for ' men,' and insert kampant kt fauj in the next 
 clause as the agents in the pursuit. Turn the second verb ' making 
 pursuit came along.' See | 2 i . 
 
 (6) Turn thus : ' By this same victory of Plassy, one may say 
 (yoy&), the foundation of the English rule was established.' 
 
 (7) Turn thus : ' Even then S.'s feet were not planted in M.' 
 
 (8) This sentence is difficult, and requires the use of the Past 
 Conditional in the second clause, as follows : ' Trnst indeed of 
 anyone was not to him (fod ht nahtn), and trust could have been 
 (ho-saktii) then to him, had he done good (bhal'jft M hoti) with 
 anyone.' (See (70.) Insert jab after ki in last clause. 
 
 (9) Introduce this sentence by n&ch&r. In the second clause 
 avoid the passive by making faqir the subject of the verb, imme- 
 diately followed by the first relative clause in parenthesis. The 
 second relative clause should be detached as a new sentence. 
 
 (10) This may be turned in imitation of the idiom exemplified 
 at 201. 9 by inserting to khair after M. J. 
 
 (11) Turn ' without informing his father." See 96. 
 
 11 *
 
 164 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 6. 
 
 1 Mysore (Maisur) was ruled at this period by 
 Haider 'Ali. a This man, whose father had risen from 
 a common soldier to a hiph rank in the service of the 
 Nawwab of Sira, became conspicuous for his daring 
 valour in the army of the Mysore Diwan ; and eventually 
 pensioned off the ruling Raja and himself became sove- 
 reign of the country. The discovery of a hidden treasure 
 at Bidnaur further increased his resources, and he began 
 to extend his dominions on all sides. In the year 
 1767 A.D. Nizam Ali, accompanied by an English contin- 
 gent, according to an existing treaty, made an attack 
 upon Mysore ; and Haider, being defeated by the English, 
 formed a junction with 3 the latter. 4 The confede- 
 rates, with an army of seventy thousand against twelve 
 thousand English, were defeated with a loss of sixty-four 
 guns. Hereupon, the Nizam made terms with the Eng- 
 lish ; but Haider Ali still maintained hostilities, 6 some- 
 times losing and sometimes gaining ground, till at last 
 he too made peace with the Company and 8 concluded 
 an offensive and defensive alliance on the basis of mutual 
 restorations. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) See above, Introductory Remarks, par. 7. ( 1O )- 
 
 (2) If the English order of clauses were copied here, the subject 
 would be too far removed from the principal verb ' became,' which 
 in Hindustani must be placed at the end of the sentence. The 
 best plan is to break np the sentence into two collateral clauses, 
 thus : ' This man's father had risen,' etc., followed by ' He himself 
 remaining (106.) in the army of D. of M., and doing work of
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 165 
 
 bravorv ;uu! manliness, increased so much that he," etc. Observe 
 in this the way in which the epithet 'daring' (see 101. (0> * a 
 got rid of, and the adverb ' eventually ' expressed. ' Ruling Raja ' 
 may be simply translated wah&n IcA rdjd, and ' became ' in the last 
 clause may be forcibly expressed by the compound ban-baithnA. 
 
 (3) Nizam Ali was Subahdar of the Deccan, hence instead of the 
 ' latter ' use the term s&bahd&r. 
 
 (4) This sentence is not easy to dispose of, though the terms are 
 simple. Turn as follows : ' Then these two, acting in concert 
 (muttafiq hokar), encountered the English with an army of seventy 
 thousand, but the E. with an army of twelve thousand beat them 
 all and took sixty-four guns.' 
 
 (5) Turn thus : ' In these hostilities sometimes his loss was 
 taking place (hoj&nd), sometimes (the loss) of the English,' and 
 connect this with the next sentence by yah&n tak ki. Comp. last 
 Sect. 8. 00- 
 
 (6) Expand this difficult clause as follows : ' Both sides (tara- 
 fain), who the provinces of which had taken, those they restored, 
 and both together for their respective protection made a treaty of 
 mutual assistance.' ' Assistance ' is here mo'&wanat, this form of 
 verbal being expressive of reciprocity. See App. A , Form III. 
 
 7. 
 
 Tippoo (Tipu) bad made peace with the Company 
 1 under the pressure of necessity, and 2 it was not 
 strange that he still cherished feelings of hostility. The 
 Governor-General had proof that he was corresponding 
 with the French, with the object of obtaining their assis- 
 tance in his designs ; 3 and, being a man of great 
 determination, he at once issued orders for the assembling 
 of an army at Madras, and * gave Tippoo the choice of 
 two alternatives, viz., either the cession of his territory 
 on the Malabar coast to meet the expenses of the con- 
 centration of the troops, an undertaking to give up all 
 communication with the French and to expel all French-
 
 166 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 men from his dominions, the admission of a British 
 Resident at the Court of Mysore, 6 or, on the other 
 hand, war. 6 Tippoo having vouchsafed no reply to 
 these demands, the Company's forces crossed the frontier 
 on the Madras and Bombay sides. 7 The Nawwab of 
 Haiderabad sent an auxiliary force, but 8 the Peshwa 
 was induced by Scindhia (Sendhia) to hold aloof. 
 Tippoo encountered the English at a distance of forty 
 miles from his capital, and was defeated and fell back. 
 
 (To be continued.) 
 
 Direction*. 
 
 (1) This phrase may be turned by majbAr hokar placed at the 
 beginning of the sentence. 
 
 (2) Put this interrogatively, ' What wonder that the fire of hatred 
 remained burning in his bosom ?' Comp. 159. ' 
 
 (3) Begin fresh sentence ' He was,' etc. 
 
 (4) Turn thus : ' Wrote wqrd to T.' following this by a statement 
 of the terms offered in the oratto recta, the alternatives being 
 either the payment of the expenses, a treaty adverse to the French, 
 the admission of a Resident, or war. 
 
 (5) Turn thus : ' or, consider the Company your enemy.' 
 
 (6) The form of continuation best suited to the Hindustani 
 idiom is ' When no answer to this came from the side of Tippoo.' 
 
 (7) Get rid of the adjective here by saying ' The army of the 
 N. of U. too was companion of the Government in this expedi- 
 tion.' 
 
 (8) Turn thus : ' by the tempting of Maharaj Sendhia the P. 
 was not a sharer in help.' 
 
 8. 
 
 (Continued.) 
 
 1 He assumed that the English army would advance 
 by the same route it came before, and therefore stripped
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 167 
 
 that part of the country of forage and supplies ; but 
 when he found that 2 another line of march wa taken, 
 he was utterly disheartened, and told his followers that 
 3 his days were numbered. They said they would die with 
 him. The English at once laid siege to Seringapatam 
 (Shrirangapaiari), * while the allies looked on. The 
 Governor-General in person directed the operations ; and 
 on the 4th of May 1799 A.D. the English flag was planted 
 on the walls. Tippoo's corpse was found amongst the 
 slain, and his sons 5 surrendered themselves. 6 The spoils 
 amounted to nine hundred and twenty-nine cannon and 
 a hundred thousand stand of arms, with ammunition, 
 and more than ten millions in cash and jewels. 7 By 
 rights the territory of Tippoo ought to have been parti- 
 tioned among the victors, but the Governor-General, 
 deeming it impolitic to enlarge the Nizam's dominions, 
 divided a portion only between the Company and the 
 Nizam, and assigned the remainder to 8 the representa- 
 tive of the Hindu regime who had been dispossessed by 
 Haider A.li, 9 on condition that he should maintain a 
 contingent of the Government troops for the safety of 
 the kingdom, at a cost of seven lakhs, and that if the 
 necessity arose, the civil administration of the country 
 should be placed in the hands of English officials. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) Use the Past Conjunctive Participle in the first clause Fol- 
 lowed by fci with the oratio recta, and omit ' and therefore ' in the 
 next. ' Stripped,' etc. may be rendered by ' went along destroy- 
 
 ing 121. 
 
 (2) Turn thus : ' the English have 'not come by this road, (and) 
 have chosen another road.'
 
 168 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (3) The corresponding idiom ia ' My days are arrived.' The 
 answer of the soldiers may be idiomatically paraphrased ' Where 
 your sweat will fall, our blood will fall,' which occurs in the Hindt 
 original. 
 
 (4) A collateral clause in this form : ' The Nawwab'a army re- 
 mained looking at the spectacle.' See 1 1 Q . 
 
 (5) The simple expression h&zir h<Le ' were in attendance ' (in the 
 Governor- General's camp) is sufficiently significant. 
 
 (6) Begin by the enumeration of the details, and add ' came into 
 the hands of the English.' See 51. '3- 
 
 (7) Form a concessional sentence, and translate ' ought to have 
 been,' etc. by chAhfe th& ki, followed by the Past Conditional. 
 
 (8) Turn : ' to the heir of the old Raja of M.,' the title of Raja 
 being a sufficient indication of ' Hindu,' and serving as antecedent 
 to the relative clause ' whom H. A. had turned oat thence.' 
 
 (9) Turn as follows : ' and had this stipulation made (ard-iend) 
 that in future for protection a Government army remain (rahA 
 fcarnd), and seven lakhs of rupees yearly expenditure be paid (odd 
 h4d karn'i), and when necessity falls (purnd) the Government 
 carry on the administration of the country in its own method.' 
 
 9, 
 
 Scindhia sought to annex the district of Gohad to his 
 territories, but l the Bana was an ally of the Company 
 and asked for their assistance ; and in consequence Cap- 
 tain Popham, who was marching with a small force to join 
 the main army under General Goddard, received orders 
 to drive the Marhattas out of Gohad. Having effected 
 this, Popham seized the Fort of Lahar and then laid 
 siege to Gwalior, 2 one of the most formidable forts in 
 India, perched on the summit of an almost perpendicular 
 rock. The people of those parts believed that, if only 
 ten men were present to roll down stones on the attack- 
 ing party, 3 no force, however large, could take it by 
 assault ; * and, as the Fort was then held by a thou-
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 169 
 
 sand picked men of Scindhia's army, well supplied with 
 the materials of war, 5 Popham was at a loss how to 
 proceed. Chance befriended him. He got hold of a 
 thief who was in the habit of entering the Fort by a 
 secret foot-path ; and by this route, before the morrow's 
 dawn, Popham first and his men close behind, 6 by means 
 of ropes and ladders, by driving pegs into the crevices of 
 the rock, and grasping shrubs and roots, 7 more in the 
 fashion of monkeys than men, scaled the heights and 
 defences and 8 suddenly burst into the stronghold. 
 9 The Marhatta garrison had scarcely risen from their 
 slumbers, when, seeing the enemy like grim death upon 
 them, they lost their wits and abandoned the Fort. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) It will be convenient to carry down this sentence to 
 ' Gwalior,' so as to detach the descriptive sentence which follows 
 for amalgamation with the next period, as more suitable to the 
 Hindustani idiom. The sentence, then, takes the following form, 
 and this shall be given in full as a good illustration of the Hindu- 
 stani period : ' But as a treaty of the Bana had been made with 
 (se) the Company, therefore he begged aid from the Company, and 
 Captain Popham , who with a small army was going to unite with 
 General Goddard's camp, he immediately on the order of Govern- 
 ment arriving drove the Marhattas out of Gohad, and then having 
 conquered their fort Lahar, went and laid siege to the fort of 
 Gwalior.' 
 
 (2) Turn thus : ' This fort on a standing rock was built with such 
 strength and firmness that,' etc. 
 
 (3) See |75. 
 
 (4) Begin this sentence with aur ab to, and end it at ' war.' 
 
 (5) Continue, 'Popham was at a loss by what device he may 
 mount the hill, when (fct) by good luck he met with a thief,' etc. 
 See Piece 3 . (2) above. 
 
 (6) The junctura of this period is formed by the use of the Past 
 Conjunctive Participle with each item of the description.
 
 170 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (7) Treat as a parenthesis : ' There was no knowing at the time 
 whether they are men or monkeys.' See last Sect. |4. (S)- 
 
 (8) The expressive phrases tab ke sab, b&t let bat, will serve the 
 purpose. 
 
 (9) Tarn as follows : ' The Marbattas, who suddenly rising from 
 their pallets saw the enemies like death (ajal) mounted on (their) 
 heads, at that moment, losing their wits, abandoned (kM.lt kardenA) 
 the fort.' 
 
 10. 
 
 1 Jeswaut Rao Holkar, Raja of Indore, was now the 
 only chief who declined to acknowledge the authority of 
 the Company. He refused to send a vakeel and did not 
 scruple to plunder their dominions. Reprisals were de- 
 termined upon, and a small force under the command of 
 Colonel Mon son was sent to engage him ; - but this 
 officer, after having blown up the gates of Tonk, allowed 
 himself to be entangled in the Mukandara Pass and to 
 be hemmed in there by Holkar's army. 3 The force 
 extricated itself with the greatest difficulty, and, after 
 much suffering and loss, fought its way to Agra in a 
 shattered condition. * Holkar's elation was unbounded. 
 He at once proceeded to lay siege to Dehli with a force of 
 twenty thousand men and thirty guns. The garrison at 
 that time consisted of only eight hundred men with 
 eleven guns ; but, Ochterlony, the Resident, 6 completely 
 baffled the Marhattas, and they decamped, on the news of 
 Lord Lake's approach, 6 after a fruitless struggle of 
 nine days' duration. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) Tarn thas : ' Now only one, Jeswant Rao Holkar, Raja of 
 Indore, remained, who neither bowed his head before the Company 
 nor sent in his vakeel, nay more, unscrupulously kept plundering 
 the Government provinces.'
 
 KXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 171 
 
 (2) ' Bat ' is not required for the junctura here. Begin ' The 
 said s&hib blew up, etc. . . . but having been misled (P. C. P.), 
 being entangled (P. C. P.), . . . was surrounded by,' etc. 
 
 (3) Turn as follows : ' At last the force escaping (P. C. P.) thence 
 with very great difficulties, fighting, struggling (Imp. P.), under- 
 going (Imp. P.) hundreds of troubles of heat and rains, and suffer- 
 ing (Imp. P.) loss, being shattered (P. C. P.) reached Agra.' 
 
 (4) Turn ' What limit was there to Holkar's elation? ' 
 
 (5) This phrase is best expressed by a proverbial turn, as ' quite 
 set the Marhattas' teeth on edge.' 
 
 (6) Turn this similarly : ' having beaten and beaten their heads 
 for nine days ' a sign of despair. 
 
 11. 
 
 General Lake invested Bhartpur on the 3rd of January 
 1805. l The first assault was made on the 9th, but the 
 English, on arriving at the edge of the moat found the 
 water 2 too deep to be forded, and H many men were 
 lost in the attempt. On the 21st the attack was renewed 
 from another side, 4 but here the moat proved too 
 broad for the bridge which the attacking force had 
 brought with them, and on their attempting to lengthen 
 it with ladders the whole thing fell into the water, and 
 many perished. A third attack was made next day on 
 another part of the defences, and though 5 the Sepoys 
 crossed the moat and mounted the walls, the English 
 soldiers declined to accompany them, and they had to 
 retire. Eight hundred and ninety-four men were killed 
 on this occasion. Next day Lake bitterly upbraided the 
 English soldiers for their disobedience of orders, and 
 these, 8 ashamed of their conduct, led a fourth assault ; 
 but the defenders had repaired the bastion and wall in 
 the meantime, 7 and the attack was foiled with a loss 
 of a thousand men. 8 The armv was now worn out and
 
 172 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 beaten with fatigue, their ammunition was expended 
 and the supplies exhausted, and Like was forced to with- 
 draw. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) Contracted collateral clause with the same subject. ' On the 
 9th (he) attacked.' 
 
 (2) Instead of this, say ' cheat fall deep,' chhAtt bhar gahrA. 
 
 (3) Turn ' in this many men were lost (kdm And). 
 
 (4) Turn as follows : ' But there the moat was BO broad that the 
 bridge which they had made and brought (frawMilnd) fell short 
 (chhota pnm'i), and when joining on ladders they desired to lengthen 
 it, that bridge fell into the water.' 
 
 (5) For 'Sepoys' use Hindustani sipAht, and for ' English sol- 
 diers,' gore or yore log ' white-folk.' 
 
 (6) Turn ' having come into a sense-of -shame.' 
 
 (7) Turn ' For the attackers no way was found, and more than a 
 thousand men wore killed.' 
 
 (8) Turn ' People became tired out and disheartened,' etc., and 
 instead of ' and ' in the final clause begin with nfah'ir ' helpless ' ; 
 the form of verb is that used at SI. 2 - Further, as the word 
 ' army ' is not reproduced in the first clause, treat the gerund as a 
 transitive (causal) in agreement with /an/' ; thus, fauj hat&nt part. 
 
 12, 
 
 At this period Shah Shuja', grandson of Ahmed Shah 
 Durrani, l was driven from the throne of Kabul by his 
 brother Mahmiid, 2 and became for a time the prisoner 
 of Ranjit Singh in the Pan jab. Here he was deprived of 
 the famous diamond called the Eoh-i-nur, and after much 
 ill-treament eventually sought shelter in British territory. 
 'Mahmud, on the other hand, was expelled from Kabul 
 by Dost Mahomed, the son of the Vazir Fateh Khan 
 Barak zai, whom the usurper had blinded and put to 
 death. Under these circumstances Count Simonich, the
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 173 
 
 Russian Ambassador at the Persian Court, * by way of 
 extending the influence of Russia, urged the Shah to lay 
 claim to Afghanistan, and on his despatching an army to 
 lay siege to Herat, paid him a subsidy on the Czar's be- 
 half. 5 The result was the discomfiture and retreat of 
 the Persians ; and when England asked for an explana- 
 tion, the Russian Government disclaimed all knowledge 
 of the Ambassador's proceedings. ** The suspicion enter- 
 tained by the authorities in India that Russia had designs 
 on India, and would, if opportunity offered, advance in 
 this direction, was confirmed by the statement of Captain 
 Burnes, who had been sent on a political mission to Kabul 
 in 1837, that Dost Mahomed was in confidential corre- 
 spondence with the Russians, and that the latter had 
 even promised to recover Peshawar for him from Ranjit 
 Singh. 
 
 (To be continued.) 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) An attempt to reproduce the passive construction of the 
 English in this sentence would end in confusion. Turn as follows : 
 ' In this time A. S. D.'s grandson S. S., who was 'Amir of A., his 
 brother M. had expelled from thence.' There is no obscurity in 
 the Hindustani, for Shuja' will be marked by ko and M. by ne. 
 
 (2) Begin this sentence with Shah Shujd' to, pointing to a corre- 
 spondence with M'llom'ui at the beginning of the next. 
 
 (3) Construct this sentence on the model of (1) above. 
 
 (4) Turn thus : ' Thinking this a fine opportunity of extending 
 the power of the Czar in this direction,' and omit 'under those cir- 
 cumstances ' at the beginning of the sentence. 
 
 (6) Turn in the following manner : ' But that army being worsted 
 returned from Hirat, and when England,' etc. 
 
 (6) This period must be broken up as follows to suit the idiom of 
 Hindustani : ' However, the Company had a strong suspicion that
 
 174 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 certainly Russia's tooth is on India, when (she) gets opportunity, 
 (she) will advance foot in this direction, and in confirmation of this 
 Capt. B.' etc. 
 
 13. 
 
 (Continued-) 
 
 1 The Indian Government never seriously contemplated 
 the question of a Russian invasion. - Should it be argued 
 that Russia might incite the peoples of Persia, Tartary, 
 and Afghanistan, to invade India by stimulating their 
 hopes of spoil, it must be borne in mind 3 that the times 
 of Mahmud of Gbazni and Changez Khan are passed 
 away, when bare-headed and bare-footed Gakkars cut 
 to pieces the cavalry of Mahmud; 4 when a Raja like 
 Anandpal lost a battle by the flight of an elephant ; 
 when the followers of Jelaluddin of Khwurazm, 5 with 
 clubs cut from the forest, and mounted on bullocks, did 
 battle with the army of Changez Khan in the Sindh 
 Sagar Doab; 8 and when powerful kings depended for 
 success on the prowess of archers. 7 We have seen all 
 along how small bodies of English troops have put to 
 flight the armies of Shahs, Sultans, Nawabs, Marhattas, 
 Naipalis, and Burmese, 8 no matter how numerous they 
 were ; and that even men trained by Dupleix and 
 Bussy were unable to face the English artillery. Suivlv 
 the half-civilized invaders above spoken of are of no 
 account. 
 
 (To be continued.) 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) To use Hindustani for ' Indian ' is of course impracticable, 
 nor can our use of the word ' Russian ' be imitated. The sentence 
 may be turned as follows : ' The Government paid no attention at
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 175 
 
 all to this point (bd<), that, well! how can the Russians come 
 hither ? ' 
 
 (2) Turn, in accordance with the principle so often laid down : 
 ' If anyone say that, what ! cannot the Russians,' etc. 
 
 (3) This clause should be turned as follows : ' that now the 
 period of .... has not remained, when (fct jab),' etc. 
 
 (4) In correspondence with the above construction, ' when ' 
 here, and in the two next clauses, should be translated aur na 
 u>oh zamdna hai ki, varied by waqt for zamdna. 
 
 (5) Use the Past Conjunctive Participle, ' having cut,' in the in- 
 tensive form of k&t-k&t-kar. 
 
 (6) Turn ' were placing their centre of battle on archers.' 
 
 (7) The junctura required here is balki, and the verb dekhtd 
 chalA dnd, and the subordinate clause may be thus put : ' that 
 from very small armies of the English Government what numerous 
 hosts (kaise kaise dal-bddal lashkar) of Shahs, etc. fled defeated.' 
 
 (8) Form a detached sentence from this point to the end of the 
 piece, as follows : ' The thing is this, thatjwhen an army, etc. flew 
 away (r-?dnd) like flocks of cotton before the English artillery 
 then (to phir) what count (haqtqat) is there of Iran, Turan ? ' etc. 
 
 14. 
 
 (Concluded.) 
 
 Should it be argued that 1 there is nothing to pre- 
 vent a Russian army approaching the Panjab, we reply 
 that 2 it is possible to suppose anything, 3 but 
 at least let us remember the distance between Russia 
 and the Panjab, and the deserts and mountains that 
 block the way. 4 Again, the resources of Russia are un- 
 equal to the transport of fifty thousand disciplined troops 
 with the proper complement of artillery by this route. 
 1 Then, too, the time occupied by the Russians in 
 crossing the Hindu Kush 6 alone would enable our 
 Government to convey twice as many men by steamboat or 
 railway to the banks of the Indus. 7 Add to this, that
 
 176 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 the Russians would arrive upon the scene tired and 
 wearied with their long march, 8 famished for want of 
 supplies in Afghanistan, and enfeebled by the change of 
 climate, 9 while the English array, posted on its own 
 frontier, would be fresh and ready for the fray, 10 with 
 a fertile country in its rear and abundance of supplies. 
 11 Moreover, a single English battalion in the Khaibar 
 Pass would be enough to destroy the fifty thousand 
 Russians. 
 
 Direction*. 
 
 (1) Use the oratio recta in the form of an interrogation, viz. 
 ' What ! cannot the Russians bring their armies to the Panjab P ' 
 
 (2) The corresponding phrase is bar taqdtr farz mwnkin ha\. 
 
 (3) ' Magar Akhir one ought to reflect that, What deserts, etc. lie 
 between Russia and the Panjab, the passage of which how dif- 
 ficult it is.' 
 
 (4) Torn thus : ' Again, where has Russia so much money as 
 that (she) can give the cost of bringing,' etc. 
 
 (5) After the conjunction begin with relative clause. 
 
 (6) Express by fc, placed before Hindu Rush. Comp. Piece 10 (i). 
 
 (7) Either iske 'al&wa, or qat'-nazar in sab baton ke. 
 
 (8) Turn : ' Hungry thirsty on account of scantiness of supplies 
 from Afghanistan.' 
 
 (9) For ' while ' translate ' and here.' 
 
 (10) Turn thus : ' And from the P., of which the fertility is 
 famous, how easy will be the collection of supplies ! ' 
 
 (11) Turn thus : ' Besides this (siw&e ithe), one white battalion 
 (paltan) is enough for,' etc.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 177 
 
 SECTION III. 
 MISCELLANEOUS. 
 
 1. 
 
 In the Spring of 1838, when the famine 1 which had 
 for some time afflicted the North-western provinces of 
 India was still raging, it happened that I was encamped 
 not far from the town of Rewari. 2 The pergunnah 
 was just surveyed, and I had come down to that part of 
 the country to settle the land revenue for a term of thirty 
 years. While I was there, a feud arose between the 
 Mussulman and Hindu inhabitants of the town, 3 which, 
 but for the interference of the authorities on the spot, 
 would most unquestionably have ended in bloodshed, if 
 not in a partial insurrection. 4 The point in dispute 
 arose from a well-known prejudice of the Hindus against 
 the slaughter of the ox, which they hold to be a sacred 
 animal. The Mussulmans, on the other hand, wished to eat 
 beef, as it was cheaper than either mutton or goat ; 5 and 
 though they formed only a small minority of the popula- 
 tion, they seemed determined now at length to get their 
 way. 6 Year after year they had begged for permis- 
 sion to kill the forbidden animal within the walls, or even 
 at any reasonable distance outside. 7 But it had been 
 all in vain, for the Hindus vowed that 8 they would 
 have recourse to force if their religious scruples were dis- 
 regarded, and so the Mussulmans remained dissatisfied 
 and oppressed. 
 
 (To be continued.) 
 
 12
 
 178 EXEKCI8ES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) Pat the relative clause after ' raging,' BO as to avoid the 
 clashing of the verbs. See Int. Rem. 7. (10). 
 
 (2) Torn thus : ' A new survey in this parga.no. had been, and 1 
 had gone there to make a thirty -year settlement of the revenue.' 
 
 (3) With aisA in the preceding clause, proceed as follows : ' that, 
 if the authorities arriving on the spot had not interfered, there 
 would have been an emeute (baited), or if there had not been an 
 emeute, there would certainly have been bloodshed.' In this, the 
 adjective ' partial ' of the text is avoided by the use of a word 
 which rather falls short of our term ' insurrection.' 
 
 (4) Begin thus : ' The foundation of the disturbance was,' etc. 
 
 (5) Turn as follows : ' and though (go) in comparison of the 
 whole population the number of the Mussulmans was very small 
 (fcam), but at last they had already determined to obtain their 
 desire.' For ' already ' see 76 " 
 
 (6) Turn thus : ' Every year they were begging ' (Continnative). 
 
 (7) Turn thus : ' but their requests were in vain (rffieg&n j'dnd).' 
 
 (8) The oratio recta : ' if in this matter our religious rules were 
 set aside, we shall be ready to do violence.' For the tense of the 
 first clause see Introductory Remarks 7. (2)- 
 
 2. 
 
 (Continued.) 
 
 At last the leading members of the Mussulman popu- 
 lation brought me one day, when I was in camp, a fresh 
 entreaty * worded in somewhat the following manner : 
 3 Hail, cherisher of the poor ! Be it known unto your 
 enlightened Excellency, that for many years the Hindus 
 of this town have, 8 by their lying and deceitful repre- 
 sentations to the highest authorities, prevented the Mus- 
 sulmans from killing cattle, ' under the plea that those 
 animals are sacred. Our lords, the English, have 
 hitherto made it their rule to prevent one class of their
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 179 
 
 subjects from tyrannising over another, 5 and have 
 dealt out impartial justice to all, making no distinction 
 between caste, creed, colour, or race. 6 Indeed, such 
 is the protection which all enjoy, that it may be said that 
 the wolf and the lamb drink from the same ghaut. 
 
 7 What, then, have we oppressed creatures done, that 
 we are denied the benefits which all others enjoy ? 
 
 8 Trusting that you will take our grievous case into 
 speedy consideration, and issue an order enabling us to 
 eat beef, we pray that on you the sun of prosperity may 
 ever shine gloriously. Such was the petition that was 
 read out on that day in open court before several hun- 
 dreds of Hindus and Mussalmans. Everyone around 
 could see and hear all that was going on, as the canvas 
 walls of the tent were taken down on three sides. 
 
 (To be continued.) 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) That is, ' nearly (qartb qartb) to this effect.' See 30.9- 
 
 (2) This is a capital specimen of a native petition. The intro- 
 duction and conclusion should be given in the stereotyped form, 
 viz. gartb-parwar sal&mat, and MM aftab-i-daulat o iqb&l hamesha 
 t&ban rahe, faqat. 
 
 (3) Use the Past Conjunctive Participle ' having represented 
 falsehood and deceit in the service of the superior officers.' See 
 
 103.3 
 
 (4) Fresh clause : ' and have made this pretext,' etc. 
 
 (5) Express this as part of the ' rule ' ; thus, ' and that with 
 every person without distinction of, etc. justice be done in one 
 manner.' 
 
 (6) Express the junctura here by chun&nehi. 
 
 (7) Turn as follows : ' then (pas) what fault have we oppressed 
 ones done that we do not receive,' etc. 
 
 (8) The correct form here is' it is the hope that your Excellency, 
 giving speedy consideration to our earnest-plea (istiyfisa), will,' 
 etc. 
 
 12 *
 
 180 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 3. 
 
 (Continued.) 
 
 While the petition was being read, the audience ' pre- 
 served, a respectful siUnce; the Mussulmans stood 
 anxiously expecting my decision, and I observed the 
 Hindus furtively glancing at my countenance to read, if 
 possible, the order about to be issued. 8 I may here 
 remark that no people in the world are more observant 
 of character, or more quick or able judges of it, than those 
 of Hindustan. 8 They seem by a kind of intuition to 
 understand every movement and every gesture. Nor is 
 this surprising. Subject for so many centuries to rulers 
 whose will is law, the ability to comprehend the character 
 and anticipate the thoughts of their masters has become 
 a necessary part of their education. I felt that both law 
 and equity were on the side of the Mussulmans, but 
 * seeing how strong was the feeling of opposition 
 among the Hindus, and what an infringement of a long- 
 standing custom it would be, 1 advised them to make a 
 formal application to the Commissioner, as superinten- 
 dent of police, 5 who forthwith sent an order permitting 
 the slaughter of cattle. I fixed upon a spot for this 
 operation about three-quarters of a mile from the town, 
 6 hoping thus to soften the blow to the Hindus. But 
 their rage and indignation knew no bounds, and I was 
 continually beset wherever I moved with petitioners. 
 Finding me inexorable, they returned to their homes to 
 deliberate with their friends. 7 They waited in ominous 
 peace until the festival of the Mohurram, six weeks 
 later, came round, then suddenly rose and attacked
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 181 
 
 8 the Mussulman procession with all manner of weapons, 
 bricks, stones, and even dead pigs and dogs, animals to 
 which ' the faithful ' have the greatest abhorrence. 
 (To be continued.) 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) Turn thus : ' remained respectfully standing silent,' so as to 
 relieve the next clause of the word ' stood,' which is not intended 
 to apply to the Mahomedans alone, and proceed ' The Mussul- 
 mans were anxious in expectation of my decision, and the Hindus 
 furtively looking (dekh-dekhkar) at my face, were wishing that, if 
 possible, they may discover from my physiognomy (qiy&fa) that, in 
 this business what order will be issued.' 
 
 (2) See Sect. II. 3.4- f r the best method of beginning this 
 sentence, and proceed 'There are no such men in the whole 
 world anywhere who in the art of physiognomy- knowing are 
 more quick and intelligent than Hindustanis.' 
 
 (3) This, too, is a difficult sentence. Turn : ' It seems that they 
 have a kind of intuition (tafarrus) in discovering from every 
 movement and sign the interior state.' 
 
 (4) Turn as follows : ' Seeing this, that the Hindus have a heart- 
 felt desire of preserving this ancient custom, nay, more, are ready 
 for opposition,' etc. 
 
 (5) As shown in former examples, the relative clause in this posi- 
 tion must be detached : ' accordingly, the said Sahib issued an 
 order," etc. 
 
 (6) Turn : ' with this hope that the grief of the Hindus may be 
 less.' 
 
 (7) This may be expressed : ' they chose a superficial ('Apart) 
 silence, but when,' etc. 
 
 (8) Say : ' the fa'ztos of the Musalmans,' which are the chief 
 feature of the processions on these occasions. 
 
 4. 
 
 (Continued.) 
 
 1 The confusion and tumult which ensued were tre- 
 mendous, and a desperate affray and loss of life would
 
 182 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 have been the result had not the Tahsildar, a native of 
 much force of character and self-won influence in the 
 place, hastily summoned the police to the spot, and put 
 himself, though a Hindu and a Brahmin, at the head of 
 the Mussulman procession, and conducted it in safety 
 through the town. The parties separated, mutually 
 breathing vengeance against each other ; 2 the Muslims 
 swearing by their fathers' graves that they would wash 
 out the insult in the blood of every Hindu in the town, 
 'even if they died to a man the martyr's death. 
 
 The Tahsildar was thankful for his success so far, but 
 4 felt that the presence of the magistrate alone could arrest 
 further mischief, and accordingly sent special messengers 
 s for me to the place whero business had called me. I 
 was in camp forty miles off. in a straight line, but with a 
 range of steep and pathless hills between, 6 necessita- 
 ting a circuitous route some twenty miles longer, so the 
 information did not reach me till about noon the follow- 
 ing day. "Here was a pleasant communication for 
 me ; the hot wind was blowing a perfect simoon, and it 
 required no small spirit of adventure at such a season to 
 face the heat and sand over that wild country Jj I sum- 
 moned some of the neighbouring villagers, and asked 
 if they knew the direct paths over the hills, and whether 
 they would engage to conduct me across. They replied 
 that they knew the way well enough, but that it was 
 quite impracticable for any but men on foot or for goats. 
 ' Never mind,' I replied, ' I can go, and you can show me 
 the way '; and 8 a guide was started at once to wait at 
 the base of the hill till the heat of the day had suf- 
 ciently subsided for me to venture across the plain. 
 (To be continued.)
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 183 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) To attempt to follow the English form of the period here 
 would lead to confusion. It may be broken up aa follows (in skele- 
 ton) : ' From this tremendous confusion, etc. was created, and 
 there was suspicion that a desperate, etc. will be, but the Tahsil- 
 dar, who was a very, etc., summoned the police, and though he 
 himself was a Hindu, etc. but leading the Muslims he caused,' etc. 
 For the epithet 'tremendous' see 24. The idea of ' self -won 
 influence ' is fairly conveyed by ro'b, which means the ' respect ' 
 enjoyed by a man for personal or other merits. The adjectival 
 form is ro'bd&r. 
 
 (2) Turn : 'and the Muslims, taking oaths of, etc., were saying 
 that.' 
 
 (3) For the mode of expressing this clause see 176. 9- 
 
 (4) Turn as follows : ' from this idea that without the magistrate's 
 having come (96.) there will be no arrest of this disturbance,' 
 and omit ' and accordingly.' 
 
 (5) It is quite sufficient to turn this clause by mere p&s. 
 
 (6) Turn ' in coming and going a circuit (pher) of twenty miles 
 lay (par-j&nft).' Coinp. the use of this verb at 157. * 
 
 (7) Tack this clause to the preceding in the form aur khdbar 
 kaist ! 
 
 (8) Turn thus : ' A guide at that very time was started that he 
 may remain waiting below the hills till (t& An ki), when the heat 
 became rather less, I, too, may be able to make intention of passing 
 over (se) the plain.' 
 
 5, 
 
 (Continued.) 
 
 At 3 P.M. I mounted my best Arab, and, with one 
 mounted orderly, started for the hill, l at the foot of 
 which I found the guide waiting. We dismounted, and 
 led our horses up the steep ascent. Before we had gone 
 far the orderly's horse fell ; we left him to his fate, as 
 there was no time for delay. 3 The path now became
 
 184 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 more and more precipitous. In places it seemed all but 
 impassable, and had there been room to turn my horse, 
 I felt almost inclined 8 to give it up and go back. 
 
 4 Yet we pushed on and on till we reached the top. 
 
 5 If it was a labour for my poor horse to scramble 
 up, the difficulty and danger of descending the other 
 side was much greater ; 6 any slip would hurl him 
 headlong down ; 7 but by dint of care, what with 
 sliding and slipping on his haunches, 8 we at last 
 reached the bottom without serious damage. It was six 
 o'clock by the time the descent was accomplished, 9 so 
 that there was little more than an hour of daylight re- 
 maining, with more than thirty miles of sandy trackless 
 plain intersected by ravines to traverse, 10 and nothing 
 but a western star and information from an occasional 
 village to guide me. But, trusting to the speed and en- 
 durance of my gallant steed, well tried in many a bard 
 day's run before, I dismissed the guide, and u set off at 
 a hand ga'lop. 
 
 (To be continued.) 
 
 Directiont. 
 
 (1) Begin fresh sentence, and turn as follows : ' Then (phir) 
 when we arrived where we found, etc., there we, dismounting and 
 taking (le le) the horses by leading-rein, began to ascend the hill.' 
 
 (2) Torn this clause in the manner indicated at (37. '3- 
 
 (3) An expression used in Sect. I. Piece 8. (fnkh karnd) will 
 answer here. 
 
 (4) Turn this as a simple sentence, and see ||2. 8. for Parti- 
 cipial phrase. 
 
 (5) This may be expressed as follows : ' On my poor horse what 
 misfortune of ascent was (dn-banwd), than that a hundredfold more 
 difficulties in descent befell.'
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 185 
 
 (6) Turn ' if his foot had made the slightest slip he would have 
 been overturned below.' 
 
 (7) All this is extremely difficult. Tnrn ' when he was beginning 
 to slip or slide we were carefully propping him.' 
 
 (8) Begin fresh sentence, and combine it with the next clause as 
 follows : ' so far that (yah An tak ki) at evening at the time of six 
 o'clock we arrived sound and safe below the hill.' 
 
 (9) Fresh sentence : ' For the rest of the journey, of daylight 
 some one hour remained, and 1 had to traverse (tai kartid), etc., in 
 which there were,' etc. 
 
 (10) Again begin fresh sentence : ' Except a western star, or the 
 information which there may be a chance of obtaining from vil- 
 lagers, seeing no other means of guidance, and trusting,' etc. 
 
 (11) Turn ' raised the horse's rein,' which is a mode of expression 
 closely corresponding to the idea of the English phrase. 
 
 6. 
 
 (Continued.) 
 
 Towards ten o'clock at night I discerned the thousand 
 little twinkling lamps which light an eastern city, l and 
 riding into the town, found the people all on the alert, 
 and was soon recognised, my horse and myself being well 
 known there. ' Larens Sahib is come,' was repeated from 
 mouth to mouth with much surprise. My sudden appear- 
 ance scared them, and they slunk away to their houses. 
 2 After parading the streets for a short time till they 
 were quiet, I went to the Tahsildar and heard from him 
 of the commotion having increased throughout that day. 
 I sent messengers to collect all the police from the neigh- 
 bourhood, and then repaired to the somewhat rough 
 quarters of a hostelry outside the walls. Here I luckily 
 found 3 an officer belonging to the political department, 
 
 Captain R , who, being in ill-health, was glad to 
 
 recruit in rather more comfort than in tents ; for I had 
 repaired and slightly furnished two or three rooms in the
 
 186 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 serai, * in case of an emergency like the present. After 
 seeing my horse well rubbed down and fed 1 retired to 
 rest. In the morning I stationed police at the gates, at 
 the market-place, and at other 5 central spots, so that 
 they might be ready in case the Hindus should have 
 recourse to arms, and there they remained for three 
 weeks. 
 
 (To be continued.) 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) Form the junctura here by a change in the form of the 
 description, thus : ' (1) entered into the town, and (to) found the 
 people alert and awake. Recognising me (they were knowing me 
 and my horse well), they were astonished that how the Sahib came, 
 and immediately (\><\t ki bAt men) this news was spread (zab&nzad 
 Jwm4) that,' etc. 
 
 ( 2) Turn as follows : ' I paraded the streets for a short time, and 
 when I saw that now there remained no fear of outbreak, I went to 
 the Tahsilclar and heard (his) report of the increasing of the dis- 
 turbance.' 
 
 (3) Political mahkama k& tk kapt&n sahib. 
 
 (4) Turn ' that if a necessity like to-day (d; jaist) happened, 
 there may be no trouble.' 
 
 (5) This may be expressed by sadr maq&m. 
 
 7. 
 
 ( Continued.) 
 
 Thus the danger passed by, for 1 the Mussulmans, 
 with their more active warlike habits, backed by the 
 European forces, were too strong for their opponents ; 
 8 o, after receiving a decided rebuff to a fresh petition 
 from me, the Hindus tried a wholly new method. By a 
 preconcerted and simultaneous movement they shut up 
 all the shops, suspended trade and business of every
 
 BXEHCI8E8 IN HINDUSTANI. 187 
 
 description, and declared that, until the obnoxious order 
 was rescinded, they would neither buy nor sell, nor, 
 indeed, hold any communication with the opposite party. 
 3 This plan of passive resistance was by far the most 
 effectual they could have adopted. It completely para- 
 lysed their enemies, and * alarmed the magistrate more 
 than he would have liked to own ; for they had complete 
 control over the supplies, being the wholesale, as well as 
 retail, dealers of the town. The next morning, 5 when 
 not only the Mussulmans but the lower orders of Hindus 
 came as usual to purchase the day's provisions, they 
 found all the shops closed. 6 Living from hand to 
 mouth as they do, they were in blank despair, and, 
 adjourning to my house, they implored my leave to break 
 open the granaries and 7 help themselves, if I could not 
 compel the traders to open their shops. I replied that 
 the traders had done nothing contrary to law, and that I 
 had no power to compel them in any way. 
 
 (To be conformed.) 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) A difficult sentence to reproduce. The meaning may be 
 given as follows : ' In the first place the Mussulmans were active 
 and quarrelsome, in the second place we were at their back, then 
 (pa*) their being victorious over their opponents was not 
 difficult.' 
 
 (2) Begin a fresh sentence, thus : ' A new petition which the 
 Hindus presented me, of it they received a flat refusal (see 1 8 5 . 3) > 
 therefore they sought to bring into operation a rare method, viz. 
 this, that by mutual agreement they shut up,' etc. 
 
 (3) The expression ' passive resistance ' cannot easily be imitated 
 in Hindustani. Perhaps the best way to treat the sentence is this : 
 4 In reality the method of patient encounter (taq&bul) which they 
 adopted, this was very effective.'
 
 188 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (4) The writer's avoidance of egotism here need not be preserved 
 in Hindustani. Torn thus : ' and, if 700 ask the truth (sack ptichho 
 to) to me also was anxiety.' 
 
 (5) Use here the form of expression indicated at 201. 9- 
 
 (6) Effect the junctura here by introducing the clause with 
 ch&nki as follows : ' As these people, whatever they were earning all 
 day, on it were living,' etc. 
 
 (7) ApnA kAm nik&lnd. 
 
 8. 
 
 (Continued.) 
 
 A plan occurred to me l which would give me time to 
 reason with the Hindus, and possibly bring them to a better 
 state of mind. I collected many waggon-loads of grain 
 from the country round at my own risk, trusting that the 
 Government would refund me when the peril was made 
 known to them. This grain I stored, and -' gave out 
 by letters of credit to retail dealers whom I chose myself 
 and placed in the streets. In this way all the slight 
 wants of an Asiatic were supplied, and so careful was the 
 organization of the whole thing, that there was no ulti- 
 mate loss to the Government. Meanwhile I published 
 proclamations 3 warning the Hindus against blind alle- 
 giance to their priests, and telling them that any act 
 of violence would meet with prompt retribution. This 
 I was frequently able to do in isolated cases, as combina- 
 tion was now impossible for them. They first sent peti- 
 tions to the Commissioner, and Hhen to the seat of 
 Government itself in the hills, complaining both of me, 
 their magistrate, and the Tahsildar. These were in due 
 time returned to me for explanation. I did not think it 
 necessary to answer their charges against myself, but 
 successfully vindicated the Tahsildar. 
 (To be continued.)
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 189 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) Turn as follows : ' that from it I shall obtain opportunity of 
 arguing with the Hindus, and if by it they come into the straight 
 way, it is no wonder.' 
 
 (2) Turn thus : ' entrusted for retail sale,' etc., with the verbs 
 ' chose ' and ' placed ' in form of Past Conjunctive Participle. 
 
 (3) Oratio recta, ' that let not the Hindus foolishly engage in un- 
 lawful matters at the bidding of their Pandits, else, if any sort of 
 violence is shown, simultaneously (ma'an) punishment will be 
 inflicted.' Observe here the avoidance of the adjectives ' blind ' 
 and ' prompt.' 
 
 (4) Turn : ' and after that to Government on the hill.' 
 
 9. 
 
 (Concluded.) 
 
 For twenty -two days the Hindu traders J held out, 
 till I was much worn and harassed with the constant 
 work of inspection, repression, and writing answers to 
 complaints. At last the poorer Hindus found that they 
 were injuring themselves as well as the Mussulmans ; 
 2 gradually a shop was opened here and there, and on the 
 evening of the twenty- second day a crowd of Hindus came 
 to me in a humble frame of mind, 3 owning that they had 
 been led away by their priests, begging for pardon, and 
 solemnly promising never to repeat the offence, and offer- 
 ing to open their shops at once. I agreed to this, and thus 
 a combination which had threatened to produce a general 
 uproar was quietly and peaceably put down. 4 I was able 
 to satisfy the inquiries of Government into my somewhat 
 independent action in the matter, and so to establish the 
 conduct of the Tahsildar that he received special thanks 
 for all he had done. 6 He did not, however, long survive
 
 190 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 to enjoy his recovered credit. A few months afterwards 
 
 he died from a sudden attack of cholera. 
 
 LAWRENCE. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) Torn thus : ' In that same way went on being contrary ' 
 (zidd iarnd), ' and I continuously doing (karte karte) watching and 
 punishing (sar-jfcobt) and answer-giving was wearied ('djit d-jdnd).' 
 
 (2) Begin with chun&nchi, and proceed ' place by place gradually 
 the s hops went on being opened' (||8.)- 
 
 (3) ' And declared ' followed by oratio recta. In the final clause 
 the form of verb illustrated at 129. ma 7 be introduced, though 
 the usage is rare. 
 
 (4) Turn as follows : ' In this affair the inquiry which the 
 Government made on my somewhat free proceeding, of it I was 
 able to give a sufficient answer, and also so proved the good services 
 of,' etc. 
 
 (5) Turn ' after this he did not remain alive many days, that (fct) 
 the approbation (wdh w&h) which he had obtained, from it he could 
 have derived (Past Cond.) profit.' 
 
 10. 
 
 The Rajputs were l born soldiers ; each division had its 
 hereditary leader, and each formed a separate community, 
 like clans in other countries, 8 the members of which 
 were bound by many ties to their chiefs and to each 
 other. The rules of caste still subsisted, and tended to 
 render more powerful the connection just described. As 
 the chiefs of those clans stood in the same relation to the 
 Raja as their own retainers did to them, the king, 
 nobility and soldiery, all made one body, united by the 
 strongest feelings of kindred and military devotion. 3 The 
 sort of feudal system which prevailed among the Rajputs 
 gave additional stability to this attachment, and all to- 
 gether produced the pride of birth, the high spirit, and 
 romantic notions * so striking in the military class of that
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 191 
 
 period. Their enthusiasm was kept up by the songs of 
 their bards, and inflamed by frequent contests 5 for glory 
 or for love. They treated women with a respect unusual 
 in the East ; and 6 were guided even towards their 
 enemies by rules of honour, which it was disgraceful to 
 violate. 
 
 (To be continued.) 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) The Persian mddar-zdd suits the meaning exactly. 
 
 (2) Turn thus : ' and to the members with their chiefs and 
 among themselves was a connection (wd-bastagt) of many sorts 
 (tarah tarah M), and the fashion of caste observance (jdt-dharm) 
 too, which remained regularly in force, was more a cause of 
 strengthening of this connection.' 
 
 (3) This, too, is by no means easy. It may be paraphrased ' and 
 from the fashion of giving (and) taking jdgtr and service, such as 
 was current (riw&j") among the Rajputs, still more confirmation 
 (istehkdm) came into this body.' 
 
 (4) Turn ' which at that period was a conspicuous mark of the 
 military class.' 
 
 (5) This must be expanded : ' which sometimes for the sake of 
 (bar&e) glory and sometimes for the sake of love took place.' 
 
 (6) Avoid the change to the passive here, which spoils the sen- 
 tence from a Hindustani point of view. The last clause may be 
 easily turned by ' to do the contrary of which was considered a dis- 
 grace.' 
 
 11. 
 
 (Concluded.) 
 
 1 If to these qualities we add a very strong disposition 
 to indolence, and make allowances for the effects of a long 
 period of depression, we have the character of the Eaj- 
 puts of the present day, 2 who bear much the same re- 
 semblance to their ancestors as those did to the warriors 
 of the Mahabharat. With all the noble qualities of the
 
 192 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 early Rajputs was mixed a simplicity, s derived from 
 their want of intercourse with other nations, * which 
 rendered them inferior in practical ability, and even in 
 military efficiency, to men actuated by much less elevated 
 sentiments than theirs. Among the effects of their divi- 
 sion into clans, one was that s although the Rajputs are 
 anything but a migratory people, yet when they have 
 been compelled by external force to leave their seats, they 
 have often moved in a body like a Tartar horde ; and 
 when they occupied new lands, 6 they distributed them in 
 the same proportions as their former ones, and remained 
 without any alteration but that of place. 
 
 ELPHINSTONE. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) The agency here being a matter of indifference, the passive 
 construction may be conveniently adopted, thus : ' together with 
 these qualities, if their being immoderately addicted to sloth be 
 described.' The next clause may be given more literally. 
 
 (2) Begin fresh sentence, thus : ' And this character is like that 
 of their (opne) ancestors (see 6|. 13.), in the proportion in which 
 ( jis nisbat ) theirs (unkl) is like that of the heroes of the Maha- 
 bharat.' 
 
 (3) Turn thus : ' which was created by their remaining apart 
 from other (gair) nations.' 
 
 (4) The above introduction of the relative bars its adoption here. 
 Turn, therefore, ' and for this very reason they remained inferior in 
 practical wisdom, nay more (balki) in war-making (jang-Aviar!), m 
 those people who in comparison with them were not so mag- 
 nanimous.' 
 
 (5) Turn thus : ' though (go) migration is never agreeable to 
 Rajputs.' 
 
 (6) Turn thus : ' The way in which land-division was effected 
 (Mid tornd) in their native country, in the same arrangement the 
 land of here too is divided.' The last clause should be a collateral 
 sentence : ' Except change of place no other difference was 
 ooming.'
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 193 
 
 12, 
 
 x The plain uuinstructed Mahratta (Marhata), Sudra, 
 or Khatri, enters upon his career as a soldier 2 with the 
 same dress and with the same habits with which he tills 
 his fields or attends his flocks ; 8 and he has, generally 
 speaking, preserved, throughout revolutions that have at 
 one time raised him to the highest consideration and 
 power and again cast him back to his former occupa- 
 tions, the same simplicity of character. 4 This may be 
 referred to the nature of Hindu institutions, to the 
 example of Sivaji and his leaders, and to the advantage 
 derived from habits that gave facility to conquest 5 by 
 placing him in strong contrast with the proud and formal 
 Muhammadan; by associating him with the Hindu 
 population of the countries he invaded ; and by prevent- 
 ing his progress ever being impeded by that pomp, 
 luxury, or pride, which forms so often an 6 incumbrance, 
 if not an obstacle, to the most successful conquerors. 
 That the Mahratta soldier was more distinguished by art 
 than by valour ; that he gloried as much in rapid flight 
 as in daring attack, 7 is not denied by the warmest 
 panegyrist of his tribe ; but though these facts are 
 admitted, and, further, that he was often mean and 
 sordid, 8 it is contended, and with truth, that he had 
 many excellent qualities. 9 Few could claim superiority 
 to him in patience under fatigue, hunger, and thirst, and 
 in that plain manliness of character which remained un- 
 changed by success or adversity ; 10 nor can we deny to 
 the Mahrattas in the early part of their history, and 
 before their extensive conquests had made their vast and 
 
 13
 
 194 EXEBCI8E8 IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 mixed armies cease to be national, the merit of conduct- 
 ing their Cossack inroads into other countries with a 
 consideration to the inhabitants which had been deemed 
 incompatible with that terrible and destructive species of 
 
 warfare. 
 
 (To be, continued.) 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) ' Marhata ' and the pronouns which refer to it throughout the 
 passage become plural in Hindustani. 
 
 (2) By way of simplification use one word waza" for ' dress ' and 
 ' habits,' as it describes both. 
 
 (3) Turn as follows : ' and iv. general in those vicissitudes in 
 which at one time they reached exalted rank and again came to 
 their original status, that same simplicity of theirs remained (banA- 
 rahnd) as usual.' 
 
 (4) Arrange thus : ' The cause of this perhaps in the institutions 
 of Hinduism, and in the examples of Sivaji and his chiefs, and also 
 (our nfz) in such (aiaf aist) habits, is found, from which (ki jin se) 
 in victory easiness is obtained.' 
 
 (5) This clause and the corresponding sequent clauses may now 
 be introduced by jab ki. 
 
 (6) Translate thus : muz&him balki m&ni'ul mohimm. 
 
 (7) This clause should be placed first in the Hindustani sentence : 
 ' To the special panegyrists even of this tribe there is no denial 
 that,' etc. 
 
 (8) Turn thus : ' but yet in truth it is not remote from justice to 
 admit their praiseworthy qualities.' 
 
 (9) Turn thus : ' In the matter of patience, etc. very few were 
 taking precedence of (se) the Marhattas.' 
 
 (10) The junctura here is best effected by tis parbht, after whk-li 
 proceed thus : ' This fact (amr) is worthy of praise, that in former 
 time and before that (qabl iske ki) their army so increased in ex- 
 tensive conquests and in mixture with strange races that it did not 
 remain the army of one nation, this people used to conduct their 
 Cossack warfare (qazz&q&na fauj-luwM) with such humanity which 
 (jo ki) was being considered,' etc.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 195 
 
 13. 
 
 (Concluded.) 
 
 The character and actions of this people were in all 
 respects singular ; l they had indeed few, if any, similar 
 features in common with other nations. 2 Those means 
 which the pride of conquerors has often rejected seem 
 always to have been used in preference by this extra- 
 ordinary race : not merely the discontented were invited 
 to their standard, but robbers and plunderers were courted 
 as auxiliaries, and allowed to act for a period in their own 
 mode and for their own advantage. 3 To insinuate them- 
 selves by wiles into a share of the government of a dis- 
 trict or country, and to make a party amongst its inhabi- 
 tants, were deemed better than using force, even when the 
 latter was in their power; 4 and in effecting these objects 
 their patience and humility were great aids. They were 
 contented at first to divide the 6 government, as well as 
 revenues, with the Hindu chiefs of the military class they 
 found established, 6 trusting to time and intrigue for 
 their gradual reduction. 
 
 MALCOLM. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) The meaning of this sentence may be given as ' In reality, 
 ways (auzd') like theirs (see above, 1 1 . Note 2) if (they) may have 
 been in any other nation, then (they) have been fewer.' 
 
 (2) Torn ' which means great conquerors will have often despised, ' 
 etc. 
 
 (3) This difficult sentence may be expressed in the following 
 way : ' When any strange province or country came into their 
 power, in this case also, in comparison with force, by deceit to 
 obtain entrance there and to do plottings with the inhabitants, this 
 people thought their advantage.' It will be observed that the final 
 
 13 *
 
 1% EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI 
 
 clan se of the English sentence is not left an translated, bat is worked 
 into the initial clause. 
 
 (4) Tarn ' and in this affair (mr) their patience and humility 
 were coming in very useful (Jcdm And).' 
 
 (5) Use the phrase employed at (09. - 'Chief of the military 
 class ' may be rendered by the title ' Raja.' 
 
 (6) Begin fresh sentence : ' And they trusted that after some 
 time and by means of plottings the time of reduction (taakhtr) will 
 gradually arrive.' 
 
 14. 
 
 The Bheels that live in villages are reputed faithful 
 and honest ; they are usually the watchmen, and have a 
 portion of land or dues assigned them. a These village 
 Bheels have little intercourse with their more numerous 
 and independent brethren who dwell among the hills. 
 The cultivating classes of Bheels, who live in districts and 
 hamlets under their Tarwis or heads, 2 though indus- 
 trious, have neither given up the habits nor arms of the 
 tribes in a ruder state, and, like them, indulge in strong 
 liquors to excess. They excite the horror of the higher 
 classes of Hindoos by eating not only the flesh of buffa- 
 loes but of cows. From this abomination, for such it is 
 considered, they only rank above the chamdrs or shoe- 
 makers, who feast on dead carcases, and are deemed so 
 unclean that they are not allowed to dwell within the 
 precincts of the village. The plundering, or wild, Bheels 
 who reside among the hills are a diminutive and wretched- 
 looking race, 8 whose appearance shows the poverty of 
 their food ; but they are nevertheless active and capable 
 of great fatigue. They are professed robbers and thieves. 
 4 Armed with bows and arrows, they lie in wait for the 
 weak and unprotected, while they fly from the strong.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 197 
 
 5 Ignorant and superstitious to a degree, they are devoted 
 to their Tarwts, whose command is a law which they 
 implicitly obey. 
 
 (To be continued.) 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) Torn as follows : ' Of these Bhils with their mountain 
 brethren, who are numerous and more free (kastr-ut-ta'd&d aur 
 tiy&da dzdd), little intercourse is kept up (rahnti).' 
 
 (2) Arrange matters so as to begin a fresh sentence here : ' And 
 though they are industrious, but they have the same mode of life 
 and the same arms, which are customary in those rude ( jangalt ) 
 tribes, and also (niz) like them are very reckless in liquor-drinking.' 
 
 (3) This clause may be expressed by making it a third epithet 
 before ' race,' in the idiomatic term kdl M mdrd, ' famine-stricken.' 
 
 (4) Detach this clause from what follows, as an independent 
 sentence, viz. ' Their arms (are) bows and arrows.' For ' strong ' use 
 a pair of adjectives to balance the preceding pair, and omit ' while.' 
 
 (5) Turn ' They are so ignorant and superstitious that they are 
 devoted to their Tarwis, whose command is of the rank of a law , 
 and is carried out without when or why' (be-chdn o chirti). 
 
 15. 
 
 (Continued.) 
 
 1 The men, and still more the women, have their intel- 
 lect formed by their condition ; they are quick, have a 
 kind of instinctive sense of danger, and are full of art 
 and evasion. To kill one another, when their Tarwi 
 desires, or to suffer death themselves, appears to them 
 equally a matter of indifference. The whole race are 
 illiterate, and they are, without exception, fond of 
 tobacco and liquor to excess. Their quarrels begin and 
 end in drunken bouts ; no t'eud can be staunched, no 
 crime forgiven, but at a general feast, 2 aud here the
 
 198 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 common and popular fine for every offence is more liquor 
 to protract their riotous enjoyment, which sometimes con- 
 tinues for days. 3 The Bheel women have much influence 
 in the society ; but it is a carious fact, that their manners 
 and disposition are in general quite opposed to those of 
 the Pindaris. 4 They never accompany the men in their 
 expeditions ; and when prisoners are taken, their prin- 
 cipal hope of life is in the known humanity of the 
 women. The latter are usually the first sufferers from 
 the crimes of their fathers and husbands, the women and 
 children (when the men are suspected) being always 
 seized when Government can lay hold on them. They 
 show, in such circumstances, great patience and fortitude, 
 5 as they well know the men will never abandon them, and 
 that the guilty will surrender themselves to any punish- 
 ment, even death, rather than allow them and their 
 children to continue in confinement. 
 (To be continued.') 
 
 Direction*. 
 
 (1) Turn as follows : ' The men-folk and especially the women- 
 folk, in the condition in which they live, have intellect in accord- 
 ance with that same (condition), that is, they are quick, and their 
 natural temperament is danger-knowing and deceiful and artful.' 
 
 (2) Effect the junctura here by yahdn ink ki, and proceed : ' the 
 customary and'common fine is liquor, which is taken in compensation 
 of every crime, and from which their riotous-living remains lasting 
 (for) periods (muddaton').' 
 
 (3) See 109. 4 tor the use of dakhl. 
 
 (4) Join on by the use of In/tin ki. 
 
 (5) Turn thus : ' because it is certain to them that our men will 
 not abandon us (use the idiom of 56.)> Dnt rather they who are 
 guilty will deliver themselves up for punishment (sacd-ydbf), though 
 it may be the punishment of death (see J76. 8.), and will not like 
 (jaM*Jra karnd) that (their) families remain in confinement.'
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 199 
 
 16. 
 
 (Concluded). 
 
 1 In the recent reform of a great proportion of the 
 Bheels of Central India, the women have acted a very 
 prominent part, and one worthy of the character of their 
 sex. 2 They have invariably been the advocates of the 
 cause of good order ; but the fact is, they have been 
 accustomed to industry and labour, and must be happy 
 to see their partners, who have hitherto passed their time 
 between crime and debauchery, compelled to more re- 
 gular courses. The Bheels, though in distinct classes, 
 are still one people. 3 Tiiey all eat the same diet ; they 
 intermarry ; 4 and they unite in the mode as well as the 
 substance of their worship. The latter, in essentials, is 
 similar to that of other Hindoos ; but the forms are 
 different. The religious ceremonies of this rude race 
 5 are much limited to propitiatory offerings and sacrifices 
 to some of the Hindoo minor infernal deities, but par- 
 ticularly to the Goddess of the Small Pox, whom they 
 invoke under various names, 6 in the hope of averting the 
 dreadful ravages this disorder at times makes among 
 them. They also pay great reverence to Mahadeo, from 
 whom they boast descent. 
 
 MALCOLM. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) This is by no means an easy sentence. It may be turned as 
 follows : ' In the reform of a large class of Bhils, which is recently 
 being carried out in Central India, their women have done great 
 service (jpesh-dastt), and certainly have done work worthy of their 
 sex.' Observe that the choice of petih-daatt is suggested by the 
 fact that pesh gives the notion of ' prominent.'
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (2) Begin with ' the fact is,' taken from the following clause, and 
 replace that phrase by ' and.' The clause ' compelled,' etc., may 
 be managed by ' began to leave off their irregularities ' (be-lagAmt). 
 
 (3) Turn : ' their eating drinking is one.' 
 
 (4) Simply : ' (their) religious ceremonies (dharm-rtt) are one 
 and the same (yafcadn).' ' The latter,' in the next clause, may be 
 translated by ptijd. 
 
 (5) Turn : ' are ended in this, that (fci) they do so and so.' 
 
 (6) Turn : ' in order that in the days of small-pox they may 
 remain safe from this dreadful plague.' 
 
 17. 
 
 The Thugs are composed of all castes ; Mahomedans 
 even are admitted ; but the great majority are Hindoos ; 
 and among these the Brahmans, chiefly of the Bundel- 
 khand tribes, are in the greatest numbers, and generally 
 direct the operations of the different bands. They have 
 fixed rules, particularly as to the division of booty. 
 
 1 Auxiliaries to their enterprises are sought for in all 
 ranks, but the most abandoned of the officers of govern- 
 ment of the countries to which they proceed are those 
 they chiefly desire; and after having ascertained, by 
 letter or verbal report, that circumstances are favourable, 
 
 2 they usually send as precursors, for the purpose of 
 minute local information, spies disguised as religious 
 mendicants, as tradesmen, or as soldiers looking for ser- 
 vice, who connect themselves with the loose characters of 
 the country, and all is prepared for the principal party, 
 which often consists of three or four hundred ; 3 but 
 these are never seen together, though the different bands 
 travel in perfect communication with each other. Some 
 of them have horses, camels, and tents, and are equipped 
 like merchants ; others are dressed like soldiers going
 
 EXEBCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 201 
 
 under a leader to take service ; some affect to be Maho- 
 medan beggars and Hindoo Bairdgis or holy mendi- 
 cants : they assume, in short, every disguise. 4 Parties 
 of the boldest and most active are always detached from 
 the main band ; these sometimes seek protection from 
 travellers ; at others afford it : 5 in either case the fate of 
 them who join them is the same. 
 
 (To be continued.) 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) Turn this sentence as follows : ' In their enterprises they 
 recruit for assistance low and high people of every sort, and are 
 specially desirous of the wicked (shartr shartr) officers of those 
 stated where it is their intention to go." 
 
 (2) Turn thus : ' It is their custom that they send precursors, 
 etc. ; these spies are in the disguise sometimes of faqirs, sometimes 
 of merchants, and sometimes of soldiers, etc., and connect them- 
 selves with, etc., and make preparation for the advent of the 
 principal party," etc. 
 
 (3) The junctura is here : ' but not this that they are ever seen 
 together, else, all the bands,' etc. 
 
 (4) Turn thus : ' one or more (ek no, ek) party of the brave and 
 active always remains apart from the main band : their business is 
 this, that either,' etc. 
 
 (5) For the method of idiomatically representing this clause, see 
 above Sect. I. 1 1 . (7) : ' in every case misfortune (s/idma<) came on 
 the poor people.' 
 
 18. 
 
 (Concluded.) 
 
 Tbe Thugs have, concealed, a long silken cord with a 
 noose, ! which they throw round the necks of their heed- 
 less companions, who are strangled and plundered. 
 2 Their victims, who are always selected for having pro-
 
 202 EXERCISES IV HINDUSTANI. 
 
 perty, are, when numerous, or at all on their guard, 
 lulled by every art into confidence. 3 They are invited to 
 feasts, where their victuals and drink are mixed with 
 soporific or poisonous drugs, through the effects of which 
 they *fall an easy prey to these robbers and murderers, 
 s the extraordinary success of whose atrocities can only be 
 accounted for by the condition of the countries in which 
 they take place. 6 They attained great strength in Central 
 India, and many gangs of this class passed annually 
 through the country, on their way to the dominions of 
 the Nizam and the Peshwa. In 1819 the manager of 
 Mandisur surrounded a body of Thugs, who professed 
 themselves, and appeared to be, 7 a party of horse and 
 foot soldiers that were escorting their baggage on camels 
 and bullocks from the Deccan. 8 He had, however, 
 gained information who they were, and commanded them 
 to submit; they refused, and an action took place, in 
 which the Thugs were routed, some of them killed, and 
 others made prisoners. The whole of their booty was 
 captured, amounting in value to more than a lac of 
 rupees, and comprising every variety of personal clothes 
 and ornaments, 9 rich and poor, for they plunder all 
 classes indiscriminately. Among other articles, a great 
 number of their strangling cords were taken and exhi- 
 bited. 
 
 MALCOLM. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) In order to avoid the second Relative and the Passives, turn 
 ' by which, having thrown (it) round the necks, etc., they strangle 
 and plunder (them).' Also see 50. (') 
 
 (2) Turn this as follows : ' The object of the Thugs is with rich 
 travellers only, and if these are numerous, etc. they bring them
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 203 
 
 into the net of deceit with a thousand artifices and entangle them." 
 In this latter clause the first verb may be constructed as a Past 
 Conjunctive Participle. 
 
 (3) Introduce this sentence by chundnchi, and construct actively 
 in connection with preceding sentence. 
 
 (4) Turn ' come easily into power (gdbtl) of.' 
 
 (5) Begin a fresh sentence here. 
 
 (6) Turn ' The Thugs especially increased in Central India (watat 
 Hind), and every year several gangs of them passing-through (hoke) 
 this country were in the habit of going towards,' etc. See 126. 
 
 (7) In the oratio recta. The word ' loaded ' must be placed before 
 the preposition ' on.' 
 
 (8) Turn thus : ' but to the hdlcim their actual reality had been 
 discovered.' 
 
 (9) Turn this more accurately than the English expression by 
 ky& amtron fcd our kyd gartbon fed. ' Indiscriminately ' may be 
 rendered by be taskhts-i-ashkh&s ' without specification of persons.' 
 This kind of association of fellow-derivatives is considered to be 
 good style. Comp. Sect. I. 9. (9)-
 
 204 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 
 1 PROCLAMATION 
 
 BY THE QUEEN IN COUNCIL TO THE PRINCES, CHIEFS, 
 AND PEOPLE OF INDIA. 
 
 2 VICTORIA, 
 
 By the Grace of God, of the United Kingdom of 
 Great Britain and Ireland, and of the Colonies 
 and Dependencies Thereof in Europe, Asia, Africa, 
 America, and Australasia, Queen, Defender of the 
 Faith. 
 
 8 Whereas, for divers weighty reasons, We have re- 
 solved, by and with the advice and consent of the Lords 
 Spiritual and Temporal and Commons in Parliament 
 assembled, to take upon Ourselves the Government of the 
 Territories in India, heretofore administered in trust for 
 Us by the Honourable East India Company. 
 
 4 Now, therefore, We do by these presents notify and 
 declare that, by the advice and consent aforesaid, We 
 have taken upon Ourselves the said Government ; and We 
 hereby call upon all Our subjects within the said territo-
 
 EXEKCISK8 IN HINDUSTANI. 205 
 
 ries to be faithful, and to bear true allegiance to Us, Our 
 Heirs, and Successors, and to submit themselves to the 
 authority of those whom We may hereafter, from time to 
 time, see tit to appoint to administer the Government 
 of Our said Territories, in Our name and on Our 
 behalf. 
 
 5 And We, reposing especial trust and confidence in 
 the loyalty, ability, and judgment of Our trusty and well- 
 beloved Cousin and Councillor, Charles John, Viscount 
 Canning, do hereby constitute and appoint him, the said 
 Viscount Canning, to be Our first Viceroy and Governor- 
 General in and over Our said Territories, to admini- 
 ster the Government thereof, in Our name, and generally 
 to act in Our name and on Our behalf, subject to such 
 Orders and Regulations as he shall, from time to time, 
 receive from Us through one of Our Principal Secretaries 
 of State. 
 
 6 And We do hereby confirm in their several Offices, 
 Civil and Military, all persons now employed in the ser- 
 vice of the Honourable East India Company, subject to 
 Our future pleasure, and to such laws and regulations as 
 may hereafter be enacted. 
 
 7 We hereby announce to the Native Princes of India 
 that all Treaties and Engagements made with them by or 
 under the authority of the Honourable East India Com- 
 pany, are by us accepted, and will be scrupulously main- 
 tained; and We look for the like observance on their 
 part. 
 
 8 We desire no extension of Our present territorial pos- 
 sessions, and while we will permit no aggression upon 
 Our dominions or Our rights to be attempted with im- 
 punity, We shall sanction no encroachment on those of
 
 206 EXZBCI8E8 IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 others. We shall respect the rights, dignity, and honour 
 of Native Princes as Our own ; and We desire that they, 
 as well as Our own subjects, should enjoy that prosperity 
 and that social advancement which can only be secured by 
 internal peace and good government. 
 
 9 We hold Ourselves bound to the Natives of Our 
 Indian Territories by the same obligations of duty which 
 bind Us to all Our other subjects ; and those obligations, 
 by the blessing of Almighty God, we shall faithfully and 
 conscientiously fulfil. 
 
 10 Firmly relying Ourselves on the truth of Christianity, 
 and acknowledging with gratitude the solace of religion, 
 We disclaim alike the right and the desire to impose Our 
 convictions on any of Our subjects. We declare it to be 
 our Royal will and pleasure that none be in any wise 
 favoured, none molested or disquieted, by reason of 
 their religious faith or observances ; but that all shall 
 alike enjoy the equal and impartial protection of the 
 Law : and We do strictly charge and enjoin all those 
 who may be in authority under Us, that they abstain 
 from all interference with the religious belief or worship 
 of any of Our subjects, on pain of our highest dis- 
 pleasure. 
 
 11 And it is Our further will that, so far as may be, 
 Our subjects, of whatever race or creed, be freely and 
 impartially admitted to offices in Our service, the duties 
 of which they may be qualified by their education, 
 ability, and integrity, duly to discharge. 
 
 12 We know, and respect, the feelings of attachment 
 with which the Natives of India regard the lands 
 inherited by them from their ancestors ; and We desire 
 to protect them in all rights connected therewith, subject
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 207 
 
 to the equitable demands of the State ; and We will 
 that, generally, in framing and administering the Law, 
 due regard be paid to the ancient rights, usages, and 
 customs of India. 
 
 13 We deeply lament the evils and misery which have 
 been brought upon India by the acts of ambitious men, 
 who have deceived their countrymen by false reports, and 
 led them into open rebellion. Our power has been shewn 
 by the suppression of that rebellion in the field ; We 
 desire to shew Our mercy, by pardoning the offences of 
 those who have been thus misled, but who desire to 
 return to the path of duty. 
 
 14 Already, in one Province, with a view to stop the 
 further effusion of blood and to hasten the pacification 
 of Our Indian dominions, Our Viceroy and Governor- 
 General has held out the expectation of pardon on cer- 
 tain terms, to the great majority of those who in the late 
 unhappy disturbances have been guilty of offences against 
 Our Government ; and has declared the punishment which 
 will be inflicted on those whose crimes place them beyond 
 the reach of forgiveness. 
 
 15 We approve and confirm the said act of Our Viceroy 
 and Governor-General, and do further announce and pro- 
 claim as follows : 
 
 16 Our clemency will be extended to all offenders save 
 and except those who have been, or shall be, convicted of 
 having directly taken part in the murder of British 
 subjects : with regard to such the demands of justice 
 forbid the exercise of mercy. 
 
 17 To those who have willingly given asylum to mur- 
 derers, knowing them to be such, or who may have acted 
 as leaders or instigators in revolt, their lives can alone be
 
 208 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 guaranteed ; but in apportioning the penalty due to such 
 persons, full consideration will be given to the circum- 
 stances under which they have been induced to throw off 
 their allegiance; and large indulgence will be shown to 
 those whose crimes may appear to have originated in too 
 credulous acceptance of the false reports circulated by 
 designing men. 
 
 18 To all others in arms against the Government, We 
 hereby promise unconditional pardon, amnesty, and 
 oblivion of all offence against Ourselves, Our Crown and 
 dignity, on their return to their homes and peaceful pur- 
 suits. 
 
 19 It is Our Royal pleasure that these terms of grace 
 and amnesty should be extended to all those who comply 
 with their conditions before the 1st day of January 
 next. 
 
 20 When, by the blessing of Providence, internal tran- 
 quillity shall be restored, it is Our earnest desire to stimu- 
 late the peaceful industry of India, to promote works of 
 public utility and improvement, and to administer its 
 Government for the benefit of all Our subjects resident 
 therein. In their prosperity will be Our strength ; in 
 their contentment Our security ; and in their gratitude 
 Our best reward. And may the God of all power grant 
 to Us, and to those in authority under Us, strength 
 to carry out these Our wishes for the good of Our 
 people.
 
 KXKIiCrSES IN HINDUSTANI. 209 
 
 Directions. 
 
 (1) Persian, in some of its idioms, is a better conveyancer of 
 official English than Hindustani, partly on account of its prestige 
 as the former language of the Courts, and partly because it in- 
 volves less inversion of the English order of the words. Thus, in 
 translating the heading of this Proclamation, the Persianised form 
 Ishtehdr-i-maliqa-mo'azzama ba-ijlds-i-kaunsil ba-n&m-i-wdliydn o 
 aorddrdn o b&shindag&n-i-Hind, involving, as it does, nothing which 
 is strange or unintelligible to an educated native, is statelier both 
 in form and sound than Ishteh&r malika-mo'azzama fed kaunsil he 
 ijl&s men Hindustan ke ra'tson aur sarddron aur bdshindon ke ndm, 
 which is the Hindustani equivalent. 
 
 (2) In this paragraph, native etiquette requires the word 
 ' Queen ' to be in the forefront of the sentence. Begin, therefore, 
 jandb maliqa-mo'azzama Victoria, and instead of 'of say ' Regent 
 of the kingdoms of,' omitting ' united,' as unnecessary ; thus, 
 khadtv-i-mamdlik-i-, etc. And, as the paragraph is not a heading, 
 it should be completed in the Hindustani version ; thus, ' on the 
 part of (ki taraf se) it is published for public information in the 
 following terms,' khdss o 'dmm kt ittild* Ice Ife hasb-i-tafsil-i-zail 
 mushtahar kiyd j<lt<l hai. 
 
 (3) Begin with the formal wdzeh ho ki ' Be informed that.' See 
 Vocabulary for the remaining terms. For ' resolve ' the term most 
 congruous to the occasion is irdda kar-lend, because ' irddd ' is the 
 official term under Mahomedan Governments for a public decree. 
 The last clause must be turned as a relative clause parenthetically 
 adjusted, viz. ' of which the management till to-day was com- 
 mitted in trust to the Honourable East India Company,' and the 
 last four words are to be transliterated. 
 
 (4) ' By these presents,' is qirtdt ke rti se, lit. ' By the face or 
 appearance of this document.' ' Call upon,' tdktdan farmdnd ki. 
 
 (5) To be turned in this form : ' And as (jo) there is to us full 
 trust, etc. in the loyalty, etc. of,' etc. The conventional terms 
 ' trusty and well-beloved,' etc. may be rendered by the correspond- 
 ing official Persian Farzand-i-arjmand mo'aezas o mo'tamad 'alaihi 
 
 14
 
 210 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 muthtr-i-khAta placed at the beginning of the clause. ' Through 
 one of our principal,' etc., ma'ri/o* ham Are vaztr-i-a'sam ke. 
 
 (6) Begin with relative clause : ' And those people who,' etc. 
 ' Hereby,' i.e. ' by these presents,' which may be repeated from (4). 
 The clause ' subject to,' etc. should be introduced by lekin : ' but 
 let them be subject,' etc. 
 
 (7) To be turned as follows : ' And information is given to the 
 Princes of India that we shall,' etc., the relative clause, however, 
 standing first with doubled relative. ' Native ' is unnecessary. 
 The final clause is emphasized by the preface aur chashm-dAsht hai 
 ki, etc. ' and there is expectation that.' 
 
 (8) Begin, ' The country which is at present in our possession, 
 we do not wish to extend,' etc. ' And while,' etc., aur jab yeh 
 hamko gawAra nahtn hai ki, followed by to ham bht in the apodosis. 
 ' As our own,' that is, ' like our own rights.' ' Internal ' need not 
 be translated in the final clause. 
 
 (9) Begin with relative clause: 'The obligations which are in- 
 cumbent on us with respect to our other subjects, those same obli- 
 gations we shall consider our necessary charge with respect to our 
 subjects in India, and by God's grace we shall continue to regard 
 the said obligations with faithfulness and sincerity.' The student 
 should bear in mind the use of the Progressive and Continuative 
 forms of the verb in this and other paragraphs. The masculine 
 and not the feminine plural should be used throughout. 
 
 (10) Construct with concessive clause, followed by to bht in the 
 apodosis, and proceed, ' it is neither our design nor desire that we 
 cause to adopt (iaaltm fcardnd),' etc. After this, carry on the 
 junctura with balki. The final clause maybe turned 'and if not 
 (wo t/M), our extreme wrath will be.' 
 
 (11) ' Of whatever,' etc., Qo kiet qaum yd mazhab ki ho. ' Freely 
 and impartially,' bilA ta'arruz o taraf-dArt Ice. 
 
 (12) The translation of the verb ' respect ' in this connection is 
 difficult, for the ordinary verbs in use are applicable to persons only. 
 Approval of the sentiment referred to is intended: begin, tli<T<>- 
 fore, with iskA hamko ba-kh&bt 'Urn hai ki, followed by ' the people 
 of India love the lands (ardzt) which,' etc. The clause ' subject 
 to,' etc. may be rendered here adverbially, ba-shart odd knrne 
 mutiilaba farkAri ke, the word mutAlaba being technically used
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 211 
 
 as a legal demand. The last part of the paragraph may run : 
 ' And it is our order that at the time of the framing and effecting 
 (m/de) of the law, full consideration continue (hot A rahnd) for(jmr) 
 ancient rights and the habits and customs of India.' 
 
 (13) ' Evils,' etc. cannot be the direct object of ' lament ' in the 
 Hindustani idiom. Turn, therefore : ' On the hearing of this state 
 of things (ba-istimA* is h&l fee) that some intriguers, by spreading 
 (Past Conjunctive Participle) false reports and seducing their 
 fellow-countrymen, caused them to make open mutiny and made a 
 calamity descend on India, extreme sorrow was to us.' The implied 
 ' path of duty ' being submission, the phrase may be translated 
 accordingly ; but the idea may also be expressed by the Persian 
 rd-ba-r&h. 
 
 (14) This paragraph is exceptionally difficult. Paraphrase as 
 follows : ' With this intention that in future more bloodshed be not 
 allowed (hone pdnti), and (that) peace and tranquillity take place 
 quickly in our countries of India, our Viceroy, etc., in one province 
 where (ki jahUn) the people in the days of foul mutiny did offence 
 against the Government, made most of them expectant of pardon 
 for their faults on special conditions ; and the faults of those 
 which made them outside the enclosure (pale) of mercy, of those 
 also has explained the punishments.' 
 
 (15) Begin with chun&nchi. 
 
 (16) This also is extremely difficult. Turn as follows : ' Except 
 those people with respect to whom it has been proved or may 
 be proved that they have personally shared in the murder of a 
 subject of the English Government, a declaration of mercy with 
 respect to all the rest will be made ; but with respect to the 
 sharers in murder justice demands this, that no mercy be shown 
 them.' 
 
 (17) ' Knowing them to be such," jdn-btijh-lce. ' But in appor- 
 tioning,' etc., lekin aise logon kt tajurtz-i-sazti men. ' And large 
 i nlgence,' etc. Turn as follows : ' And in respect of those people 
 f ho, without thinking (be socfre), having come into the false state- 
 ments of the intriguers, became criminal, great clemency will be 
 done.' 
 
 (18) This may be constructed as follows : ' With (se) all the rest 
 who are, etc. . . by these presents the promise is, that, if they go 
 
 14 *
 
 212 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 home and engage in their occupations peacefully, tln-n their 
 faults, which were committed (aarzad) in respect of us and in 
 respect of our sovereignty and dignity, without condition will be 
 pardoned and forgiven and forgotten.' 
 
 (19) ' Terms ' and ' conditions ' may be translated by the same 
 word, sharA'it (pi. of short). ' Extended,' muta'alliq (e). 
 
 (20) The first sentence of this paragraph is thus constructed : 
 ' It is our earnest desire that, when in India by God's grace again 
 tranquillity may be restored (Jio-jdnd), then (to) there improve- 
 ment of the arts of peace be effected, and for the benefiting (t/dda) 
 of the people works like the making (tayydrt) of roads and canals, 
 etc. be established, and such an administration of the country made 
 that from which advantage may be to all our subjects of the said 
 country.' Join to this the following sentence by ky&nki ' Their 
 prosperity is for us a cause of power,' and so forth. The last sen- 
 tense is thus turned : ' And may the God of all power (khud&e 
 q&dir) to us and our subordinates grant such grace that these our 
 wishes (murdd) for the advantage of the people may reach a happy 
 ending ' (husn ikhtittim ko pahUnchnd). 
 
 END OF PAJIT III.
 
 APPENDICES.
 
 214 
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 B 
 
 ^ 
 
 CTUs or ARAB 
 Examples ar>' c 
 
 SB 
 
 B 
 
 si 
 
 1 
 
 '5 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 fc 
 
 o <-> 
 
 3 1 1 
 
 - ' ' 
 
 o o " 
 
 
 
 fc-8 - 
 
 -*a w ** 
 
 -1 
 
 
 
 II 
 
 i S 
 
 S S 
 
 7 -3 xs 
 -s v- w 
 
 r 
 
 8 
 
 J s 
 
 j 
 
 '> 
 
 -is 
 
 ~ -a T = 
 
 o 2 "* 
 
 Jbfi O ^ *0 
 _= ^ _o js c ( 
 
 'S S-'iJ'SJ' 
 
 c X 
 
 1 
 
 jr 
 
 
 5 o a & 
 'o *> 'S 
 
 ills 
 
 .- : ? 'I 
 
 - J: ~ 
 
 t; s c "S d 
 
 g > -2 g .2
 
 APPENDIX A. 
 
 215 
 
 Mil 0*1 ^ 
 
 ... J J-l 
 
 im 
 
 .-3 o^ 3 
 
 3*3, 
 
 $3. 
 
 -3 
 
 80 ^ ffi r* 
 
 o "C "** '4 
 a ^ 
 s fl 
 
 S .S .2 
 
 > 
 
 ' 
 
 82 " 
 
 II a ^ 
 
 if 51? 
 
 c ^ 
 
 I^HJ 
 
 a S S 
 
 1 is 
 
 J cr^ 
 d o a> 
 
 d a a 
 
 -S S 05 
 
 SBC 
 313 
 
 -o-? 
 
 >. a 
 
 * f "ca 
 h 
 
 H 
 
 * 
 
 ^ 'O O ^ 
 
 P ^* w -8 
 
 In i 
 
 H 
 
 Hi 
 
 S.-S"
 
 216 EXBBCI8BS IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 1 . In the model Measures, which are given in large 
 type in the Conspectus, Fa, 'Ain, and Lam are radical 
 letters, and the rest, whether vowels or consonants, are said 
 to ' fatten ' the root, on the principle that extension of 
 form means extension of meaning (see Col. 1). 
 
 This process of word-building is regular and symmetri- 
 cal, but is subject to certain euphonic adjustments when 
 
 one or other of the radicals is a ' weak ' letter, that is to 
 
 
 
 say, is either \ ) or ^5 These letters are severally homo- 
 geneous with the vowels Fatha, Zamma, and Kasra ; and, 
 when ' quiescent ' by position, combine with them to 
 form the long sounds d, d, and t. Only two other com- 
 binations are admissible, viz., the diphthongs au and at, 
 in which fatha precedes wdv and yd. Consequently, in the 
 structure of derivatives, when a weak radical (quiescent) 
 succeeds a vowel augment in any other order than is 
 indicated by the above five legitimate combinations, such 
 radical gives way, and is either changed or dropped, as the 
 circumtanoes of the case require. Thus, Alif-hamza may be 
 changed to Wdv or Yd, Wdv to Yd, or Yd to Wdv. 
 
 2. An examination of the examples which are given in 
 the Conspectus, with their roots, for this special purpose, 
 will explain the principle of these permutations. 
 
 FORM I. (1) In ^y*^ rdzi, normally rdziw, the 3rd 
 radical has been changed to yd, with which the charac- 
 teristic Kagra of the second syllable is combined. In 
 classical Arabic the radical wdv is dropped, and the Ka-sra 
 preserved in the form of tanwin, so that rdzin, not rdzi, id 
 the mode.
 
 APPENDIX A. 217 
 
 (2) In ^i qaim the 2nd radical has been changed to 
 yd to avoid the double alif. Hamza records the nature of 
 the change, and the suppression of the subscript dots in 
 the substituted letter indicates that the sound of the 
 syllable is 'iw, not yim. The common word sd'is, vulgarly 
 ' syce ' is another example. 
 
 (3) In u-y t mdnus, the fatha of the augment combines 
 with the quiescent alif-hamza, and the same thing takes 
 place in ^f>-y* maujud. In ^^ ma'ni, the characteristic 
 augment it of the second syllable in the normal form has 
 been changed to i, and the 3rd radical is dropped in 
 writing, though the sign of tashdid is added by the gram- 
 marians. 
 
 FORM II. (1) In ^ tdsir, the fatha of the augment 
 combines with the quiescent alif-hamza ; and the same 
 thing takes place in the final syllable of mohaiyd. 
 
 (2) In &rfy or o~rfy tarbiyat, the wdv has been changed 
 to yd, and the lightening of the characteristic i of the 
 second syllable compensated by the affix at. 
 
 (3) In the Participial forms QJJ* muazzin, and s^j* 
 mtfaddab, the 1st radical has been changed to wdv, with 
 which the zamma of the augment is homogeneous. Hamza 
 records the nature of the change and reminds the reader 
 that the pronunciation is unaltered. 
 
 FORM III. (1) In sAi^j* mtidkhaza, the change is the 
 same as that above described. The wdv unites in writing 
 with the mim in both cases, but has no sound of its own. 
 
 (2) In yU^* muldqdt, normally muldqayat, the radical 
 yd is dropped, and the characteristic fathas unite to form 
 the a of the final syllable. 
 
 (3) In (*Ay muwdfiq, no change was necessary in the 
 writing, but the radical wav is unsounded.
 
 218 BXERCISK- IN HINDISIANI. 
 
 FORM IV. (1) In gU^ imdn, and U^ im<7, the 1st 
 radical has been changed to // ' in symphony with the 
 characteristic kagra of the augment, and though the 
 radicals are different, the crasis thus formed is the same 
 in sound. 
 
 (2) In J\)\ irdda, normally irwdd, the loss of the wdv 
 is compensated for by the affix ah or at. In the Parti- 
 cipial forms murid and murdd, from the same root, com- 
 pensation is made by lengthening the characteristic vowels 
 of the second syllable in each case. 
 
 (3) In jj^^* muruhi, the 3rd radical has been changed 
 to yd in sympathy with the characteristic kasra of the 
 second syllable. 
 
 FORM V. (1) In J*U ta'ammul, the fatha of the augment 
 forms a crasis in writing, but not in reading, with the 
 homogeneous 1st radical. (Comp. F. II. (3) above.) 
 
 (2) In <...7. m-utashakki, the 3rd radical has been 
 changed to yd in symphony with the characteristic kagra 
 of the final syllable. 
 
 (3) In Jj~* niutabannd, both servile and radical are 
 retained in the form Jj which is usually written and 
 read as a in Persian and Hindustani. 
 
 FORM VI. (!) In ^U* tamdshi, the characteristic zamma 
 of the final syllable has been changed to kasra in symphony 
 with the 3rd radical. This word, and a few others of the 
 same form, are written and read in Hindustani with a 
 instead of i final. 
 
 FORM VIII. (1) In kU*J ehtiydt, the 2nd radical which 
 follows the medial augment ti has been changed for the 
 homogeneous yd. In multawi, on the other hand, the 
 augment is ta, not ti, and the wdv is retained. 
 
 (2) In e^*- mohtaj, normally mohtawaj, the wdv, has
 
 APPENDIX A. 219 
 
 been dropped, and (as in F. III. (2) above) the two fathat 
 form a crasis in a. 
 
 (3) In jtoj ittifdq, normally iurtifdq, the loss of the 
 wdv has been compensated by the duplication of the 
 servile t. 
 
 (4) In g>\ ittild', ^-** mijidda'i, \*A* mudda'd, the 
 euphonic change consists in the absorption, under tashdid, 
 of the medial augment t with the 1st radical. It may be 
 added here that, when the 1st radical is j the t of the 
 augment becomes J ; and when the 1st radical is \j> or ^6 
 the t is written t . 
 
 POEM X. (1) In f+gax* mustaqim, the 2nd radical has 
 been dropped, and compensation been made, as in murid, 
 F. IV., by lengthening the characteristic kasra of the 
 final syllable. 
 
 (2) In jUx~* musta'dr, the same explanation holds 
 good. Compare murdd, F. IV. 
 
 3. The chief proportion of Arabic verbals current in 
 Hindustani belongs to Form I., under the head ' Nouns 
 of Action,' which are used as Abstract nouns, and, with 
 at or ah added, as ' Nouns of Unity.' Of the Derived 
 Forms, the most fully represented are those which belong 
 to Forms II., IV., VIII., but it rarely happens that more 
 than four or five Derivatives from the same root are in 
 use. An example of four Forms from the same root 
 occurs in the Conspectus, viz., 'Urn ' knowledge,' and 
 ma'lum 'known' ; ta'lim 'education,' and mo'alliin ' teacher.' 
 In addition to these 'dlim ' knowing,' and 'alim ' all- 
 knowing,' an epithet of the Deity, and one or two rarer 
 forms, are current in literature. 
 
 4. The Gender of Nouns of F. 1. is conventional. For
 
 220 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 instance, 'ilm is masculine and 'aql feminine; fikr 'thought' 
 is either Masculine or Feminine. Nouns of this class, 
 however, which end in d are generally Feminine. (See 
 Part I. 2.) The Gender of nouns which belong to the 
 other Forms is almost invariably Masculine, except in the 
 case of Form II., where the reverse is the case. Out of 
 some 230 regular examples of this Form, which occur 
 in Hindustani, only one, viz., ta'wiz ' amulet,' is Mascu- 
 line. 
 
 5. In addition to the three leading verbal Measures of 
 Form L, which are given in the Conspectus, the following 
 are in every-day use : 
 
 (1) A form denoting intensive agency in the noun, or 
 superlativeness in the adjective; as,faqir ' a professional 
 beggar ' ; hakim ' one who gives orders in a special branch 
 of science,' ' a physician,' or ' sage ' ; amir ' one who gives 
 commands,' ' a ruler ' ; ra't ' one who exercises headship ' ; 
 sharir ' villainous ' ; rahim ' compassionate ' ; 'alim ' all- 
 knowing,' ' omniscient,' mentioned above. 
 
 (2) Afm-ated Nouns of Place and Instrument, so called 
 because they receive the prefix ma or it; such as, 
 masjid 'place of worship'; matba 1 'place of printing'; 
 miftdh ' instrument for opening,' ' key ' ; mizdn (root, wazri) 
 1 instrument for weighing,' ' balance,' etc. etc. 
 
 (3) Mim-aied Nouns of Action ; such as, mahabbat 
 * affection ' ; maslahat ' counsel,' etc. 
 
 (4) Nouns formed by the addition of at, often softened 
 to ah in passing through the Persian, to the Participial 
 forms ; as, musibat ' misfortune ' ; muqaddama * law-suit/ 
 etc. 
 
 (5) Nouns or adjectives, of which the characteristic is
 
 APPENDIX A. 221 
 
 a duplication of the 2nd radical, which denotes intensive- 
 ness (see F. II.) ; such as, nawwab (Anglice, Nabob) ' a 
 vice-regent ' ; sarrdf (Anglice, shroff) 'a money-changer ' ; 
 tayydr ' alert,' etc. etc. 
 
 6. Numerous other Arabic measures are employed in 
 the vocabulary of Hindustani, and among these the 
 various forms of ' Broken Plural,' of which instances occur 
 in the Exercises, deserve close attention. But enough has 
 now been said to show the interest and the importance of 
 the subject, with reference to the remarks made in the 
 opening paragraph of this work.
 
 APPENDIX B. 
 
 THB TENSE SYSTEM OF THE HINDUSTANI VERB. 
 Ex. m&rna ' striking* or ' to strike.' 
 
 Native Nomenclature. 
 
 CorreBponding English 
 Nomenclature. 
 
 3rd Pen. 
 Sing. 
 
 English Meaning. 
 
 
 Th 
 
 ree Tenses formed 
 
 from the Bt 
 
 IM 
 
 (Which may itself be used aa an Abstract Nonn). 
 
 1. Amr . 
 
 Imperative . 
 
 mar 2 p.s. 
 
 Strike thou. 
 
 
 
 marlyo. 
 
 Strike (not neces- 
 
 
 
 
 sarily at once). 
 
 
 (Precative) . 
 
 mari e, ma- 
 
 Pray strike (when or 
 
 
 
 rl eg- & 
 
 as yon please). 
 
 2. Jfiwdrt' . . | 
 
 Aorist or Dubious ^ 
 or Optative . ) 
 
 mare . 
 
 SHe strikes (perhaps) 
 or may strike. 
 Would he may strike 
 
 3. Muxtaqbil 
 
 Future or Presump- 
 
 maregA 
 
 He will strike or must 
 
 Ehtim&H. 
 
 tive. 
 
 
 strike. 
 
 Six Tenses formed from the Imperfect Participle (Ism-fd'il). 
 
 4. HAl 
 
 Present . 
 
 m&rta hai . 
 
 He is striking. 
 
 5. HOlHMMfcMfc. 
 
 Present Dubious . 
 
 marta ho . 
 
 He is striking (per- 
 
 
 
 
 haps), or may be 
 
 
 
 
 striking. 
 
 6. H&l-ehtim&li . 
 
 Present Presump- 
 
 marta hogr& 
 
 He will be striking 
 
 
 tive. 
 
 
 (perhaps), or must 
 
 
 
 
 be striking. 
 
 7. M&zt-n&tam&m 
 
 Past Imperfect 
 
 mArtatha . 
 
 He was striking. 
 
 8 - Mazi llamannfit j 
 
 r, . ( Conditional ) 
 Pa8t 1 Optative, j 
 
 marta . 
 
 ( Had he struck. 
 ^ Would he had struck. 
 
 
 
 
 f Had he been striking. 
 
 9. Aizan . 
 
 Do. do. (2nd Form) 
 
 marta hota 
 
 < Would he had been 
 
 
 
 
 ( striking. 
 
 Six Tenses formed from the Perfect Participle (Ism-maf'ul). 
 
 10. MAzt-mutlaq . 
 
 Past Absolute 
 
 mara . 
 
 He struck. 
 
 11. M&zt-qartb . 
 
 Past Proximate 
 
 marahai . 
 
 He has struck (re- 
 
 
 
 
 cently). 
 
 12. Mlzt-mashKLk 
 
 Past Dubious . 
 
 mar A. ho . 
 
 He struck (perhaps), 
 
 
 
 
 or may have struck. 
 
 13. Mfat-ehtimd.lt 
 
 Past Presumptive . 
 
 mara hoga . 
 
 He will have struck, 
 
 
 
 
 or must have struck. 
 
 14. Ifdzf-ba'fd . 
 
 Past Remote . 
 
 mara tha . 
 
 He struck (some time 
 
 
 
 
 ago), or had struck. 
 
 
 f Conditional "J 
 
 
 f Had he struck (some 
 
 IK \TA<,t ('WW** ) 
 
 i > " ' *\* t 
 ( tamarind t ) 
 
 Past \ (Remote), f 
 3t 1 Optative C 
 
 marahoU . 
 
 i time ago). 
 / Would he had struck 
 
 
 (. (3rd Form). ) 
 
 
 (. (some time ago).
 
 APPENDIX B. '223 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 (1) In respect of Time, the first three Tenses are 
 Future, the next three Present, and the last nine Past. 
 Native grammarians place the Past Tenses first, in imita- 
 tion of the Arabic manner, then the Present, then the 
 Future. 
 
 (2) In respect of Meaning, Nos. 5 and 12 serve as 
 Auxiliary extensions of No. 2. 
 
 (3) Similarly Nos. 9 and 15 serve as Auxiliary exten- 
 sions of No. 8. 
 
 (4) No. 8 is formed from No. 7 by dropping the 
 Auxiliary thd, and No. 15 is formed from No. 9 by drop- 
 ping the Auxiliary thd, and using hotd in its place. 
 
 (5) As regards the nomenclature, Muzdri' (No. 2) is a 
 misnomer, and out of harmony with the rest of the desig- 
 nations. It means ' resembling,' and is borrowed from 
 Arabic grammar, in the tense-system of which what we 
 call the Aorist has noun-like inflections. Some native 
 scholars have suggested the term gair-mo l ayyan to corre- 
 spond with our term Aorist. 
 
 As regards the order of the Tenses, English gramma- 
 rians place the Tense No. 8 where No. 4 stands in the 
 arrangement here adopted. In so doing they forget the 
 fact that No. 8 is a Past Tense, formed, as said above, by 
 dropping the Auxiliary in No. 7.
 
 '2- ^ !\IK<I<r- IN 
 
 APPENDIX C. 
 
 ON THB USE OP THK ROMAN CHARACTKR IN 
 TRANSLITERATION. 
 
 1. There are three difficulties in practice, viz. 
 (1) The due representation of the short vowels, viz., of 
 Zabar, Zer, Peek or Fatha, Kasra, Zamma. Sir W. Jones's 
 adoption of a, i, u, is undoubtedly the most convenient for 
 Englishmen, and the word insular, which might be written 
 ;1~-H is a compendious exhibit of the sounds intended to 
 be conveyed, the only objection being that, in English, a 
 rarely has the sound which is here assigned to it. But, 
 as a matter of fact, each of the vowels Zabar, Zer, Peak, 
 is liable to considerable modification of tone in connection 
 with certain consonants, notably, so far as Hindustani is 
 concerned, when the syllables in which they occur are 
 closed by c or 8 or . A hard and fast rule is, therefore, 
 misleading. Thus, the vowel Zabar has the sound of e 
 rather than a before c and . For example, J*-*^ is 
 better written tehsil than tahsil ; and this variation in 
 sound is due to the necessity of clearly aspirating the 
 consonant. In several common words, such as \** kat,n I, 
 *ii>pahld, the Zabar approaches the sound of ei, and can be 
 acquired by the ear only. Zabar before hardens to 
 d, as was noticed at 85. 7, an effect due to the peculiar 
 phonation of that consonant, for which see below. 
 
 Again, the vowel Zer has the sound of e rather than i 
 l>efore c * and when these letters close the syllable. 
 Thus, is*o^ is mi'hnat, not mihnat, and gW* mehni<in.
 
 APPENDIX C. 225 
 
 uot mikmdn. In the same way ^J&J is rightly written 
 Dehli, not Dihli. (Delhi is doubly wrong.) On the other 
 hand, the native fashion of spelling J^ is correctly given 
 in Dilli. Hence, too, ^ is better rendered yeh than yih. 
 Similarly, J\J*a~\ is more exactly pronounced iste'ddd than 
 isti'ddd, and jWxeJ. is e'tibdr, not i'tibdr, J*k fe'l, not fi'l. 
 The vowel Pesh before these same consonants is o rather 
 than M, under the same circumstances. Thus, s^*" is 
 mohtdj, not muhtdj, and 8Hc is rather 'ohda than 'uhda. 
 The pronoun Sj is better rendered icoTi than wuh. Simi- 
 larly, ,4** is mo'allim, not mu'allim, <*JUV** mo'dmala, not 
 mu'dmala. 
 
 It may be added here that, in such words as ** or ^ 
 which, exactly transliterated, would be fath and sulh, the 
 necessity of clearly enunciating the aspirated final, pro- 
 duces the di-syllabic utterance fateh and suleh. For a 
 case in point see 85. 6. 
 
 (2) The representation of different consonants which 
 have approximately the same sound to the European ear ; 
 such as, ^tyij-^yevi*, etc. The ordinary practice 
 is to use one Roman letter, and to differentiate the Oriental 
 letters by placing a dot or dots below this Roman letter. 
 The only other alternative is to invent separate symbols, 
 such as those used by Prof. Newman in his Handbook of 
 Modern Arabic ; but one might as well use the originals 
 themselves. The objection to the dot system is that it is 
 not sufficiently distinctive, and fails to catch the eye and 
 impress the memory, so that when an exercise is written 
 in the native character, misspelling is unavoidable by 
 students who lean too much upon the romanization of the 
 words. The hints given in the first Exercise, if studiously 
 attended to, will help to minimise the evil. The subscript 
 
 15
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 dots are omitted in this work by way of compelling the 
 student to refer to the original words. 
 
 (3) The representation of the letter 'Ain. The real 
 vocal affinity between this letter and Hamza is indicated 
 in the symbol adopted by the Arabs to denote the latter, 
 which symbol is the upper portion of the 'Ain. Con- 
 sequently, if the comma is accepted as a representative of 
 Hamza, it is consistent pro tanto to take the inverted 
 comma, inconvenient as it is, as the sign for 'Ain. 
 
 2. As regards the pronunciation of the 'Ain, the author 
 above referred to says : " The letter Ainin not merely a 
 hiatus like Hamze, but a muscular upward jerk of the 
 chest and stomach, accompanied with an elevation of 
 musical note to the vowel." Whatever may be the case 
 in the Desert, the Indian Mahomedau is content with a 
 less spasmodic phonation. Without apparent effort he 
 emits the sound directly from the larynx. 
 
 The letter Gain, which represents the Gimel of Hebivw 
 and the Gamma of the Greeks, is produced in much the 
 same way, but has a harsher and coarser sound than 
 'Ain. The Arabs themselves describe it as ^ yarr, 6,^ 
 gardra, or tyjk gargarat ' gargling.'
 
 VOCABULARY No. 1. 
 
 OF WORDS CONTAINED IN THE HINDUSTANI 
 SENTENCES OF PARTS I. AND II. 
 
 (The numbers refer to the Exercises in which the words occur.) 
 
 \ ab now ; ab to just now, 
 for the present ; abtak up 
 to the present time, till 
 now, as yet, 51. 
 
 abdbil swallow, 164. a. 
 abtar ruined, impove- 
 rished, disorganized, 18. a. 
 \ ilbri't honour ; dbru bar- 
 hand to increase the ho- 
 nour paid to a person, 
 to honour, do honour to, 
 84. p. 
 
 \ dp self or selves, what- 
 ever the person : you, Sir, 
 Your Honour ; 3rd p. pi. 
 (in addressing friends, 
 equals, or superiors) ; dp 
 hi dp or dp se dp of one's 
 own accord, 91. 
 \ apnd own ; applicable to 
 all persons and numbers 
 (see 43) ; apne pi. one's 
 own folk (44) ; apne dp 
 se of one's own accord. 
 \3\ utdrnd to take or bring 
 
 down, 1st caus. of utarnd, 
 68. 
 
 t?\ atis aconite, 18. 
 W\dtd flour, 18. 
 &\ dth eight. 
 6j^ athdra eighteen, 68. 
 \*\d>\ uthdnd to raise, take 
 up, etc., 1st caus. of 
 uthnd ; uthd na rakhnd to 
 take a thing up and not 
 put it down (till done 
 ^ with), 84. 
 ?\ asr effect, 10. a. 
 5\ dj to-day ; dj-kal now- 
 
 a-days, 10. 
 
 wwjM ijdzai leave, 143, 150. a. 
 ajnabi foreign, 60. a. 
 achchhd good, etc. 
 
 ehtimdl presumption, 
 assumption, 143. a. 
 
 ehtiydt care, caution, 
 circumspection, 34. a. 
 \ akhbdr (pi. of khabar) 
 newspaper, 122, 143. a. 
 jtt\ ikhtiydr authority 
 power, control, 150. a. 
 15 *
 
 . HIXDf-r.VNI. 
 
 y*-\ dkhir at last ; akhir ko 
 
 ditto, 187. a. 
 J**^ akhldq morals; akhlaqte 
 courteously, kindly, 60. a. 
 v^ adab etquette, good 
 manners, 76. a. 
 
 dwi man, human 
 being, 4. a. 
 
 idhar hither : idhar 
 udhar ki bdfen small talk, 
 76. 
 
 r/A half, 44. 
 **)\^ irada intention, deter- 
 mination, 51, 157. a. 
 p\$ dram ease, rest ; dram' 
 talab lazy, ease-loving, 
 indolent, 91. p. 
 y>^ Urdu name by which 
 the Hindustani language 
 was first known at Dehli, 
 camp-language, 84. /. 
 je~\\ Aristu Aristotle, 164. a. 
 eji are vocative particle, 
 like English O! hallo! 
 you there ! etc. 
 
 azbaski inasmuch as, 
 157. p. 
 
 dean easy, 182. 
 \ (isbdb (pi. of sabab), 
 things, baggage, furni- 
 ture, etc., 18, 150. a. 
 jjiiJ iete'ddd proficiency, 
 44. o. 
 
 .\ etc. ifea, itko or 
 ukd, utko inflected forms 
 of yeh, woh. 
 
 U-\ agmdn sky, heaven, 
 34. p. 
 
 dshkilr known,. evident, 
 34. p. 
 
 ierdf extravagance, 
 
 of Ian totally, quite, 91. a. 
 Iffll,!' informatiou, 
 137. a. 
 
 r'tibdr reliance, 102. a. 
 ,ifldb sun, 182. p. 
 afsos alas ! 60. p. 
 
 disclosure, 76. a. 
 a/''a/ (pi. of fel) acts, 
 deeds, proceedings, 1 76. a. 
 i^6Z prosperity, good 
 fortune, 84. a. 
 
 iynir confession, agree- 
 ment ; iqrdr k. to con- 
 fess, 91. a. 
 
 or 0^\ ikathd or ikhattd 
 assembled, g;ithered to- 
 gether in one place, 18. 
 \ aksar most, many, the 
 greater number ; gene- 
 rally, 18. a 
 
 \ dtjdh informed ; dgdh h. 
 to be informed, 157; dgdh 
 k. to inform, p. 
 
 agar if; agarchi al- 
 though, 176. p. 
 ^ or \f] Agra 27. 
 \ nqe in front of, before, 
 in com par ison with, 2 7, 97. 
 albalta certainly, a. 
 ultn up-turned, 198; 
 ulti hawd adverse wind. 
 amr thing, matter, pro- 
 ceeding, affair, etc., 60, 
 137. a. 
 
 amir (from same root as 
 above), prince, ruler, 193. 
 a. 
 
 dmdani income, 137. p. 
 imkdn possibility, 193. 
 
 ummedwdr hoping
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 1. 
 
 229 
 
 14 i; applicant for em- 
 ployment, 198. p. 
 and to come ; d-jdnd to 
 arrive, 187; dne-do let 
 him come, 76. 
 anciri rustic, 60. 
 
 intiznr expectation, 
 waiting, 84. a. 
 
 intizdm administra- 
 tion, 109. a. 
 )&} andar inside, within, 
 
 109. 
 
 C)UJ\ i)isdn human being, 
 176; insdmyat humanity, 
 44. a. 
 
 <W >\ insiddd prevention, 
 putting down, 27. a. 
 dnkh eye, 102, 114. 
 
 angrez English (ap- 
 lied to persons), 84. 
 
 ungli finger, 27. 
 dwdz voice, sound, 01. p. 
 i'par over, above, 97. 
 
 uthnd to rise, get up. 
 j~^ uskd, usko infl. 
 forms of woh. 
 ^ a a i i at (pi. of waqt) 
 times, 164 ; wage, means, 
 198. a. 
 
 Jjfc^ ahli-hirfa trades- 
 men, 193. a. 
 4^ aisa such, so, like this. 
 ek (P. yak) one, a or an. 
 \ (iina mirror, 143. p. 
 
 Bdbu Hindu title of re- 
 spect, corresponding with 
 our ' Master,' 84. 
 A* bap father. 
 
 ^ bdt word, thing, matter 
 (ace. to context), 4; gai 
 guzri bdt thing of the 
 past, bygones, 198. 
 
 ddehahi royal, 18. p. 
 bddal cloud, 109. 
 bdrish rainfall, 10. p. 
 bdrhd (Persian pi.) 
 many times, again and 
 again, 198. p. 
 
 bdri turn ; bdri bdri 
 (se) in turn, turn-about, 
 122. 
 
 bdz back ; bdz-rahnd to 
 leave off, 157; bdz-dnd 
 do., 114, 176. p. 
 
 bdz-purs inquiring, 
 questioning, 157. p. 
 bag garden, 171. p. 
 
 bfigi mutineer, rebel, 
 84. a. 
 ^ bdqi due, left, 44. a. 
 
 bdl child, 130; bdl- 
 bachche children. 
 
 bdlai over ; extra, 
 general (as applied to a 
 charge, or duty), 130. p. 
 bilfe'l at present, 198. 
 a. 
 
 bdndhnd to bind, 
 fasten, 109 ; zin lay dm 6. 
 to put on saddle and 
 bridle, 68. 
 
 bd-wujild notwith- 
 standing, 1*22. a. 
 
 bdhar outside, 76 ; ba- 
 har kd sahib a stranger 
 or visitor, 34. 
 
 bd'en construct form 
 of bdydn left, 130. 
 i batdnd to sav, declare, 
 state, tell, etc.,' 122, 137.
 
 230 
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 W: bajnd to strike (of the 
 hour) ; bajd, baje corre- 
 spond to our ' o'clock,' 
 114; bajdnd to strike, 
 beat, 193, 1st caus. of 
 above. 
 
 s~>*r.bijin8ihi intact, 150. a. 
 U^.. or ^W^. bachnd or bach- 
 jdnd to escape, 164. 
 f. bichhnd to be spread, 
 102. 
 
 f. bichhond bedding, 130. 
 bachcha babe, child, 
 176. p. 
 
 bakhshnd to give, 
 bestow on, pardon, 84. 
 j\jjfc bad-karddr ill-doer, 
 
 157. p. 
 
 ,j*\j+j* bad-mizdji bad- 
 temper, 193. p. 
 ^Uo) bad-ndmi disgrace, 
 
 27. p. 
 
 oyi. &\J* bi-zdt-i-khild in per- 
 son, 187. a. 
 
 \jt burd ill, bad, etc. ; bwrd- 
 mdnnd, to take a thing 
 ill, 187. t>. 
 ji\jt bardbar like, equal to, 
 
 137,51. p. 
 ^j\j birddari brotherhood, 
 
 caste-fellows, 34. i>. 
 ^jt baras year, 1 64. 
 \bfbarandd verandah, 150. 
 ty bard great (in most of 
 the English senses), 10, 
 51 ; is also used in the 
 sense of ' very ' ; bard 
 old or elder (as noun), 
 68, 102, 187. 
 
 barhnd to increase, 
 grow, be extended, 122; 
 barhkar in ore, 102. 
 
 ) buzvrg venerated, 60. /<. 
 -j bos enough, bold ! 
 ' that's all,' ' and nothing 
 else,' 51, 193. p. 
 
 * bos power, 76. 
 
 j bashra countenance, 
 198. a. 
 
 * ba'd after (post.), 44, 
 137. a. 
 
 ba'z some (used as pi. 
 of JWI), 182. a. 
 
 bayicha garden, 76. p. 
 bagair without, 97. a. 
 
 bakri she-goat, 76. 
 > bikri selling, 182. 
 
 bald misfortune, 114; 
 bald kl awf til or terrible, 
 60; baU 8e bother it! 
 76, 198. a. 
 
 balki but, nay more, 
 rather, 197. p. 
 bandar monkey, 176 ; 
 bandri she-monkey, 130. 
 > banduq gun, 68. p. 
 fc jo> band-hond to be 
 shut, 114. 
 
 .j} ba-nisbat in compari- 
 son with, 60. p. 
 
 Bengali 60. 
 
 i? bangld bungalow, 10. 
 j fea/m<i to be made, 
 managed, etc. 164 ; ban- 
 dnd to make, 1st caus. of 
 above, 102; band-lend to 
 build or make for one- 
 self, 84; ban-pamd to be 
 managed (somehow), 76. 
 \ ^4 beni-ddam mankind, 
 193. a. 
 
 bojh weight, 137. 
 jy burhd old, old man, 34.
 
 VOC ABDLARY NO. 1. 
 
 231 
 
 )> bolnd to speak, utter 
 sounds, 68; ~bol~uthmi to 
 speak suddenly, ejacu- 
 late, 76, 187; buldnii 1st 
 caus., to call, 97. 
 W* bhnri heavy, 27. 
 
 bhtignd to flee, to scud 
 (of clouds), 109 ; bhdgtd 
 runaway, 97. 
 
 bhai brother, mate, 51. 
 hahtlr spring, 164. p. 
 
 bahut very, much, 10. 
 bhatijd nephew, 84. 
 i bfhtar better, p. 
 
 j^> ba-har-hdl in every 
 case, on the whole, 91. 
 j bharnd to fill ; bhar- 
 dend int., 102. 
 
 &Au0d chaff (fodder), 
 102. 
 taaZa well ! 76, 187. 
 
 > bahin sister, 84. 
 
 jV &afo* - betiyiin 
 (younger women of a 
 family), 137. 
 
 # Bhoj name of an an- 
 cient Hindu monarch, 187. 
 bhukhd hungry, fam- 
 ished, 18. 
 
 > bhi also, even, too ; 
 kuchh bhi anything at 
 all ; ko"i bhi anyone at all. 
 
 bhejnd to send, 84, 130 ; 
 bhijwdnd or bhijwd-dend 
 to cause to be sent, 76. 
 
 bher sheep; bher bakri 
 she^p and goats, 76. 
 be without, 97 ; be-tamiz 
 silly, indiscreet, 176 ; be- 
 ,lil out of heart, dis- 
 heartened, 198. p. 
 
 * baydn description, 157 : 
 b. karnd to describe, 68, 
 84, 164. a. 
 
 bibi lady, wife, 109. p. 
 i betd son, 76 ; beti 
 daughter. 
 
 ^*? baithnd to sit ; bith- 
 dnd to seat, 102 ; baith- 
 rahnd to remain seated, 
 150 ; baithe-bithde at ease, 
 coolly, without effort, 
 etc., 1(19. 
 
 rf bich middle ; bich kd 
 middle, 27 ; bich men in 
 the middle (of what is 
 going on), 187. 
 
 bechoba kind of tent 
 (poleless), 84. p. 
 s> beddr awake, 143. p. 
 ~> bis twenty, 34. 
 
 Begam fein. of Beg, 
 198. t. 
 
 rf bimdr sick, a sick 
 person, 97, 164; Mmdri 
 sickness, 114, 193. p. 
 
 (j*^* pds by, near to, in pos- 
 session of; pas hi close 
 by, 27. 
 
 ^^> pdnd to find, obtain, ac- 
 quire, 109, 150. 
 
 or 0/^> or y^ pilnon or 
 pcTon or pdnw foot, 60. 
 
 ^^ pdni water, rain, 10, 
 51 ; pdni kd j>dni really 
 water, the real thiug. 
 
 4 e V> pd'o quarter, 114. 
 
 u* paid trace, address (of a 
 letter), 10, 182.
 
 232 
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 .spleen- 
 
 striking; p. / 
 
 troublesome work, 102. 
 (j*^; pacha* fifty, 18. 
 ft par on. See 50 (2). 
 j> /r/r Init. 
 \)j pariod care, anxiety, 
 
 10. p. 
 (j*))j> parwarish cherishing, 
 
 taking care of, 44. p. 
 Ujj j/arnd to fall, bef.il, 
 
 happen, lie, 51 ; par-jdnd 
 
 to he brought to bear, 157. 
 U*j> parhnd to read, 164. 
 
 so, 187. 
 pasand pleasant ; ^>. 
 
 and to be agreeable, 44 ; 
 
 pasaiidida agreeable, 176. 
 
 o- *> ;>u0&t generation 
 (past), ancestrv, 137. p. 
 pakarnd to seize, take, 
 catch, etc., 91, 150 ; pak- 
 rai dena to be caught or 
 catchable, 91 
 j put bridge, 164. 
 Jo palang bed, 1 02. 
 
 pandraii'dn fif- 
 teenth, 143. 
 
 pankhd fan, 114. 
 grandson, 27. 
 i~ichhnd to ask, make 
 inquiry, 143; purhli- 
 fn'irhhke asking an<l ask- 
 inp, 76. 
 
 i>iini full, complet , 44. 
 paune a i]uarter less, 
 114 
 saj phitkdr curse, 102. 
 
 in't to be broken 
 or burst, to open (as the 
 
 earth in :ui f.irtln|U;ike), 
 109, 171. 
 
 /,nl,i-li-;ni,.i to know, 
 -rnise, 68, 109. 
 j#, t'hir then, 91, 187. 
 jv> pahar eighth part of a 
 d;iy, equal t<> thn-f hours, 
 a watch, 114; do pahar 
 noon, 60. 
 ^jvi pahrd sentry, 157; //. 
 
 lagdnd to |K)st a sentry. 
 U^> fihirnd to wander about, 
 
 traverse, 176. 
 bj&pahlu first ; pahle before 
 
 (w), 193. 
 tu^ pahnnd wear (clothes), 
 
 etc., 91. 137. 
 
 \j5y^ phntnn to be broken; 
 pMtd pdni boiling water, 
 102. 
 ^ 4 jvj pahunchnd to arrive; 
 
 jnili''>i>ch-ji'ni<'i int., 76. 
 Uj^ phernd to return ; pher- 
 den'i to give back, 187. 
 
 fihailn.il to spread, 
 122. 
 
 jiydr love, affection, 176. 
 U* pydg thirst, 97. 
 
 t<?i(r to beat ; fir 
 I ,tnj to beat t'ne head in 
 token of grief, 143. 
 ^9^<* pichhe behind, 97. 
 \^paidd produced, created, 
 born, 10, 18. p. 
 
 paidal footman, on 
 foot, 27, 143. p. 
 
 iriiir! pursuit, prose- 
 ution, 157. p. 
 
 pesh before ; pesh-<ind 
 to treat, 60 ; pesha pro- 
 fession, occupation, 137 ; 
 pesligi advance (of mo-
 
 VOCABULARY NO. I. 
 
 233 
 
 ney), 51 ; peshi present- 
 ment, 176. p. 
 > pind to drink; pildnd 
 to make drink, 130. 
 
 V? J\s \s Jtd, tdki, ki td that, 
 in order that, etc. (See 
 155.) p. 
 
 #A>" tarikh date, 143, 176. a. 
 J J ) 6 j^ tdza-wdrid newly 
 arrived, 18. a. p. 
 
 tdham yet, still, 197. p. 
 tapdk zeal, warmth, 
 130. p. 
 
 ^r tujhko or tujhe 
 objective form of tit. 
 Lrac& tehsilddr collector 
 (native official), 187. a. 
 Uua=E> tahqiqdt investiga- 
 tion, 187. a. 
 & tazkira mention, 137. a. 
 targib temptation ; t. 
 dend to induce, 157. a. 
 
 tarmim emendation ; 
 t. karnd to correct, 
 emend, etc., 91. a. 
 
 t^j tashkhis diagnosis, 
 97. a. 
 
 tashrif honouring (by 
 a visit), 91 ; t. farmdnd, 
 t. land to visit! 198; t. 
 lejdnd to depart, a. 
 s tasawwur imagination ; 
 t. karna to imagine, sup- 
 pose, 150. a. 
 
 taswir picture, 68. a. 
 u ta'arruz interference, 
 176. a. 
 
 ta'rif praise, defini- 
 tion, 34, 102. a. 
 
 ta'til holiday, vaca- 
 tion, 44. a. 
 
 ta'lim education, 122 ; 
 ta'lim - i - ni&wdn fern ile 
 education, a. 
 
 u*\j~*5 ta'indt Ar. pi., lit. 
 appointments ; ta'indt k. 
 to tell off (for duty), to 
 appoint, 84. a. 
 
 -*!& takalluf ceremony, 
 trouble, 171. a. 
 
 v>^* taldsh search ; t. karnd 
 to search for, 68. p. 
 
 kafc talaffvz pronunciation, 
 60. a. 
 
 ft turn you, pi. ; tumhdrd 
 your ; tumhen you. 
 
 ^U* tamdshn (takingamuse- 
 ment or recreation), a bit 
 of fun, spectacle, 10. a. 
 tamiz discretion, dis- 
 cernment, 171. a. 
 
 tambdku tobacco, 18. 
 -j-^ tandurust in good 
 health, 150. p. 
 &^ tankhwdh pay, 193. p. 
 tang tight, short (time) , 
 10. p. 
 tu thou. 
 
 to illative particle, 9; to- 
 bhi yet, nevertheless, not- 
 withstanding. 
 tawd griddle, 198. 
 y top gun ; top-dagi gun- 
 fire, 114. 
 
 & thord small, little, 51, 
 198. 
 
 terd thy, thine. 
 i^ tez-raftdr swift, fleet, 
 60. p. 
 
 ? teli oilman, 187. 
 fin three; tinon all three.
 
 234 
 
 I \l-:i-ISKS IN HINI.fSTAM. 
 
 tdld rick, 143. 
 S tukrd piece, 130. 
 * th lii'l |K)lice-station ; 
 l&une - 7a/</ policeman, 
 143. 
 
 thekeddr contractor, 
 61. 
 
 WV jdgnd to be awake, 97, 
 114, 193. 
 
 *W Jidmi' masjid 
 ' ongregational mosque, 
 the Chief Mosque (in 
 I)ehli),97. a. 
 
 life, 164. p. 
 jVmu to go ; jd-chul:// ; 
 TO have already gone, 76. 
 A&W- jdnkani death-agony, 
 the being at the point of 
 death, 114. 
 
 Jan mi to know, 171 ; 
 jdn-lend do., 143. 
 
 j'&nu as many as, the 
 amount which, 135. 
 J&JLQ. jidhar whither. 
 fyj*- jazira island, 187. a. 
 j+ j si ^ jiixt o jit search, 
 
 176. p. 
 
 jjj j~t,. equiv. tojittid. 
 tS+jagah place, (JO, 182. 
 V*V julihd weaver, 34. 
 Al. jild volume (lit. parch- 
 ment), 182. a. 
 
 Januind orJammi, 68. 
 + jinn genius, demon, 97. 
 a. 
 
 ?> jo who, which, etc. 135; 
 ji.--lc-', jink.!, etc. infl. I 
 
 s-^)* jawdb answer, 76; 
 /. /.-./ to reply, 171. a. 
 
 ($\f>-j(iwdn young, viporous, 
 97. 
 
 ^1+ jotnd to yoke, 114. 
 
 P&F* jokhim risk, 143. 
 
 o*>* Jl/* religious mendi- 
 cant, ascetic, etc.. 97. 
 
 *\f t>V*" j<*Mldn-gdh riding- 
 school, 171. p. 
 
 Of* jon or jaun as ; jonhin 
 precisely as ; jon kd ton 
 as before ; jaun taun 
 somohow. (See 149.) 
 
 jauhar jewel, excel- 
 lence, faculty, 176. a. 
 jhdrnn to sweep, 150. 
 
 :ii|>, 91. a. 
 jehdn world, 60. p. 
 jehdn where ; jehdn- 
 par where to ; jehdn se 
 whence. 
 
 jhagrd quarrelling, 
 sedition, mutiny, 102, 193. 
 
 tJL&=- _///'///' to swing, 114. 
 
 ^>^}. jln'tth lie, falsehood, 
 182. 
 
 ij*. ji soul, spirit, life, 
 energy, 97 ; ji lagnnn to 
 ;i|i|ily the mind, 164. 
 
 ^ ji (title of respect), Sir, 
 182. 
 
 \~&jind to live, 164. 
 
 yyj*,. jyun as (manner), 149. 
 
 yUV*. chdddn teapot, 102. />. 
 f>ur.
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 1. 
 
 235 
 
 JU. chdl-dhdl manners, 
 behaviour, 44. 
 
 - chdnd moon, 109. 
 
 . chnhnd to wish, desire, 
 love, 130 ; hud chnhnd to 
 be about to happen. 
 chdhie see 90. 
 
 - chirdg lamp, 109. />. 
 
 O. chared hide (of land), 
 
 84. 
 
 - chiriyd l>ird, 60. 
 
 jft. charhnd to ascend, 
 
 1 14, 137 ; charh-baithnd to 
 
 go up and sit, 102 ; din- 
 
 charhnd forenoon, 114; 
 
 sahm-charhnd (par) panic 
 
 to seize a person, 193. 
 
 chashm-numd 
 
 reprimand (prop, by the 
 look), 122. p. 
 e- chalnd to move, go, 
 etc. ; chalCe, chaliegd 91 ; 
 chaldnd 1st caus. 198 ; 
 chaltd thriving, recur- 
 ring ; chaltd-phirtd nazar 
 and to be on thp move, 
 to be off, 193 ; chal-dend 
 to start, set off, etc., 91 . 
 
 chundnchi, accord- 
 ingly, 130, 187. p. 
 . chand some, some few, 
 several, 44 ; chanddn 
 somewhat, 76. p. 
 o. chanda levy, subscrip- 
 tion, contribution, 137. p. 
 *. chor thief, 18; chor- 
 jahdz pirate-ship, priva- 
 teer, 91 ; chor-darwdza 
 postern, back door, 157. 
 y>; chori theft, 44 ; chori- 
 hond to be stolen ; chori- 
 Icarnd to steal. 
 
 chauki chair, 34. 
 . chokidar watchman, 
 84. 
 
 *y5 chunki as, since, 157. 
 i "^^r chaunk-pamd to 
 start up from sleep, 157. 
 chhdpnd to print; 
 chhapwdnd to get printed, 
 182. 
 
 chhold small, 60. 
 
 chhutnd to be loose, 
 leave, be set free, be let 
 go, 91, 150. 
 
 e. chhornd to set free, 
 etc., 1st causal of above, 
 150, 171 ; chhor let alone, 
 68 ; chhor-dnd to leave 
 (and come away), 109. 
 chirnd to split, 130. 
 chiz thing, 34. p. 
 
 W hdjat want, need, 137, 
 171. a. 
 
 hdsil resultant ; hdsil 
 hond to be obtained, 
 176. a. 
 
 hazir present, in wait- 
 ing, ready, 4, 10, 60. a. 
 
 hdl state, condition, 
 circumstances, present 
 time, 187 ; hdlat do. do. 
 status, 1 76 ; hdldnki al- 
 beit, 176. a. 
 
 Hasan prop, name, 
 (Mahomedan), 198. a. 
 ^ hazrat Excellency, re- 
 ligious title of saints, 
 etc., 187. a.
 
 236 
 
 i:XKKi'I.SKS IN HINIH-SI-AM. 
 
 huzi'ir presence (of a 
 suj>erior), term of obse- 
 quious address, 27, 34; 
 dp ke huzi'ir, 76. a. 
 
 hukm order, command, 
 68, 182. a. 
 
 ~*e. hikmat science, 171. a. 
 hakim physician, 68, 
 122. a. 
 
 e. hall solution ; h. kanul 
 to solve, 171. a. 
 je. hawdla reference ; ha- 
 wiila dend to quote, or 
 refer to, 193. a. 
 
 hairdn being in doubt, 
 at a loss, perplexed, 143. 
 a. 
 
 j&*>\&- khdskar especially, 102. 
 khdk lit. dust, used 
 idiomatically for kuchli, 
 10,68. p. 
 
 khdtir heart ; meri khd- 
 tir obliging me, 157 ; khd- 
 tir-khwdh suited to one's 
 ideas, or tastes, 198. a. 
 khdli empty, 10; 
 sometimes 4 only,' ' barely,' 
 198. a. 
 
 khdmosh silent, 182. 
 
 yt*- khabar news, intelh'gence, 
 114,187; care, 193; kha- 
 bardnr take care ! 34. a. 
 
 \A*. khudd God, 84 ; khudd 
 ki qasam By heaven ! 34. 
 
 P- 
 * khidmat service, 102. 
 
 a. 
 
 - kli<tr<-li money for ex- 
 penses ; kharch-hond to 
 be exj>ended ; kharch- 
 karnd to expend, 34. p. 
 
 hit us '< Hi-it enmity, 
 193. a. 
 
 khatt letter, 76, 84 ; line 
 (geoin.), 102. a. 
 
 - khatd offence, sin, crime, 
 91. a. 
 
 d. kliatra danger, 164. a. 
 
 - khafd angry, 91. p. 
 
 khilitf contrary to, 
 60 ; khildf'ina'mul un- 
 usual, 137 ; khilif-qiyl* 
 inconceivable, 34, 137 ; 
 khildf-adab contrary to 
 etiquette, 76. a. 
 
 khamydzah retribu- 
 tion ; /.-//. khainchnd to 
 suffer retribution, 137. p. 
 ys- khwdb dream; kh. 
 deklmd to dream, 193. p. 
 _ khwdja title of re- 
 spect, like our Mr., 84, 
 198. p. 
 
 khwdh either ... or, 
 193 ; khwdh ma-khwdh 
 will he nil! he, 176; 
 khwdhdn desiring, desi- 
 rous of, 27 ; khwahish 
 desire, inclination, 187. p. 
 
 khilb well, 68, 164. p. 
 s- khdd self (with all [x-r- 
 gons), 44, 150. p. 
 
 khilsh pleased, 193 ; 
 kh>iith-hdl well off, com- 
 t'ortuble, etc., 198. p. 
 
 khayill thought, ima- 
 gination, 198. a. 
 khair well ! 18, 182. a.
 
 VOCABULABY NO. 1 . 
 
 237 
 
 -> dnkhil entering; 
 ddkhil hand to enter, be 
 admitted, 60. a. 
 > ddg spot, blemish, 150. a. 
 J ddl pulse, 18. 
 * ddm price, 4. 
 
 dabdu pressure, 157. 
 o dabnd to le pressed 
 down ; dabi zabdn se in 
 subdued tones, gently, 
 102; dabe paton with 
 light tread, 109. 
 "> dakhl entrance, power 
 of interference, 109. 
 )^;'* darbdri, darbdri ka- 
 prd full dress, 91. p. 
 
 darpesh on the tapis ; 
 iu prospect, ready for pre- 
 sent.it ion, etc., 34. p. 
 -jJ darja degree, 193. a. 
 O Durgd prop, name 
 
 (Hindu). 
 
 ))* darwdza door, 150. p. 
 
 j daryd river, sea, 109, 
 
 157. a. 
 
 darydft finding out ; 
 
 d. karnd to fa'nd out, 76. p. 
 
 )* dareg reluctance ; da- 
 
 reg k. to grudge, 157. p. 
 > das t-en. 
 
 dast-khatt signature 
 
 (dost hand), 109. p. 
 
 -o Dasehrd a festival 
 
 held on the 10th Jaith,44. 
 
 ^o daswdn tenth, 44. 
 d ashman enemy, p. 
 
 For peculiar use, see 199 
 (7). 
 
 difficult ; 
 
 chanddn d. nahin not so 
 very difficult, 76. p. 
 
 du'd prayer, salutation, 
 114. a. 
 
 jcJ da'wat feast, enter- 
 tainment ; invitation, 34, 
 171. a. 
 
 dikhdnd (1st caus. of 
 dekhnd) to show ; di- 
 kha'i dend to be visible, 
 91. 
 
 J^ datil proof, 164. a. 
 dam breath, time ; dam 
 ndk men and (breath 
 coming into nose), gasp- 
 ing for breath ; marte dam 
 at time of death, 114. p. 
 > din day, 44; din-bhar 
 all day, 109 ; ae din 
 every day, 102. 
 J dunyd world, 102. a. 
 do two ; donon the two, 
 both, 18 ; do pahar noon. 
 J dawd medicine, 18, 114. 
 a. 
 
 o diidh milk, 44, 176. 
 dur distance, or dis- 
 tant, 4; bari dur se a 
 long way off, 91 ; dur-bin 
 telescope, 176. p. 
 .o dusrd second, other, 
 10, 91. 
 
 dH-latti kicking with 
 both heels (of a horse), 
 198. 
 t^ or (jJj Dehli or DiUi. 
 
 diddr sight (of per- 
 son), 60, 182. p. 
 
 der or ^> deri delay, 
 51. .
 
 KXEKCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 desi belonging to 
 country, 18 ; countr?- 
 bred, 87. 
 
 dekhnd to see, to look 
 for, 68, 182 ; dekhd-dekhi 
 imitation, following ex- 
 ample of, 130. 
 J din religion, 137. p. 
 .> dend to give. 
 
 ddkd dacoity, 187. 
 
 3 ddk-ghar post-office, 
 4; ddk-bangld dak-bun- 
 galow, 27. 
 
 ddlnd to throw, cast; 
 dfil-dend to cast (into), 
 109. 
 
 Ut>5 ilnbnd sinking, descend- 
 ing, 114; ilin dubnd .it'- 
 teruoon. 
 
 VjJ darnd to fear, 109, 143. 
 Utj3 dubnd to sink; //'/- 
 in am 1 1 to be drowned, 
 157. 
 ,3 duZi litter, 51. 
 
 dhai two and a half, 
 51 ; dhai sau two hun- 
 dred and fifty. 
 CUE>J dhang fashion, man- 
 ner of life, 68. 
 
 oZ drum, 193; dh. 
 bujdnd to beat a drum. 
 
 dhundhnd to seek, 
 search for, 68, l!>3. 
 >O derh one and a half, 
 10 ; derh baje half-past 
 one; derh sau a hundred 
 and fifty. 
 
 j zarra just a little, 76, 
 91. a. 
 
 JJ zari'a means; zari'a 
 e by means of, 1 76. a. 
 z/A-r mention, 182. a. 
 J zinnia charge, respon- 
 sibility; merd zimma 'I 
 warrant it.' 164. a. 
 
 j\> m< night; rdi ko at 
 
 night, 51. 
 W\> r*?/(i Hindu title, head 
 
 of Kshatri caste, 187. 
 j\> r<iz secret, mystery, 76. p. 
 ^\) rdzi satisfied, con- 
 
 tented, 97, 193. a. 
 r>tni fern, form of rana, 
 
 a Rajput title ranking 
 
 above Raj A, 114. 
 6\> rdh road, way, 143 ; rnh- 
 
 chaltd wayfarer, 97. p. 
 rukhsat leave ; r. Itond 
 
 to take leave, 76 ; r. karnd 
 
 to dismiss, 44; r. lend 
 
 to take leave (of absence), 
 
 84. a. 
 
 <Vi-j or <u- raate or 
 
 road, way, 76. p. 
 jj ) ra rope, 97. 
 UO Ai^j rishta-ndtd Kinship, 
 
 60. ;>.//. 
 ^> rakhnd to put, place, 
 
 hold, 102; rakh-lend to 
 
 keep for one's own, 187. 
 S^i) rivdj customary, 137. a. 
 ^jy rawana started, de- 
 
 spatched, 18. p.
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 1. 
 
 239 
 
 jjj riibakdr proceedings 
 (written official), G8. 
 )) r up a y a money, 10 ; a 
 rupee. 
 
 roti bread (leavened or 
 unleavened), 10. 
 y roz day ; roz roz daily, 
 44, 102. p. 
 
 jy Rumi inhabitant of 
 Kum, the Sultan of Tur- 
 key, 193. 
 ^y rond to weep, 109. 
 
 j rihai release, 187. p. 
 >j rahnd to remain, dwell, 
 stay, abide ; rah-jdnd to 
 be left over, or behind, 
 int. 51. 
 
 rah-numai showing 
 the way, guidance, 84. p. 
 j rnis chief, 198. a. 
 re> railway or railway 
 train, '27, 44. e. 
 
 zdkhm wound, 51. p. 
 j zdba.ii language; ba- 
 zabdn-i-hdl ' in such lan- 
 guage as an animal has,' 
 176 ; zabdni by word of 
 n.outh, used as a prep, 
 or post., 34. p. 
 
 zar money; zar-kharid 
 purchase-money, 76. p. 
 *j zamdna time, fortune, 
 60. p. 
 
 ) zamin earth, land, 34; 
 zaminddr landowner, p. 
 rj zanjir chain, 60. p. 
 
 j zinhdr beware ! 76. p. 
 j zin s iddle, 68. p. 
 
 sath companionship, 
 27 ; sdthi companion, 
 157; sath postp. with, 
 60 ; sdth-dend to accora- 
 panv, 91. 
 
 sdth sixty, 143. 
 
 , sard all, the whole, 84. 
 
 >j^- sdrhe a half more, 1 14. 
 
 . sal year ; sdlhd-sdl year 
 
 after year, for years, 176. 
 
 P- 
 
 sais syce, groom, 34. a. 
 JfL. sail questioner, peti- 
 
 tioner, 182. a. 
 s sab all, every, 18 ; sab 
 ke sab the whole lot, 27 ; 
 sabhon pi. of totality, 176. 
 s < sabab cause, 68; as 
 a postp. 76. a. 
 
 sabaq lesson, 44. a. 
 
 sipdhi or s'pdhi sepoy, 
 soldier, policeman, 18. p. 
 sitdnd to worry, op- 
 press, bully, 198. 
 U- sattdwan fifty-seven, 
 68. 
 
 -seven, 
 
 68. 
 
 S~- sakht very, 122. p. 
 sir head, 193 ; sir (jpar) 
 hond to annoy, 97. 
 sar head ; sarddr chief, 
 head servant or 'bearer,' 
 143 ; sarkdr government; 
 sar-guzasht adventures, 
 84, 164. p. 
 
 ~ nird end, extremity, 122. 
 earae ' serai, 'inn, 60. p. 
 sarishta office, 27 ;
 
 '240 
 
 EXERC18K8 IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 sarithla-ddr head of of- 
 fice (native), 34, 60. p. 
 sarak road, 27, 44. 
 sastd cheap, 18. 
 yk~ safar journey ; eafar k. to 
 journey, to travel, 157. a. 
 -'//V/a taste, breeding, 
 manners, 27. a. 
 
 eamdnd to be swal- 
 lowed up (lit. to be con- 
 tained in), 171. 
 
 samajh thinking, 150 ; 
 samajhnd, to understand, 
 think, 84, 193; samajh- 
 lend do.; samjhdnd, 1st 
 caus., to explain ; samjhd- 
 lend, do., do. 
 
 {* sunnd to hear, 97; 
 vumVi dend to be audible, 
 91. 
 
 **~ sanad authority, 27. a. 
 ,^~ or <.) Ban year, 68. a. 
 
 Csau hundred, 10. 
 J - sawd quarter more, 114; 
 sawd-sauonc hundred and 
 twenty-five. 
 \j~ or ^y~ sited or siwde 
 
 besides, except, 150. 
 ^\)^ su'dl question, problem, 
 
 171, 182. a. 
 l^j- sochnd to think, 187. 
 
 sitraj-ijahan eclipse 
 .of the sun, 143. 
 f- sond to sleep ; sold sleep- 
 ing, sleep, 97 ; sone-wdld, 
 60. 
 
 .^y- savere early, 114. 
 8'ihdgd borax, 18. 
 r~ sahm panic, 193. a. 
 r~ -"limn inadvertently, 
 164. a. 
 
 for the idiomatic 
 
 sense of this particle, see 
 
 150 (bis), 176, 182. 
 siynhi ink, 68. j>. 
 
 - Sayyid appellative of 
 
 i he Prophet's descend- 
 
 ants, 60. a. 
 ser a weight (about 2 
 
 Ibs. av.), 44. 
 
 j^*- saikron hundreds, 
 
 122 ; P. sadhd, plural of 
 
 totality. 
 
 sikhnd to learn, 164. 
 W- *ja to sew, sewing, 102. 
 ^oU g/ia^i marriage, wed- 
 
 ding, 34. p. 
 
 nhd'ir poet, 60. a. 
 sham evening, 114. 
 shah king. jj. 
 jy S\A Shdh-Russ the Czar, 
 King of Russia, 193. 
 
 shdyad perhaps, 97. p. 
 
 * shabdrozi of night 
 and day, 164. 
 
 shakhe person, fellow, 
 individual, 10. p. 
 j^ shardrat wickedness, 
 114. a. 
 
 s/tar/ condition, bet, 44. 
 a. 
 Hharin shame, 68. p. 
 
 shurii' beginning; shu- 
 rn'-hond to begin, 44; sh. 
 karnd to begiu, trans, a. 
 
 sharir wicked, 122. a. 
 sharik sharing, part- 
 ii' T, 18. a. 
 
 shatir a beam, 130. a. 
 shifd-khdna dispen- 
 sary, 60. a.p.
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 1. 
 
 241 
 
 r-<iitz(ir thankful, 
 
 grateful, 27. p.- 
 
 > shahr city, 114, 193. p. 
 * sliai thing, 51. a. 
 *> sher lion or tiger, 143. p. 
 
 ~eA-o sahib lord, master, 
 appellative of English- 
 men in India, 34; sdhi- 
 ban or sahib log, pi. a. 
 
 sdf clean, 68. a. 
 
 sahn courtyard, 76. a. 
 
 sahih correct, 84. a. 
 
 sarrdf money-changer, 
 198. a. 
 
 sir/ only, 164. a. 
 
 sar/ expenditure, sarf- 
 i-zar do., 182. a. 
 
 si/a< quality, attribute 
 (tech. adjective), 84. a. 
 C^ saldh what is right, good 
 advice, counsel, etc., 187. 
 a. 
 
 province ; siibajdt 
 Pers. pi. 18 a. 
 )^> siirat, appearance, good 
 looks, 97. a. 
 
 jgra form, tense-form, 
 157 ; siga-i-mdzi past 
 tense, a. 
 
 zdbila rule, regulation, 
 34. a. 
 
 zidd opposition, vexatious 
 conduct, 176. a. 
 i zariir, necessary, neces- 
 sarily, 34, etc. a. 
 zila' district, side, 51. a. 
 
 tdlib-'ilm seeker of 
 knowledge, student, 34. a. 
 ^?^ tibdbat the profession 
 of medicine, 76. a. 
 
 > tarah manner, way, etc., 
 76. a. 
 
 *^> taraf direction, side, 
 150 ; taraf-ddri siding 
 with, 157. a. 
 
 i;l=> tariqa plan, method, 
 way, 44. a. 
 
 > taur manner ; bataur (fee) 
 in the shape of, like, 150. 
 a. 
 
 k sometimes written j& 
 ready, 4, 164. a. 
 
 zdlim tyrant, 109. a. 
 
 'dlam world, 176. a. 
 Wc 'ebdrat style, diction, 
 written text, 164. a. 
 
 'etdb reproof, repri- 
 mand, 34. a. 
 
 'aj b wonder, 164 ; a/6 
 ., to wonder, a. 
 
 Arabi the Arabic lan- 
 guage, Arabic, 18. a. 
 jC 'i'zzal honour; 'izzat'ddr 
 honourable, held in re- 
 spect, 27. a. 
 
 'azlz (from same root 
 as above) dear, a friend 
 or intimate, 157; 'oziz 
 rak\nd to hold dear, to 
 value, 193. a. 
 
 16
 
 24-2 
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 'a/a gift ; 'atd karnd to 
 bestow, 171. a. 
 
 'aql common sense, in- 
 telligence, wisdom, 84. a. 
 'aks reflection (opti- 
 cal), 68. a. 
 * 'ellj cure, 76. a. 
 
 \tlUat indisposition, 
 76. a. 
 
 -*^ 'alamat mark, sign, 
 denotation, 157. a. 
 e 'i/m knowledge, 176. a. 
 umda excellent, 176. a. 
 'wmr life, age, 164. a. 
 
 'amaZ action, practice; 
 'amal k. (par) to act upon, 
 164. a. 
 
 'endyat favour, kind- 
 ness ; 'en. karnd or /ar- 
 mdnd to grant, 143, 187 ; 
 'en. hond to be granted ; 
 'en. ndma a letter, 51. a. 
 c 'aural woman, 76 a. 
 -* 'ai'6 defect (in mind or 
 body), wrong, 198. a. 
 c 'am (lit. eve) 198. a. 
 
 JiU f/ ,;/iZ forgetful ; </*'^ eo- 
 n<i to sleep sound, 109. a. 
 U Gdnim name of a wor- 
 thy in the Alf Laila, J64. 
 gadr mutiny, 68. a. 
 / garib poor, pauper, 
 193; garth-kit ""> Iminhle 
 abode (used by an infe- 
 rior in mentioning his 
 house or home), 91. a. 
 giissa anger; gusse an 
 gry, 51. a. 
 
 s tegazab misfortune, some- 
 thing awful or calami- 
 tous, 27, 130. a. 
 
 Jc gul uproar, noise, 143. a. 
 goldm slave, used by an 
 inferior instead of 1st 
 pers. 27, 44. a. 
 galat wrong, 137. a. 
 
 \j4$ J^c gol-kamard drawing- 
 room, 102. a. 
 e& gairat sense of shame, 
 150. . 
 
 Persian, the 
 Persian language, 18. p. 
 ,?'j7 agent (gr.) f 157. a. 
 ;/<,; extra, spare, 18. 
 a't'efa pro tit, ad vantage, 
 27, 176. a. 
 
 A Fatehgarh (lit. Vic- 
 tory-Fort) 84. 
 ^A fdjr early morning, 114. 
 
 a. 
 
 \j*fidddevoted (par) 176. a. 
 ^A* _/idri (same root as 
 above), devoted (used by 
 an inferior in speaking of 
 self, like goldm, kamtarin 
 etc.), 91. a. 
 
 getfulue&s, omitting to 
 mention, 44. p. 
 
 farsh carpeting, 34, 
 102. a. 
 
 fursat leisure, 44. a. 
 
 jy fa rq difference, 34, 51; 
 dissension, 137. a. 
 
 *ji fareb deceit, 143. a. 
 ~* fastid disturbance, re- 
 bellion, tumult, etc.> 27. a.
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 1. 
 
 243 
 
 J->* fasl season, 164. a. 
 Jj-** fuzid excessive ; fuzul- 
 
 khurclii extravagance, 27. 
 
 a. 
 
 J**/e'Z deed, act (gram, a 
 
 verb), 34. a. 
 r&Jaqir beggar, 97. a. 
 ^~)<( fehrist list, 198. p. 
 )i^^filfaur instantly, 137. 
 a. 
 
 <*W faisala decision (law) ; 
 /. hond to be decided. 
 176. a. 
 
 c3 
 
 J* ja6i7 worthy, deserviner, 
 
 34,137. a. 
 
 v^- 26? before, 150. a. 
 j* 5>a6r tomb, 150. a. 
 )& qadr worth, quantity, 
 
 value, consideration, 27, 
 
 122, 137. a. 
 
 rakhnd to step, 193. a. 
 */ garii near, nearly, 
 122, 150. a. 
 
 jasd intention, 114. a. 
 
 qusur fault, 164. a. 
 
 gajsa that which is al- 
 lotted, death ; qazd karnd 
 to die, 150, 187. a. 
 
 _ za<jr marauder (Cos- 
 sack) ; yazzaqi maraud- 
 ing, 137. a. 
 qalam reed-pen, 68. a. 
 * 9.iyuf a physiognomy, 
 143. a. 
 
 sign of tzJ/a<. 
 
 (t to cut ; bat Mtnd 
 
 to contradict, interrupt, 
 187. 
 
 kdr work; Art/H effec- 
 tive, fatal, 51 ; kdrdmad 
 useful, 18 ; kdr-rawi 
 business procedure, 34; 
 kdr-guzdri performance 
 of work or duty, 193. p. 
 fj kdrtiis corr. cartridge, 
 
 <>tf kdsh or kdshki optative 
 particle, 164, 171. p. 
 
 **X kdyaz paper, 68. p. 
 
 jW kdfi sufficient, 157. a. 
 kdld black, 27. 
 
 work, 27; use, 187. 
 ear, 68. 
 
 kd*indt possessions, 
 44. a. 
 
 s-^ A;a6 when, or kis-waqt ; 
 fcaft A;a or kabhi led long 
 ago, some time ago, 76 ; 
 
 _ kabhi nahin never, 10. 
 
 ^ kuppd leathern vessel for 
 holding oil, ghee, etc. 122. 
 
 cr^ kapds cotton-plant, 10, 
 18. 
 
 <y^ kaptdn capitano, cap- 
 tain, 60. 
 
 ^ kuttd dog, 198. 
 
 v^ kitdb book, 18, 84, 91 ; 
 Arab. pi. kiitub. a. 
 
 ^x kitnd how much, how 
 many? 
 
 kuchh anything, some- 
 thing; kuchh kuchh some 
 little ; kuchlt na kuchh 
 something or other ; aur 
 kuchh or kuchh aur some 
 more. 
 
 kiruya-ddr tenant 
 (rent-payer), 122. p. 
 
 16 *
 
 244 
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 V*/ karnd to do, make, etc. ; 
 karke (P.C.P. of karn.'), 
 68, 198; k'ir-'if' (1st 
 caus.), 109; kar-raklu,.'' 
 to do a thing and keep 
 it done, 84 ; apnd kar- 
 lend to make one's own, 
 84. 
 
 *;/ karwat lying on one 
 side ; k. badalnd to 
 change to the other side 
 in lying, 114. 
 
 j~i' kasr fraction, 102 ; 
 rhulfi kasr recurring de- 
 cimal, a. 
 
 J kal to-morrow or yester- 
 
 ' day. 
 
 j kal machine, 10. 
 
 JZkull all, the whole, 44, 
 109. a. 
 
 *^xfe..-*^ kambakht wretch, 
 wretched (lit. little-for- 
 tunate), 114. p. 
 
 kumtarin (lit. least) 
 term used by inferiors in 
 speaking of self, 84. p. 
 kani reduction, 198. p. 
 kumet bay (horse), 60. 
 
 or (j> or \f kunwdn 
 or Icuwan or kit d a well. 
 
 f ko sign of object (near or 
 remote). 
 
 V/ kothd house-top, 102. 
 
 iff ki'tch march, 114. p. 
 
 Q kaun who, what? kaun- 
 <m wbat-likc-, what? (asks 
 for a description, either 
 of persons or things). 
 
 ko i anyone, someone ; 
 hoi sau etc. some hun- 
 
 dred etc. ; / 
 few ; ko"l na kol some 
 one or other, 198. 
 ^ kah'i (verb, noun), orl- r, 
 
 97, 171. 
 
 ^ kah'tr appellative of the 
 bearer or carrier class, 
 18. 
 
 khiir alkali, potash, 18. 
 kahdn where ? 
 khiiml food, a meal, 
 dinner; (as a verb), to 
 eat ; khd-jdnu to eat up. 
 >^ khurdari rough (of 
 surface), 27. 
 
 khard erect, standing, 
 34, 68. 
 
 kahldnd to be called, 
 182. 
 
 kahnd to say, speak, 84 ; 
 kah-dend, intens. 
 
 khodnd to dig, exa- 
 mine closely, 157. 
 
 d to open, 122. 
 khet field, 137. 
 (f~ kahin somewhere ; ka- 
 hin nahin nowhere ; ka- 
 hin na kahin somewhere 
 or other, 10. 
 <_/ ki or ke sign of 
 
 iz<\fai. 
 
 ^ kai how many ? 
 W* kyd what? ky'i . . . ky<'< 
 whether ... or? 
 
 kai*<t what-like? of 
 what sort or kind ? how 
 or what (with adjective 
 of quality) h in what 
 state ? 
 
 * kyiln why ? ky / / nka r 
 how ? kynnki because.
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 1. 
 
 245 
 
 dri carriage, 150. 
 or <j)\S or f\ gdnon or 
 gaon or gdnw village ; 
 gdon-wdld villager, 76. 
 \j guzdra living, subsis- 
 tence, 187. p. 
 AT guzarnd to pass, 109 ; 
 gitzar-jdnd to pass away, 
 114. 
 
 "\^ grdmi villager, 
 thatcher, 143. 
 >gird around, 182. p. 
 'f giriftdr caught, appre- 
 hended, taken prisoner, 
 18. p. 
 
 S girnd to fall ; gir-parnd 
 to fall down, 97. 
 
 gar-jdnd to be rooted, 
 150. 
 
 jS ' gaz yard measure, 97. p. 
 
 yrA ^ gosain saint, holy 
 man, 97. 
 
 fcUu-S' gustdkh insolent, im- 
 pertinent, 122. p. 
 
 j&S guftdr speech, 182. p. 
 
 Stf gal'i neck, 12'<3 ; gfaZe 
 in !J nd to embrace. 
 
 ~ gttmbaz dome, 150. p. 
 
 \&S gangd proper name, the 
 Ganges, 68. 
 
 ^S ginnd to count, 143, 
 193. 
 
 jS or Zfgo or groH although, 
 176. p. 
 
 f>\jjfgoddni ' godown,' ware- 
 house, store-room, 102. 
 
 y~ij 4*^ gosha-nishin a re- 
 cluse, 68. p. 
 
 \tjS goyi'i so to say, 102, 157, 
 ll8. p. 
 
 speech, .76. p. 
 & ghabrdnd to be in 
 alarm, 91. 
 
 ghar home, house, 76 ^ 
 ghar-wdle members of 
 family. 
 
 jQ? ghari a period of time 
 equal to one sixty-fourth 
 part of natural day ; the 
 eighth part of a pahar-^ 
 a watch or clock, 114, 187. 
 to rush in, 143. 
 \ ghantd gong, hour, 114. 
 ^jje* gliord horse ; ghori 
 
 mare, 27. 
 
 ^y^ ghumnd to go round, 
 182. 
 
 gJii ' ghee,' clarified 
 butter, 18. 
 
 Id (privative) ; Id-Msil 
 without success, 176; Id- 
 kaldm unquestionable, 
 157. a. 
 
 Idzim intransitive (gr.)> 
 157. a. 
 
 land to bring; taslirif 
 land to honour with a 
 visit, 68. 
 
 la'iq capable, suitable, 
 worthy, 198. a. 
 
 lihdz modesty, con- 
 sideration (for others), 
 respect, observance, etc. 
 84. a. 
 
 larai quarrel, fighting, 
 battle, 102, 193. 
 J lartd (from larna) com- 
 batant, 97.
 
 246 
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 VSjl lark<i boy, son, child, 
 18 ; lirki ^rirl, 10 ; lar>ik- 
 pan childhood, 60. 
 -AiJ In if zest, enjoyment, 
 130. a. 
 
 logat vocabulary, 91. a. 
 lafz word, 34. a. 
 
 1'ikhn'i to write, to 
 translate, 84. 
 %</*n bridle, 68. 
 fe^na to be set, be 
 fixed, fit, etc. ; burd lagnd 
 to come amiss, 51. p. 
 
 lalachdnd to long for, 
 covet, 97. 
 
 &jJ laundi slave-girl, 109. 
 jJ lohd iron, 60. 
 ZaAar idea, 143. a. 
 
 liydqat the being 
 qualified, suitability Capa- 
 bility, merit, etc. 137. a. 
 
 lekin but, 197. jp. 
 lend to take, buy, 84; 
 le-jdnd to take away, 68 ; 
 le-lend to keep in one's 
 own hands, 130; lie 
 postp., for sake of, on 
 account of. 
 
 ruddy an mare, 60. p. 
 rrulrnd to strike, beat, 
 slay, etc. 122 ; mdrd- 
 phlrnd to wander or 
 knock about, 182 ; mdre 
 postp., on account of, 150. 
 JU miil wealth, 51 ; mdl o 
 daulat wealth and riches, 
 27. a. 
 
 alik proprietor,182. a. 
 mdli financial (relating 
 to revenue), 109. a. 
 
 O\* man mother ; m<ni-bi1p 
 or i)i<'i-biip parents, 18, 
 44. 
 
 UU mtlnd granted, 1 76. 
 i'iii'l" tired, 18. p 
 //,./'/////,; to ask for, 
 198; i ///;/-/ '//"' to ask 
 for and bring, 91. 
 
 mdnind, postp., like, 
 27. p. 
 
 mdh month, 143; /'//- 
 wdri monthly, month by 
 month, 122. p. 
 -W* mubdhasa discussion, 
 114. a. 
 
 mubtali. involved in, 
 91. a. 
 
 mubram urgent, irre- 
 sistible, 187. a. 
 
 mat prohibitive particle, 
 198. 
 
 niiiilnnna adopted 
 son, 130. a. 
 
 mutasavncar supposed, 
 imagined, 137. a. 
 x* matldnd or j j 1 kd mat- 
 land to feel nausea, 187. 
 2* m a f 'i a-.: a,- consecu- 
 tively, 130. a. 
 
 i-^> mutaicasslt l 
 in middling circum- 
 stances, 198. a. 
 
 mutawafd deceased, 
 the deceased, 157. a. 
 
 mathor earthen jar, 102. 
 * misiil proverb, apho- 
 rism, similitude, 164. a. 
 i* musallas triangle, 51, 
 102. 
 
 ajbi'ir forced, 84. a. 
 or <^*** mujhko or 
 mujhe obj. form of main.
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 1. 
 
 247 
 
 machhli fish, 51. 
 >p*W mohusara siege, 132. a. 
 ^*" mohdwara idiom, dia- 
 lect, fashion of speech ; 
 bd-mohawara idiomatic, 
 34 ; be-mohdwara unidio- 
 matic. a. 
 
 ~*- mahdbbat affection, 
 176. a. 
 
 mohtdj poor, 171. a. 
 mohtamim editor, 
 122. a. 
 
 mahrum deprived of, 
 60. a. 
 
 mulchlasar abridged, 
 shortened ; m. Jcarnd to 
 abridge, abbreviate, 68. a. 
 muddat long period of 
 time, 156. a. 
 * madad help, 171 ; ma- 
 dad-gdr helper, a. 
 
 murabba' square, 51. a. 
 ^jr* murtakib guilty, sin- 
 committing, 34. a. 
 mard man, 137. ^>. 
 marz disease, 97. a. 
 marzi pleasure, 60. a. 
 U.* marnd to die, 97 ; death, 
 157. 
 
 wart2 sick man, pa- 
 tient, 97. a. 
 
 mizdj temperament, 
 state of health, temper, 
 4. a. 
 
 musiifir traveller, 60. a. 
 .".. musta'dr borrowed ; 
 musta'dr lend to borrow, 
 84. a. 
 
 5.-. muataqim straight, 
 
 102. a. 
 
 Ul musalmdn Moslem, 
 Mahomedan, 60, li'3. a. 
 
 musawicada rough 
 draft, M.S. 91. a. 
 
 mushtdq desirous, 34. 
 a. 
 
 mushkil difficult, 182, 
 may be used as a noun. a. 
 
 vnashhur known, pub- 
 lished, 114. a. 
 
 masdrif (pi. of raas- 
 ra/) expenses, 198. a. 
 u^^la^ maslahat expedient, 
 expediency, 51. a. 
 
 musibat misfortune, 
 44. a. 
 
 mutdbtq according to ; 
 mutdbiq-asl exact copy 
 (lit. according to origi- 
 nal), 34. a. 
 matba' press, 182. a. 
 
 mutliq or mutlaqan 
 quite, 91. a. 
 
 mo'df forgiven ; m. 
 farmdnd to forgive, 164. a. 
 
 mo'dmala affair, busi- 
 ness matter, 76. a. 
 
 mo'dyana inspection ; 
 m. farmdnd to inspect, 
 171. a. 
 
 mo'allim preceptor, 
 teacher, 109. a. 
 
 ma'liim known, 4. a. 
 
 ma'ni meaning, 182. a. 
 
 muft gratis, 51. 
 
 muqdbala comparison, 
 opposition, 198 ; ba-muqd- 
 bala in comparison with. a. 
 muqaddama case (in 
 law), 84, 176. a. 
 
 muqarrar appointed, 
 fixed, settled, 34 ; muqar- 
 rar a, fern, of above, 176. a. 
 .^* makdn place, abode,
 
 248 
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 house (of a better sort), 
 4, 84. a. 
 
 magar but, 197. p. 
 * mayn't cross, sullen, 
 peevish, etc. 4. 
 
 muldhaza considera- 
 tion of, inspection, 137. a. 
 \j}L Hiiili'iyilt viyit, inter- 
 view; )n. k'lrm'i to pay 
 a visit, interview, etc., 34, 
 68. a. 
 
 xU multawi deferred, 
 postponed, adjourned; m. 
 kar-rakhn<l to adjourn, 
 84. a. 
 
 mulkt (relating to 
 country), civil, 109. a. 
 mil HU to receive, intr. 
 to meet, combine, be like, 
 correspond, etc. 51 ; jd- 
 milmi to fall into (of a 
 river), 68; milkar (P.C.P. 
 ofmilml) united, summed 
 up, in combination, 68. 
 
 maliU grieved, discon- 
 tented, 176. a. 
 
 imnnkin possible, 143, 
 176. a. 
 
 Duiix'ir minaret (A.r. 
 noun of place), 97. a. 
 
 m mi''! sib befitting, 
 187. a. 
 
 muntazir expecting, 
 143. a. 
 
 munsarim manager, 
 143. a. 
 
 mnnznr agreeable, 
 approved, 150. a. 
 
 or &* or j$y mouth, 
 face, 60, 68, 187. 
 
 maujiid available, in 
 
 hand, ready, in existence, 
 10, 198. a. 
 
 fy tn "ii l"i-; Moslem title 
 of learning, 187. a. 
 ^jV* mahjrnja chief Ruju. 
 198. 
 
 i'Jirl'Ini kindness, 
 favour, 27. p, 
 
 Htohlat delay, respite, 
 grace, 143. a. 
 
 mehmdn guest, 51. j>. 
 Wv* mohaiyd provided, 1H. a. 
 
 mahiti'l month. 
 - (jW* miydn ji title of 
 teacher, 91. p. 
 mekh tent-peg, 109. p. 
 inez table, 34. p. 
 
 muyassar obtained, 
 176, 182. o. 
 main I ; merd my, mine. 
 men post, affix locative, 
 in, into, among, between, 
 etc. 
 
 menhdi henna, 102. 
 
 nd (privative) ; nd-insdfi 
 injustice, 27; n"'-/<"/<""//i 
 unfinished, 44 ; mi-haqq 
 unfairly, 109; //"'-;/ 
 displeasing, disgusting, 
 122. p. 
 
 U ndpnd to measure, 97. 
 ndddni ignorance, 34. 
 
 P- 
 
 \] nddur rare, 176. a. 
 
 wiZa ravine, ' nullah,' 
 157. 
 
 iwlish complaint, 
 plaint ; nulish karnu to
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 1. 
 
 249 
 
 lodge a complaint, file a 
 suit, etc. 84, 157. p. 
 * mini name ; ndm-lend 
 to mention a person's 
 name, 91, 198. 
 
 nabz pulse ; nabz dekh- 
 ifi to feel the pulse ; nabz 
 dikkditd to let the pulse 
 be felt, 130. a. 
 W* najdt salvation ; najdt- 
 
 n ii to escape, 157. a. 
 < nadi river, 68. 
 -~- - nisbat proportion, re- 
 lation, 137. a. 
 
 nuskha MS. 84. a. 
 j > niswdn or \ > nisd 
 women, female sex (Ar. 
 pi.) 122. a. 
 
 tj-a* nasrdni Nazarene, 
 Christian, 193. a. 
 
 as6 pi., destinies, 
 fate, fortune, 143. a. 
 ^~a> nasihat advice, ad- 
 monition, 91, 164. a. 
 j nazar and to appear, 
 164; nazar parnd to ap- 
 pear casually or unex- 
 pectedly, 97. " 
 
 nazir exemplar ; be-nazlr 
 unrivalled, 171. a. 
 
 //;/.,;///<; to turn out, 
 take- out, drive out, etc. 
 1st caus. of nikalnd,76,I93. 
 nlkalnd to issue, come 
 out, turn out, turn up, 
 etc. 51, 198. 
 
 edU namak salt, 18, 137. p. 
 f nau nine, 68. 
 v^^y Nawwdb (Nabob) vice- 
 r>v (Mahomedan title), 
 34. a. 
 /t'.mknr servant, 10 nau- 
 
 Tcarl service (esp. under 
 Government), 176. p. 
 ?.V nehd'jat very, exceed- 
 ingly, 198. a. 
 
 n\hin or > no, no, 
 not ; nahin to else, 193. 
 nayd new, 51, 68. 
 i nil indigo, 18. 
 *s nim tree with leaves of 
 a bitter taste, 18. 
 
 wdlid father, 150. a. 
 
 waste for the sake, on 
 account, etc. a. 
 <**j wajh reason, cause, 34. a. 
 fi) wazir vizier, chief minis- 
 
 ter, 109. a. 
 Jj-j wusul collected (money), 
 
 137. a. 
 (^) watan native country, 44. 
 
 a. 
 
 wazifa scholarship, sti- 
 
 pend, 34. a. 
 ^ wa-grairo- et csetera, 18, 
 
 34, 97. a. 
 j; warq page or leaf (of a 
 
 book or MS.), 164. a. 
 j) warna else (to be trans- 
 
 lated ace. to context), 
 
 193. p. 
 t**j v:aqt time, pi. auqd,t, 10, 
 
 44, 60. a. 
 j woh he, she, it, that, the 
 
 remote of two persons, 
 
 the latter as compared 
 
 with the former (pi. as 
 
 well as sing.) ; wohi that 
 
 same, that very. 
 jut) wahnn there ; wahin 
 
 just there, 150.
 
 250 
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 hdth hand, 51; h.lth 
 lagnd to come into one's 
 hands, be acquired, 109. 
 htithi (vnimanus) ele- 
 phant, 60. 
 
 es"^* hdmi bharnd to 
 assent, 76, (10). 
 6> hdn yes, 10, 198. 
 har every, 68; har ek 
 everyone, 27. p. 
 
 harchand although, 
 176. p. 
 
 harkdra messeuger, 34. 
 
 P- 
 
 jj*> hargiz na never, 1 76. p. 
 j\^fc hazdr thousand ; hazd- 
 ron or hazdrhd (pi. of to- 
 tality), thousands, 176. 
 
 <*~ft> hast o niit yes 
 or no, 182. p. 
 halkd light, 137. 
 ham we ; hamdrd our. 
 
 himmat spirit, pluck, 
 60. a. 
 
 hamrdh companion ; 
 use das postp.,in company 
 with, 44, 157. p. 
 v~*fe hamesha always, 44. p. 
 hindil 193 ; Hindustan 
 India north of the Ner- 
 budda, 84. 
 
 Hindi the vernacular 
 of Upper India written in 
 the Nagri character, 18. 
 
 hunar virtue, skill, ac- 
 complishments, etc. 27, 
 84. p. 
 
 hansmt to laugh, In;!. 
 150; hansi ridicule, 1"'.. 
 
 haii'ii wind, air, atmo- 
 sphere, 137. a. 
 
 haww'i ogre, 193. 
 * hond to be, exist, etc. ; 
 htijfe Precative form, 
 91 ; hote hotc gradually, 
 by degrees, 109 ; //<' 1'. 
 Part, and P. Abe. 
 *> hech of no account, 
 mean, 27. p. 
 
 haiza cholera ; haiza 
 karnd to be seized with 
 cholera, 76, 109. a. 
 
 yd or, instead of, whereas, 
 193. 
 
 > ydd remembrance ; 
 hond to be remembered ; 
 yad-rakhnd to remember ; 
 ydd-dnd to come to recol- 
 lection, be remembered, 
 44; ydd-parnd to recol- 
 lect, be reminded of, 150 ; 
 ydd-farmdna to ask after, 
 call for, 187. p. 
 
 yaqin certain, 157. a. 
 ynkdigar one another, 
 = ek dusrd, 198. p. 
 > ynn thus, 51, 182. 
 yeh he, she, it, this, the 
 nearer of two persons ; 
 former as compared with 
 the latter (pi. as well as 
 sing.) ; yefii this same, 
 this very. 
 - yahdn here.
 
 VOCABULARY No. 2. 
 
 OF WORDS CONTAINED IN THE ENGLISH 
 SENTENCES OF PARTS I., IL, AND IN THE 
 TRANSLATION EXERCISES OF PART III. 
 
 N.B. (1) See App. C. 1 (2) above for principle of transliteration. 
 (2) Exceptional genders only are marked, with reference 
 chiefly to Part I. 2 (2). 
 
 A. 
 
 Abandon cfihornd alone, 
 or chhor-jdnd chhor- 
 dend int. ; chhor- 
 rakhnd or rakh- 
 rhhornd are oftenuse- 
 ful ; chhor-bhdfjnd 
 describes itself. See 
 
 abandoned (wicked) 
 sharir. 
 
 abhor nafratkarnd(se). 
 
 ability <jdl>i/iyat, lii/d- 
 qat. 
 
 able, to be saknti, as 
 second member of 
 compound verb. 
 
 able, adj. tjdbil, Ifriq. 
 
 about to qarib hni ki, 
 qarib tlid lei ; or the 
 idea may be ex- 
 pressed by the verb 
 chdhnd in combina- 
 tion with perf. part. 
 and occasionally by 
 the use of wdld with 
 gerund. 
 
 about, adv. pas, lixjuis 
 about fifty pachas ek 
 or qarib pachas. 
 
 absent ynir-hdsir. 
 
 abuse nniziiiiuii<it,bHi-d'i. 
 
 abuse, v. burd lhald 
 kahnd, gdli dend. 
 
 accept (formally or 
 officially) pazir aur 
 qabulfarmdnd; or qa- 
 bul farmdnd alone : 
 (generally) lend or le- 
 lend. 
 
 accompany sdth-dend ; 
 to accompany me 
 meru sdth dend, ho- 
 lend, sdth Iw-und 
 (ke), hamrdh liond 
 (ke). 
 
 accordance with, in ba- 
 miijib (ke), muwdfiq 
 (kfj. 
 
 accordingly chundnchi. 
 
 account or accounts 
 Itisdb ; to check ac- 
 counts hisdb sent nd] 
 accounted for i/i/ni- 
 sub ; on account of 
 waste, li e, mare (usu- 
 ally in connection 
 with an emotion). 
 
 acknowledge(formally) 
 e'tird/' kurnd. 
 
 &croBBpdr ; a. the river 
 niuli par. 
 
 acton, v. 'fiiiidl kniitd 
 (//r) ; act towards 
 (treat) bartdo kurnd 
 ' 
 
 active chust o chdldk, 
 
 hoshydr. 
 activity, chdldki, hosh- 
 
 ydri. 
 accrue hond, hdstl, or 
 
 paidd hond. 
 actuated by elevated 
 
 sentiments 'dli-him- 
 
 mat. 
 addicted to, v. marnd 
 
 (par). 
 address nam o nishan, 
 
 or simply />a<; tohis 
 
 address uske ndm kd. 
 administration insirdm, 
 
 intizdm; administra- 
 
 tion of law, nifdz-i- 
 
 qdnun. 
 admit (the force of an 
 
 argument) tasliiit 
 
 karnd, or qffil hond 
 
 (/.v/) ; admit him usko 
 
 due-do. 
 admitted, to be ddkhil 
 
 hond. 
 admonish tambih karnd, 
 
 nasihat di-iui. 
 adopt (a son) muta- 
 i k. 
 
 adopt, cause to taslim 
 
 kardnd. 
 advance, v. qudam bar- 
 
 find as the morning
 
 J.vj 
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 advanced din chnrhtf 
 
 ch'irfite. 
 
 advance-guard pesh- 
 1'nfikar. 
 
 advantage yVfiVAi, pi. 
 fated id. 
 
 advent dmad, tashrif- 
 I'ni 
 
 adventure (ambition) 
 tiunsila. 
 
 adventures snr-r/usasht. 
 
 adverse wnttkdaj ; ad- 
 verse vrindultihawd, 
 buil-i-innkhnlif. 
 
 adversity burffi, \xid- 
 
 idbdr. 
 advice snld/i, mashwara, 
 
 ntisifint. 
 advisable maslahat, 
 
 advocate of, to be an 
 
 rated jdnnd t rawdddr 
 
 honii. 
 affair inifiimnln, amr, 
 
 liit. 
 affect to be apne tii'in 
 
 zdhir kn'ii'i. 
 afflicted (with) mub- 
 
 affray fiuni/ii/nn 
 
 Afghan n/gtiii. 
 
 afi>r<-.-<.iicI imizkiii; mnz- 
 ki'iru liilii : person 
 aforesaid ndin-burdn. 
 
 after /</' /// . //'</; after 
 some days rhand roz 
 ke Im'd: afterwards 
 itkf or uske ba'd, or 
 pirfi/ii> ; after that 
 1 1' i'il i-iki ki. 
 
 again phir. 
 
 against muqdbil 
 iir, f. 
 
 aged f>uldhd, tinn-ra- 
 
 agent kdr-pmddz, i/o- 
 
 : it'i ; (in gram.) 
 
 t'l-il ; through the 
 
 agency of ma'rifat 
 
 (*> 
 
 agree (to take) ////// 
 
 k'tntiiorkii' l> mi. 'n/nl 
 to agree (on 
 
 a course of action) 
 
 mildh k'irnd agree 
 
 (solemnly) /<// <> 
 
 qatam karnd. 
 agreement qauloqurdr, 
 
 'aJldopainnin, ninini- 
 
 faqat. 
 aggression (minor) 
 
 dattamliizi. 
 aid (mutual) mo'dwa- 
 
 nat. 
 aid, v. madad dend ; to 
 
 be a great aid buhnt 
 
 k'i/ii and. 
 air Itiiwd. 
 alarming. khaufndk, 
 
 khattf kd. 
 alas ! tifsos. 
 albeit halnnki. 
 alert hoshydr, tayydr ; 
 
 being on the alert 
 
 alike yaksdn, bardbar. 
 
 alive zindn, sali'mtnt. 
 8<ihiti-suldmrit,jitHJi. 
 
 all sub, siirti, tdindin, 
 kll all the lot sub 
 ke gab ; all (our) sub- 
 
 although fitirrlinnil. '/". 
 i, luilnnki 
 altogether (quite) 
 , ni't//<itj. liilktill, 
 
 allegiance itd'nt ; true 
 allegiance wtjfUU 
 itd'at ; throw off alle- 
 giance itn'ut se phir 
 
 jiinii. 
 
 alliance '(ihd opaimnn. 
 
 allow ijiiz'tt ilmti; (ap- 
 prove) t/mriirii k-irini; 
 (admit) taxliinknrna; 
 to make allowance 
 for lihd; niklutd. 
 
 Almighty, the qddir- 
 i-mnt/tiq, k/imltif <' 
 dir. 
 
 alone tnnlui, l-, In. 
 
 alphabet til if -be ; to 
 lenrn the alphabet, 
 ///'/' juirtinu. 
 
 thn. 
 always hnmesha, hnr 
 
 tr,,<jt. 
 
 ambassador 'Irhi. 
 ambitions hutmil"- 
 
 . f/arz-mand. 
 ammunition (shot and 
 
 powder) /// bi'trii', 
 
 tdz o aiiiin'in-i-jnii'i, 
 
 mi/it'iii-i-fiitr/i a 
 amnesty <l'ir</u:<i 
 among men; frm 
 
 among men e, mm 
 
 amount, to this i* qadr- 
 
 kd. 
 
 amuse dil-bnhli'mn. 
 amusing inn :nk<i.iniizii<f 
 
 kii. I at/ kit. 
 anceitors baj>-d<ide, bit- 
 
 ;iin. 
 anchor, to /</</<// <//;/'/ 
 
 (to cast anchor) 
 ancient qai(i>.'/'i<limi. 
 anecdote hiku>int. 
 angelic ferightim kd sii 
 
 otfrrishton jaisd. 
 anger //(/...-</. 
 an^ry '/""''" 
 animal jdnwar. 
 annex mildnd (lit. make 
 
 unite). 
 anonymous </'""-'"'"' 
 
 / -inini. 
 
 announce and proclaim 
 'i7a;i f'liriiiinn'i. ixhti - 
 fidr dend. 
 
 answer jmrdlt ; to an- 
 
 swer JIlWIlli ill 
 
 answer (be useful) 
 
 peith-jdnd, kdin-nikul- 
 
 mi. 
 
 answering juwnb-dihi. 
 anyone A'o'i; infl. kisi. 
 anxiety <nul<shn. turn (- 
 
 dtid,
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 2. 
 
 253 
 
 anxious mutajakkir, 
 apparently zdhir men, 
 
 zdhirun, mii'lum lioti't 
 
 /mi lei. 
 appear nnzar ana or 
 
 ///, dikhtPi il'ini, 
 
 zd/iir hond. 
 appearance surat. 
 appoint tu'indt karnd, 
 
 inui/ttrrttr k. 
 appointed muqairar. 
 apportionment of pe- 
 nalty ttijiciz-i-t'izti. 
 approach, n. /<i*hrif- 
 
 t'urdri (ceremonious), 
 approve nuimur karnd, 
 
 i/<il> til karnd, paziro k. 
 approved manziir. 
 Arab (horse) 'arabi. 
 arbitrate panchdyat k. 
 archer timnddz. 
 argue hujjat land, hujjat 
 
 /c'iriHJ, mubdhasa kar- 
 nd 
 
 argument bahs, f. 
 arise ut/ind, uth-jdnd ; 
 
 (spring from) paidd 
 
 hond, nikulnd. 
 army latUcar, fauj f . ; 
 
 enormous army, dal- 
 
 bdd'il I'lahknr ; in 
 
 arms hathydr-band. 
 arrangement bando- 
 
 bast, intizdm, tajwiz. 
 arrange, add kurnd to 
 
 either of the above ; 
 
 to be arranged bun- 
 
 pai mi. 
 arrive pahunchna, d- 
 
 ji'nui. 
 &rt f iniii. 
 artful dugiiln'iz. 
 artifice chdldki, fitrat, 
 
 hikinnt. 
 
 artillery top-khdna. 
 ascend cfnir/nni. 
 ascent churhuo. 
 ascertain ma 'liim karnd 
 
 <l'iii/df't k., tahqiq k. 
 ashamed a/itirminda ; to 
 
 be ashamed yairat 
 
 men dud, uliunn and 
 
 (In). 
 
 ask jnichhnd ; ask after 
 hdl jiuchliiid, k'htiir o 
 'dfiynt jiiii-hluid ask 
 for tbmckvfat k. 
 
 ass ;/H(//t(i. 
 
 assassin sujfdk. 
 assembly jalsti, mnjlis 
 
 f. , mahjil f.,jiimi'dt. 
 association with <////- 
 
 zish, so/that, tnnghat, 
 
 m. 
 assuredly albatta, haqi- 
 
 qatan, tcdqa'i. 
 attack, to hamla kaiiid, 
 
 yarish k. 
 attacking (party) ham- 
 
 Id-divar. 
 
 attendance, in hdzir. 
 attention tawujjoh f., 
 
 lihdz. 
 
 attract, tojazb karnd. 
 attractive force quw- 
 
 wat-i-jdziba. 
 atrocity shardrat. 
 audible, to be sunffi 
 
 dend. 
 
 audience hdzirin-i-ijlds. 
 author musannif; (com- 
 piler) mu'allif. 
 authority ikhtiydr, sa- 
 
 nad, f . ; in authority 
 
 farman-pazir ; under 
 
 authority farman- 
 
 barddr, mdtaht. 
 auxiliary madadgdr, 
 
 xhnrik-i-imddd, 
 available maujud. 
 avert t/q/* kurnd. 
 awake bc-ddr ; to be 
 
 awake jdijnd. 
 awaken, jai/dnd. 
 aware, to be jdnnd, 
 
 dydh hond, wdqif 
 
 hond. 
 
 B. 
 
 back;V/< f., pusht, f. 
 
 bad bnrd, khrdb, (bud 
 
 as first member of 
 
 compound), 
 baggage nxbdli (sing.), 
 band t/iiroh, dastu. 
 Baniya Bnniyd. 
 banker m<thdjan,s<trrdf. 
 bard bhdt. 
 
 bareheaded and bare- 
 footed sar o pd ba- 
 
 rdhnd. 
 
 bargain khtish-khdrid. 
 bark bhaunknd. 
 b&rleyjutcdr. 
 bastion burj. 
 battalion (regiment) 
 
 pal tan, f. 
 battle larffi. 
 bazaar bazar (a collec- 
 tion of shops) ; 
 
 through the bazaar 
 
 bazar hoke. 
 bear richh. 
 
 bear, v. barddsht karnd. 
 beard ddrhi. 
 beasts and birds cha- 
 
 rand o parand. 
 beat pitnd, mdrnd beat 
 
 (a cover)JAama. 
 become ho-jdnd, ban- 
 
 jdnd, ho-li'nd, ban- 
 
 baithnd. 
 bed palanu. 
 bedding mctihond, bis- 
 
 tar. 
 
 befall ho-parnd. 
 before dtje, pahle, qabl, 
 
 qabl iskc ki, pesh. 
 before, prep, sdmhne, 
 
 di/i, ru-ba-ru, p<ilil>. 
 Begam beyam (f. of bey) 
 
 a lady of rank(Jlah.) 
 beggar faqir. 
 begin, int. shurti' hond 
 
 tr. shuru* kamd. 
 beginner mubtadi, nau- 
 
 dmoz. 
 beginning and end dydz 
 
 o (injdin. 
 behalf of, on wdttrl, li*e ; 
 
 on our behalf hamdre
 
 2/14 
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 twin *f, or Itamdri tu- 
 
 rn f *e. 
 behind picHhf behind 
 
 the back pith pichhe. 
 belief t'tiqad. 
 belly/" '. 
 below ni<-ht. 
 belt / 
 benefit fffida, if'idn- 
 
 t promote the bene- 
 
 fit of if udn karnd, 
 besides 'aldwa (Jce), 
 
 tiwdf islce 
 
 besiege mohdsara karnd 
 bet thnrt, f . ; to bet 
 
 thart bdndhnd. 
 better be/i/nr. 
 between men, darmiydn, 
 
 itch, bich men. 
 binding (of book) jild- 
 
 bandi. 
 
 binding, adj. wdjib. 
 bird chiryii, f. 
 birth, pride of khan- 
 
 ddnifakhr. 
 bite kdtnti. 
 blame, to tohmnt la- 
 
 bless me ! Ihuir to hai. 
 blind tindfid; blind of 
 
 one eye kdnd. 
 blood khi'tn. 
 bloodshed khun-rezi. 
 blow (wind), to chnlnd, 
 
 chal-rtihnd ; blow up 
 
 (fort), iininii. 
 boast, \.o Jnkhr samnjh- 
 
 nd, lii /'sun i k. 
 boat kialiti. 
 body buil'in. 
 boil. intr. khaulnd, 
 
 phut n ii. 
 
 bold bnhddur, dilrr. 
 bond (Instil irez, f. 
 book kitdb, f. 
 booty '/"'""'"') '''' 
 born, to be paidd hond 
 
 a born soldier mddar- 
 
 borroweil mange led, 
 mu/a'dr. 
 
 bosom siii'i. 
 
 both donon ; both sides 
 
 tnrnfnin (Ar. dual). 
 bough '/'//, f. 
 bound rlih'ili'm'i, f. ; to 
 
 be bound by (ob- 
 
 liged) ; palxind hond. 
 boundary snrhadd, f. 
 bows and arrows fir o 
 
 k'lintiii. 
 box Sfindiifj. 
 boy Inrkti. 
 bravery dildwuri,dileri, 
 
 (xihadnri. 
 bread roti. 
 
 breadth chaunfi, t nrz. 
 break, intr. tutnd, tut- 
 
 j'iiui ; tr. tornd. 
 breakfast hdsiri. 
 breeches nefa (lit. fas- 
 
 tening of the 
 
 drawers^. 
 bribery nshwat, rish- 
 
 irnt-sitiini. 
 brick int. f. 
 bridge pnl. 
 briefly nnikhtusar karke, 
 
 mukhtiisnr lanr jinr. 
 bring le-dnd, land, pa- 
 ' ' 
 
 broad ckaurd. 
 broker dalldl, 
 brought up by, to be 
 
 (stopped) ruk-jdnd. 
 bucket luilti. 
 buifalo (she) bhuins. 
 building mukdn. 'iimi- 
 
 rat. 
 
 Inunjulnd. 
 bush jhiiri. 
 business kdm, kdr-o- 
 
 bdr, pesha, mo'd- 
 
 IIHllll. 
 
 but lekin, mmjnr, brilki, 
 
 par, 197; but stay 
 
 Hi'ii/nr hi'in. 
 buy iiiol-luni, A/)'/. 
 
 khnridnd, khiirid k. 
 by and by thori der 
 
 men, ba'd chande. 
 
 c. 
 
 cage pinj, <i. 
 
 calamity shdinut, <if'>if, 
 
 iiiii.tilmt. 
 calf li'ii-hhrd. 
 call (8ummonB)lm/'/i/v{. 
 call, v. Imliinii call 
 
 upon (insist) tdkid 
 
 fnnniinii. 
 
 camel unt ; she-camel 
 
 untni. 
 
 camp ffiyiiiii-i/tih, f. 
 camping-ground khi- 
 
 canon law (Islam) shut*, 
 
 s/ttiri'nt. 
 
 canvas wall qnmit. f. 
 capable of (qualified 
 
 to), tHttjdz, qdbil. 
 cape rdk. 
 capital snrmdyti. 
 captured yinftur, mn- 
 
 k ft its. 
 carcass (of dead ani- 
 
 maH, murdtt jdnwar 
 care khu/mr f.. /, 
 
 {., pnrwn rish , kh n \>n r- 
 
 ddri, hoshydri, ihti- 
 
 ynt f. 
 career, military shuyl- / 
 
 carry off or away le- 
 jdnd, lf-rhiilnd carry 
 a load bojh nthiimi : 
 to be carried on fn'ni 
 k<ii-nii- carried out. 
 to be tii'mil hond ; to 
 be carried out suc- 
 cessfully hnsn-ikhti- 
 liiin k jxifiiitirhnii. 
 
 cartman i/iirihan. 
 
 case (in law) mnqnd- 
 ti'imn ; (in gram.) 
 hii/nt ; (condition or 
 circumstances) hi'il. 
 hd/nt, nhwul, siirnt ; 
 in every case b<i-h'ii - 
 hdl, fni-hiir-knif' ; 
 grievous case isti- 
 ydsa.
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 2. 
 
 255 
 
 cash ifiqd, nnqdriipaya. 
 
 cask ]>ipti. 
 
 caste ;dt,jdt, f. ; rules 
 of caste, jdt-dkurm. 
 
 cat 6i7/i, yurlm. 
 
 catch, to pakarnd. 
 
 cattle maweahi. 
 
 cause sabab ; cause of 
 anxiety khmkha. 
 
 cautiously ahixta dhis- 
 tn, khabarddri se, 
 htiydtan. 
 
 cavalry soldier sowar ; 
 cavalry regiment rt- 
 .i<i/'t. 
 
 cease (of famine etc.) 
 *'//' hand (leave off) 
 luiz t'inu. 
 
 Central India wasat 
 Hind. 
 
 centre maddr. 
 
 ceremony takaUuf; re- 
 ligious ceremonies 
 dhurm-rit, f. 
 
 certain (indef. ~), fiildn 
 t'nldna, koi shukhs; 
 (sure) yaqin ; on cer- 
 tain (special) terms 
 fj>t -shard* it-i-makhsus 
 ^ certainly albatta, Jil- 
 \ haqiqat. 
 
 chairman mir-majlis. 
 
 chamber kothri, ka- 
 iiniri'i. 
 
 change tabdil ; change 
 of mind kisi ki ntyiit 
 badalni. 
 
 change, v. int. badnlnd. 
 chapter bub. 
 character chdl-dhdl f . 
 tid'it ; good charac- 
 ter nekndmi ; 
 loose character nn- 
 liiish character anc 
 actions utwdr o kir- 
 dnr. 
 
 charge zimmn. 
 chastisement taduruk 
 
 xnzn. 
 cheap firzdn, sustd. 
 
 check (accounts), sent- 
 
 nd 
 cheer, to be of good, 
 
 khdtir jumf rakhnd. 
 cherisher of the poor 
 
 f/nrib parwar. 
 best chhnti. 
 chicken bachchn (young 
 
 of any animal), 
 chief sdrddr, P. pi. sar- 
 
 i li'ir tin. 
 
 hildhood bachpan. 
 children bdbd-loy,larkf- 
 
 bdle, larke larkiydn, 
 
 l eydl o atfdl. 
 hink darz, f. 
 chintz chhint. 
 cholera, to be attacked 
 
 with haiza karnd. 
 choose, to ikhtiydr 
 
 karnd. 
 Christianity mazhab-i- 
 
 'isa'i. 
 chuck (away) phenknd, 
 
 phenk-ddlnd. 
 circuit pher, in. 
 circumstances ahwdl 
 
 (sing.)- 
 citizen mahalla-wdld. 
 
 shahr-wdld. 
 city shahr. 
 civil and financial mulkl 
 
 o mdli. 
 civil and military kyd 
 
 nnilki, kydfauji. 
 claim dfi'wd. 
 claim, v. du'wd karnd; 
 
 du'widdrhond ; claim 
 
 superiority to sab- 
 
 i/nt-lfjdnd. 
 clan qaum, t. 
 class yuroh, jamd'at ; 
 
 large class jamd'ut- 
 
 i-knsir. 
 claw panja. 
 clemency ri'dyat, rahm 
 
 rahm-dili. 
 
 climate db o hawd, f. 
 climb chnrhnd. 
 cling />/>tti-rii/ind, 
 cloak litbtidii. 
 
 close to pds, wtzdik, 
 muttasil ; quite close 
 to pds hi. 
 
 lose, v. band-karnd. 
 
 closely (of dress) khiib. 
 
 cloth kaprd ; table- 
 cloth dasfdr-khwdn. 
 
 luh sontd. 
 
 cluck, to kukurdnd. 
 
 ioast kindra ; to coast 
 kindre kindrejdnd. 
 
 cock murff, mitrf/d. 
 
 ioincidence itttfdq- a 
 happy coincidence 
 husn-ittijdq. 
 
 collect, to jam 1 karnd, 
 
 ikatthd k. 
 
 ollected (revenue), 
 wnsul. 
 
 collector (revenue) tnh- 
 silddr, kalektar sahib 
 
 colonies dbddilid, Per. 
 pi. 
 
 :olour rang. 
 
 :omb (honey) chhattd. 
 
 combination ittifdq 
 (conspiracy) sdzish. 
 
 come and, tosh rif land ; 
 come to and fro and 
 jdnd. 
 
 comfort chain. 
 
 command hukm, ir- 
 shdd. 
 
 command, v. farmdnd, 
 hitkm dend, hukm 
 karnd. 
 
 commercial venture ti- 
 jdrat. 
 
 commission dhartd. 
 
 commit, to murtakib 
 hand, karnd. 
 
 committed sarzad. 
 
 committee panchdyat, f. 
 
 common (customary) 
 murrawaj. 
 
 common sense 'a<7/, f. 
 
 Commons in Parlia- 
 ment assembled 
 m nkhtdrdn-i- ' awdmm 
 huzirin-i-jalsa Par- 
 liament (lit. repre-
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 sentatives of the 
 Commons, etc. V 
 
 comm otion jasdd. 
 
 communication //_/"/ : 
 (dealings dad o sitad ) 
 
 compact 'uhdo jmiimin, 
 quiil o tjnrdr. 
 
 companion sdthi, h<un- 
 rah. 
 
 companionship sdth, 
 tony ha t , sohba t. 
 
 company mahfil l.,maj- 
 lit f. ; in company 
 with sdth. 
 
 comparison tntiqdbala ; 
 what comparison is 
 there between . . . ': 
 kalian.. .kahdn(W) 
 
 complain shikdyat k., 
 shi'iki or mutashakki 
 hand. 
 
 complaint ndlish (legal) 
 cause a complaint 
 to be laid against 
 ndlish karwd-dend 
 ( /'ar); (general )/r- 
 ydd, f., thikdytit. 
 
 comply with ta'inil 
 karnd. 
 
 compound hdtd (for 
 ehdtti). 
 
 comprehend qiya* kar- 
 nd, samajh-lend. 
 
 c oncealed posh idu , 
 chhipd hud. 
 
 concentration (of 
 
 troops) fauj-kashi, 
 faraham i-fa uj. 
 
 concluded (treaty) 
 mun'aqid. 
 
 concord muwdfaqat, 
 ittifdq, ittehdd, ham- 
 din. 
 
 condition hdl, hdlat ; 
 original condition 
 ux'ili hdlat ; in a ruin- 
 ous condition khrdb- 
 khatta, tabdh-hdl. 
 
 conduct (loyal) khair- 
 khu-nhi. 
 
 ui i 
 
 coHiuueraie, uuj. IHUI- 
 tafiq hokar. 
 
 coiuenuon rv/ / . , 
 
 F. n. (rare). 
 
 confess, to iqrdr 
 
 contentment i/un<i''it. 
 
 confidence bharotd, 
 
 contents ////;//. 
 
 e'tiindd, e'tibdr, khd- 
 
 contest (military) /"''/, 
 
 tir-jam'i. 
 
 f. 
 
 confined muqaiytnl. 
 
 continually mutmcutir. 
 
 confirm, to tt? id karnd, 
 
 continue laid 
 
 l/n-fnt/ fiirnidiid. ijd'im 
 
 gffiiii ratinii. 
 
 far in tilt it. 
 
 contrary to khtl'\t' : 
 
 confirmation tni<{. 
 
 contrarv to law khi- 
 
 confounded (term of 
 
 Idf-i/ihiiiii. nii-/iTi;. 
 
 abused kambakht. 
 
 contrast between i'n/i"- 
 
 confront mnqdlxtla kar- 
 
 ydz, /arq. 
 
 nd. 
 
 contrived, to be tajiciz 
 
 confusion shorish. 
 
 hand. 
 
 connected with muta- 
 
 control, v. zabt knrnd ; 
 
 'alliq (*e), mild hud 
 
 to control the tongue 
 
 (se) ; to be con- 
 
 zabdn x'liii/itiii/nii : 
 
 nected with mild- 
 
 under control kiihe 
 
 rahnd (*e). 
 
 men. 
 
 conquer fateh karnd, 
 
 converse, to ltdten knr- 
 
 jit ad. 
 
 nd, bat-chit or ;/./'- 
 
 conqueror fatehmand, 
 
 '/// karnd. 
 
 ahl-i-zafar. 
 
 conviction (belief), 
 
 conquest Jateh f., pi. 
 
 n<i'ida ; to impose 
 
 l>itiihdt,fateh-mandi. 
 
 conviction on klm-dh 
 
 consequence (result) 
 
 ma khwdh tnsliin (- 
 
 natija, anjam-kdr ; 
 
 rand. 
 
 (import) parwd, HIM- 
 
 convince qd*il iinr</iil 
 
 :<ii/uqa. 
 
 karnd. 
 
 considerable number 
 
 convinced, to be i/n>/in 
 
 bahut se. 
 
 hand. 
 
 consideration lihd: , 
 
 coolly baithe-bithu ' . 
 
 mttldhaza, gaur ; full 
 
 coolness khnnuki. 
 
 consideration gaur- 
 
 copy naql, t. ; exact 
 
 i-kdmil ; highest 
 
 copy naal mtitdbiq 
 
 consideration, etc. 
 
 /. 
 
 darja-i-'dlijdh ojaldl. 
 
 cord dori; (for stran- 
 
 conscienciousness rds- 
 ti t rdst-dili. 
 
 gling^ phdnxi ki <l"ii. 
 corn (liiiKi. nndj, >/nll<i. 
 
 constantly mutawdtir. 
 
 corpse lash. i. 
 
 consultation mushdwa- 
 
 correction tnh:il>, isliih 
 
 rat, mashwarat. 
 
 f., tnrmim. 
 
 consume sarfmen land. 
 
 correspondence khutt- 
 
 contemplate, to tawaj- 
 
 kitdliat 
 
 joh fanndnd. (par), 
 
 cossack inroads quz- 
 
 mulahaza k. 
 
 zdijdna faitj-kushi. 
 
 content, to be iktifd 
 
 cost qint'if. 
 
 karnd (par). 
 
 costly beth-qimat, be- 
 
 contented rdzi. 
 
 bahd.
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 2. 
 
 257 
 
 cotton rfi ; (cotton- cross words ukhri ukhi 
 plant) knjtds, f. ; bdten. 
 cotton cloth suti crow, to bony dend 
 kiijtrd : cotton thread i finet.) nzdn dend. 
 dhdgd ; flock of cot- crowd //'""/', bhir, f. 
 
 crown (power of) sal 
 
 t/tnut. 
 
 ton rii'i kd i/til. 
 council kotauil] 
 
 council ba-ijlds-l- "J*i b'-rahm, s; 
 
 kaunsil (lit. in SPS- ,.","!/','' 
 
 sion of council): cultivator kathtkar. 
 
 members of council 
 
 >iieiiil>erdn-i-k<iunsil. 
 councillor musliir. 
 countenance 
 
 c/i etini. 
 
 country mull:, teuton. 
 country-bred desi. 
 countryman dehdti ; 
 
 follow - countryman 
 
 hnin-iciitnn, inulk- 
 
 irt'ilti. 
 
 couple do, jord. 
 courage shajd-at. 
 court (law) karhnhri 
 
 (royal) darbd, 
 
 cultivation kd.thtkdri 
 
 1,-licti, khetii/dn. 
 cure 'eld/: to perform 
 , a cure '<?// karnd. 
 ' current jdri, iiuirawwaj 
 custom dastur, riwdj 
 cut kdtnd. 
 
 D. 
 
 daily roz-roz, roz-roz 
 kd, de din kd, roz- 
 marrn. 
 
 court-yard 
 open court 
 
 Xdflll ; 
 bdr-i- 
 I, khule kttchahri. 
 
 courted, to bo rofit/ 
 ho-jdnd (lit. to be- 
 come sought as a 
 friend). 
 
 cow pd'e. 
 
 coward, adj. buzdil. 
 
 cow-killing f/fie-kushi. 
 
 crawl, to re>i(/n<i. 
 
 create, to paida k. 
 
 created, to be jmidd h. 
 
 credit (praise), wdh- 
 wdh. 
 
 creep on chald and. 
 
 cricket-ground gend 
 khflne kd inniddn. 
 
 crime /"<v/i (pi. jtird* ////) . 
 
 iii'Tsii/ilt. 
 
 criminal mujriin. 
 critical (of a crisis) 
 
 ndzuk. 
 
 cross par hand. 
 crossing uliin , ghat. 
 
 damage (hurt) zarar. 
 
 danger khatra having 
 a sense of danger 
 khutra-shinds. 
 
 dare yard hond (ko). 
 
 dashed in pieces, to 
 be chiknd. chftr hond. 
 
 date tdrikh. 
 
 date-palm, also date 
 khajur. 
 
 day din, roz; to-day 
 dj, djhi ; days of the 
 Mutiny ayydm-i- 
 gadr ; for days mud- 
 dat tak, muddaton 
 at daybreak fajr 
 hote. daylight din ki 
 roshni; next day 
 (ii//c ilin ; some day 
 or other ek na ek din. 
 
 dead uiitrdu, mud. 
 
 deal, to jiesh and 
 (sdth). 
 
 dealings sar-o-kdr 
 wholesale dealings 
 tftok-faroshi ; retail 
 
 dealings khurda-fa- 
 
 ros/ii. 
 dear mti/mi/d ; (risen in 
 
 price) yirdn ; pydrd, 
 
 l aziz ; to hold dear 
 
 '(iziz rtikhnd. 
 death nuiut. f., ajal f. ; 
 
 put to death mdr- 
 
 ddlnd, (jatl-karnd ; to 
 
 suffer death apnijdn 
 
 dend. 
 
 debauchery 'ayydshi 
 debtor rjarzddr. 
 deceased mutawajffa. 
 deceit fareb. 
 deceive, to fareb dend, 
 
 tvdn/aldnnd, ddm-i- 
 fureb men land. 
 decide, to (in law)yt- 
 
 sala karnd. 
 decided, to be faisala 
 
 decision faisdla. 
 declaration mahzar, iz- 
 
 hdr. 
 
 declare baydn karnd, 
 zdhir k., 'clan far- 
 mdnd ; in detail 
 tashrih k. 
 
 decree, to fatwd dend. 
 deemed, to be muta- 
 
 sawwar hond. 
 deep gahrd. 
 deer hiran. 
 
 defeat, v. shiknst dend. 
 
 defeated, to be shikast 
 
 khdnd, hdrnd, maglub 
 
 hond. 
 
 defendant mudda'd- 
 
 liiihi. 
 
 lef ender qiVa-w&ld ; 
 Defender of the 
 Faith zahini-l-maz- 
 lm!>. 
 
 egree dnrja ; by de- 
 grees hole hote. 
 elay tawaqquf, der, f. 
 deri. 
 
 eliberately dhista 
 dhista. 
 elight khiishi ; in de- 
 
 17
 
 B68 
 
 KXKKCI8E8 IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 klxinlii ki hdlut ni' n. 
 demand tnlnh k'tntd. 
 
 muijtiizd hand. 
 denied, to bo inkdr 
 
 deny, to in 
 
 depart rhnJ-il mi, /// 
 
 jdnd. 
 department muhkuma. 
 
 f right a. 
 
 departure rmrdifiifi : 
 date of departure 
 ' 
 
 destroy nit o ndbi'id disc.-.- .'iz,h,i- 
 
 knrnd. ;d,;it kamd. ris o //,. 
 
 destroyed, to be khdk di- '/' 
 
 ,/!. n*f o ndliu-l ' '/''<'< ^ 
 
 ^ O ,IH. (disease (// r. liimnri. 
 
 detached judd. nlmi. disgrace tnnl-ndmi. 
 (1, to be nikul- disgraceful lmil-ndm. 
 nn,iilini ho-idnd. /'-// dUifiiise oneself, to 
 
 i'i, lift-* 
 
 detachment (mil.) dia- 
 
 t,t. 
 detail, in t<ifilte t taf- 
 
 depend on mun/iamr 
 
 hond (ii). 
 dependencies muzdfdt, 
 
 miitii'a/liqdt. 
 depression dnlx'm. 
 derived from puida. 
 descend, to utarna; 
 
 cause to descend 
 
 utdrnd niizil kardnd. 
 descended from anldil 
 
 men hond. 
 desc"iit ut dr. 
 describe tmydn kiirnd. 
 description baydn, kni- 
 
 deserve Iffiq hond. 
 deserving nazdirdr. 
 
 Id'iq, qdbil-t-tir'rif: 
 
 deserving of death 
 ,liu-l-qntl: deser- 
 ving of punishmenl 
 snzd ki Id it/. 
 
 <li-^iri' in/nixlid, ifhti- 
 >/-ii/. di-zd f.. ldlin-h. 
 
 desire, v. c/id/md, khiod- 
 hdn lumd. 
 
 despair nd-nmtn'di, md- 
 i/ii.-ii, l>f-ihli : in de- 
 spair iii'ijhur motor, 
 mdi/ds liokm . li< -'/il 
 hok'ir: blank de- 
 spair unkht indyiisi. 
 
 despair of, to hath 
 dhond, indyiis ruhnd. 
 
 desert g'lhrd, /mydhdu, 
 
 detected, to be khnl- 
 l>nrna. 
 
 determined mtistrt'/HI- 
 mizuj (possessed of 
 force of character), 
 zahnrdnxt (high- 
 handed). 
 
 devoted, to./W (par). 
 
 devotions (Islam) '/- 
 
 devour, to chut km 
 
 jdnd. khd-jdnd. 
 diamond hird. 
 diary roatAndko. 
 die, to imirnd, fund ho- 
 
 jiiiiii. (/nziikitrnd 
 diet khdnd pind. 
 different mukhtnlif 
 
 jiiildi/diin. iiiiiliijnr- 
 
 liij. 
 
 difficult mattUeil, dufh- 
 
 n-iir. 
 
 difficulty muxhkil, f . 
 dignity innnzilut. 
 diminutive past-qadd. 
 dinner khdnd. 
 direct fhtimdm k. ; di 
 
 rect route rdh-i- 
 
 direction tarn/', f. ; di- 
 rec ion of operations 
 (mil.) kdr-fiirmiTi. 
 
 director ndzim. 
 
 dirty, to nujitknr 
 
 disciplined qawfrid- 
 ildn. tiiliin-ydftd. 
 
 disclaim inkdr kurnd. 
 
 men 
 
 hond. 
 
 disgust nnfrtit. 
 :ed, to be 
 
 irdr xiiuuijlinn. 
 disgusting nd-ifnrdi- 
 disheartened M-fKl. 
 dishonostv 
 
 dislodge, to be-dnkhl 
 
 km mi. 
 dismayed, to be t/liub- 
 
 rdnd. i//inlird-idiid. 
 dismiss rukhsnt knrnd, 
 
 mcutf&fk. 
 
 dismissed, to be mnu- 
 
 i/df hond. 
 dismount, to zin jmr *e 
 
 lititrnd. 
 
 mi. nd-f'iii-niiini. 
 
 Ix'il ; fifov. i iHfl-nnz- 
 
 IHI. 
 displeased ndrdz, nd- 
 
 khdsh. 
 
 disposed to md'il. 
 disposition mizdj. khn*- 
 
 Int. 
 
 -lied nd-r-'i 
 
 khiixlt, iid-rnzdmnnil, 
 
 distance dur f., th'iri, 
 
 ilistinct iHul:litnhl'. 
 
 distinction iintii/dz. 
 
 distracted innztarr, 
 pun shiin. /inriii/niiil'i, 
 hf-tdli, lii'-r/inin, be- 
 ijiirdr.
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 2. 
 
 259 
 
 distribution of lands 
 
 /./iicii/idn-i-/iiiii/,j(ing- 
 
 khet-bdnt m. ; distri- 
 
 ./'' 
 
 bution (proportion) 
 
 ear kdn. i 
 
 tnrtib. 
 
 early innn/i nnd/n rr,sa- 
 
 district zila 1 , suba, 
 
 vere, buri fajr ; 80 
 
 pi. siiliajdt. 
 
 early (in the day) < 
 
 ditch kfniiidaq, f. 
 
 itne din rahe se ; (of 
 
 divide, to bdntnd, hant- 
 
 time) ii;/ld. ( 
 
 IIIK'I, ti/<jsi/ii /c.,hisse 
 
 earn, to kamdnd. 
 
 k. 
 
 earnest ba-dil ojdn se. 
 
 divided munqasim. 
 
 ease dsdni, drum, 
 
 division taijs'un ; (of 
 
 dsi*/i. 
 
 tribes) got f., got- 
 
 eastern iiiashriij ; east- 
 
 /itindi. 
 
 ern countries bildd- 
 
 do karnd ; doing good 
 
 i-nttliihriq. 
 
 fd'ida-rnsdni ; 10 
 
 easy dsdn, saM ; how- 
 
 have done with fa- 
 
 ever easy kaisd hi 
 
 ng hond. 
 
 d.sdn. etc. 
 
 doctor Ittikint. 
 
 eat, to khdnd, khd-lend ; 
 
 document (written) 
 tti/irir, qirtds (from 
 
 eat up klid-jdnd. 
 edge, on (of teeth) 
 
 the (jreek). 
 
 khattd. 
 
 dodge (iron.) hikmttt. 
 
 education tarblyat, /'- 
 
 doff, to utdr-phenJaid. 
 
 ///, 'ilmiyat. 
 
 dog kuttd. 
 
 effect asr pi. dsdr, 
 
 dolefully dardohasrat 
 
 natija pi. natd^ij ; 
 
 ke sntli. 
 
 (gist) mazniiin. 
 
 dominion riydsat, mam- 
 
 effective kdrgar, kdri. 
 
 lakat. 
 
 effusion of blood khun- 
 
 door kiivdr, dar, dar- 
 
 rezi. 
 
 ici'izn. 
 
 egg andd ; to lay eggs 
 
 doubtless be-shukk. 
 
 '///(A ili in}. 
 
 drain l>ndni--/-nii, f. 
 
 eight at ft. 
 
 dress libds. 
 
 eighth dthtvdn. 
 
 drift iut /ul>. 
 
 elder bard. 
 
 drink pind\ drink up 
 
 elephant hdihi. 
 
 pi-jdnd. 
 
 else, if not, tvarna, na- 
 
 drink shurdb, f. 
 
 hin to. 
 
 drinking shardb pind, 
 
 embezzle, to khiydnat 
 
 inni-noshi. 
 
 k. 
 
 drive in gdmd. 
 
 emeute danyd-fasdd, 
 
 due bdqi (lit. remain- 
 
 Jasdd, sar/citshi, bal- 
 
 ing to be paid). 
 
 wd. 
 
 dues iiiahsitl , ujrat. 
 
 empire amalddri, sal- 
 
 dunghill kiirt- kd anbdr. 
 
 tana t. 
 
 
 employ rakhnd (of a 
 
 
 servant) ; iste'mdl 
 
 . 
 
 karnd. 
 
 each har ek t har ko^i ; 
 
 employe' muldzim. 
 
 each other ek dusrd. 
 
 employed in office ( oh- 
 
 eager for the fray 
 
 da par mdmur. 
 
 employment nankarl, 
 
 IIKlll'tzillint. 
 
 encounter (meet) ///- 
 na ; (resistance) /- 
 qdbitl. 
 
 encroachment 
 (jadami. 
 
 end anjdm, intehd, ikh- 
 tifi'tm ; in the end 
 anjani ko ; from be- 
 ginning to end awwal 
 se dkhir t<ik. 
 
 ended, to be khatm 
 hond. 
 
 endurance iiti-finut, .%- 
 bit-qudnmi. 
 
 endure suhnd. 
 
 enemy dnti/iman. 
 
 engage in masnif hona; 
 'in battle) mnqdbala 
 :nrn<i. 
 
 English niif/rcz ; E. 
 (language) anyrezi. 
 
 enjoy, tofd'idn ufhdnd ; 
 to enjoy good health 
 tandurust mlmd. 
 
 enjoyment (riotous) 
 tyydshi. 
 
 enlightened /HU niir. 
 
 enmity uddicnt. 
 
 ensue, to paidd hond. 
 
 entangled, tobojihans- 
 nd, phans-rultnd. 
 
 enter qadain rnkhnd 
 (wen), ddkhil hond, 
 darj karnd ; enter on 
 (a career) ikhtiydr k. 
 
 enterprise ino/aiiu/i, f. 
 
 enthusiasm sanjanni. 
 
 enthusiastic sarijnnn 
 
 entice baU/iAtd, tanjib 
 dr-nd. 
 
 entrust, to .su/mrd k<u-- 
 nd. 
 
 equity 'addl<it. 
 
 era waqt. 
 
 escape, to bachnd. 
 
 escort, to pahiinchi'imi. 
 
 essentials in <ts,il nun. 
 
 establish, to sdbit kur- 
 nd. 
 
 17 *
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 eunuch kkwdja-mird. 
 
 expose kfiolnd ; expose 
 
 father l><i/i, irdlid. 
 
 Europeans nhl-i-fu- 
 
 the head sir nikdlnd. 
 
 fatiguo tltakdn f. , mdn- 
 
 rain/, farantji. 
 
 exposed, to be k/in/nd 
 
 d'li/i. 
 
 evasive makkdr. 
 
 extended, to be ///- 
 
 fault anxiir jil. i/naiii-dt, 
 
 evening sham. {. 
 
 itl/ii/ /iond. 
 
 /'/</.-;'/ pi. taijdair, 
 
 everyone liar ek, tab 
 
 extensive hard, hard 
 
 klmtd. 
 
 Jfco'i. 
 
 liard. wasi'. 
 
 favour, to t<Ti<l karnd. 
 
 every day roz-ba-roz, 
 
 extent, to some ki*i 
 
 favourable mnndaili. 
 
 roz-roz, di> din. 
 
 i/ailr. 
 
 fear, fright dar, kltunf. 
 
 every six months har 
 
 extraordinary djib, *///; 
 
 feast dn'irat. 
 
 r/i/ta/i' ina/iiiif tin n. 
 
 /'/". 
 
 features (of conduct) 
 
 exact t/iik exact state 
 
 extremely Ixihut /ii, ne- 
 
 anzd 1 pi. of MVIZ*. 
 
 of case fni(fii/at-lidl. 
 
 ftdyat, xhiddat Sf. 
 
 feed khildnd hare fed 
 
 examination imti/idn. 
 
 eye dnkh, f. ; eye of 
 
 kliiln-i'ini'i. 
 
 example namuim, nazir 
 
 needle ndk- kd innnh. 
 
 feel sure umiin jdnnd, 
 1 1 ' t ' ' A \ 
 
 pi. nazd'ir. 
 
 
 k-lntli iiinnn : to be 
 
 excellence khulii. M/- 
 
 diiui. 
 
 F. 
 
 felt dtl nt' n /ai/nd. 
 feelings of kindred 
 
 excellent (laudable) 
 /laniidu. 
 
 face innii/i, chehra. 
 facility suliuliyat. 
 
 birddardna /lanu/i/i. 
 fellow s/iak/ix ; yon fel- 
 
 excessive bti-darja-i- 
 
 iiiiunt . 
 
 fact amr, pi. niniir. 
 factor kothi-H-ii/ii. 
 
 low ! an- tu, are 
 shaklis ; yon fellows 
 
 J"S " , 
 excite titifutrna. 
 
 factory kothi. 
 
 tnni log : fellow coun- 
 
 excuse 'usr, iita'zarat. 
 
 fair meld, adj. immxi /', 
 
 trymen Itaiit-iriitiin. 
 
 excuse oneself, to 'uzr 
 
 ingdfse ba'id nahin. 
 
 female infanticide 
 
 karnd. 
 
 faithful nttmak-kliirdr. 
 
 nixin-i-diiklitar-kushi. 
 
 excused mo'af. 
 
 wafdddr, imdnddr. 
 
 ferry alidt, ittdr. 
 
 exemplar peshnihdd. 
 exempt, to be iintdf 
 
 raftnd. 
 
 fall gimd, ijir-jximd, 
 jiarnd. 
 fall into, to (of a river) 
 
 fertility zar-kln-zi. 
 feudal system jdijir 
 kliidmdt Icne dene kd, 
 
 exhibition numffish. 
 
 jd-nii/nd. 
 
 tariijn. 
 
 expectation inti-i'n . 
 chasftm-ddx/it. 
 expecting muntazir. 
 
 familiarity miinft-lnad- 
 nd. 
 family, knnl/a, k/idnddn. 
 
 fever linklidr. 
 few rhand, ko*i ko'i, 
 knrlili kwlth, kamtar, 
 field miiiddn, khet; to 
 
 expense kharch, surf. 
 experience iajriha, taj- 
 
 i/liar the whole 
 family kunlie kd kun- 
 
 be master of the 
 field nuiiddn hdth 
 rahnd of battle 
 
 riba-kdri (In the 
 
 t f i 
 
 famine qfht-tdli, i/r/it. 
 
 maiddn - i - kdrzdr. 
 
 sense of feel expe- 
 
 famished kdl kd mdni. 
 
 iiiatildn-i-jaini. 
 
 rience, the verb may 
 
 far, far off din-, noun 
 
 fifteen MMnaA ; fifteen 
 
 generally be trans- 
 
 and adj. ; not far 
 
 hundred </</// hazdr 
 
 lated by bond, with 
 ko to mark the per- 
 
 t/niri ditr, din nahin 
 not very far r/tanddn 
 
 or )ia ndi ah sun. 
 fifty /iarf,d*. 
 
 son affected.) 
 
 ilin n/i/iin. 
 
 lifty-st-ven, .-artdiran. 
 
 expert yaktde rosy dr. 
 
 fashion tarali f. , tari- 
 
 fight larnd ; fight one's 
 
 explain tashrilt knrnd, 
 
 i/n, tain: 
 
 way larnd liliirnd. 
 
 tiaydn k. 
 
 fast ii -, t> z-niftdr. 
 
 filth (dung) huh f. 
 
 explanation kaifiyat 
 
 fasten, to lagdnd. 
 
 till li/iarnd. hltar-ilmd. 
 
 for explanation kai- 
 
 fate i/itiinat, taydir; 
 
 find fidnd ; find out 
 
 ( iyi it liklme ki- l?e. 
 
 sad fate 'nzdf,. 
 
 dinyd/t knrnd.
 
 VOCABULARY XO. 2. 
 
 261 
 
 fine jnnmiinn ; fine 
 fellow (iron.) hnz- 
 
 finger unyli. 
 
 finish kfir-chitknd, tn- 
 
 mti/ii knnid, khntni 
 
 knrnii : tinisli a job 
 
 (in sense of killing) 
 
 kdin tnitidnt k. 
 fire dy f. , dtitsh ; to 
 
 catch fire dy-lnyni 
 
 (nn n) ; to burnjalnd. 
 firmness istehkdm. 
 first /iii/i/ii. turn-ill ; at 
 
 first jinfili', ibtidd- 
 
 iiifii. 
 first-rate nirirnl darjn 
 
 kii. 
 fit, v. laynd ; adj. iinind- 
 
 tsib ; to see fit to ... 
 
 W&H&rib sninnjlind ki. 
 fix Inydnd, qffim k. 
 fixed qim\ fixed rules 
 
 flesh 
 
 fioat, bahnd, btih-jdnd. 
 
 flock rr-ii'tir f . ; (of 
 cotton) ///. 
 
 fly wrwa ; (flee) bh&gnA, 
 
 follow pirhlip juiid ; 
 (obey) iiitiinifi. 
 
 folly jti/idlat, be-tcu- 
 qtifi. 
 
 fond of fkaug hond 
 (led). 
 
 food (diet) yzza. 
 
 fool (ihnniij. 
 
 foot panon (and by 
 elision of either 
 nasal panic orpffon), 
 /"'//', /"/, i/'iiln/n 
 (pace) ; to go on 
 
 looipff'Onpff'O)! rfinl- 
 
 nd, ptttdal <-/iiiliid. 
 foot-path piii/fliinrli. 
 for kyunki, kin If'e ki, 
 
 etc. 
 
 forbid /* kiirnii. 
 forbidden hnn'un. 
 force (of men) janfat, 
 fauj; (strength) zor; 
 
 violent force jabr o 
 
 zii/d</n/i. 
 
 force, tojitln- knrnii. 
 forced ninjfuir. 
 fordable j>dydl>. 
 forefathers, liap-ddde. 
 forest jnni/til. 
 forged j'i'li. 
 forget lilii'dna, bhvl- 
 
 jdnd. 
 
 forgetful yafil. 
 forgetfulness, ijaftat, 
 
 t'<tr<iiiH>*h-k<iri. 
 formal (serious) .11111- 
 
 jida. 
 fort qil'd. 
 fortitude tstif/ldt. 
 fortnight do h<ift<i. 
 fortune znindtm, iqbal. 
 forty rfidlix. 
 foul uiakrtih. 
 foundation bnnydd f. , 
 
 liivu. 
 four char; four times 
 
 as much fluinijinm. 
 fourth chant/id ; (part) 
 
 rltn lit/in fii.i.in, chd- 
 
 hdrniu. 
 fowl limn/, iHitn/ti 
 
 (male), mitryi (fe- 
 male), 
 fowl - house durba, 
 
 iii>ir<i'i-khdna. 
 fox lornn. 
 framing of laws taj- 
 
 iviz-i-qdniin. 
 frequent (continual) 
 
 ntntuwdtir. 
 fresh tdza, tdza-dmn. 
 friend dost, bhffi, 
 
 "tijiq, 'aziz ; friends 
 
 ;l\bub (pi. of flit/jib). 
 fright kluiiif, sfihm. 
 Erightened, to be durnd 
 
 ("'), k/iini/' k/tdnd. 
 [ront, in age. 
 Frontier .Kir/indd f. 
 frozen jama hud. 
 fulfil, to purd karnd, 
 
 irnf'ii knrnii 
 
 full, piird, kull, bhnrd 
 
 furniture nsbdb. 
 furtively chori se. 
 future dynnda. 
 
 G. 
 
 gallant bahddur. 
 gallantry linhddnri, jdn 
 
 gambling qi mdr-bdzi. 
 game, bdzi, shikar. 
 gang, ju.ind'at. 
 garden bay. 
 gasp for breath, to 
 
 dnni nnk men and. 
 gate phdtak. 
 gaze dekhtid. tdknd ; 
 
 gazing dekhte Ice 
 
 dekhte. 
 generally tikxar, 'uuiu- 
 
 gently dhi.itngi .if. 
 
 gesture ishdra. 
 
 get pdnd, hd.iil karnd t 
 milnd, int. ; get off 
 ntarnd, uttir-jxirnd; 
 get up uthnd. 
 
 ghaut yhdt. 
 
 give, to fiend, de-dend ; 
 cause to give dildnd ; 
 give up chhornd, 
 chhor dcnd, huwdla 
 kanid ; (an inten- 
 tion) faskh karnd. 
 
 glory, for barde nany o 
 nii in. 
 
 glory in apnd fakhr 
 jdnnd. 
 
 50 jdnd, tashrif lejdnii , 
 chalnd ; to have to 
 go jdnd parnd ; go 
 away chald idnd ; go 
 back phir jdnd, wd- 
 pas chalnd ; go about 
 your business chaltd 
 phirtd naznr and. 
 
 joat (she) bakri. 
 
 jlod fcfiudd ; by God ! 
 khndd ki rjuxtini
 
 - IX HINDUSTAXI. 
 
 God knows i-lnuld 
 jtin> , l.hnilii 'nliin 
 h<ti ; for God's sake 
 khudd ke 
 praised be God ! 
 
 gold mobur nshrnfi. 
 
 good tirhchhd, l iiiiiiln, 
 ilnrnxt, nek- 
 linlc/it, ni L- - uiiziij \ 
 good government 
 A '!. - iittizdia : good 
 fortune itjlidl. 
 
 government snrkdr f. 
 riydant, hnkm-rdni, 
 ri, adj. 
 
 xraceless 
 ^rade tlnr/'d. 
 gradually bu - 
 
 hotf half, raft a raf'tn. 
 grain i/iinn, </"//". 
 grammar mirf'-nn/iir f. 
 granary oalla-Ut&ta. 
 x'rand 'dli-xhdn. 
 grandson jtota, 
 grant l endy<it knrmi ; 
 
 granted that ;////</ 
 
 /.-/, m ili i (at the end 
 
 of sentence). 
 grasp pabanm. 
 grass ////.- f. 
 gratitude ahnkr-iinziiri. 
 graze, to rhnmd : make 
 
 graze rhnn'mi'i. 
 grease tbe palm, to 
 
 (i.f. bribe) inuiih 
 
 initliii knnta (lit. to 
 
 sweeten tbe mouth). 
 great IKITH great man 
 
 itinir-i-ii/iir. 
 grief t/'ilnq, 1'iiiij, /<"-- 
 
 rat, <i<tin. 
 ground saiiiin f. 
 grow Ixn-hni'i. Imtn jiind, 
 
 jiin'ild /mini ; grow 
 
 up fmrd liond, jinn'tn 
 
 hnui'i. 
 guard, on one's 
 
 linldr, 
 
 guide rnhiimiid, rnh- 
 
 harm ijnlidlint. 
 
 iliii. 
 
 harvest (spring^ 
 
 gulf khnlij. 
 
 (autumn) /.' 
 
 gun hnnduq f. , top (can- 
 
 harvest to be got in 
 
 non^ f. ; (heavy gun) 
 
 liird juir hond (lit. 
 
 ztirb-top f. 
 
 the crossing of tbe 
 
 
 raft). 
 
 
 hatch, to lini-hi-hi- nil.nl- 
 
 H. 
 
 iniiid (spoken of 
 
 habit '</"'. 
 
 breeder). 
 
 hal'its (of body or 
 
 have, use subst. verb 
 
 mind) -/r' f. ; (of 
 
 with post p. )>d* or 
 
 lifej ini z-i-:inil'n/i. 
 
 affix In for the pos- 
 
 ' habitation of war ' 
 
 sessor ; occasionally 
 
 ddru 'l-hnrli. 
 
 rnkhiid may be used. 
 
 hair ///. 
 
 head >/V H., anr P. ; 
 
 hair to stand on end 
 
 (ch: 'ii/iir, 
 
 i-oiii/t< klutrf If 
 
 IK .-hn-ii; head over 
 
 hair-splitting, ;/<->///- 
 
 heels niiiiil/iii. 
 
 i/iif'i. 
 
 health tnniliint*' . 
 
 half lii/fui. 
 
 ynt ; state of health 
 
 half kill, to i'nl/1 mud 
 
 intziij, Inlii-nt. 
 
 knrnii. 
 
 hear, to stnmd, snn- 
 
 half-way ddlii <liii'. 
 
 l> mi. .--itii-jiiiii(i ; hear- 
 
 half-yearly .-linahmdhi. 
 
 ing of i fluid'. 
 
 hamlet khe.ru. 
 
 heart dil ; out of heart 
 
 hand lidfh ; to take into 
 
 In -ilil, nznntn-dil ; 
 
 one's own hands 
 
 heart's content, 
 
 ti/nif f hit main nun 
 
 I.Ini.-ld l.i /iii/nt. 
 
 I' nn. 
 
 hearty ih'li. 
 
 handcuff, to iniishkin 
 
 heat i/nniii, if/ni/i f. , 
 
 lidndhnd. 
 
 tnifli, ! zi. 
 
 handful mntlii. 
 
 heir H-- 
 
 hang down, tr. Int- 
 
 hell doznkh. 
 
 l.iimi. 
 
 helj) anhdrd, iiinilid f., 
 
 hang it ! Imlii .-> . 
 
 iiindnd-ndri, i iinliiil. 
 
 , happen hond, irm/ir 
 
 help, to minimi , ' 
 
 men and ; as it hap- 
 
 km HU; help oneself 
 
 pened itti/dijnn. 
 
 (i/niti kdni itil.iil-li mi. 
 
 hard (difficult) niit*h- 
 
 helpless nii-l.'iif, iinij- 
 
 kil, tliin/nrdi; (ma- 
 
 luir, lie-ikhtiydr. 
 
 terial) sakht ; (wind) 
 
 here yn/idn. i/n/iin. is 
 
 tez ; to do hard 
 
 'It (nn n ) ; here 
 
 work tnklit' Hthdnd. 
 
 and there jd-lm-jd. 
 
 nn Itnnt knrnd. 
 
 high '/. liiirlid, li- 
 
 hardship xnkhti. 
 
 I'linl. 
 
 Hardwar, Unnln-di- 
 
 higher class / ilnrjn. 
 
 (place where the 
 
 hill /Hi/idr ; ' on the 
 
 Ganges enters the 
 
 hills ' /in/iiir ftnr. 
 
 plains). 
 
 Hindooism himlu-mtit. 
 
 hare khnnjogh. 
 
 hindrance
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 2. 
 
 263 
 
 hint i.mi, itkAro, 
 
 hurry jaldi ; in a hurry 
 
 hold, rnkhnii, tasaw- 
 
 /'lid. 
 
 ii-nr k. ; to be held 
 
 liurry, to jaldi knntd. 
 
 niiitiisitiru'iir fiond, 
 
 hurt, to be chot Inynd. 
 
 jdri honii ; hold out, 
 
 husband khdwind, 
 
 to (in opposition) 
 
 shauhar. 
 
 zidd /vV jdmi, to 
 
 
 hold oneself bound 
 
 I. 
 
 iifnid ziiiimn liiziin 
 
 
 jniiini. 
 
 iced water barf kd 
 
 home, at yhnr />nr : to 
 go bonus yhnr jiini't. 
 
 l>dni. 
 idea laJinr f. , khaydl, 
 
 honest diy&natd&r. 
 
 irada,Jikr m. & f. 
 
 honey sltnhd. 
 
 idiom iHohau-nrit. 
 
 honour '>:~n/, Ininnut. 
 
 idiomatic bd-mohdicnra. 
 
 hope, iimmed f. 
 
 idiot ahmaq. 
 
 hope, to iiiiinii il rnk/nid. 
 
 idle be-kdr, mist. 
 
 horde qnmn f. 
 
 ignorant jdhil, ndddtt, 
 
 horrible khnnf- mik. 
 
 be-wnijiif. 
 
 bald kd. qazab kd. 
 
 ill biitidr, 'nlil ; to be 
 
 horror (aversion) dili 
 
 illji burd knrnd. 
 
 niif'rnt. 
 
 ill-luck bntl-tjtfiinnti, 
 
 horse yhord. 
 
 />n</-ii/bdli. 
 
 hot i/nriH ; the hot 
 
 ill-use aitdiid. 
 
 weather ytirmi kd 
 
 illegal, nd-jS'iz. 
 
 miiiisiiii, t/ariiiiydn 
 
 illiterate nd-khirdnt/n. 
 
 pi. 
 
 illustration (verbal) 
 
 hound, shikari knttd. 
 
 tamxil. 
 
 hour ghnntd. 
 
 imaginary khaydli. 
 
 house (general) yhnr ; 
 
 imagine, to tnxtunvur 
 
 (betterclass) mukdii, 
 kothi, hnvili. 
 
 knrnd, khnijdl k. 
 imitation of, in <l< khd- 
 
 housekeeping khdnn- 
 
 dekhi. 
 
 ddri. 
 
 immediately bn-mujnr- 
 
 however, Im-hnr /nil. 
 
 rml, fnnrnn, Jil j'n nr . 
 
 ji/u'r bfii, fo bhi. 
 
 impartial baynir tnrn.f- 
 
 human t>eing ddmi, 
 
 ddri ke. 
 
 dilnmzdtl, iin-dn. 
 
 impeding, muzdhim. 
 
 humanity uinril-ddnii- 
 
 impertinent nd-ham- 
 
 ynt, insdniyat. 
 
 ivdr, gutt&kh. 
 
 humble frame of mind 
 
 implicitly be-<-hun o 
 
 'd/'izi ki hi tint. 
 
 cJiird (lit. without 
 
 humility inkisdr. 
 
 when and why). 
 
 hundred, snii ; hun- 
 
 implore, to mnltnji 
 
 dreds ainkro/i. sntllid. 
 
 fiond. 
 
 hanger bhiik f., aur- 
 
 impossible nd-mumJein, 
 
 .-iiniyi ; sore hunger 
 
 muhdl, imliiii ho- 
 
 zor ki lihiik. 
 
 xnkiid. 
 
 hungrv, to be It/nik 
 
 inasmuch as, nz /'.> //. 
 
 l<n/iid, blu'ikhd Innn'i. 
 
 incompatible nd liniii- 
 
 hunt, to thikdr knrnd. 
 
 KOZ. 
 
 inconcoivable be-ijiyii*, 
 k/u'l<ir'-t/i>/('i*. 
 
 increase, to, int. bnrh- 
 nd, tr. barkdnd. 
 
 independent dzdd; in- 
 dependent action, 
 dzdddna kdr-rawa'i. 
 
 India Hindustan, Hind. 
 
 indiscreet be-tuiniz. 
 
 indiscriminately, be- 
 t(uhlcMt-i-athicM*, 
 
 indispensable /d-bttdd. 
 
 indisposed '//"/. 
 
 indisposition 'alalat. 
 
 indolence kahili. 
 
 indulge m to excess 
 nehdyat be-bdk hand 
 (men). 
 
 indulgence in strong li- 
 quors shardb-k/nvdri, 
 mai-noxhi. 
 
 Indus Sindh. 
 
 industrious jafd-kash , 
 mehnnti. 
 
 inexpedient masfahat 
 iin/iin. 
 
 infantry fmidul ; foot- 
 soldier i>i>/iidn. 
 
 inferior kain - nttbd, 
 iidiiti. 
 
 infernal deity />dttil- 
 wdld dcotd. 
 
 inflame, to isht? l dl 
 dfiid. 
 
 inflict dend (of punish- 
 ment). 
 
 influence dakhl, ro'b. 
 
 influential ro'b-ddr. 
 
 inform di/dh kurnd ; to 
 bo informed dijdlt 
 Itond ; to gain infor- 
 mation who a person 
 really is iixnli hnqi- 
 qat d<iri/<ift knrnd. 
 
 information ittild- f. , 
 khabar f. 
 
 informer mukkabbir, 
 
 ingrate kdjir-ni'aiit'it. 
 
 inhabit rah mi, buxnd, 
 I i iid o bdth k. 
 
 inhabitant
 
 264 
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 pi. lni*/,i mini/tin, 
 
 riihni-n-dld. 
 
 inheritance tnrkd : by 
 inheritance /arX-* 1 
 MM. 
 
 inquiry /;;-/"/;> f. : 
 (in sickness) 
 dnt. 
 
 inside tniilnr, lifiitnr. 
 insinuate oneself dnkhl 
 
 jniini. 
 
 inspect nin'iii/'nin k. 
 inspection nn/rdni. 
 instability mi- fideddri. 
 instance niisdl f. 
 instead, adv. i/d. 
 instead of, post. 'twaz. 
 instigate, to tnr;/i/> 
 
 dead. 
 institutions nth nism 
 
 f., riisiii o riirdj. 
 instruction /// ; in- 
 structions fiiddynt, 
 Iiitkin, knhii. 
 insult tnnliin. 
 insurrection sm--k<is/ii : 
 
 (minor) Imlini. 
 integrity diydnnt. 
 intellect 'iiql f. 
 intelligent z>hin, 'ntjl- 
 
 iiiiinil, tfz-fifini. 
 intent murdd f., tiiynt. 
 uitention qnsd, iruilu ; 
 to give up intention 
 Jiiskli km mi. 
 intercourse linnul n 
 rnfi i. ; want of in- 
 tercourse /add in/nid. 
 interest >'/' n >/// />// : 
 in your interest ////- 
 ftii i li'iiji/ UK n. 
 interesting tlil<-/mi 
 iiinzii kd, iniizdi/ kd. 
 interfere, to ilnxtnndd: 
 
 knrmi, tn'm i n: k. 
 interference / 
 
 intermarry. t'< 
 
 men */<iit/i In/ii/i k 
 internal uiuluruni ; in- 
 
 ternal tranquillity 
 
 just wait,' etc. may 
 
 ainn a rhnin. 
 
 generally bo trans- 
 
 intoxicated 7/< kr 
 
 lated by :nrrn to. 
 
 mi."/,' 
 
 
 intrigueyi/f//. >:>//. 
 
 
 intriguer </////>//. 
 
 . 
 
 intuition tur'um . 
 
 keep riikhtui : keep 
 
 .'it. 
 
 watch dfklttd ni/ind ; 
 
 invade, to rhinluTi 
 
 to be kept up /< 
 
 knrnii. 
 
 kni-ini. 
 
 invasion <-]i<nluT<>. 
 
 nii. i-fnilii. tiili. 
 
 invent ijdd knnia ; to 
 
 kill, to nidnid, tniir- 
 
 be invented //</ 
 
 i/iilnii. lintiil: /.'.. '/'/'/ 
 
 /tond. 
 
 /.. ; to be killed (in 
 
 inveigled, to be dhokd 
 
 huttle) ktiiii linn, kin t 
 
 khdnii 
 
 i-ii/inii. iiiiini jtiiui. 
 
 invite to a feast ziya- 
 
 kind iff SHI f. , /'/;/'/, 
 
 f'nf ktirnti. 
 
 tin-nil f. 
 
 iron lufni. 
 
 kindled, to be Uutrnk- 
 
 irregularity (of con- 
 
 Kllllll'l. 
 
 duct), irregular 
 
 kindness >//.-, nnhr- 
 
 courses hi -lu</<iini. 
 
 liiini. 
 
 island jnzirn. 
 
 king liiitlsfidfi. 
 
 isolated //</////</, /mln 
 
 klSS, to //>'/ '/' nd. 
 
 jit < Id. 
 
 know, to kisi k kfin- 
 
 issue, to (order) ./"/// 
 
 IHII /mini, or ''// 
 
 X\ , int. in kit/ nd ; to 
 
 hand. or nurliiin 
 
 be issued mijh /<//. 
 
 fiond. jiiinni. JHI/I- 
 
 item raijniii f. 
 
 c/uiiiiiii. 
 
 
 knowingly, jdii-lmjh- 
 
 
 known mn'lum ; made 
 
 J. 
 
 known mnnknshif. 
 
 
 L. 
 
 jar ijlimii. 
 
 
 ievrellerjnii/inri. 
 
 labour im/innl. 
 
 jewels jnirii/iir. 
 
 ladder sir/ii. 
 
 join, to jonni, mildnd ; 
 
 lady liil.i. 
 
 join in xfidiitfl /mini. 
 
 lamp rhirnij ; (collec- 
 
 xhnrik finmi. 
 
 tivelv) lintti r/iii-dif. 
 
 journey .-nfnr. 
 
 land uanln f. 
 
 judgment fnlnn o fini- 
 
 landholder znmindiir. 
 
 *at, taiiiiz ; day of 
 
 lands 'r/'/r/. 
 
 judgment i/ii/dmnt. 
 
 language znlxi,, f . . /x>/. 
 
 junction, to form with 
 
 lash out, to diil'itti 
 
 niil-jiiini. 
 
 i-ltnliinii. 
 
 justice instil'. 
 
 last, at akhir, dkhir 
 
 just now iili/ii to. The 
 
 ki'n- last year /</ - 
 
 idiom of ' just ' in 
 
 41. 
 
 such phrases as 
 
 late, to bo </<; km mi ;
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 2. 
 
 265 
 
 BO late in the day 
 it ni i/in i-linrhe\ so 
 late at night itni rat 
 gu'i. 
 
 laud, to tit'rif k. 
 
 laugh, to litnisiid ; to 
 get oneself laughed 
 at (ipni kansi kardnd, 
 
 laughing. laughter 
 Imnxi ; laughing,adj. 
 kanii k<i. 
 
 law f/dniin, pi. i/iiii-ii- 
 n in ; laws and regu- 
 lations fflH O qdlllill. 
 
 lazy mist. 
 
 lead away (deceive) 
 (tn/i/.-iind, l>nlikti-il< mi ; 
 taking the lend.yexA- 
 /niri. 
 
 leader xiirijnrnh, mir- 
 ild i- ; hereditary 
 
 leader bSpoti-ra^is. 
 
 leading-rein bdij-dori. 
 
 leap, to koilini. 
 
 learn. riJchnd, parhnd. 
 
 leave rnk/istit, ijti-nt, 
 chhnthi ; take leave 
 i-iiklistit /mini or /</< ; 
 give leave (dismiss 
 in interviewing) 
 nttktat 1,'nniti. 
 
 leave, to (start) t-hliut- 
 nd; trans, <-hli<>riid, 
 i-lilior-tlend ; leave off 
 /irh dud, c/i/ioi'iid. 
 
 left liutji; to be left 
 rnli-jdnti, /I'ir/id ; to 
 be left on the field 
 khi't nilnii'i. 
 
 length tiil, Iainlju"i. 
 
 lengthen />/////. 
 
 leopard, rltiiii. 
 
 lest tiisd nn lio Id, // 
 
 liuihi'l Id. 
 
 letter //<//, rlu'tt/ii, 
 
 rutj'it, naiiin. 
 libraiy kntnli-Lliiiitn 
 
 (Ar. pi. of hitub). 
 lie jiitr/i'i. 
 life jaii f. , zinil'ii/i ; 
 
 whole life '// ///// ; 
 
 to pass life :i*t 
 knrnd, IHIHII- tunjiit 
 
 . 
 lift itt/tdiiH ; to lift off 
 
 the feet le-nrnu. 
 light roxfuii, in'tr. 
 light haiku, l;lmf(l\ 
 
 norm 
 
 lightning, bijli. 
 like, alike yaktdn, 
 
 biirabnr : prop, mix! ; 
 
 have a liking for 
 
 xltanq hond (X-'), 
 
 chdJiix't. 
 limb 'rtcw, pi. ti'zd, 
 
 lidtli-pff'oii. 
 limit thikdnd. hurld f. ; 
 
 to bo limited to 
 
 kltntin hond (//ww). 
 lion n/ier. 
 listen Kinnid. 
 literal liii/mvi. 
 little rhhold, thord ; a 
 
 little zurnt. fliord ad, 
 
 t/iord thord, kuchli 
 
 kitchh. 
 live, to bamir (inqdt 
 
 kurnd, ;i*f ktintd, 
 
 i-ii/iiid ; as long as I 
 
 \vrejiteji. 
 liver j'ffnr, kulejd. 
 load bojh. 
 load Iddnd to he 
 
 loaded Imliid, l<ul- 
 
 Iftid. 
 loadstone minfi-i-iuft/- 
 
 ndtix. 
 local i* jtif/(ih kd, 
 
 i/i ih an ke lot/on kd. 
 lock, qufl. 
 long durdz, lambd ; 
 
 very long tfil-tawil; 
 
 long ago kulilii /</, 
 
 /.v//; /.', linn/tin/ Al/i. 
 
 long for nttuhtdq hond. 
 
 uktiy&q nikhnd. 
 look, look for tlt-khiid ; 
 
 look blankly at 
 
 ninnli <l> L'linfi ; look- 
 ing for service mittit- 
 
 looks, good sAnit. 
 
 loose lafolnd, chhornd. 
 
 lord khitihiirnntl \ lords 
 spiritual and tem- 
 poral iiinriic inillati 
 o HI ill ki. 
 
 lose (game or battled 
 hdrnd. 
 
 loss khtixdrd, imqsdn, 
 ziydn ; a losing con- 
 cern jiit men kttuxdrd 
 hold ; at a loss, 
 Imirdn. 
 
 lost, to be jdtd ra/nnl. 
 
 louse jiin f. 
 
 love '<iziz niklind, pydr 
 hiirnd, i-hd/tnd ; for 
 love burde tsliq o 
 
 IIKlltllllllllt. 
 
 loyalty irafdddri,kh(iir- 
 
 kliicdln, 
 luckily khuxh-qimitati 
 
 .sr, hufn-ittifitq ne ; 
 
 bad luck biid-iqbdli, 
 
 lull, to j>husldnd. 
 lying and deceit tluroij 
 o dtiyd. 
 
 M. 
 
 made up btindyd hiiu. 
 
 magnanimity 'ali-liiin- 
 iiiati. 
 
 Mahomedan, Moslem, 
 or Muslim, nnixdl- 
 indn. (t/il-i-ixldiit. 
 
 maiutonance(of treaty) 
 
 I/a 
 
 majesty, his or her 
 
 make bdndnd, ktirnd 
 make peace MM 
 knr-li-nd ; make a 
 noise yul machdnd ; 
 make both ends 
 meet kifdyat ktirnd 
 make a clean sweep 
 stifd rlint ktirnd, 
 btinibtir kttrnti ; make 
 good a deficiency 
 let IK r nikdliid.
 
 266 
 
 .OISKS IN HIXHOTANI. 
 
 man ddmi, ////'/;;/-:;/</, 
 
 with means /;" 
 
 inn nl. MIX/// ; dead 
 
 te. 
 
 man mm-dn ; holy 
 
 meaning ////<//, nuni- 
 
 man fmzurtf, bdmil, 
 
 >7(, mil 1 ni. 
 
 joift, i/iixiTin ; old 
 
 meanwhile '/ mm, 
 
 man pir-murd, hud- 
 
 is u*,iii mi n. 
 
 il/id. 
 
 mechanical, knl kd. 
 
 managed, to be In mini. 
 
 melt, to i>ii//nilnii. 
 
 fmit-jianui ; if I can 
 
 mend, to innntnnnut 
 
 manage it. ;//</// //> 
 
 ktirmi : wanting 
 
 r/K//f, ho-nnkf, bane 
 
 mending iiiiirnmmiit- 
 
 to. 
 
 tnlnl,. 
 
 management inlizdm, 
 
 mention tnzkirn. zikr. 
 
 tuilliir, li'iinliili'i'it. 
 
 mentioned uuiziiir. 
 
 manager, miiiixuri/ii, 
 
 merchant ><(;/<///-//;. 
 
 iiiohtiiiiiiin. 
 
 tiijir. 
 
 manifest, rmtliiiii, >/(- 
 
 mercy nilim, turuhhnm. 
 
 /'(/;'. 
 
 mere nird. 
 
 mankind /'//>. 
 
 mess /ifiiindii, /'//. 
 
 manliness x/iu/i'rut. 
 
 /inis-linix f. 
 
 iii'iri/-dd:iiii/iit,/iiii-iin- 
 
 messenger, r/dxid. 
 
 niiirili, mnidiiiiiii/i. 
 
 method tin ii/ii. 
 
 many Imltnl, /m/u/t M, 
 
 middle, midst dtirmi- 
 
 lin/uiti iii, tiksur; 
 
 i/iin. liir/i, li'ii-h kd. 
 
 many times luirfid. 
 
 migration niiql-i-ina- 
 
 march run-tint i ftond, 
 
 l.'iin. 
 
 kurlt kiintti. 
 
 military /'/'//(/;(. /'((;;'//, 
 
 mare i//n'i, mdili/dn. 
 
 fini/i; military class 
 
 mariner /u/ui;i, /n/niz- 
 
 f'iii/i /umii-iit mili- 
 
 irdld, ii/il-t-jn/idz. 
 
 tary devotion jtnnji 
 
 market /;:/-. </"/ 
 
 fii/iriifiit. 
 
 marriage xlitidi. 
 
 milk <///'/// : to be in 
 
 marry xhtidi /., lu/iih 
 
 milk ili'nlh id mi. 
 
 k., fhii/li-lii/iili l.'iirnii. 
 
 mill, f/mkki. 
 
 martyr .>/////</. 
 
 mind ! kfml>nrtldi-, zin- 
 
 master mdlik, *ain'li ; 
 
 Inii, i/' /./in, di/./i- 
 
 master of the house 
 
 ni/iii ; to come to a 
 
 Kii/ii/i-k/iiiini. 
 
 right state of mind 
 
 match, to mil mi (int ). 
 
 rii/t-i-itixl /nir limi. 
 
 materials of war ></- 
 
 miiU'lin^ ./" r/>//. 
 
 iiiiiii-i-limli n Z'lili. 
 
 minor mind. 
 
 mathematics riydzi. 
 
 minute information 
 
 matter </;/. Init ; (sub- 
 
 inn t'<i Haul /it'll. 
 
 ject; lnil>, liiii'ii. 
 
 miracle, a ktimdl. 
 
 Maulavi unnilnri (Ma- 
 
 misapprehension i/ulut- 
 
 homedan religious 
 
 fi linti. 
 
 title). 
 
 misfortune klirdfii. 
 
 mean />risf-lii<iii<it. 
 
 xnk/i t i,m n.tibn f. /</;/'/- 
 
 means ^of) wnxila, pi. 
 icuxa'il by means 
 
 hdli. 
 misled, to be dhukd 
 
 of liti-ztiri'ti ; in ace. 
 
 khdnd. 
 
 lllist ik<- i/'i/'i'i, 
 
 f., klintii ; rven liy 
 mistake hhulkui- ///</. 
 
 mistaken i/nlni. 
 
 mir, to, tr. // //. 
 or mi In nn. 
 
 modesty '//<'' 
 
 molestation taklif. 
 moment dinn, Imnhu ; 
 in another moment 
 
 koi dmii /did /mi ki. 
 Monday I'ir. 
 money rii/mi/n, r/////</- 
 
 l>ni.-d ; ready money 
 
 monkey Ixmdar she 
 monkey Iminlri. 
 
 month iiiil/iinii, miilt. 
 
 monthly nuilm-nri. 
 
 moon I'lidnd m. 
 
 morning *uf>h or xnhiift 
 f. : in the morning 
 sun n : <'ool of morn- 
 ing kfiuiinki. 
 
 morrow kal,fnrda. 
 
 morsel (of food) liiyum, 
 
 mortgage, to 
 rn/.'/iiiii. 
 
 mother man mother- 
 in-law .vv ; being 
 motherless ' 
 
 motive 
 
 mount. I", -nii-iir //, 
 
 rhiirh-liiiithnd, tr. -<O- 
 
 /; kni'iinti. 
 mountain jiu/iiir, koh. 
 mountainous region 
 
 /co/n 
 mouth MH/iA ; by word 
 
 of mouth -uluiin. 
 movo rhnliiti, Inl/ni, tr. 
 
 r/inliiiiii. liiliinii. 
 movement karaJbut, 
 much /(>>//, tin/tut. 
 Munshi in'iimfti (pro- 
 
 fessional writer). 
 murderer ijiitil, kluini ; 
 
 (Thug) i>hniti<i<tr.
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 2. 
 
 267 
 
 murrain irabd. 
 mutineer liw/i. 
 mutiny <i<idr, Imydwat. 
 mutual fiaindfyar, ek 
 duxrc /.ii. 
 
 N. 
 
 name /, ixm ; in our 
 name hamdrd ix'tiii 
 leke, limiiiiri tnritf'f< . 
 
 nation qainn f.; foreign 
 nation yair qiuna. 
 
 national (/muni, ek 
 i 1 1 1 n in fed. 
 
 native r<ili>i<u-<ild; na- 
 tives of India ahl-i- 
 Hind ; native coun- 
 
 try Wtltllll. 
 
 nature taltrnt. 
 
 near nazdik, qarib, 
 
 autttaril 
 nearly qarib qarib. 
 
 qnrib thd ki. 
 necessary zariir, luziin ; 
 
 necessaries zarurtdt. 
 neck aardan f. 
 need zarurat. hdjat. 
 needy mo/itdj, hdjat- 
 
 viand. 
 neglect yajlut, be-par- 
 
 w&i, be-fktiydti. 
 neglect, to oe-khabar 
 
 hand, </d/il hond, 
 
 kh< i1i< n- an l< IK'I. 
 neighbour hamsdya. 
 neighbourhood (envi- 
 
 rons) (jird-nawdh f. , 
 
 qurb-joit'dr. 
 nephew bhatijd, bhdn- 
 
 > 
 never kabhi iiahin, Imr- 
 
 giz nahin ; never 
 
 mind kurhh parted 
 
 nahin. 
 new jadid, nayd ; 
 
 (rare) uiiokhd. 
 next <ti/lu, <il> /. 
 nice 'tnml'i, dtl-patOttd, 
 
 Ichub. 
 
 ; how nice ! kya 
 
 nicely maza men. 
 night rat f. ; night and 
 
 day rat din ; so late 
 
 at night ifni rat yae ; 
 
 to-night dj rat. 
 nine nau. 
 nineteen unia. 
 no, not nah, nahin ; do 
 
 not mat; no one ktfi 
 
 nn/iiii ; no matter 
 
 how, etc., see 175. 
 nonsense purhbdfl. 
 noon do pahar f. 
 noose phdndi with a 
 
 noose (rope) phdnd- 
 
 wdld 
 north uttar, xhimdl ; to 
 
 the north nttar men. 
 northern shimdli; n.- 
 
 western maijrabi o 
 
 shimdli. 
 nose ndk f. 
 nothing kurhh nahin. 
 notify, to it.tild- dend, 
 
 mttttali 1 karnd. 
 notwithstanding that 
 
 bd-wujudeki. 
 number ta'ddd. F. n. 
 
 like takrdr. 
 numbness sanxani. 
 numerous kasiru 't- 
 
 ttrddd. 
 nylghau nilydo. 
 
 O. 
 
 object chiz f. , matlab, 
 yarz f. , nntrdd f. 
 
 object v. e'tirdz k. 
 
 objection e'tirdz f. 
 
 obligations of duty la- 
 wdzim. 
 
 oblivion fardmoshi. 
 
 observance ta'mil. 
 
 observe dekhnd, muld- 
 liaza karnd, ta'mil 
 
 obstacle nnizdhini ; ob- 
 stacle to progress 
 
 indiii'ii 'l-tiio/tiiniii. 
 obtain JH'I/KI. htixil /.'. 
 
 obtainable dastydb, 
 
 occasion martaba ; qdbu 
 m. , mauqa 1 . 
 
 occupation mashyala. 
 
 occupy, to jd-baxnd ; 
 occupied in masruf, 
 iittix/ti/ul. 
 
 occur hond, wdqi 1 hond, 
 wiK/ir men and, kixi 
 ke khaydl men and, 
 xitjhnd. 
 
 ocean xtimiindar, bahr. 
 
 offence yunur. 
 
 offend (to be unplea- 
 sant to) pasand na 
 and. 
 
 offer, to dene laynd, 
 dend. 
 
 off-hand sar-i-dast ; in 
 off-hand manner be- 
 takaUuf hokar. 
 
 office serixhta, 'ohda ; 
 (place) daftar ; 
 
 (duty) manaab. 
 
 office-people daftar- 
 loy, 'omuld, or 'arnla. 
 
 officer of government 
 mansabddr, 'ohda- 
 ddr; superior officers 
 hukkdin-i-bdld-dast. 
 
 oftentimes akxar auqdt. 
 
 old, purdita, xdbiq. qa- 
 dim ; old age bur- 
 hdpd. 
 
 ominous (in sense of 
 outward indication) 
 upari. 
 
 omit (in writing) qa- 
 lam-anddz karnd. 
 
 once ek daf'a, ek mar- 
 taba ; at once jald, 
 fanrdn.jhat,jh(t1)xit, 
 daf'atan, bat ki /nit 
 men, yakdyak. 
 
 one ek ; one or other 
 ek na ek; one by 
 one ek ek karke ; one 
 another rk duxni. 
 
 only xirf. /'mjtit, hlinli. 
 
 ooze HI kid and.
 
 2CS 
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 open, to, int. klmlnd. 
 
 operation kdr-nnrtTi. 
 
 opinion ddni.*t f. . ; < 
 f. : in ray opinion 
 MfTf nnzdik. 
 
 opponent umkhdlif. 
 
 opportunity nutni/ir ; 
 to think it a good 
 opportunity //""""' 
 xiimiijhiidi asoppor- 
 tunity offers 
 
 fiili-i ]>lir. 
 
 oppose, to iiiu 
 
 kitrnd, khildt' /.'////, 
 nmklidli t' linnn. 
 
 opposition wuJcktlafat, 
 
 oppress, to ;"///( kumd, 
 titdnd. 
 
 oppressed mn:luin, 
 dulid fn'li'l. 
 
 or yd, nnhin to. 
 
 order /iukm. tur/ih ; in 
 order tnrtib * -. in 
 order to /, tdki, ki 
 td, ix i/itrz tit- ... /, 
 etc. ; under the 
 orders of zfr hiilcm 
 (X>), ma teht ; good 
 order X7//>7*-/i'/://<i, 
 /tn*ii->nti;titii ; lower 
 order mlnu <l<trj, 
 
 orderly nriluli. 
 
 organization Imndo- 
 liiint, iiifizdiii. 
 
 ornaments :> n-n 
 
 orphanage (state of) 
 yntinii. 
 
 out brea k f'nxdil, <l<i nf/d 
 /,!.- it I, /nilwd. 
 
 over ti/i'tr, /./. 
 
 overland khuxhki lei 
 rtili . 
 
 ox ;/do ; slaughter of 
 oxen (fdo-Lu*lti. 
 
 P. 
 
 pace rluil I. 
 pacification i 
 
 niniln. 
 
 pain '/</'/; ' on pain 
 
 of ' may be occasion- 
 
 (a law) jnri > 
 
 ally rendered by the 
 
 ii-'i:' kurnd. 
 
 ase of trnrnn. 
 
 passage ;/nzdr. 
 
 pair (of horses) jord. 
 
 passport rhdlnn. 
 
 pale of forgiveness 
 
 past tense siiiu-i-mdzi, 
 
 fhdtu-i- turn II/IH HI. 
 
 ind;i. 
 
 Pandit Pundit (Hindu 
 
 path (track) /"/- 
 
 religious title). 
 
 (/ mill. 
 
 panegyrist inndli- 
 
 pathless ln-rdh. 
 
 l.'liirdn -. warmest 
 
 patience *///. t'lh'im- 
 
 panegyrist k/idax 
 
 mill. 
 
 iii'nllt-kliirdii. 
 
 patient bin-dlnti-dmt. 
 
 panic xiiliin : panic- 
 
 patient (noun) /<///r, 
 
 stricken chnakki-- 
 
 lit ni dr. 
 
 i-hhi'it (metaphor 
 
 patrol, or parade, 
 
 from dice). 
 Panjab Pnnjdb (five 
 
 pauper khdli lidtfi, innf- 
 
 waters). 
 
 , , ... 
 
 paper kdi/uz. 
 Paradise janmit. 
 paralysed, to be hath 
 
 pay iiiHi. iticiiit i. 
 pay, v. n'ld km-nd \ pay 
 up i-hnkdnd. i-linkd- 
 il mi. 
 
 parda fmrdu (custom 
 
 peace and harmony 
 
 iiniii-i'iiiii n. 
 
 of veiling and se- 
 cluding women). 
 
 peaceful industr 
 nd*i*-i -sul/t (lit. artB 
 
 pardon v//)r, <l<iri/nztn; 
 baJAtkut . maq/tmt. 
 
 of peace), 
 peacefully *// *<ntdd 
 
 pardon, v. ilnrifiiznr 
 
 nun (lit. in peace 
 
 kiinid or I'ltrnidnd. 
 
 and rectitude). 
 
 In iklix find ; to get 
 
 pearl inoti m. 
 
 pardoned ino'af'kar- 
 
 peep mjhdnknd. 
 
 I'mi'i. 
 
 peg (of tent) mr-klt f. , 
 
 parents //</;/>. 
 
 khonti. 
 
 part hfmifi ; act a pro 
 
 people lot/, i-iilii. 
 
 minent part />'*/t- 
 
 Imtliiiuiit, ]il. lid-Inn- 
 
 ilntti kurnd. 
 
 il'n/dn, khnliTiq. 
 
 partaker xhnrik; par- 
 
 perch, to Imitlind. 
 
 takers in murder 
 
 perform, to unjdm 
 
 xhiirnkd-i -i/ntl. 
 
 i/> iid. mid kurnu. 
 
 particularly faiaMbMi 
 
 perhaps xfidi/ml. 
 
 klidsl.-nr. 
 
 peril (critical circum- 
 
 partnership xhirktit. 
 
 stances) hdtli.-ti. 
 
 party fnri^j'nnq; op- 
 
 period 'nr.-n, ;>tiiidii'i, 
 
 posite party fnnij-i- 
 
 irni/t. 
 
 ni'il.lidlif ; make a 
 
 permission j><inrdnni/i, 
 
 party among *dzi- 
 
 ijd-iit. 
 
 s/ii n l.nrni'i. 
 
 permit <i<ncdrd kurnd, 
 
 pass (large) durn ; 
 (small) i/Jidfi. 
 pass, v. i/ii:arnd ; pass 
 
 ijd-nt ill i,d. 
 perpendicular khnrd. 
 perplexed to be hnirdu
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 2. 
 
 269 
 
 hain't, /iin'rut tnfn 
 
 /mini, /iiiix-bnix m< n 
 
 hond. 
 person dilmi, xfidkfix ; in 
 
 person bi-:<it-i '-k/nixx, 
 
 bi-zdtihi, ln'-:iit-i- 
 
 klii'nl -. some persons 
 
 bn'z, ba'z /or/. 
 petition 'rri, 'arz- 
 
 (/<;.</! C f. 
 
 picked r7if//<M hifd. 
 piece //? ; piece of 
 
 cruelty ://///< ; in 
 
 pieces purze jiurz? ; 
 
 to be dashed in 
 
 pieces chiknd clu'tr 
 
 ftit-jdnd. 
 pig stir. 
 pitch (tent) klutrd 
 
 kunid; to be pitched 
 
 ndsub hond, 
 pity furs. 
 philosophy 'ilm-i-hik- 
 
 iunt, hiknidt. 
 physiognomist qiyafa- 
 
 tkinif, 
 
 physiognomy qiyafa. 
 place jdt/tth f. , makdn, 
 
 jd f . ; (halting-place) 
 
 nuiqdm, iiKinzil f. 
 place, v. rnkhna, rakh- 
 
 tlena ; take place 
 
 wuqu k men and. 
 plain iiKiiddn. 
 plain zdltir, dsh/cur ; 
 
 (simple) hi>-*nkht<i ; 
 
 plain fact >/' bat. 
 plaintiff iiiuddti'i. 
 plan tujiriz, tudbir. 
 plant, to iintxib kiirnd. 
 plates and dishes 
 
 (crockery) 
 
 khuth knrnd. 
 pleased kliush. 
 pleasant ]ni.iiifli<ln. 
 pleasure (will) mtirzi. 
 plight hadixn ; in this 
 
 plight yt-h hdl dtkh- 
 
 /'//. 
 plod wearily behind 
 
 JH'IOII IK'KIII i/ltiisittd 
 
 lii'id ritnliiii. 
 
 pluck, to (fruit) tornd. 
 plunder, to liit-li-ml. 
 plundering liiti-rd adj. 
 
 and n. 
 
 poisonous znhr-aluiln. 
 pole (of a tent) choba. 
 police polin, (ihiilfdn-i- 
 
 poiti. 
 
 policeman M/ia-wd/a. 
 police-officer tlidiuiddr. 
 pomp and luxury karr 
 
 fnrr. 
 pony ttittii. 
 
 poor i/arib, bi'-rltura, 
 
 i ii i nl in, iiiohtdj. 
 popular (customary) 
 
 1 ltd 1 ' i n nl i. 
 
 population, dlxidi. 
 porridge t/huw/hniydn 
 
 pi. 
 
 portion AfMO. 
 possession qdbzu. 
 possible mumkin ; if 
 
 possible hosake, bane 
 
 (o. 
 
 pot lota. 
 power iqtiddr, ikhti- 
 
 ydr, qdbu, qabzd, 
 
 bds ; to have power 
 
 bus c/ntlnd. 
 practice (as opposed 
 
 to theory) 'amal ; 
 
 (habit) ( dddt,(la.itur. 
 practised, to be hud 
 
 karnd. 
 
 pray, to du l d mdngnd. 
 prayer dtt'd, tuuiidz f. 
 prayer-mat (or carpet) 
 
 jde-namdz i. 
 precincts of village 
 
 biixtiiin I, i dbddi. 
 
 preconcerted bu-itti- 
 fdq-i -ltd nidi <i<tr. 
 
 precursor tigwdn, pexh- 
 r<ni. 
 
 prefer, to muqaddam 
 siiiniijluid. 
 
 pregnant gdfthiit. 
 
 prejudice ta'usxub. 
 
 preparation fdi/i/dri. 
 
 prepare to be off, to 
 atolne ld</nd. 
 
 present, /id/, hdzir, 
 nidiijiiil; 'of the pre- 
 sent day hdl kd at 
 present^/rV/itf /, bilji'l. 
 
 present, to ]>c*h kttrnd, 
 nnzr ynzrdnnd ; pre- 
 sent oneself hdzir 
 hond. 
 
 presents tokfct-tah&if', 
 ' by these presents ' 
 is qirtds kf ru se. 
 
 preserve, to innlij'iiz 
 rakhnd. 
 
 preserved imihfiiz. 
 
 presidency hdtd(ehdtd) 
 
 pressed hard (driven 
 to bay) hdrnd. 
 
 pressure (external) 
 ltd/it tr kd ddbdo. 
 
 pretext bahdna. 
 
 prevail, to riwaj hond, 
 murdwwdj hond. 
 
 prevent, to rok-rakhnd. 
 
 prevention insiddd. 
 
 prey shikar. 
 
 price qinuit, jiiol, dam. 
 
 pride nakhwat. 
 
 prince wall, ret is, 
 ahdhzddd. 
 
 principal party asal 
 jdiiid'at. 
 
 printing (type) chhapd ; 
 (press) chhapd- 
 
 k/tdnii, iniitba'. 
 
 prisoner qaidi; to be 
 taken prisoner quid 
 ho-jdnd. 
 
 privilege (leave) rukh- 
 xnt-ri'dydti. 
 
 prize, to qtidr karna. 
 
 proceed chalnd ; ' pro- 
 ceed through a 
 place ' may often be 
 translated by hond. 
 
 proceedings 'inual-dar- 
 diiiuil, kdr-r<iwff'i. 
 
 proclamation manddi
 
 J7" 
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 (by Toice), i*htth<ir 
 
 (by writing). 
 profess, to tzharkarna. 
 profession jH-.-lm. 
 proficiency mnhdmt. 
 
 'id I. 
 proficient, to be nihn- 
 
 rnt nikhiid. 
 profit firt/', 
 
 niiint'ii'iit. 
 prohibition ni 
 promise tca'da. 
 promise, to icn'ilu knr- 
 
 promotion 
 
 prompt tii'lim 'A nd, 
 
 property /"/; (spe- 
 cial) klinxxii/nt : 
 having property 
 mulddr : landed pro- 
 perty znminddri. 
 
 propitiatory offerings 
 and sacrifices nt- 
 rlihdirnr "in' bnliddn. 
 
 proprietor mtHk. 
 prospect, to be in ilnr- 
 
 pixlt hand. 
 
 prospectus ishti-hdr. 
 prosper, to kini bat 
 
 nun unfit' /mild (to) 
 
 prosperity 
 
 i</lldl, 
 ml'dilnt, f< 
 
 protection htmdyat, 
 miihdfnznt, hifazat. 
 
 proud mnnriir. 
 
 proved tidbit. 
 
 provide mohniyd knrnd. 
 
 provinces mnmalik pi 
 of niiiinlnknt, xnbnjd 
 pi. of ttiilm ; North- 
 West Provinces /- 
 nn'ilil: ntii'irnbi o hi- 
 indli. 
 
 provision ba-ham rani. 
 
 public, the MMi ' 
 
 >unishment 
 yd/>i, sii/d.-nt, .-utrkiilii. 
 
 >urpose irdiln, nii/nt, 
 qaxd ; to no purpose 
 ;<-//</</'/ ; answer the 
 purpose kdjl hond. 
 
 mrsue, to tu'm/i/iili 
 kitrnii. 
 
 >ut rnkhnd ; put the 
 hand to ///// ilrilmi ; 
 to put a spoke in 
 wheel of Imrj ildlint, 
 /./mini tliilnd. fin/ii > 
 in- n nt iirii-i/i n<i. 
 
 jut down f'uro knrnd, 
 Imiiil l,-<ir-<li nd ; to be 
 put down, inn in/iii f' 
 /ir>nd. iiist o nn-liiul 
 
 put off iiiniii/itf rnkhnd. 
 put up ijiydm knrnd. 
 
 publish, to jari tear 
 
 ill in'i. 
 published, to be muxh 
 
 tn/iiir luind or /'//"" 
 
 R. 
 
 rare, ifiniii f. 
 
 race along, to dnm-d 
 
 I'tni't. 
 rage, to 
 
 rail / /. / l-i/iiri. 
 railway travelling rel 
 
 pur xowitr Itoi 
 
 / | 
 rain i>dni m. . //;<//, l>d- 
 
 Q. 
 
 quality nifnt, ///- 
 t/'tt ; qualities mtxdf 
 pi. of iraxf'; noble 
 qualities xlinrdfnt. 
 
 quarrel or quarrelling 
 jlini/i-d, Inrffi. 
 
 quarrel, to Inmn. 
 
 quarter )>do, rhnltdrnm, 
 (of town) iitnhalln. 
 
 quarterly .v7(-//i iirdr 
 (lit. three monthly). | 
 
 queen mnlikn, mnlikn 
 mo'nzzniiin. 
 
 question >'/. 
 
 quick of resource phur- 
 tild, tfz, tiz-t'ihm, 
 znliin, zud-f' Inn, 
 
 honhydr. 
 
 quiet i/nril>. 
 
 quieting, n. taskin. 
 
 quietly chtinke, dfn'xtit. 
 
 quite liilkull, mittlnifiin. 
 mutiny, mnhz. 
 
 quote kn/ind, Imydn k. 
 
 rain, to 
 rainy season Intrant f. 
 range (of hills) />;/</. 
 rank rntlm, ,l,njn ; 
 
 rank of a common 
 
 soldier rntbn-i-piyd- 
 
 ilni/i. 
 rare JuuHffb, ni'nlir. 
 
 n nit/.' lid. 
 rascal mnkkdr, luni-zdt, 
 
 ration rdtih. 
 
 ravine milii. 
 
 reach ///< ////< . 
 
 read jmr/md read 
 aloud pnkdrke. jmrh- 
 n n. 
 
 ready tni/i/iir, Idzir, 
 inii.'iin/i/ii, iiniiiji'iil. 
 "i : i-fiidy at an- 
 swering //'/ : ii--jn>rdli. 
 
 real .-//. 
 
 realised, to be 'nmnl 
 mill lind. /mud, ho- 
 ji'ind. 
 
 really Imi/iijnt nun. 
 
 rear pdlm't. 
 
 reason .-nlmli. n-njh f., 
 lid" {a ; without reason 
 iiti-/ini/i/ ; for divers 
 weighty reasons bn- 
 wtijdJi-i-kdiiiiln. 
 
 reason, to hujjnt knrnd. 
 
 rebel /iii'/i. a 
 
 rebellion, open fmyd- 
 u-iit-i-Fux/t. 
 
 rebuff, decided */'//- 
 irtili.
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 2. 
 
 271 
 
 receive li nd, <j<ituil k., 
 in Una (ko). 
 
 reception isfnjlnil. 
 
 reckon yinnd, hixdli k. 
 
 recognise, to pnhrhdn- 
 ni'i. /ni/ii-/id/i-/< nd. 
 
 reconciliation //*. 
 
 recourse to arms Imth- 
 ydr utlidnd 
 
 recovery //"'/'' 
 
 recruit drdm /nind. 
 
 recruit, to (military) 
 bhnrti ktir-li nd. 
 
 reduction (conquest) 
 tatkhtr. 
 
 refer, to mtinxiibn kar- 
 nd, litiirdln <l< nd. 
 
 reflect, to sw-lmd, t/ititr 
 knntd. 
 
 reform isldhi., tn/i-i//. 
 
 refuge, to take jumd/i 
 Inid. j>/nid/ti/ir liond, 
 
 refund (cost of outlay) 
 i/'uiin/. 
 
 refusal (flat) sdf ja- 
 irdli 
 
 refuse inkdr kurnd. 
 
 regard with attach- 
 ment 'uziz rtik/nid; 
 in regard to />ti-nix- 
 bttt, iinztir Imr tin. 
 
 regent khudir. 
 
 regiment (of foot) pul- 
 tun I. ; (of cavalry) 
 
 regret, to parhhtdnd. 
 
 regular bd-sdbita 
 
 rein bdq, f. ; leading- 
 rein bay -dor i. 
 
 reject, to tmfnit kurnd. 
 
 rejoicing, matter of 
 klu'tnlii 1,'i /nit. 
 
 rejoicings jn. -</in. 
 
 relation rix/itntldr. 
 
 relation, relationship 
 nislxit, ria/itn-nd/d, 
 
 relations m/dn'/i. 
 reliance 'ftibdr; firm 
 
 reliance yuuin-i- 
 
 kulli. 
 
 religion nmzltab. 
 religious innzhabi ; re- 
 ligious mendicant 
 
 ./'"/''> J'ji- _ 
 
 remain rtilma to re- 
 main the same ba- 
 i/it.-ititr liiini'i-i'iilnui ; 
 remain at post t<ri- 
 nut rnhtid remain 
 subject to mute ra/i- 
 nd. 
 
 remedy t/nlliii: 
 
 remember, to yad rtikh- 
 nd or ktiniu ; to be 
 remembered i/dd- 
 lioiid, or y<ul-dii(i, i/dtl 
 jiarnd. 
 
 remembrance yd<l(/dri. 
 
 remove, to hat ana, /''- 
 j'dnd. 
 
 removed, to be daf 
 honu. 
 
 rent kiraya ; to pay no 
 rent at all kinn/a Id 
 i'L- /.-iniri an (lend. 
 
 repair, to put in ma- 
 rtini mat ktir-rakhnd. 
 
 repent, to ftntl/n kttmd. 
 
 nfotikmflyat; written 
 report ta/iriri L'nij'i- 
 ytit ; verbal report 
 zabdnikaifiyat ; (ru- 
 mour) cifwd/t, f. ; 
 false reports jluttli 
 mut/t {if'icdht'it. 
 
 represent, to f arz karnd. 
 
 repression mirkobi. 
 
 reprimand chashnt- 
 
 reputed n 
 request darkhwfai f. , 
 tltimtt. 
 
 rescinded, to be intin- 
 
 sukli Innid. 
 rescue, to chhurdnd, 
 
 hlinrti-tlend, 
 reside ra/tnd, tashrif 
 
 rnkhiu'i. 
 residence bud o bds/<, f.; 
 
 length of residence 
 
 resolve (forcibly) ird- 
 ilii-i-iiitimtiii/ii'iiii kur- 
 l< nd. 
 
 respect 'fzzut, ndub, 
 I Hid: ; with respect 
 bd-ndnb ; with re- 
 spect to bn-nixbiit ; 
 in all respects ba- 
 liniiiii-triijuli. 
 
 respectfully ndtib se. 
 
 restore, to wdpaa ktir- 
 nd. 
 
 result nntijn. 
 
 retail dealing khurda- 
 
 retainer utntdzim. 
 
 retire hntnd. 
 
 retrace one's steps, to 
 nlte ptTon pliirnd. 
 
 retreat /</*////. Imind. 
 
 retribution taddrvk, 
 
 return phirnd,pliir and, 
 Iniifnd, >rdj>/ix jdnd; 
 return to the path of 
 duty rvbardh hojdnd. 
 
 return-hire pln'rtd. 
 
 revenue ind/t/dzdri. ina- 
 hdxil pi. of iiiiihsul ; 
 revenue settlement 
 bandolxixt. 
 
 reverence, to mdnnd. 
 
 revolutions intjilubdt. 
 
 reward *;'/ ; best re- 
 ward ptird sild; re- 
 ward (in heaven) 
 ww&b, 
 
 rich daulatmand, mdl- 
 
 <ldr. 
 
 ride, to noicdr hond. 
 
 right haqq pi. huquq, 
 mansub ; (in good 
 order) thik, diiriist, 
 bn-lidl : (proper) 
 raw a, thik, rdxt ; by 
 right of ba-miljib. 
 
 righteousness bhal&i, 
 rdsti. 
 
 ring tiny iit hi. 
 
 ripepukkd, Id/ //. 
 
 rise dt/ind ; (moon) 
 k/iet ktirnd. nikulnd.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 rise up, to nth kfmrd 
 
 hum'i. 
 risk, or risky affair 
 
 jokhim {., jokhon f. ; 
 
 (responsibility) :im- 
 
 IIUK/li I. 
 
 rival hunt'. 
 
 river iliiryd m. , nmli. 
 
 river-marshes detryd ki 
 
 tnnTi. 
 
 road snnik f., />'". 
 robber (highwayman) 
 
 rii/izun. 
 roll down, to tlhulkd- 
 
 ilfini, Itir/tkiiini. 
 romantic ftutarui- 
 root jnr f . 
 rope, skein or ring of 
 
 <inti. rnKni ki ''nit!. 
 rough-rider cfnil>uk- 
 i'ir (lit. whip- 
 horseman), 
 round (circuit) jthrr. 
 round gol, Ixi-xfutkl-i- 
 
 knift (globe-shaped), 
 round, adv. .'/""*/; to 
 
 turn round yhummi. 
 
 iiiur-anti. 
 route rdjttn ; maritime 
 
 route ad m a in In r Lit 
 
 i-iixlu ; direct route 
 
 sitl/ni rdttta. 
 routed, to be nhikuxt 
 
 khuiid. 
 rub iiiiiliia to have 
 
 rubbed down (of a 
 
 horse) iiuiliriinii. 
 rubbish (trash) khurd- 
 
 fdt f. , TUilili. 
 rude jfiiit/uli. 
 
 rule (jli'ttln pi. tjuirii'iil; 
 
 rules 'tir/u'iil pi. of 
 'ntjidn ; rules of ho 
 nour i/tnrii'i</-i-i; :at- 
 IHH i/v,;-,'; (govern- 
 ment) hnkuiiiiit. 
 
 ruler hakim. 
 
 ruling liirniiiii-nurd. 
 
 rumour '//'/< f. (Ar. 
 pi. of j'uh ' mouth '). 
 
 run daurn'i. 
 
 rush Inpuk-nd rush in, 
 
 to <//iti."ini , 
 
 s. 
 
 sacred iH<iiiu<i<l<t. 
 
 sacrifice, to hnldl knr- 
 mi, znlili k., i/urlidn 
 k., klniild ki nili mm 
 il> mi ; to be sacri- 
 ficed, luildl fimiii. 
 etc. 
 
 safe and sound mihi/i- 
 
 safety l<if<iz<tt. 
 
 sagacity firdxnt. 
 
 said (aforesaid) mnz- 
 
 l.iir, minimi i'. 
 sail /nil. 
 sail, to jn/idz rhnldmi 
 
 (navigate), 
 sailor j<ilid-i. 
 saint kit mi I. 
 salutation xnltiin. .-////- 
 
 salute, toxdhib-saiunint 
 
 sanctioned munzur. 
 sand rit. f. 
 sandy, reijixtdni. 
 Satan xlmitim. 
 satisfaction itminun. 
 satisfied rd~i. .-T. .-<;- 
 
 dkuftlk khiixli. 
 saucy xhokh. 
 save, to biic/it'md, ixtjdt 
 
 il< iiti. 
 say, to kithnd, kah-de- 
 
 >i u: so to say goyd ; 
 
 that is to say yti'iii. 
 scarcity of supplies 
 
 ijillnt-i-rdsad. 
 scare away hnshkiinni : 
 scared, to be ghabrdmi ; 
 
 to be scared at pn- 
 
 mill i/iuni/iifi (lit. ask 
 
 refuge from), 
 scattered chinn bhinn 
 
 ho/car. 
 school muktab, madra- 
 
 scorch, to jhnln*- 
 score kitri ; ' a good 
 
 score,' /in i > 
 
 the full twenty-two, 
 
 rof to number of 
 
 Imperial provinces 
 
 (proverbial). 
 scratch at kiirnlnii. 
 scream out. t><7////;i. 
 screech, to rhiklnni. 
 scrupulously lni-k<imul 
 
 i Iiti i/iii. 
 search juxt-jii, tnliixlii ; 
 
 to search tnlnxli l.-nr- 
 
 ini. illiiiiullnni. 
 second <lii*ni. 
 secret rhhii>ii lni'ii. />- 
 
 xlii'lu. 
 secured, to be (at- 
 
 tained) juiiilii /IHIH'I. 
 security /n't'ii-nt. l - 
 
 k/mtri. 
 
 seduce, to varffat&md. 
 seem to be inn-linn ho- 
 
 in'i. 
 seize, to znftt kar-len&, 
 
 chhin-lmd ; seize 
 
 upon li/iiit-/<inti. 
 select i-lnintiii, n,iin/ii- 
 
 kliuli kurnd, intikhdb 
 
 kiiniii. 
 
 selected mtmtatkat, 
 sell fnriik/it /.-., fier/md, 
 
 ln-1-li-tliHmi, /mi- k. 
 send li/n jiid send for 
 
 iiiiiiii/ii-/>/n jnti ; send 
 
 word l.-iiliiii-l'li< jini. 
 sentence fnixuln. 
 separate <//<///, nl'iy 
 
 iilmj, jitilii, /iiihi /in/ii, 
 
 ii/ni/ ttiiiliifj. 
 ser of 2 Ibs .- / . 
 servant nnuknr ; ser- 
 
 vants (collectively) 
 
 inn/km i-ltiiknr, klid- 
 
 ilnn, iiinldziiH. 
 service khiilmut, nnu- 
 
 take service naukari 
 k'iriiii : with inten-
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 2. 
 
 tion to take service 
 
 ba-jili (if-i-nmldzitna t. 
 set on foot, to bar-pa 
 
 k(tr-<l< mi. 
 set upon, to bithdnd 
 
 (make sit). 
 settle (on course of 
 
 action) naldh karnd 
 
 (colonise)6ad karnd. 
 seventieth ttattarwdn. 
 several kcfi ek, kitne 
 
 ek, chand. 
 severe bald kd. 
 severity (e.g. of heat) 
 
 tUdaat, 
 
 shade x 
 
 shake, to hi land. 
 
 shame (sense of) gai- 
 
 rat, sharin. 
 shameless be-haya. 
 shape xhakl f., surat. 
 share fiiasa ; to give 
 
 a share in (work) 
 
 thikhl (lend. 
 shareholder hixsaddr. 
 sheep b/ieri. 
 shining tdbdn. 
 ship jahdz. 
 shoe jut L 
 shoe, to (a horse) na'/- 
 
 bandi karnd to have 
 
 shod na'lbandi kar- 
 
 wdnd. 
 
 shoe-maker mochi. 
 shoot banduq mdrnd. 
 shop dukdn f. 
 shore kindra. 
 shoreless be-kindr. 
 short, in yarz, alqissa ; 
 
 qissa mukhtasar, 
 
 qissa kotdlu 
 shout chilldnd, pukdr- 
 
 nd, dwdz dend. 
 show, to batund, batd- 
 
 dend. 
 show, to keep for ko- 
 
 tul rti/.'hiKi. 
 shrine mazdr. 
 shudder, to phurahri 
 
 lend. 
 
 shut up, to band kar- 
 dend. 
 
 sick man bimdr, mariz. 
 
 side taraf f. , jdnib f., 
 on all sides chdron 
 taraf; both sides 
 (Ar. dual) tarafain. 
 
 sigh, to uli Karnd. 
 
 sight, to come in nazar 
 and, nazar panid, 
 dfioUPf dend ; out of 
 sight nazar se g&ib. 
 
 sign (gram.) 'aldmat. 
 
 sign, to dattkkatt kar- 
 nd; signed, to be 
 dastkhatt hand. 
 
 signal ixhdra. 
 
 signature dast-khatt. 
 
 silence khdmoxhi. 
 
 silence, v. chup kard- 
 nd. 
 
 silent chup-chdp, khd- 
 mon/i. 
 
 silken rettham kd. 
 
 silver chdndi. 
 
 simoon bdd-i-samum. 
 
 simple be-sdkhta. 
 
 simplicity sddagi, sdda- 
 dili, be-sdkhtaai. 
 
 simultaneously ma'an. 
 
 sin giindh. 
 
 sine qu& non short f. 
 
 single ek. 
 
 singular nirdld. 
 
 sink, to dubond- int. 
 dubnd. 
 
 sinner gunahgdr. 
 
 sire bdp. 
 
 sit bait find ; (of a coun- 
 cil) bardbar ho rali- 
 nd, ijlda furmdnd. 
 
 situated wdqt'. 
 
 skill hunar ; military 
 skill jung-dwari. 
 
 slavery goldmi. 
 
 sleep khwdb, sotd. 
 
 sleep, to sona; to go 
 to sleep xo-rahnd. 
 
 slide, to khisalnd. 
 
 slight (simple) quill. 
 
 \ slightest, in such 
 
 phrases as the 
 
 slightest cause, mis- 
 take, etc. /.-/(// b/ii. 
 
 zarra bhi, kuchh bhi. 
 slink off, to dabaknd. 
 slip, to layzish khdnd, 
 
 khisalnd. 
 sloth suxti. 
 slowly qadam qadam. 
 Slowpace, Mr. miyun 
 
 Kust-qadam. 
 sluggish bhaddd. 
 small rhhotd, khurda ; 
 
 small and great 
 
 chhote bare. 
 small-pox chichak t. 
 snake samp. 
 social advancement 
 
 Inmn-ak/ildq ki ta- 
 
 raqqi. 
 society sohbat ; affairs 
 
 of society qaumi- 
 
 ino'dmalat. 
 solace tashaff'i, tasalli- 
 
 i-khdtir. 
 soldier sipdhi. 
 soldiery sipdh. 
 soliloquise dil men bd- 
 
 ten karnd. 
 some (pi.) 6a'z. 
 someone k<?i. 
 something kuchh. 
 somewhere kahin ; 
 
 somewhere or other 
 
 kahin na kahin. 
 son beta, auldd, far- 
 
 zand. 
 
 songs git bhajan, 
 soon jald, thori der 
 
 nifn. 
 
 soporific khwdbdwar. 
 sordid khasis. 
 soul ruh f., nafs 
 
 (human being) ddam- 
 
 zda 
 
 south janub. 
 southern janubi. 
 span bdlisht f. 
 speak bolnd ; to speak 
 
 of mini lend, zilcr 
 
 18
 
 274 
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 BO to speak 
 
 goyd. 
 
 special kh&jts. 
 specially klid.-l.nr. 
 specimen nninumi. 
 spectacle /</*//. 
 speed mjtdr f. 
 spend x(irf k., kharrh 
 
 k. to spend time at 
 
 a place ju-lmitlind. 
 spirit ;i m. , hiimnnt ; 
 
 high spirit '// ///- 
 
 all 
 
 split, to r/iiind. 
 
 spoil, to bif/drnd ; de- 
 spoil // 
 
 spot <// ; central spot 
 amir mat/din. 
 
 spread, intr. j>/miliid \ 
 tr. l>i<-/i/idmi, ji/mil- 
 dnd ; (reports) // ; 
 to be spread (of 
 news) zahdnzml hond. 
 
 spring, to liijHiknd. 
 
 spring Imhdr f. , 111-111- 
 
 spring harvest > <il>'r i. 
 spy .;*;>. 
 squandered oorMa 
 stability ixtehkdm. 
 stable isttihul. 
 Stage (halt) innnzil i. 
 stain ildij. 
 standard j/tnmld. m- 
 
 x/idu. 
 
 standing klmrd. 
 star sitdrd. 
 stare tdknd. 
 Start, to riiwdnn hond, 
 
 station, to ta'indt kar- 
 
 be too strong for 
 
 ini. Im/iind. 
 
 i/dlif> /lOmi (/i'tr). 
 
 statement buydn, kni- 
 
 Stuff in, to t/iiiii'/ini. 
 
 i't. 
 
 sturdy linttd-l>nl.-kd. 
 
 staunched, to be tas- 
 
 style elidntt. 
 
 fli/n /mini. 
 
 subject nuitlal'. pi. 
 
 steal, to r/tori /.-urmi : 
 
 iniitdlib nriyat, pi. 
 
 to be stolen rhori 
 
 rn-iii/ii {. 
 
 hond. 
 
 subject to li'i- 
 
 steamboat il/uiiriin- 
 
 fkf \fnht-l -/i iil.'iini'it ; 
 
 k<i*h. 
 
 subject to the equi- 
 
 stem (tree) dtmikht. 
 
 table demands of the 
 
 Stench i/nntlni/i. 
 
 state ba-*lnn 
 
 stimulate, to hirmjiji 
 
 /.iiiiif'iHiitdliilin 
 
 knrmi. 
 
 kdrl kf. 
 
 stir, to, intr liihid. 
 
 submit *r dlmmd, *tr 
 
 stone, rock jxitthnr. 
 
 jhiikdnd ; submit to 
 
 stoop, to xir jhuktid. 
 
 authority f<n-indn- 
 
 stop, to, tr. Imnil kur- 
 
 li'trilii/ i Inrmi. 
 
 nd, iiiinii/uf /.-., -ulit 
 
 subsist, to jdri iii'niii. 
 
 k., roknd. 
 
 success l;drlni nri. 
 
 story qinaa, kuhdni, 
 
 kdiiii/dlii. ii//>'H. 
 
 straight iitiixtnuiiii (in 
 
 succession, in quick 
 
 liiinr tuli . 
 
 a direct line) . 
 
 successor jd-m' 
 
 strangle, to p/idnsi such /.-. 
 
 </ mi. 
 
 stratagem dlml>. 
 straw liii-lilidli. 
 stream itndi, d'iryd. 
 street .'/'///, ku<-l,it. 
 strength //:////;, ; 
 
 /i/.-iim ; (of go- i 
 
 vernment) itjtiddr ; 
 at- 
 
 (grace) 
 
 tain strength 
 
 llOlll'l. 
 
 strengthening 
 (fortifying). 
 
 '- stretch out d-ird- /.-/, mi. 
 
 suddenly 
 
 dii/''<it>i>i. 'lid; /.i 'nit 
 in- a ; (compara- 
 
 tively) //ore dinon 
 mi n. 
 
 sutler inconvenience, to 
 tuklif ilt/nind. 
 
 sufferer t/m/it'ilii' -//iii.vi- 
 
 Ixtt. 
 
 suggest, to xtl/d/i ,1 nd. 
 Suitor HiiiKtiiyia, xd^ii. 
 Bummon,to ttiluli kurnu, 
 
 iid; to be started 
 (set on foot) jdri j 
 lt<ni<i, Ixirjid hond ; at , 
 starting clmlt' irmjt. 
 
 starving bhukhd, lihiik 
 *f !> -I dlt liokar, 
 li/nikon indrd, kdl l.<i 
 indrd. 
 
 state riydxnt ; (condi- 
 tion) /idl, /idlut, ,i/i- 
 u-iil. - 
 
 strike iiidntd ; int. summons 
 
 summoned fmldi/d hud. 
 
 />nld- 
 
 (clock) Imjnd, causal 
 Ixijdnd, 
 
 striking mark,V//o;/?/- 
 i--n/(iniyn ; to be on 
 the stroke of (clock), 
 
 litljd rliiilnn'i. 
 
 strong ;nlmrd>i!tt, zor- 
 liimr- very strong, 
 or so strong as to be 
 
 I was not sum- 
 moned Mi'/i talalii 
 
 HI ill ill //Ml. 
 
 sun di'tdh, (Uiit/i, f. 
 superintendence, gene- 
 
 ral /*/* i iiiti-.' 
 superstitious )>w-h-]>u- 
 
 ratt, 
 supplied, to be (of 
 
 unlimited ln'-hadd\ to wants) r';/* hond.
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 2. 
 
 275 
 
 supplies rasad f. , rasad 
 Ka ndinan ; control 
 over supplies, rasad- 
 rasdni. 
 
 support, to sambhal- 
 
 supposition farz. 
 surplus revenue ba- 
 
 chat, f. 
 surprising ta'ajjiib ki 
 
 ///. 
 surrender oneself, to 
 
 apne ttfin hnwdla 
 
 karnd. 
 surround, to ghernd 
 
 to be surrounded 
 
 ghirnd, ghir-jdnd. 
 survey paiwaish. 
 suspected of muttahim. 
 suspend, to mauquf k. 
 
 band karnd, mu'attal 
 
 rakhnd. 
 suspicion yumdn; strong 
 
 suspicion gumdn-i- 
 
 gdlib. 
 
 swear, to qasam khdnd. 
 sweat pasind. 
 swell, to jiln'iliu'i, phul- 
 
 jdnd. 
 swerve from allegiance 
 
 munharif hond. 
 sympathise, to ham- 
 
 dardi karnd. 
 
 T. 
 
 table me: L 
 
 Taj (Agra), Taj mahall. 
 
 take MM ; take air 
 hawd khdnd to take 
 warning 'ibrat pa- 
 karnd ; to take up in 
 arms god turn uthd- 
 lend ; to cause to 
 take off utrwdnd. 
 
 talent liydqat. 
 
 talk bolnd, bdten k., 
 bat-chit k. , i/ uft i/it k. ; 
 to talk as much as a 
 man pleases lakh 
 kahnd. 
 
 tear, to phdrnd tear in 
 pieces phdr ddlnd 
 tear up ukhdrnd ; 
 tear off bhdgnd ; tear 
 about bhdgd bhdgd 
 phirnd. 
 
 tears nii.-it: to shed 
 copious tears ut/i dt/i 
 dnsu rond, be-tahdshd 
 rond. 
 
 telegraph office, tdr- 
 ghar. 
 
 temper mizdj ; bad- 
 tempered bad-mizdj. 
 
 temperament tabVat ; 
 natural temperament 
 zdti t'lhrnt. 
 
 tempest tufdn. 
 
 ten das ; ten miles off 
 das mil kefdsilapar. 
 
 tenant kirdya-ddr. 
 
 tender-hearted, narm- 
 dil. 
 
 tent khima, dehra. 
 
 tenth daswdn. 
 
 terms, on the old ba- 
 dastur-i-sdbiq. 
 
 terrible khunkhwdr, ga- 
 zab kd. 
 
 territory 'dldqa, qalam- 
 rini, mamdlik. 
 
 test short L 
 
 thanks shulcr, shukrgu- 
 zdri ; special thanks 
 khdss shukariya. 
 
 thief c/ior, khfrin ; pro- 
 fessional thief chori- 
 ]i< shn. 
 
 thing (general sense) 
 but f. , amr, chiz f. , 
 shot f . 
 
 think sochnd, samajh- 
 nd, jdnnd ; to think 
 dear yirdn dnknd. 
 
 third tisrd. 
 
 thirst tixhnagi, pydx f. 
 
 thirsty pydad ; to be 
 thirsty nyds lagnd, 
 pyds iim-liim hona. 
 
 thirty tis, si (Prs.); 
 
 for thirty years, si- 
 sdla. 
 
 then phir, tab, us waqt. 
 
 thence ud/iar se, wahdn 
 se. 
 
 theory (as opposed to 
 practice) 'ilrn. 
 
 there wa/idn, us jagah. 
 
 therefore is l?e,is waste, 
 is sabab se, lihazd. 
 
 thought khaydl, Jikr; 
 thought of self apnd 
 matlab, khud-garzi ; 
 thoughts of the 
 heart md-fi-zamir. 
 
 thousand hazdr thou- 
 sands hazdrhd, ha- 
 zdron. 
 
 threaded, to be piroyd 
 jdnd. 
 
 threatening dhamki. 
 
 three tin ; all three ti- 
 non. 
 
 thrive chalnd. 
 
 thriving trade chalti 
 dukdn. 
 
 throat halq. 
 
 throne takht dethrone 
 takht se utdrnd. 
 
 throw, to phenknd. 
 
 tie, being bound by 
 ties wd-bastagi. 
 
 tiger sher. 
 
 tillage kheti-kiydri. 
 
 time waqt, zamdna, 
 martaba, daf'a ; (oc- 
 casion) mauqa' once 
 on a time ek martabn ; 
 in due time ba-waqt, 
 ma'muli waqt par ; 
 from time to time 
 waqt ba-waqt ; in 
 old times zamdna 
 sdhiq men ; after a 
 time, chand muddat 
 ke ba'd. 
 
 tired, to be thaknd, 
 thak-jdnd, mdnda 
 hond. 
 
 title laqab, khitdb. 
 
 tobacco tambdku.
 
 276 
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 to-day, 6j t &j ke din. 
 
 together bdhamjkatthd, 
 rnilkar, *dtfi, fiini't. 
 
 toil jdn-kdtii, mthnat. 
 
 toll (tax) tiin/t.-ul. 
 
 tomb turf it, mnqbara, 
 qabr f . 
 
 to-morrow, kal. 
 
 tongue zabdn i. ; oily- 
 tongued charb-zabdn. 
 
 tons of ice Idkhon man 
 baraf. 
 
 tooth ddnt. 
 
 top cfioti. 
 
 tope (of trees) bag. 
 
 torment, tease nit and. 
 
 tortoise kachhwd. 
 
 toss away, to phenk- 
 ddlnd, phenk-dend. 
 
 tour dattra. 
 
 town shahr, qasba. 
 
 trace jxiid. surdg, 
 nishdn. 
 
 trackless be-lik. 
 
 trade len-den. 
 
 trader btopdri. 
 
 tradesmen ahl-i-hirfa. 
 
 train rel. 
 
 trained ta'lim-ydj'in. 
 
 transitive nmta'addi. 
 
 traps axbdli, */;i, 
 or/imi bichhona (dress 
 and bedding). 
 
 traveller mwdjir. 
 
 traverse, to tni karnd. 
 
 treasure, hidden dafi- 
 na. 
 
 treasurer khazdnchi. 
 
 treat (kindly) *ulitk 
 karnd, suluk se pe*h 
 and (itdth) ; treat 
 harshly siyddatiknr- 
 nd, sakhti sepmh-6nd\ 
 treat with considera- 
 tion qadr-diini far- 
 man ii. 
 
 treatment (medical) 
 mtfdlaja. 
 
 treaty 'oAf o paimdn, 
 qaul o qardr, sanad 
 f. , 'ahd-nama. 
 
 tree, darakht. 
 trembling ra'xhn. 
 tremendous bald kd, 
 
 <l<i:ab kd. 
 tribe got f. ; members 
 
 of tribe goti, got-vdl>-. 
 tribute khirdj. 
 true narh, MML 
 trust, to itiiiindn kuriid ; 
 
 placed in trust <tmdn 
 
 ntiin iiiufhwwaz. 
 truth gidq ; in truth 
 
 fil-wdqi'fSachpuchho 
 
 'to. 
 try, to koshish karnd. 
 
 tuck in the tail, to 
 < In in dabdiid. 
 
 tumult fasdd. 
 
 turban pagri. 
 
 turn bdri ; in turn bdri 
 bdri turn. 
 
 turn phirnd, phemd 
 yhumnd, murnd; (of 
 milk) biyarnd; turn 
 up or out nikul- 
 nd; to turn round 
 pher-dend ; turn into, 
 tr. band-rtik/md ; to 
 be turned off ni- 
 kdld jdnd, ni<iin/tif 
 hond, Itar-tarttf hond. 
 
 turning, gardisli. 
 
 tutor ustdd, nio'aUiiii. 
 
 twenty bin. 
 
 twenty-fifth parhi.-nii, 
 tdrlkh. 
 
 twenty-nine untis. 
 
 twinkle, to chhitaknd. 
 
 tyranny cotordbcKi 
 zulm, ziydd'iti. 
 
 TJ. 
 
 ultimately dkhir. 
 unchanged yaksdn. 
 unclean nd-pdk. 
 unconditional bild 
 
 thart. 
 
 under tul- . ;</>/<.. 
 undertake uthdnd. 
 understand tamajhnd ; 
 
 make to understand 
 
 understanding namajh 
 f. : (condition) shart. 
 
 undoubtedly be-nhnkk. 
 
 unfortunate kniii-ixmili. 
 
 ungrateful na-shukr. 
 
 unhappy dil-sJ<ikii.*tu. 
 i/i I- tan'/. 
 
 gair- 
 
 afsurdn. 
 uninstructed 
 
 td'lim-ydfta. 
 unintelligible, to be 
 
 samjltai iiti dend. 
 united nnmsalik. 
 unkindness br-rahmi. 
 unmanageable ..-- 
 
 ha i ii war 
 
 unpleasant nd-pafand. 
 unprotected tie-iuiu-d. 
 unscrupulously, unre- 
 strainedly, be-tuhd- 
 
 nhd. 
 
 unseen dnkh bachd. 
 unwieldy phupjimt. 
 unworthy qdbil nn/tin. 
 
 na-qdbil, nd-lffiq. 
 upbraid, to sharminda 
 
 karnd. 
 uproar yorish, khal- 
 
 bali, sharr o fasdd. 
 usages and customs, 
 
 ra*m o ritcdj. 
 use, to istr'mdl karnd ; 
 
 to be used up 
 
 (spent) nibar-jdnd. 
 useful kdin kd, faida- 
 
 Jiiniiil, inui'id. 
 useless be-faiila, ni- 
 
 /,'niiiind. 
 usual iioi'iiiuli; as 
 
 usual, ba-dcutur, 
 
 usually aksar. 
 
 V. 
 
 vacancy khdli jagah. 
 valley darn. 
 valour Italiuduri 
 value qunat.
 
 VOCABULARY NO. 2. 
 
 277 
 
 various mutafarriq. 
 vaunting shekhi. 
 vehemence shiddat. 
 venturesomeness him- 
 
 mat. 
 venture outside, to 
 
 qadam bdhar dharnd. 
 verb /W. 
 verily wdqi ( men, haqi- 
 
 qat men, sach hai ki. 
 very sakht, khub, ba- 
 
 hut, bard. 
 vex diqq karnd. 
 vexation diqqat. 
 vexed walul; to be 
 
 vexed maldlhond(ko) 
 viceroy qS'iin-maqdni. 
 vicious bad-mizdj, sha- 
 
 rir. 
 victorious Jatehydb, 
 
 fatthmand. 
 victory fateh f., fateh- 
 
 jang f. 
 victuals and drink, 
 
 khdne pine kd sdmdn. 
 vigour :or; to lose 
 
 vigour, kamzor ho- 
 
 jdnd. 
 village gdnon, also 
 
 gdnw and </<?on by 
 
 elision of either na- 
 sal, basti ; villages 
 
 dihdt. 
 
 villain bad-zdt, sharir. 
 villainy shut drat. 
 vindicate, to kisi ki 
 
 to? id karnd. 
 violate (law), to khildf 
 
 karnd. 
 visible, to be dikha'i 
 
 dend, nazar and or 
 
 parnd, zdhir hond, 
 
 dshkdr hond, namu- 
 
 ddr hond. 
 vision, range of madd- 
 
 i-nazur. 
 
 vote, to rde <l> //. 
 vow, to iini niidt tiidnnd ; 
 
 to break a vow bad- 
 
 -nluli karnd; to pay 
 
 a vow mannat add k. 
 
 w. 
 
 wager, to short bdndh- 
 nd. 
 
 waggon chakrd. 
 
 waist kamar f . 
 
 wait, to muntazir rah- 
 nd, baithnd, thairnd 
 lie in wait for ghat 
 men baithnd. 
 
 wake, or be awake 
 jdgnd. 
 
 wake up, to, dnkh 
 khulni. 
 
 walk, to chalnd, p&on 
 p&on chalnd. 
 
 wall diwdr f . ; (of tent) 
 qandt f. ; outer wall 
 of town shahr-pa- 
 ndh f. 
 
 wander, to phirnd. 
 
 want hdjat ; want of 
 money, impecunious- 
 ness tihidasti; want 
 of sanitation nd-sdfi. 
 
 want, to mdngnd; I 
 want mujhe darkdr 
 hai, mujhko chdhf'e, 
 etc. , hdjat hai, etc. 
 
 wanted darkdr, matlub. 
 zarur. 
 
 war lar&i, 
 
 warfare jang-dwari ; 
 species of warfare 
 tarz-i-jang i. 
 
 warlike jang-jo. 
 
 warning 'ibrat ; take 
 warning l ibrat pa- 
 karni. 
 
 warrior yoddhd. 
 
 wash, to dhond. 
 
 waste nuqsdn. 
 
 ' waste-paper basket ' 
 raddi (lit. what is 
 rejected). 
 
 watchman chokidar, 
 watchman's work 
 chokiddri kd pesha. 
 
 water pdni, m. 
 
 water-pot stand gha- 
 ronclii. 
 
 watered, to have pdni 
 
 chhirakwdnd. 
 way dhub, dhang, tarah 
 
 f., taur; by way of 
 
 ba-taur, a short way 
 
 thori dur. 
 
 weak kamzor, 'alii. 
 wealth daulat, mdl. 
 wear orhnd, pahnnd. 
 wearied thakd mdnda. 
 weaver juldhd. 
 week hafta. 
 weep, to rond. 
 well ! bhald, khair. 
 well (restored to 
 
 hea.lih)bhald-changd. 
 well kunwdn, kud. 
 well-known mashhur o 
 
 ma'ruj. 
 
 western magrdbi. 
 what kyd, kaisd; what's 
 
 o'clock ? kai baje. 
 where ? kaftan. 
 whereas yd, bar-khildf 
 
 iske. 
 whether ... or ? ayd 
 
 . . . yd, kyd . . kyd, 
 
 chdhe or chdho. 
 while, long bari d/er, 
 
 bahut der. 
 white (fair), gord. 
 vrho ? kaun ; who or 
 
 which, correl. jo. 
 whose ? kiskd. 
 whole tamdm, kull ; 
 
 whole family kunbe 
 
 kd kunbd, tamdm 
 
 gharwdle, kull khdn- 
 
 ddn. 
 
 why? kyun. 
 wicked sharir, burd. 
 wife bibi. 
 wild with anger, khun 
 
 josh men and. 
 wiles dagd-bdzi. 
 will marzi. 
 vrinjitnd (intr. ) ; (earn) 
 
 kamdnd ; to win a 
 
 ? orson's goodwill 
 ini ko apne se rdzi 
 karnd.
 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 wind haicii, bad f. 
 
 wine sharab f. 
 
 wire, to tar ki khulnr 
 bhfind, tar k>< :<iri'a 
 *f Ichabar bhe/'mi. 
 
 wisdom ddnifliiii'iiidi, 
 hiknitit, 'iiijl L. 'utjl 
 lea zor ; practical 
 wisdom hikiiint-i- 
 'amali. 
 
 wise ddnithtnand, 'aql- 
 mand, khiriidiimnd. 
 
 wish tniirdd f., khicd- 
 hish, irshdd. 
 
 with sdth, sf. etc. 
 
 withdraw diistkn*h 
 hond,halnti. 
 
 without be, baifnir.bt'ld. 
 
 withstand iiniifutinln /... 
 age. thairnd. 
 
 wives and children ahl 
 o 'ayydl. 
 
 wolf bheriyd. 
 
 woman 'aurat. 
 
 women 'nitrat-log, 'au- 
 rat-zdt, iiinirHii; wo- 
 men's quarters se- 
 nuna. 
 
 wond." ///i//(. 
 
 wondrous l ajib, 'a/6 or 
 t'ftiijitli led. 
 
 wood 'luki i. 
 
 word Infz, hdt f.; send 
 word hihld btifjnd. 
 
 work kdm. 
 
 work, to kdin kttrnd, 
 mehnnt knrnd. 
 
 workmanship karigari. 
 
 world diinyd f.. j>/ntn. 
 
 worldly duties or af- 
 fairs dunyd kd kdr-o- 
 tidr. 
 
 worn out, to be t djiz d- 
 
 jt'irui. 
 
 worried to death, to be 
 da HI ndk men ain't. 
 
 worse badtrir. 
 
 worship pvjd f. . 'ebd- 
 dat, >;/</'/. 
 
 worsted, to be hdrnd. 
 
 worthless nd-tmkiir. 
 
 worthy of /<? iq. 
 
 would that ! 
 
 wounded zakhnri. 
 
 wrap round, to lapet- 
 lend. 
 
 wretch kamtmkht. 
 wretched-looking />dji- 
 
 .-tirnt. 
 write word Hkh-lhfjnd; 
 
 write down tuhrir- 
 
 fnriin'nii'i. 
 writer (clerk) wntu- 
 
 addi; (callif^raphist) 
 
 fcUtA-MH 
 wrong thik nnhin, burd, 
 
 ii-xfidi 
 
 galat. 
 
 Y. 
 
 year sdl, bara*, tan ; 
 
 full year barns roz ; 
 
 this year imsdl ; for 
 
 years, l^ini.-nii (xe). 
 yearly .-'///";//, >/-//- 
 
 sdl, har-siil. 
 yes hdn. 
 yesterday knl, kdl kd 
 
 din. 
 
 yet abtak, hanos, tdham. 
 you tuni. 
 your tumhdrd. 
 youth jnwdn. 
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 p. 31, 1. 16, for a read w (bit). 
 para. 84, 1. 6, for ^L. road ^ 
 
 102, 1. 2, for jSjK* read 
 p. 74, 1. 4, for ' become read ' becomes.' 
 223, 1. 11, for 9 read 14. 
 ,. 263, last line but one, for wfatel read wd*te. 
 
 London i Printed by W. H. Allen & Co., 13 Waterloo Place.
 
 WORKS BY THE SAME AUTHOR. 
 
 Demy 8vo. Price 12s. 6d. 
 
 TAUBATU- N-N AStTH 
 
 (REPENTANCE OF NUSSOOH). 
 
 THE HINDUSTANI TEXT OF MOULVl HAJl 
 HAPIZ NAZlR AHMED OF DEHLI. 
 
 EDITED, WITH NOTES AND INDEX. 
 
 Crown 8vo. Price 3s. 6d. 
 
 THE EEPENTANCE OF NUSSOOH, 
 
 Translated from the Original Hindustani Tale. 
 WITH AN INTRODUCTION 
 
 BY 
 
 SIR WILLIAM MUIR, K.C.S.I. 
 
 " This is a very remarkable little volume. . . . The tale is 
 both interesting in itself and as a picture of the interior of Maho- 
 metan life." Spectator. 
 
 " A translation of a popular Hindustani novel, giving an insight 
 into the details of Mahometan family life ... a remarkable book 
 in many ways. It supplies what is singularly wanted in the verna- 
 cular languages of India, namely, sound literature of a useful and 
 amusing sort." Literary World. 
 
 London : 
 W. H. Allen & Co,, 13 Waterloo Place. S.W.
 
 WORKS IN THE PRESS. 
 
 FIRST FIVE BOOKS OF THE TAU- 
 
 BATU-N-NASUH. WITH MARGINAL 
 ANALYSIS AND ADDITIONAL ANNOTATIONS, 
 AND VOCABULARY. 
 
 KEY TO 
 EXERCISES IN HINDUSTANI. 
 
 THE HINDUSTANI PART OF THE 
 
 EXERCISES, IN LITHOGRAPH, IN VARIOUS 
 STYLES, FOR PRACTICE IN READING AND 
 
 WRITING. [To be published in ///./. 
 
 DASTAN JAMILA KHATUN. AN ORI- 
 GINAL HINDUSTANI TALE. 
 
 [To be lithographed in I ml in.